ofatpe tints Peete ea Sis > an dren emai A DOr 3 nina ‘ Nar Spt eS he ied aa Perea a Ne ett ae eee Feat tyne =F" HARVARD UNIVERSITY FELT LIBRARY OF THE Museum of Comparative Zoology Vi Ns tA lye if the CANADIAN SeeELD-NATURALIST Volume 70 1956 Published by THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB OAPAW Ain gus came ei uecnn yt or) ONTARIO : MUS. COMP. ZOOL ;LNDWARY | | MAR—+-41957 HARYARD | UNIVERSITY | AN NEW YORK STATE SS MSS Te K < Ottawa - St. Lawrence Lowland MUS. COMP. ZOOL LIBRARY | Oya. $1957 A GUID Dy HARD : University | to the GEOLOGY ot the OTTAWA DISTRICT ALICE E. WILSON A Monograph Issue of The CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST VoLumE 70 JANUARY-Marca 1956 NuMBER 1 About the author... Ottawa is the centre of a classical region for geology. Here are displayed, in readily accessible form, representatives of the Pre- cambrian Grenville province, the Ordovician system, and the glacial and postglacial record. Since the time of Logan and Billings, a suc- cession of eminent geologists have found in this vicinity the bases for many valuable contributions to geological science. Alice Evelyn Wilson is a most worthy member of this distinguished company. The greater part of her long and very active career has been devoted to a study of geology in the Ottawa valley. Dr. Wilson was born in Cobourg, Ontario, and received her B.A. from the University of Toronto. Later she earned a Ph.D. in geology at the University of Chicago. She joined the staff of the Geological Survey of Canada in 1909, and officially retired in 1946. But the latter event had no noticeable effect on the continued pro- duction of monographs and contributions. Her numerous publica- tions deal mainly with Ordovician geology and palaeontology, and are culminating in a splendid series of Bulletins on the palaeonto- logy of the Ottawa formation. Dr. Wilson received the decoration Member of the British Empire, in recognition of her contributions to the work of the Geological Survey and National Museum. In 1938 she was made.a Fellow of the Royal Society of Canada, the first woman to receive this distinction. Scientific erudition is not uncommon, but this accompanied by the ability to interpret science to the layman is a rare combina- tion. Dr. Wilson has been very successful in the popular exposition of Ottawa geology, and has been in demand for years as a guide for students and interested amateurs. Since her retirement she has taught geology at Carleton College, and in this work has made the outdoors her laboratory. The Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, as well as many other groups, has enjoyed the privilege of exploring the ancient Ordovician sea bottoms under her guidance. To those of us who have had this opportunity it has seemed most desirable that such vast knowledge, and the ability to communicate it, should be combined in a permanent record. With her usual graciousness Dr. Wilson undertook the burden of making this possible. The result is here presented with pride by the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, in the confidence that it will serve many generations of en- quiring geologists and naturalists, and will also be an invaluable record of evidence which expanding urbanization may alter or destroy. Loris S. RUSSELL First Vice-President of The Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club The Canadian Field-Naturalist VOLUME 70 JANUARY-MARCH 1956 NUMBER 1 CONTENTS © PAGE INTRO DU GaUO Nie es eee ees vase ae ee oa ee Mee Boe a REE Ree BIAS oh ole Eye es 3 PART ONE AF AITS 1g) ERSVOR@ Eee E TA otis ERTS GT IN cece eee oc ee OR ee ER Oe 4 Ee Garay tal aT Meare et eR Be eee baer ok ete de ote nae nett ee eae, RE ee Soe 4 Hirstelonsurosionalanntervals. me ae es. ke eee aie see oe ee 5 Ordovician Period ............ tee BEL CNM et 18 SE RE Cn ee Bde, Bl ck 6 Beekmantown Z Chazy 8 Black River - Trenton 8 Collingwood-Gloucester 9 Carlsbad 10 Russell Lt Queenston 10 Secondeelkoncer Eerosionmallelintenviale ecco cel ues. se iene hb weata let nc Whit Reet a eee eae, 12 CCl aGablonimreres et ses eta Saat eerie N=, CL rane erat antares a NIE toh bare os aN Ate ope eee emnre 1S asta anime wns 0 mye tee iets astern et cece Peete te! weet Meus tees ee ale LOR 16 PART TWO EDK SIO IN SH se ene Ph Auciagy ote UN ace eau SUES. bois Se Oaedag RUE oR et vt ae’, 7 DRr ee climes ir aipy pa ie tie ses. Aree e Seen cn hors En ee er eS SU: 9 2 I A te Al ae 7 Brucite Plant 17 North of Chelsea 18 Gatineau Park 18 Kettles 18 Magnetite Mine 20 fret cla lorar (yea lillape ret eek nee seb en) Ph alien tC EE aa Oh 2 ce Saul LP ES oe ee 20 Feldspar Quarry 20 Road to Hazeldean Wee Campbell Quarry 23 Road Back to Highway 15 23 Britannia Yacht Club 24 Duntile Quarry 24 Kippewa Drive 26 Hogsback Bil White Bridge 29 TE Relial "I Nretyg) JU Wiersma he ste etal ley EAN a Geek gps mm Es OL aol GO oe coe aE Mane TS oct eA oe 29 Rockcliffe Outcrops 29 Montreal Road Outcrops 31 River at Rockland : 32 Stewart Quarry 33 Varela SiUres oh dN repeat Ss ee eee TOs is, Ae ae ee on SU On AAs ere eR ee 34 Foster Sandpit 34 Billings Bridge 30 Barnhart Quarry 35 Gloucester Fault 36 North Branch of Castor River 36 Red Shale Quarry 37 JEpr el limes trip tems Vays elem le eee, A AT NON, A Sie heals ORE cicada 0g 38 Pakenham 38 Sandstone Outcrop 38 Outcrop of March 39 The Canadian Field Naturalist for October-December 1955 (Can: Field Nat. 69:135-184. 1955) was issued December 18, 1956 2 Tur CANADIAN FreLp-NatTurAList Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 TOF TeTVGT ST Wrath 004) \V1 geese eos eee ace peee cet ee tee techodsscee cee see onupbcrHaceoaqansaraca: tosncnudacetiaadndncascescmszosonazc0%c: 39 East of Morewood 39 Payne River 40 West of Finch 40 TACT thar) WUE Sp ceroe ee cecesceh ee gaetenceseprisencoseeeseees Geseaceac co spnah see aeas4oyse-sesscondna9secsosp=rsaoscodbsazcbso2cncb.c0 40 Scarp North of Navan 40 Second Outcrop 41 Bearbrook 41 Bieldse Drip VU ee arcane eters cee ccrker ce ier a 42 Precambrian Spur at Carp 42 Sandstone Quarry 42 Harwood Plains 42 Winding Road 43 Pinhey Road 43 Ottawa River 43 Read Cut alt Crossroad 4A Road Outcrop 44 Isolated Ouberops: i.e ete ee eee eee 44 Brébeuf Park 44 North Shore of Ottawa River 45 South Shore of Ottawa River 45 River Bed East of Russell 45 Quarry at Top of Second Invasion, East of Rockland 45 PART THREE SOME EY EES © OR HOSSIUS ese ee ee renee eee esse ce a ee 47 Plantae 47 Porifera 48 Sponges and Near Sponges 48 Near Sponges 49 Stromatoporoidea 50 Anthozoa (Corals) ol Conulariids o2 Vermes (Werms) 53 Bryozoa 54 Brachiopoda By) Pelecypoda (Clam type) 59 Gastropoda (Snail type) ol Cephalopoda (Squid type) 58 Trilobita 59 Balanus 61 Graptoloidea 61 Echinodermata 62 Cystoidea and Edrioasteroidea 62 Crincidea 63 ILLUSTRATIONS Ottawa] St. ea wrence® Lowlands snags ea eenee see ese e ocak eR Cec rae eee frontispiece Figures; 1... Am: tAnticlime (5) ssiciulnscccs tee ccegte cites de ae teauctom ese os eee reso ee Ae oe 3 2, Ottawa- st. Lawxnence Mowland (Secttone ences ra teee oe eee eee ee 11 3. Structural Map of the Ottawa-St. Lawrence Lowland 00.0.0... 13 4; Cross Section of the ‘Gity (of Ottawa cette eee ee eee 15 5.7, Ridge Road ' Drag) jie icccee te eee sites seca e aoe eae 19 6. Section from Hazeldean to Mountain Road o..........cccccecceeeeceseeereeee ceeeeeeeserennier 21 ie Map) form Excursions aime andsanound sO ttawalncesteset perettren cette eee Tn eeeneeeneet 25 8 Typical | Hogsback | isch. ccccsedscaasnnaea conta ntrne reece cae tee eP eee Oe en Pa 9, Hogsback,, Osttawear -.csccccsceciedsicasce sh euscs eceetitven teenie desea aetna te Saeco eT See ene ee 28 10. ‘Section at Rockelifite: ‘Park: Sir E Cobourg beds § 5 y W a sO oa aS ON Ee = > O ita ZA i - @) = Sherman Fall beds S - ) Or SIIIW TRIS SS ‘(pawnsse ‘pauyep) yney SUOIJEWIOY JIOZOSe/Ed 404 UPLQWeEIAId a) SS QNa94 1 00,Sp WaYNVD SIDUBLY IS vv eclipuexaly cL AON 7 SUTeE}UNO iN NZ \, aw \ e) aynyoe] ? por NLM YX QUO? He NATIANIUQ Waal AingsayMeHs oWeYuapssS "7 q SON YyBno1oqu6no7 vojsajsey X SS RQ O10gMah\, iS > iddississiy a0e|4 UOJaeQ /~ Sei ESS x ulqojung eS Yee NS Re 10 4eyy fo; » aN 4 Wee 14 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 This has been called the Gloucester fault. A little west of Russell village it breaks. A main fault turns to the northeast and its eastern end brings up Rigaud Mountain. What is the result? The block to the east of the Gloucester fault dropped. That means, as mentioned above, that the main part of the city of Ottawa stands on the northwest corner of the down-dropped block (Fig. 4). But it is not quite so simple as that. If you break a rigid cookie it will not often make a clean break. Pieces will break off the edge. Just that happened when the rigid earth’s crust broke. A piece on the western edge of the down-dropped block broke and fell, a little crookedly, between the edge of the block and the main fault, and that piece can be seen. Below the hill at Carling and Bronson avenues is the long splinter that broke from the block. In it lie Dow Lake, the Flats, and the railway yards beneath the Somerset and Wellington street bridges. The northern end of the splinter passes under the river. Climb the hill at the Farm and you are crossing the major fault that caused the trouble. The north side of this large down-dropped block is more complicated along the Ottawa River. A large number of faults almost parallel one another, oriented in a northwest-southeast direction, resulting in numerous small faulted blocks. Some of the blocks slipped down, others while faulting squeezed up their neighbours. If you had lived then and travelled the Montreal Road you would have had to climb over one block and slip down the other side to the next block which probably would not have been flat but sloping up or down to the succeeding block. But faulting was not the only process during this long erosional period. Weathering went on and on for several hundreds of millions of years. The jagged edges of the blocks became rounded. Rivers worked out valleys. The land, particu- larly in the lower levels, would be deep in soil. Still later during this time the Monteregian hills were formed. Montreal Mountain, the most westerly one of the group, is the core of an old volcano. A line of erupting volcanoes so close at hand would not leave this basin undisturbed. There may well have been further movement along established faults. Long before the next great event both plants and animals had taken to the land. We have no way of knowing by direct evidence whether any lived here, but the probabilities are that life did exist. Just south of James Bay are some land plants that lived as early as the first fifth of this period. GLACIATION And then the glaciers came down from the north — the fifth great event. What happened to our Gatineau Mountains? Their tops—what was left of them after the long erosion—were gouged off, ground up, and carried southward. What happened to our thick deposits of soil? The soil was carried down into New York State. The mountains we see now, have been decapitated and levelled. Although the deep valleys and heights are still in contrast, yet when you look across the tops you see that they are approximately the same height—a peneplain. As the glaciers melted they dropped the debris which they had gathered. It is strewn all over our countryside—boulders from the hills and from the younger rocks over which the glaciers passed. Some of it, too, has gone down to New York State. Such boulders are commonly called ‘erratics’ because they have wandered far from their original position. 15 Witson: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT Ayo oy] JO WeoYy IY} sI[LapUN YOIYM SUOISPAUT INOF ISITF oY} FO SUOUIpas oY) Jo sysodop oyi JO UdNefei oy} pul WI sso1o YI SINeZ oy Surmoys wWiegq [eUoU1odxy 9yI 01 Yeq IffOYooy Worf BMeNO fo etjus0 oyy YSnoiyy 9d1[s [BoNIeA YW “p “SI 0008 0082 009 0) yea4 JO ajeos je}UOZIOY jea4 JO ajeos yeaa, 25 MSN ee > SR are I Zi Ws Ue oS ee Say 7s |S SAN We ea a WHW4 IWLNAWIYadX4 ye] ¥M24 2/F°qOq rey eIq°GO%d | TIHIH “SAV NOSNOUS GUOZ 7Ne-+ J2}589NO/S 16 THe CANADIAN FieLp-NATuRALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 Usually the glaciers left a written record of the direction of their movement. The rock base over which they thrust was scratched by the boulders within the ice. In some places where melting water flowed beneath the ice the debris was dropped in long trails. Such trails may be straight or curved according to the course of the under-ice stream. They lie like huge serpents across the country. They may be continuous for a distance or they may be discontinuous due to later erosion. These long mounds are called ‘eskers.’ There are some, but not many, within this area. Then there are drumlins, piles of debris shaped like an inverted spoon, broader at one end than at the other. Usually at the centre there is a hard core of rock. Drumlins, too, tell the direction of the ice flow. The moving mass meets an obstacle, now the hard core of the drumlin. As its speed is retarded it divides and piles up some of its debris on the upward end of the obstacle. Moving on along either side it again unites and continues. An ice-field, static for a time, may deposit debris more or less unevenly from its widespread base forming a ground moraine, or an unmelted block of ice may be surrounded by debris. When the ice is gone an unfilled bowl called a ‘kettle’ remains, surrounded by debris. The debris piled at the lower edge of the glacier is a ‘terminal moraine.’ There are also ‘lateral moraines’ but they are more fre- quently found in moutainous country piled at the side of a valley glacier. As the ice cap melted, its margin retreating farther and farther to the north, large freshwater lakes formed along the melting margin. Like all lakes, they too, deposited sediments, and we have heavy clays over large areas of the Lowland. In many places they show the difference between the winter and summer deposition —or what stood for the summer then. Varved or ribbon clays they are called. The summer deposit is thicker and browner because of oxidation. In time the glaciers disappeared northward but the icefield is not gone. Green- land is still ice-capped as well as some parts of the Arctic islands. The normal sequence, then, of glacial deposits would be: glacial boulder till overlain by varved clays. Last MARINE INVASION The sixth great event! This is the shortest chapter in the history of this part of the earth, yet we find its evidence everywhere, even in the gravels that cover many of our roads. The weight of the glaciers depressed the north part of the continent. For, in some places, the ice was a mile thick. When the ice was gone in this eastern part of Canada as well as in the north, the continent was slow to adjust itself. The sea came in once more—the last time to date. It came up the St. Lawrence valley, spread south into the Champlain valley, crossed the Beauhar- nois axis into our Ottawa-St. Lawrence Lowland. Seashells have been found as far up the Ottawa valley as Pembroke and as far up the St. Lawrence as Brockville. A remnant of seabeach has been reported above the 600-foot elevation on King’s © Mountain. This does not mean that the Lowland was covered to that height above us but that its floor was later raised to that extent. The deposits of this Champlain sea, as it is called, are spread in and out among the hills that mark the boundaries of our present Lowland. The tops of the higher hills stood as islands in the sea, just as the Thousand Islands now rise above tthe St. Lawrence. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT v7. As this last sea entered and encountered the debris left by the glaciers and the subsequent glacial lakes it reworked and resorted it, working over the moraines and the finer outwashed material, and re-deposited it anew. In these sediments are the seashells which now we find first in the marine clays, and then in the reworked sands. In the last few years two whales were found in a sand pit near Uplands. Gradually the earth’s crust re-adjusted itself and the sea again withdrew leaving its story behind. * % * So now, above the Precambrian complex lies the bedrock of the long-ago deposits of the early period of fluctuating invasions and retreats of the sea, and above that we find the glacial boulder till, the varved clays of the glacial lake deposits and, lastly, the marine clays and sands. In places one or the other may be missing because of some local condition. And, in two places in the succession of rocks recording the long history of our Lowland is a line where there is nothing. But each line represents the passage of some hundreds of millions of years, the history of which is written elsewhere on the earth. PART TWO EXCURSIONS The logical plan for these field trips would be to visit the outcrops in the order in which they were deposited. This, however, is not always possible because of the limitations of time and space, and because faulting has upset the order in which the sediments are brought to the surface. In this Part Two the distance between two points is given in order that a long excursion may be split up into two short ones, or conversely that two short ones may be put together, or any other change desired according to the time available or other circumstance. FieLp Trip [ THE BRUCITE PLANT Distance: Ottawa to Brucite Plant via Hull 22 miles. Arrangements can be made with the company for a conducted tour to see the outcrop in detail. The entrance is on the old Gatineau Road from Farm Point. The main outcrop is the Grenville limestone or dolomite (p. 5) which contains the almost translucent brucite. Other desiderata to be seen here are various forms of rock metamorphosed by igneous intrusions (p. 4), on the east side of the quarry. The Grenville limestone can be seen en masse on the east side of the regular Gatineau Road not far south from the east turn to Wakefield. The debris from the quarry forms a gleaming white hill. Here, as in a number of other places, the limestone is quite dolomitic, that is, it has magnesium in it as well as calcium. Bits of the translucent brucite are scattered through the dolomite or are loose in flake- like pieces. 18 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 A metamorphic zone (p. 4) on the east side of the glistening hill is shown by the presence of rocks of various colours due to the chemical variations caused by the action of hot intrusives into the Grenville limestone. NORTH OF CHELSEA Distance: Brucite Plant to marine clay 1014 miles. Marine fossils of the Champlain sea (p. 16) occur in the clays on both sides of the highway over the hill just a little north of Chelsea. North of the clay deposit, on the east side of the road, is a pit of sand outwashed and reworked by the same Champlain sea. GATINEAU PARK Distance: Chelsea to junction of Kingsmere and Meach Lake roads 1% miles. Park cars on the south side of the Kingsmere road just beyond the junction of the Meach Lake road (Fig. 5). Take the first trail north into the bush. On either side of the trail are outcrops of Grenville limestone intruded by various types of igneous rocks. Many metamorphics (p. 4) are present, also paragneisses and quartzite and such minerals as mica, apatite, quartz, pyroxene crystals and many others. About a half mile beyond the entrance from the Kingsmere road a mica mine lies some 30 or 40 feet from the trail, on the left. Farther along the trail on the right are great joint planes weathered to large chasms. The end of the side path is marked by the Parks Branch, and cannot be missed. Still farther up the trail, on the left side, right at the path is one of the largest erratics (p. 14) to be seen in the area. Proceeed to the Meadow Picnic Grounds and turn, descending towards the Kingsmere road. At the big curve south of the Grounds is a large basic dike of the gabbro-diorite type. A dike is a mass of igneous rock intruded into a crack of older and usually less resistant rock. The latter weathers more quickly leaving the long, narrow dike extruding like a frozen stream. KETTLES Distance: Meach Lake road junction to Meach Lake 3% miles. Return to the junction of the Kingsmere road and the Meach Lake road. Drive north on the Meach Lake road to the hill sloping down to the foot of the lake. To the west of the road just at this corner is a ‘kettle’ (p. 16), a large hollow that was probably preserved by a block of ice. While the ice was there the glacial debris piled up on either side of it. When the ice melted the hollow or ‘kettle’ remained surrounded by the debris. The former drainage system issued from the foot of the lake, but was blocked. The old channel can be seen following a low valley connecting with the creek at Old Chelsea. ‘The new drainage begins on the east side of the lake. 19 WItson: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT eesjoud Pja!4 dUdIq \ pue suiyied \ peoy aspiy ~ S/EIBUI\/ 19430 \ pue BDI —_— SSS ~ [en peoy ospry “¢ “ory ar ae GS SO Le eee | 0001 3994 JO a]e9S = x 219847 fi wsey2 ~~ _ Plaid aiuaig / 20 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 MAGNETITE MINE . Distance: junction from Kingsmere and Meach Lake roads to Iron Mine 4 miles, to Museum via Driveway 18 miles. Return south to the Kingsmere road, from thence descend the Mines road. Just after you pass the artificial pond on the right, a wood trail enters the bush on the right. At the edge of the trail just off the road is a cleft in the rock from which magnetic (iron) ore has been taken. Large blocks of the rock, replete with magne- tite, are lying all around half buried by the scrub. FreLp Trip II FELDSPAR QUARRY Distance: Ottawa to Hazeldean 14 miles, to feldspar quarry 2 miles. At Hazeldean on Highway 15 turn north. Stop at the first crossroad. A quarry lies beyond the fence at the northeast corner. The quarry can also be reached from Highway 17, turning south at the Klondike Inn, South March. The distance is slightly greater. This quarry is near the end of a Precambrian spur which leaves the Shield at Fitzroy Harbour, projects to the southeast terminating in isolated rocky islands before it passes under the younger sediments a few miles beyond this crossroad (Fig. 6). On the northeast side, the gentle dip of ancient rocks away from the spur has preserved progressively younger rocks in their natural order, extending across the country to a fault near the Mountain road, marking the southern edge of the Shield. The southwest margin of the Precambrian spur is limited by another fault which will be observed later. Although this Precambrian outcrop has never been thoroughly studied many things of interest can be seen during a short visit. a) The main body of the rock is a type of hornblende gneiss. It varies con- siderably from fine to coarse, and from place to place. b) At the corner just over the fence is a small fault showing the lateral move- ment of a narrow vein. At some period the vein in a molten state intruded along a crack or a weak plane in the older rock. Later when both country rock and vein were rigid some pressure broke the rock separating the broken ends of the vein. c) A few steps to the east lies the quarry containing considerable water from springs. A large pegmatite vein is the raison d’étre of the quarry. The word peg- matite refers to the granitic nature of the vein and to its large crystals. The sharp contact of this vein and the country rock can be seen on both sides of the quarry. On the north the vein passes beneath the country rock. The main constituents of the vein are pink feldspar, quartzite, and both biotite (dark) and muscovite (light) micas, the latter only in very small quantities. A number of other minerals are present in the country rock itself. d) Note the relative temperatures at which each constitutent of the vein soli- dified or “froze out.’ Right at the contact of the vein and the country rock lies the thick, crystalline pink feldspar, in places containing large crystals of dark biotite mica. ‘The mica is not common on the west side of the quarry, but in the piles on the east side flat pieces of large crystals are preserved in the blocks of feldspar. When the vein intruded, as mentioned above, it was molten. The country rock was already solid. The feldspar within the intruding magma (the melted stream) solidi- WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT NiO ae a an ae Db IN lez, Sif ma QTSIHS NVIGVNWO WOud UNdS HOYVW--AOYZLI4 “GY NVACTIZVH-HONVW S Fic. 6. Cross-section from near Hazeldean to Canadian Shield at Mountain Road yA» 22 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 fied first, therefore, the feldspar must have ‘frozen’ at a higher temperature than the other constituents of the vein. Next follows an envelope of mixed feldspar and quartzite, also to be seen in blocks on the east side of the quarry. There are variations in the order, probably due to varying temperature within the magma. The regions are not sharply divided. The last to crystalize is the pure quartzite. Great blocks of it are lying about, again on the east side dump or east of it. When the water is low, just beneath the surface the quartzite core of the vein can be seen at the south end nearest the gate. e) When the vein in a molten state transgressed a crack in the country rock, why were the edges of that rock not melted? On the quarry side of the pile, on the east side, several sharp-edged pieces of the dark rock are embedded in the feld- ‘spar vein. Evidently they were broken and swallowed, but not digested by the in- truding molten stream. The reason? A higher temperature than that of the molten magma of the vein would be required to melt the country rock! A more careful examination, however, shows a slight effect on the lower right hand corner of the dark embedded block. There is a blending. The contact of the hot magma has produced limited chemical action, resulting in a small field of rock different from either of the two original types—metamorphism (p. 4). f) Another prominent feature of the whole area is the rounded surface of all the rock of the countryside, roche moutonnée (sheep’s back), due to the glacial scour. A great many other conditions and minerals can be found by tramping across, and up and down, the long Precambrian spur. ‘THE ROAD SOUTH TO HAZELDEAN a) Driving towards Hazeldean stop just south of the last Precambrian outcrop that extends as a ridge to the east. Look east. Below the ridge across the second field having a ‘bush’ in the background is a level, or almost level, outcrop of white sandstone just north of the bush between it and the ridge. On the south side of the Precambrian ridge and near it the sandstone can be seen to slope upward against the ridge. It cannot be established whether the slope of the sandstone adjacent to the ridge is due to a small fault or to slumping of the sand before consolidating. Either interpretation would explain the position. Some of the layers here are quite quartz- itic, that is, the sand grains are closely cemented with secondary silica. That contact represents approximately 500 or 600 million years, the length of time of the first great erosion period (p. 5). b) Again stop, a little north of the cemetery. On both sides of the road are several outcrops of the sandstone. The Precambrian is covered here. On the west is a drop in the terrain to the rich farm lands at a lower level. Across a narrow field on the west is a clump of trees, most of them felled now, among which lies an outcrop of limestone. In its natural position the limestone should be, roughly speaking, some 490 to 500 feet higher. That drop is due to the fault or crack in the earth’s crust along the southwest margin of the Precambrian spur (p. 20). After the faulting the side to the east of the fault must have been a high ridge, now eroded to its present elevation above the down-dropped area. The lower land has caught the rich soil. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DiIsTRICT 23 CAMPBELL QUARRY Distance: Hazeldean to Campbell’s quarry 3 miles. A sign on the north side of Highway 15 between Hazeldean and Bell’s Corners marks the turn-off to Campbell’s quarry. Drive through the fields on the quarry road. Stop beyond the farmhouse and park beyond the barn. This is the first of several Nepean sandstone quarries from which the rock was taken for the Parliament Buildings, Confederation Building, Connaught Building and the Museum. It can be seen also in many smaller buildings throughout the city. a) A few feet beyond the turn into the quarry on the west side of the quarry and between the trail and the quarry is an artificial ditch in marine clay (p. 17). The clay is rich in Pleistocene fossils. The most prolific is the widespread Saxicava, now called Hiatella. Evidently the clay was deposited in a cove in the sandstone hill. b) In the quarry itself note the direction of the joint planes. Many of them now are outlined by grass streaks. Joint planes occur in rocks because of the shrink- age when the sediments are solidified. On the north end of the quarry where the vertical face of the joint planes is visible they are inclined at quite an angle to the perpendicular. c) Notice the ripple marks. They are close and mostly asymmetric. The water then must have been shallow. They were probably formed near shore by breaking waves. True wave ripples are symmetric. The water of a wave moves up and down. Only the top water is carried forward by the wind. The resulting ripple is the same on both sides. Current ripple marks, on the other hand, are steeper on the side away from the current, and a breaking wave on a shallow shore is of the nature of a current. d) Note the ‘liesegang’—dark spots of iron material. Percolating water dis- solves the oxidized material and carries it through the porous sandstone, redepositing it en route. In some places the dark streaks are shown in irregular concentric circles, in other places the result is suggestive of cross-bedding. e) Note the occurrence of layers of coarser sand, probably due to some new source of supply or, in some cases, due to sorting by the weight of the larger, heavier grains. f) About half way up the east side of the quarry is a layer peculiarly marked like a turtle’s back. Black patches are separated by low sand riges. It is really a series of mud-cracks, further evidence of shallow water. The source of the mud has been limited, and apparently some of it has been worn off. Fresh water-mud-cracks curl up with the concave surface uppermost. Mud- cracks from salt water dry, leaving the convex surface uppermost. These are from salt water. ROAD BACK TO HIGHWAY 15 Stop at the low scarp just south of the farmhouse. a) Near the base or halfway up the scarp several dirty-looking sandstone layers are interbedded with the dolomite. Nearer the top the sandstone has disap- peared. It has been completely covered by dolomite. Why the intermingling? As the sea moved inland to the west across the basin over the Precambrian base it dissolved the solubles in its path, and deposited the 24 THe CANADIAN FreLp-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 insoluble sand along its margin. As the shore advanced farther and farther west- ward the solubles behind it became more and more concentrated and were deposited. Deposition may have been accelerated by bacteria. A layer of dolomite or limestone would be laid. Then a pause until more solutions were concentrated. Meanwhile the sand left was distributed, then more dolomite or limestone. Finally all sand was covered. b) Note that the dolomite is rusty-weathering because of iron in the water. In places at the top of the low scarp the dolomite has inclusions of large, more or less clear calcite crystals. One explanation for the crystals may be that as the dolomite replaced the limestone there was shrinkage, which is usual in that replacement pro- cess. Percolating water has deposited secondary calcite. c) Near the top of the scarp are some glacial striae in a general northwest- southeast direction. They are not very pronounced, but they indicate the direction of glacial movement in the immediate area. Driving on still farther towards the Highway on the east side of the quarry road is an abandoned quarry used as a dump. The same features can be seen here, though not so well displayed as on the scarp. A few poorly preserved fossils occur here. BRITANNIA YACHT CLUB Distance: Campbell quarry to Yacht Club 7 miles. At Britannia Heights, just before reaching the traffic lights, turn north from Highway 15 to Highway 17, then again turn north at the little white church. Drive down to the river (Fig. 7). At the sharp turn to the left park the car and take the right trail to the dam and cross the canal. a) Note the colour and fineness of the sandstone as compared with the Nepean sandstone at the Campbell quarry. b) Note also the small traces of greenish shale in the hollows of sandstone. No fossils are found here. No self-respecting fossil would live in such an environ- ment. This outcrop is a large sandstone lens, the result of the second invasion from the east (p. 8). It is only partially typical, and a more characteristic outcrop can be seen on a later excursion. DUNTILE QUARRY Distance: Yacht Club to Duntile quarry 4 miles. The Duntile quarry (Fig. 7) is cut into the hill on the south side of Carling Avenue. The road into it is well marked. The rock of this quarry was deposited by the third invasion that entered the basin over the Frontenac axis (p. 3). There are several grades of limestone here, and near the base there is more shale interbedded, though it is not always possible to approach the walls because of work- ing conditions. Halfway up the quarry is some fine-grained almost lithographic stone which contains a few fossils. Higher up the rock is a darker grey, and con- tains many fossils, if you hunt long enough and if the Company has not covered it with debris. A simple coral, Streptelasma, ranges from these beds upward more than 600 feet to the top of the limestone. One characteristic compound coral, Lyopora halli, is confined to these upper beds. Brachiopods are also common. Two forms, Dole- 25 GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT WILSON BMPIQ punoie pue Ur suOIsIMoxa Joy dep °) “917 eluueqig a5qlug S.,NVWGYNH ae. eA [~) 4 I (0) T SAlIN $0 a]e9S eMeHyO $0 AUD 26 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 roides pervetus ottawanus and Hesperorthis tricenaria, also found here, have a range of approximately only twenty feet. Various species of Rafinesquina are most pro-- lific. The genus has a convex pedicle valve and a concave brachial valve. Another form, Opikina, has the same general shape, and is often mistaken for a smaller spe- cies of Rafinesquina. The most easily distinguished difference lies in the interpunctae on the inner layer of either valve. In Rafinesquina the interpunctae are compara- tively large and are arranged in rows between the striae. In Opikina the inter- punctae form a fine network with no regular arrangement. These two forms are inter- esting in more than their outward similarity. In these beds the Opikina is more abundant. Gradually upward the numerical ratio changes, and the Rafinesquina is more abundant in the upper part of the formation. Then there are a few large pelecypods (clam type) also a few rather flat gastro- pods (snail type). Another fairly common group of which there are several species is the cephalopod. The modern squid and the devilfish or octopus, though lacking a shell, are distant relatives even if the relationship is not suggested by the fossil shell. The cephalopods found here are long, straight, cone-shaped creatures divided by partitions into a number of chambers like the living, coiled nautilus. A few trilobites are present in the rocks, most of them the smooth, less spectacu- lar type. A number of other fossil forms are not so common and are more difficult to distinguish. KIPPEWA DRIVE Distance: Duntile quarry to Kippewa Drive 3%4 miles. Turn south at the corner of Carling and Bronson avenues, to Kippewa Drive (Fig. 7). Stop on the slope down to Opeongo Road. On the north side of the Drive is a ledge of grey limestone. It belongs to the same general formation as the rock of the Duntile quarry, but was deposited much later by the same sea. In its natural position it would be roughly 500 feet higher than the rock of that quarry. What happened? The present Administrative Building at the Experimental Farm was built over an old quarry of approximately the same horizon as the top of the Duntile quarry. This means the outcrop at Kippewa Drive should also be about 500 feet above the Experimental Farm. The answer is that the Carling Avenue hill at the Farm outlines another fault. The Kippewa Drive rock has dropped. In fact, as mentioned pre- viously, the city of Ottawa lies on the northwest corner of a large down-dropped block. The greatest exposure, of course, of these beds is the cliff all along the Ottawa River within the city. The cliff crosses Rideau Hall grounds meeting the road just east of the gate. It forms the promontory upon which Earnscliffe stands. Lady Grey Drive is cut out of it. It forms Nepean Point and Parliament Hill. Just before Christ Church Cathedral it turns southward and continuing forms the hill on Carling Avenue just west of Bronson Avenue. From here it swings southeast and gradually disappears under the houses on Fourth and Fifth avenues. Before this part of the Glebe was built up a number of very fossiliferous outcrops were exposed in that locality. The whole cliff is due to a curving fault, not the same fault as that crossing the Experimental Farm. When the large block fell, the block upon which the city stands (p. 14), a | piece broke from its western edge and sank still farther. In falling it tilted. Carling WiLtson: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 27 Avenue crosses the broken fragment between the Farm hill and the hill just west of Bronson Avenue. In that fallen strip lie The Flats and the railway yards below the Wellington Street and the Somerset Street bridges. South of Carling Avenue, Dow Lake is part of it (p. 14). a) At the Kippewa Drive outcrop note the slope of the rock. The edge of the scarp was pulled down by the force of the sinking valley to the west. Excavations for the houses near Opeongo Road and the digging of the sewer exposed black shale, not grey limestone. Other exposures and well drillings show that the black shale was deposited on top of the grey limestone—another proof that the strip has fallen from its high estate. b) Note the crumbly nature of the rock. Part of that is due to dynamiting for the roadway, but part is due to the breaking along the edges of the fault. c) Note the calcite in the cracks—a feature often found near a fault. Running water dissolving the limestone flows down the cracks. As it evaporates, or as the calcium becomes concentrated, the water desposits the secondary calcite in a crystal- line form. d) There are a few fossils here, but not many. In the flat weathered exposures such as could be found along the avenues before they were built up, corals were present and numerous brachiopods. It is at this horizon that the replacement of the Opikinas by the Rafinesquinas culminates. HOGSBACK Distance: Kippewa Drive to Hogsback 314 miles. From the Bronson and Carling avenue intersection drive to Preston Street and thence to the Driveway and the Prescott Highway through the Farm to Hogsback. The name Hogsback (Fig. 8) is given to this outcrop because of the peculiar Fic. 8. Typical hogsback (Resistant rock caps and protects weaker underlying rocks) structure of the rock. Some of it is folded. The small island block that divides the falls is tilted. It is all supposed to resemble a hog’s back. The exposure is not quite typical of the form technically called a ‘hogsback,’ but there is a similarity. Geologically speaking a hogsback is a scarp caused by the dip of the rock from which it is formed. a) Stand on the bridge facing north towards the falls (Fig. 9). Compare the rock on either side of the falls. Note the difference in the colour of the layers, and the interbedding on the east side. Why the difference? Again it is due to faulting. The rocks on the east are younger than those on the west. They are down-faulted. 28 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 b) Just north of the east end of the bridge a small fault is visible in the wall. Faulting is responsible for the twisted block in the middle of the falls. The block belongs to the rocks on the east. It has broken from the parent rock and was tilted in falling. A fault having a greater displacement separates the block - from the rock on the west. c) Note the long folding of the rock on the north, just at the falls. In falling the edge of the larger down-dropped block has not had room for the movement and has folded somewhat. d) Visit the rock on the east side of the river. It is limestone with some layers of rusty-weathering dolomite and some shale. This outcrop corresponds to some of the lower layers in the Duntile quarry, a deposition of the third invasion. PRESCOTT HIGHWAY BOWESVILLE RD. Fic. 9. Hogsback, Ottawa e) Go down the path on the west and note the type of rock. It is a fine- grained sandstone with some greenish shale in the hollows, a lens of the shale and sandstone of the second invasion, such as was seen at the Yacht Club. It, too, is tilted, and later rounded by weathering. Note that the main slope is in the wrong direction. The rock on the west should be dragged down to the east by the regional down-dropped block but it is the reverse, except for a very narrow edge. Considering this position and the folding mentioned above it looks as though there was some compression at the time of the break. The whole region around Hogsback is crisscrossed by faults as though the surface had been struck by a mighty hammer in the long ago. The record of a well nearby bears further witness to the broken-up conditions. A fault to be seen later is yet further evidence. }) Walk east on the road to a path winding northward past one or two houses. On the right of the path is a fenced-off, water-filled quarry. The rock in it corre- sponds to the top of the Duntile quarry. The elevation of these higher strata is not much greater than the lower beds at the falls because of the eastward dip of the down-dropped_ block. | g) On either side of the road east from the bridge are two small, abandoned quarries hidden by an overgrowth of bushes and trees. They corroborate the age and the tilting of the beds of the fallen block. A few fossils can be found here. h) From the east end of the bridge follow the path south paralleling the river. Another path on the left leads to the entrance of another quarry. Note the coarse crystalline grain of the rock on the east face of the quarry. This, too, is a deposition of the third invasion, but a part not seen before. It occurs above the Duntile quarry rock and below the rock of Kippewa Drive. It will be WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 29 seen again in the large quarries on the Montreal Road in the region known as ‘The Quarries.’ On the river side push through the bushes to the west wall. Here the rocks are torn and steeply dipping. The east side of the quarry is down-faulted. The edge of the west side is dragged down with it. By climbing the rocks in the southwest corner the fault itself can be seen. The actual break is about 12 to 18 inches wide. For years the only fossils found were bryozoans, a group of very fine colonies. They were carefully studied by an expert in that phylum, but did not yield the age of this twisted wall. During a field trip of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club a participant, hitherto unacquainted with fossils, knocked off a piece of rock con- tainmg some brachiopods, Parastrophia hemiplicata, which places the beds just above those at the top of the Duntile quarry. The formation is wrongly identified on the map. WHITE BRIDGE Distance: Hogsback to White Bridge 114 miles. Drive across Hogsback bridge to the Bowesville road. Turn north to the railway track overpass. Park cars and descend to the track, following it to the river. The rock outcrops above and below the bridge, and on the other side of the river. Watch out for poison ivy here! a) Note the crystalline nature of the limestone. These are the Hull beds, the same as the coarse grained limestone on the east wall of the quarry south of Hogsback (see above), and the same as the Quarries on the Montreal Road (p. 31). b) But, the unique feature here is the slope of the beds. Examine the dip under the bridge, then walk upstream along the bank of the river, and note the great increase in the angle of the dip. You are approaching closer and closer to a fault. The falling piece of the earth’s crust pulls down the margin of the rock from which it breaks. In falling, its margin, in turn, is dragged up along the break. c) Note the large almost black irregular blebs within the rock. They are more evident the farther upstream you go. The black material is chert or flint. Some pieces are not very pure. But try scratching a smooth black piece. Pure chert, like quartz, is very hard. FieLp Trip III ROCKCLIFFE OUTCROPS Distance: Ottawa, to Rideau Hall gate 514 miles; to intersection of St. Laurent Blvd. and Montreal Road 1014 miles. 1 Drive to Rockcliffe. Just east of Rideau Hall gate is a rather dark grey lime- stone ridge, somewhat shattered by dynamiting and by weathering. This is the eastern extremity of the long scarp mentioned in Field Trip II upon which stands the Parliament Buildings and Christ Church Cathedral (p. 26). It is outlined by 30 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 a fault which causes the low ground into which the river has penetrated forming Governor’s Bay (Fig. 10). The exposure near the gate corresponds approximately to the rocks at Kippewa Drive. It is the top of the deposition of the third invasion (pie27).. a) Note the dip of the rock, dragged up by the block to the east. The low scarp crosses southeast cutting diagonally through Rideau Hall grounds, and gradually becomes less and less prominent, finally disappearing. b) A few brachiopods and other fossils can be found here but they are not well preserved. GOVERNOR'S BAY BAY EAST OF GOVERNOR'S BAY NY, SVE) [js Soe i We Fic. 10. Section at Rockcliffe Park 2 Drive around to Lookout Point, on the eastern margin of Governor’s Bay. Look westward across the bay. a) The west side of the bay with its promontory upon which Earnscliffe stands has dropped in relation to the rock which forms the Lookout. The small outcrop on the east side of the roadway, in its natural position would be about 450 feet below the rock of the Earnscliffe promontory, or Nepean Point, or Parliament Hill. But, it is about 100 feet higher than the rock at the Duntile quarry, and in texture it is considerably more crystalline. 3 Return to the main Rockcliffe Drive and continue east. Stop before descending the hill to the tennis court. a) Note the scarp upon which are built the houses above you. The shale is interbedded with thin sandstone layers, almost paper-thin in some places. This is WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 31 a deposition of the second invasion (p. 8), and is more characteristic of the whole than the very large sandstone lens seen at the Britannia Yacht Club. As mentioned before (p. 8) the shale in most places is eroded and the more resistant sandstone is preserved. Here, however the shale has been protected by the sandstone layers. b) The sandstone layers are stringers from a lens which can be seen on the right side of the road descending to the tennis courts, and which is further exposed in the rock garden south of the tennis courts. MONTREAL ROAD OUTCROPS Distance: St. Laurent Blvd. to Rockland 20 miles. 1 Return to the Montreal Road via Manor Park and St. Laurent Blvd. Drive east on the Montreal Road. Stop before ascending the slope at the top of which lies the road to the Rockcliffe Airport. a) Ina hollow on the south side of the road a little digging with a hammer will reveal some black-brown shale. It is a part of the same shale found at Billings Bridge (p. 35). The outcrop is poor but significant — a product of the fourth in- vasion (p. 9). b) Near the top of the hill on the north side of the road is a small outcrop of crystalline limestone, the same as that exposed at Lookout Point (p. 30), a product of the third invasion, and well down in the strata (p. 8). c) Note that to the southeast the lowland in which the black shale lies main- tains its relative position in the shadow of the older rocks. 2 Drive, or walk back to the northbound road a little west of the Airport road. A little north of the intersection with the Montreal Road is a quarry. a) Note that the scarp at the quarry and the lowland to the west of it are in the same relative position as the slope and the lowland on the Montreal Road. b) These features are the result of another northwest-southwest fault. The black shale has dropped several hundred feet from its normal position above the rock of the scarp. 3 Drive east, again, on the Montreal Road. After passing the road leading to the Rockcliffe Airport look to the south. a) Note the large quarries south of the road. Their outcrop is a continuation of the rock on the scarp. Cross the quarries to the south. The exposure is cut off abruptly by the continuation of the same northwest-southeast fault. b) Again note the crystalline nature of the limestone. It belongs to the beds exposed on the east side of the road at Lookout Point (p. 30). Fossils are not numerous in these beds. When they are present they are dif- ficult to extract. | cea 32 Tue CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 4, Distance: St. Laurent Blvd. to quarry 10% miles. Continue on the Montreal Road taking the river road at the fork. Between - Orleans and Cumberland is a deep cut in a hill on the south side of the Highway. The rock has evidently been quarried for roadbuilding. a) Note the rock on the east side of the exposure. It is the same rather fine- grained sandstone as that seen at the Britannia Yacht Club outcrop, and at Rock- cliffe before descending to the tennis courts—another lens in the lens-filled shale of the second invasion (p. 8). b) Note the rock on the right side of the exposure, and on the floor of most of the quarry. It is quite different, a blue-grey dolomite when freshly broken, but weathering rusty. This is the top of the dolomite overlying the basal Nepean sand- stone. The base of the dolomite was seen on the low scarp after visiting Campbell’s quarry (p. 23). c) Note that a layer of several feet of sandstone caps the dolomite on the right—a contact between the two formations. d) Why the juxtaposition of the two formations? There is a relatively small fault here. Which side is down-dropped? Look on the right side of the outcrop. In its natural position which formation overlies the other? The sandstone. Then the east side, all sandstone, is down-dropped. e) Now find the general position of the fault on the river side of the road. RIVER AT ROCKLAND Distance: St. Laurent Blvd. to Rockland 20 miles. Continue on the Montreal Road. Turn to the left at Rockland, towards the river. Park near the old Edwards mill. Walk back to the tree-covered bluff on the east side of the road. a) Note the clear white quartz of a piece freshly broken from the bluff. Some layers are quartzitic, almost solidly cemented. More, however, will crumble into sand. There is some uncertainty as to whether this is a Precambrian quartzite or the basal sandstone seen at the Campbell quarry but differing a little in the more complete cementing of some of the layers. The writer is inclined to the latter interpretation. b) Cross the swamp to the east of the bluff, or go around it, then proceed a little southward past the sumacs. Here is a quarry of the same old rusty weather- ing dolomite with patches of secondary calcite crystals, just like that seen on the scarp just south of the Campbell quarry. This outcrop, then, is near the base of the dolomitic phase of the first invasion. c) Note that the outcrop is considerably lower than the white sandstone bluff, and remember that in its natural position it overlies the sandstone, whether the latter be Nepean sandstone or Precambrian quartzite. In the swamp-filled valley between the two outcrops is the fault that separates them. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 33 STEWART QUARRY, SOUTH OF ROCKLAND Distance: River at Rockland to Stewart quarry 3 miles. 1 Drive to Highway 17 in Rockland. A little west of this corner turn south on the first continuing road. Go out into the country as far as the sawmill about three- quarters of a mile south of Rockland. Walk east beyond the sawmill into the next field to a small elevation. Descend the north nose of the little bluff. a) Note the rusty-weathering dolomite at the base, thick-bedded, blue-grey when freshly broken. This, again, is the top of the formation overlying the sand- stone seen at the scarp just south of the Campbell quarry (p. 23), at the quarry in the cut on the south side of the Montreal Road between Orleans and Cumberland, and in the down-dropped block near the river at Rockland—the base of the upper- most part of the first invasion (p. 7). b) About 2 feet higher note the coarse-grained sandstone. This is the base of the deposits of the second invasion (p. 8), one of the larger sandstone lenses at the base of the interbedded shale and sandstone seen at Rockcliffe above the tennis courts (p. 31). Why is it so coarse? It is a first deposit of that sea as it came over an eroded surface, and the heavier material has been somewhat sorted by its own weight. The coarser layers are not more than 2 or 3 feet thick. The sandstone at the top of the bluff is much finer-grained, as you can see. This is another contact between the two formations, the dolomite of the first and the sandstone of the second invasion. Such contacts are hard to find in this country heavily covered as it is by unconsolidated glacial and marine sediments. During the interval represented by this contact an additional 700 or so feet of dolomite was deposited in the Montreal basin, followed by a complete withdrawal of the sea, in turn followed by the deposition of more than 800 feet of limestone in the Champlain valley and 700 feet of limestone in the Montreal basin before our basin was again invaded, and this sandstone just above the contact deposited. That line of contact, then, represents some millions of years of time. 2 Continue along the road which has several twists and turns. Stop after the right hand turn up the hill. a) In an overgrown quarry on the north side of the road is another contact, in this place between the top of the shale and sandstone of the second invasion and the basal sediments of the third invasion which, you will remember, came not from the east, but over the Frontenac axis (p. 3). This contact is much less clearly defined than that east of the sawmill. The basal sandy layer is only a few inches thick. Not much sand was exposed when this invasion entered. Above this thin layer lie a few feet of rusty-weathering dolomitic beds, looking very like those below the basal sandstone at the sawmill, but considerably younger in age. As mentioned before, dolomite is a magnesium limestone and may be formed by deposition in shallow water, or by a replacement or exchange of magnesium for some of the calcium. Nothing here indicates by 34 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 which method the dolomite was deposited but it is quite evident that at the be- ginning of the transgression the water would have been shallow. b) Some fossils are present in the lower formation. Perhaps the best hunting ground is in the thin, rather shaly beds near the base of the small outcrop on the south side of the road. The characteristic fossil is a small brachiopod, Camarotoechia plena, radially striated, and having a sharp beak. Down the median part of one valve is a fold and on the other valve a corresponding groove or sinus. 3 Continue on the road turning left at the first rather indistinct corner, following several turns in the road to a large quarry which has been visible for some time. It is cut in the face of a scarp. Between the top of this hill and the contact at the last locality the rock measures some 168 feet in thickness, part of it covered of course. The rock exposed in the quarry comprises the lower part of the limestone of the third invasion, including the same beds as those at the Duntile quarry (p. 24), and some 35 feet of additional strata at the top. The covered part lies below the beds of the Duntile quarry. a) Note the limestone. There are several variations of it here. Along the west wall are some few inches of interbedded shaly layers. b) Fossils are very numerous in these beds. Both the corals Lyopora and Strepelasma are found here. Many types of brachiopods abound. Very common are a number of species of Rafinesquina. In fact these beds begin to illustrate the increase of Rafinesquinas and the decrease of Opikinas (p. 26). Several varieties of Strophomena are common, and Resserella is abundant. A lucky person may even find a tribolite almost complete, but certainly heads and tails are present. The easiest collecting ground is on the top of the bluff at the northwest end of the quarry. FieLp Trip [V FOSTER SANDPIT Distance: Museum to Sandpit 7 miles. Drive out the Bowesville road. Take the river road at the fork with the Uplands road. On the west side of the road just before the Airport is reached is a large sandpit, the last. of several. The sand is outwash from glacial material reworked by the Champlain sea (p. 16). a) In the low hummocks of sand in the centre of the pit abundant seashells can be found including several varieties of pelecypods (clam type) and numerous barnacles. They are white, not yet completely fossilized. The skeletons of two white whales (Beluga) have been found here recently. b) Note, too, the crossbedding of the sand, and the sorting of the coarser sand into rivulets as it falls from above. c) In one place, before the centre of the west wall was removed, the ends of rails of a track used to protude from the sand covered by several feet of sand drifted there since the track was abandoned—an illustration of wind action. The whole wall has now been removed. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 35 BILLINGS BRIDGE Distance: Foster Sandpit to Billings Bridge 4.2 miles. At Billings Bridge park in the shopping centre, or, if not too many cars, beneath the overhead railway bridge. On the east side of Bank Street, beside the railway, a weed-blocked path leads down to a creek which has cut through black shale, the higher beds of the same shale as that seen on the Montreal Road (p. 31). a) Note the fissile or breakable character of the shale. There are a few fossils here but not very well preserved. Fragments of a trilobite are occasionally found. More common is the small end of a long tapering cephalopod. A much better place for fossils in these beds is in Bearbrook creek (p. 41). b) Just west in the curve of the stream before its issue from under Bank Street is a small thrust fault (Fig. 11) visible on the north bank. A few thin beds SEALED Fic. 11. Thrust fault of interbedded shale and dolomite, normally occurring in the lower part of the formation, are thrust upward against the higher beds composed entirely of shale. BARNHART QUARRY Distance: Billings Bridge to Barnhart Quarry 1.5 miles. Return by the River road to the Bank Street bridge. Continue east to the Smyth Road. Turn southeast and stop at the Veterans’ Health Centre. On the south side of the road is a quarry on the private property of Dr. W. S. Barnhart. Before trespassing it has been customary to ask his permission which has always been cheerfully given. These rocks are at the base of the sediments of the fifth invasion. The formation is represented around Georgian Bay, near Toronto and in New York State. It has never been found as inliers on the Precambrian Shield to the north. a) In the northeast corner a further excavation has revealed some of the black shales beneath it. b) In the main exposure note the interbedded grey shale and thin grey dolo- mitic layers. In some places, particularly in the southeast corner, the thin dolomitic beds are hardly continuous, looking more like a line of nodules. Some thicker dolomitic beds are exposed in the bed of the creek at the west side of the Health Centre. A little higher strata occur south of Leitrim, not exposed normally but seen when the telephone or hydro poles were put in. c) In this region fossils in these beds are very rare. 36 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 GLOUCESTER FAULT Distance: Barnhart quarry to Gloucester fault and Morrisburg road _intersec- tion 8 miles. Return to Billings Bridge and drive down the Morrisburg Highway. Near Leitrim the Highway and the scarp to the west are seen to converge. A little south of Leitrim the road descends. a) The scarp, its outline softened by a covering of later unconsolidated debris, has crossed the road and continues to the southeast. In front is a hill with a valley between you and it. Beneath Leitrim and the road south of it to the slope lie the sediments of the fifth invasion, though the beds are somewhat higher than those at the Barnhart quarry. The hill across the valley is composed of the upper beds of the rocks of the first invasion. A creek runs through the valley and also reveals rocks of the first invasion. The Gloucester fault (Fig. 12) has crossed the Pe TES —_— 7 SNE Fic. 12. Gloucester Fault (Castor River bridge, 2 miles west of Russell) Highway between the creek in the valley and the slope south of Leitrim. The down-faulted block in this vicinity has a displacement of 1800 to 2000 feet. This is the continuation of the same Gloucester fault that crosses Carling Avenue at the Experimental Farm. BRIDGE CROSSING NORTH BRANCH OF CASTOR RIVER Distance: Gloucester fault to North Branch of Castor River 5 miles. Continue south on the Morrisburg road to the turn to Metcalfe. Pass through the village and stop where a north-south road has a little bridge over the North WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 37 Branch of the Castor river, about 2 miles west of Russell. Stop at the bridge. It is well, here, to speak to the farmer before trespassing. In some cases emotions are high if permission is not asked! Descend to the north bank of the river on the east side of the bridge. This is at the edge where a fault breaks from the Gloucester fault and follows a northeasterly direction to Rigaud Mountain (p. 14). a) Note the red shale, distinguishing between loose blocks and exposures in place. This red shale is much better exposed at the next stopping place. b) Note the loose blocks of grey limestone replete with fossils. There are numerous brachiopods and pelecypods (clam type). One characteristic pelecypod has radial striations. It is indicative of the rocks of the sixth invasion (p. 10). Only one bona fide exposure of this formation is known. It is 1 to 2 feet thick and occurs in the bed of a creek about lot 24, Concession VII, Cumberland Town- ship. South from the intersection of the road and the creek the road rises a little. When cut through many years ago a few feet of the formation were exposed. Blocks of the excavated limestone lie broken up and overgrown by scrub on the roadside. RED SHALE QUARRY Distance: North Branch of Castor River to Red Shale quarry 5 miles. Drive through Russell, making two turns in the village, the first to the right to the main part of the village, the second to the left just before crossing the bridge. Continue east to the first north-south crossroad about one mile from the village. Turn north. Pass the first east-west crossroad and continue about halfway to the next crossroad. In a field on the west side of the road is an abandoned, water-filled quarry. Opposite the house on the east side of the road a gate leads into the field. Park the cars and walk around the south end of the water-filled quarry, then follow the old track line. Go through a second gateway into the next field, and a large red gash in the earth faces you. The quarry can be reached by turning north on the road just after entering Russell. But, for some time this road has been so abused by heavy trucks that the longer route is usually the better. This red shale is trucked to Ottawa where it is combined, three parts red shale to one part local marine clay, to make the brick used in the city. The brickyard, at the time of writing, is on the road to the Uplands Airport a short distance west of the bridge over the Rideau river at Billings Bridge. a) Note the red shale. Scattered here and there is a nodule. Break it open. The centre is a hard green rock, considerably harder than the shale. On the north side of the quarry towards the east end is a bay, of sorts, cut into the side. Near its base is a layer of the hard green rock, about 18 inches or so in thickness. It is sometimes covered with debris. b) On the south wall of this northeasterly excavation, not far from the little pumphouse several joint planes are exposed. On either side of the joint planes a green-grey ribbon about 1 inch wide marks the joint plane. The green is not so vivid as in the nodules and larger layers. What is the explanation of the red and green? The green colour is caused by ferrous iron, the red by ferric iron, that is, an oxidation of the ferrous iron, like 38 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 rusting. But which came first? Was the deposit ferrous iron that later became oxidized? Or, was it ferric iron which was reduced by oxygen-absorbing plants or bacteria? The question is open. One thing, however, is evident. The two grey- green ribbons on either side of the joint planes show a reduction of the red shale by the infiltration of oxygen-absorbing vegetation or bacteria in water seeping into the crack. On the other hand a broken nodule with green ferrous iron centre would seem to owe the origin of its outer colour to the oxidation of the exterior. c) Until recently no fossils have been found in this quarry. An ostracod, Drapenella, has been described from the same beds at Georgian Bay, but that is all. The same form occurs here, but in addition quite a collection of material has been made recently: poorly preserved branching bryozoans, a few brachiopods and even a few trilobites. They have not yet been described. During this period, then, of some 70 million years or so, this basin was gradually filled up to the depth of 1800 to 2000 feet. The process was intermittent. The basin was probably never very high when uncovered. Some transgressions of the invading sea entered from the east and some from the southwest. FIELD Trip V PAKENHAM Distance: Ottawa to Pakenham bridge 39 miles. Leave Ottawa via Carling Avenue or Wellington Street, taking Highway 17 at Britannia Heights. Drive through South March, Carp and Kinburn to Antrim. Leave Highway 17 at Antrim, continuing on the road straight west. There are one or two jogs on the last half of the road, but as you near Pakenham the road turns abruptly to the right, and gradually descends to the Mississippi River. On the right of the slope is a quarry. At the foot of the hill a left turn brings you to the Pakenham bridge. Park cars here, and return to the quarry on foot. a) The rock belongs to the lower part of the Black River - Trenton beds cor- responding to the Duntile quarry beds. b) The lower beds are not very fossiliferous, though some fossils are found in the talus fallen from above. About 15 or 20 feet above the floor, on the north edge is a bed with masses of ‘fucoids.’ They show no structure other than irregular clumps of stems, but they are believed to be the remains of seaweed (algae), a low type of plant life. Frequently pieces of trilobites can be found and a very small coral, Tetradium, usually altered by secondary calcite. At the top of the quarry are beds bearing the large ‘honey-comb’ coral Lyopora halli, and another form, Receptaculites occidentalis (p. 49). Cephalopods (p. 58), like those of the Duntile quarry are, also, fairly common in these beds. Some of them are firmly embedded in the rocks just below the bridge. Most of them here belong to the type having a bead-like siphuncle. SANDSTONE OUTCROP Distance: Pakenham bridge to Sandstone outcrops 2 miles. Cross the bridge and turn to the left, driving on Highway 29. About two miles south of Pakenham the Nepean sandstone outcrops intermittently for some distance, lying between the Highway and the river. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 39 This is the same sandstone as that at the Campbell quarry (p. 23). It is the first sand deposited upon the ancient Precambrian base. In many places on either side of the road Precambrian knobs rise above the level of the sandstone, showing that it fills the valleys between the buried hills. OUTCROP OF MARCH ABOVE THE SANDSTONE Distance:, Pakenham bridge to Almonte road 10 miles, to outcrop 14 mile. Continue south on Highway 29 to the first road on the left leading into AI- monte. But turn right, to the west, on the country road. A short distance from this corner, along the north side of the road are intermittent bumpy outcrops of dark rusty-looking rocks. Stop and examine the second or third exposure. This rock is the same dolomite as that seen on the scarp at the Campbell quarry on the truck road to Highway 15 (p. 23). The characteristics of the formation, however, are more easily seen in the latter outcrop. a) Notice first the rusty colour due to iron. It was evidently deposited in a shallow sea, and then exposed to weathering. b) Note the interbedded sandstone and dolomite. The sand is coarse and rather dirty-looking. The dolomite layers frequently have sand grains embedded in them. As mentioned above (p. 5) the erosional interval between the close of the Precambrian and the invasion of the first sea from the east was approximately 500 million years. The Nepean sandstone along Highway 29 is the result of the re- working, sifting, and sorting of the eroded material by that invading sea, which in turn, continued to dissolve the solubles and add the insolubles to the supply. Gradually the carbonates in solution would become more and more concentrated and were deposited. A first layer would form, leaving the water with few solubles. Then the sand that remained loose would be moved about. Again in time the solu- tions would become more and more concentrated, and again would be deposited. Gradually all sand would be covered and only the carbonates deposited. Farther east we have seen (p. 7) that is just what happened. Right here we are near the western margin of the sea, near the shore line, which accounts for the number of Precambrian knobs outcropping so near the interbedded sandstone and dolomite beds. Farther east these beds of intermingled dolomite and sandstone are covered by thick beds of dolomite only. Fietp Trip VI EAST OF MOREWOOD ; Distance: Ottawa to Morewood 3714 miles, to outcrop 1 mile. Take the Morrisburg road, turning off at the Metcalfe road, and drive to Russell. Here turn south, following the road to Morewood. Turn east and about 1 mile east of the village is an outcrop. These rocks contain the brachiopod Camarotoechis plena seen at stop 2b south of Rockland (p. 34), and along the north shore of the Ottawa River near Deschénes, and west of it. It is indicative of the second invasion entering over the Beauharnois axis. The beds are very close to those that held the same fossil in 2b (p. 34). None of this limestone is found west of the city of Ottawa. Just as the Nepean sandstone of the first invasion was eventually covered by the dolomite, as seen in 40 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 the scarp at the Campbell quarry, so the sandstone and shale of the second invasion was covered in its eastern part by limestone when the calcium carbonate in its water was sufficiently concentrated to be precipitated. PAYNE RIVER, SOUTH OF BERWICK Distance: Last outcrop to Crysler 7.3 miles, to crossroad south of Berwick 5 miles, to Payne River 14 mile. Continue from the last outcrop east of Morewood to Crysler. The rocks exposed in the river here belong to the same beds as those beneath the White Bridge (p. 29). The same large, irregular beds of black chert are to be found but fossils are scarce. Turn south over the Crysler bridge, and continue south through Berwick to the first crossroad. Here turn east, stopping at the bridge over the Payne River. The limestone outcropping in the river is a deposit of the third invasion, and is practically at the same horizon as the beds in the old quarry west of Finch, to be seen later (p. 40). This series of outcrops, also, can be followed north from the bridge at Finch. In some places fossils are numerous. These are the Sherman Fall beds, occurring above the outcrop in the river at Crysler and above the big quarries on the Montreal Road, east of Ottawa. There are no good exposures of them near the city of Ottawa. QUARRY WEST OF FINCH Distance: Payne River to crossroad to Finch 3 to 4 miles, to quarry east of Goldfield 2 miles. Return to the crossroad, and turn left (south) to Finch. At the Highway through Finch turn to the right (west) and drive two miles. On the north side of the road is a quarry easily seen because of the dumped contents of old rusty machinery. These beds are representative of a part of the Black River - Trenton deposits of the third invasion (p. 8). Frequently they have thick layers which weather rubbly, or thinner beds with considerable shale. The latter are more evident where weathering has followed cutting for road building. They pass upward stealthily with very gradual change into the beds that form Parliament Hill. Fossils, particularly brachiopods, are more abundant here than in any other outcrop visited. Trilobites are not so numerous but they can be found. A hat- shaped bryzoan, Prasopora, is so prolific wherever the beds are exposed that the strata are often called the Prasopora beds. Scare NortH oF NAVAN FreLp Trip VII Distance: Ottawa to outcrop 19 miles. Drive to the Navan - Montreal Road intersection via Hurdman’s Bridge and St. Laurent Blyd. Just beyond Green’s creek, where the old and new Montreal Road divide, take the old road. About half a mile beyond Daniston (no road sign) turn to the right (south) on a straight, broad road going up an incline. A crossroad intersects the main road half a mile after leaving the Montreal Road. Again half a mile to the left on the crossroad is a feature which may be a point of interest to some. A creek goes underground beneath the road and for a WItson: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 41 some distance to the north and south of it. In summer time the bed of the creek is dry, revealing rocks of the same age and containing the same fossils as the upper beds of the Duntile quarry. The section represents a few feet of the Leray beds of the Ottawa formation roughly about 125 feet above the base of the 700 feet of sediments. Continue on the Navan road. At 19 miles from Ottawa, omitting the mile to and from the subterranean creek, a ridge of rock crosses the road in an east-west direction. It is to be remembered here that all concession roads and crossro2ds in the area are not north-south and east-west but northwest-southeast, and northeast- southwest. This east-west ridge is a long narrow tongue projecting from a much larger area of outcrop to the east. a) The rocks of the scarp belong to the same beds as those of Parliament Hill, or those at Rideau Hall gate. But they are weathered naturally and it is much easier to find fossils: gastropods (snail types), cup corals, occasionally trilobites and a number of other forms—if you search. 6) Looking back from the top of the slope it is evident that the ground is higher than at the subterranean creek, if it is visited, and much higher than at the river. In addition to the surface elevation the dip is southerly which results in the exposure of higher beds as one proceeds south. This outcrop is in the upper 100 feet of the Cobourg beds near the top of the 700-foot formation. SECOND GUTCROP Distance: from scarp north of Navan to Murray’s Hill 414 miles. Continue southerly to Navan. Here turn east towards Sarsfield. About 414 miles from the scarp north of Navan you descend another edge of the large outcrop of which the scarp was a prong. These, also, are the Cobourg beds. They contain the same fossils, though they are not usually so rewarding as at the first exposure. BEARBROOK Distance: from Second outcrop to Bearbrook Creek 3 miles. Continue east for less than half a mile to the first north-south road before Sarsfield. Turn south and pass through Leonard stopping at the second bridge beyond the village. This is Bearbrook Creek. Deepening of the creek for good drainage has resulted in the piling up of loose blocks of black shale taken from the bottom of the stream. The shale belongs to the same formation as the outcrop seen in the creek by the railway at Billings Bridge (p. 35). But a very fossiliferous layer has been exposed here. The trilobites are especially outstanding. In the lower beds and a few feet above them are numerous pygidia (tails) of a rather large trilobite, Ogygites. When full grown it may be three to five inches in length. The other trilobite, Triarthrus, is quite different. It is small, about one or one and a half inches in length when complete. And, unlike the Ogygites, the head is pre- served more often than the tail. This form begins at the top of the lower beds, hardly fraternizing with the disappearing Ogygites, and continues right to the top of the shales. It, too, exhibits the trilobed characteristic of the class. The central axis is a little more than a third of the width and its lateral furrows represent the fused segments. . 42 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 Another newcomer in this region, occurring in these black shales, is a group of graptolites (p. 61). Like the trilobites they are now extinct. Another rather common fossil here is a cephalopod, Geisonoceras, found also at Billings Bridge. It is a straight type, tapering to a very fine initial chamber. Some beds of this black shale yield another cephalopod, Trocholites, which is coiled. It is not the first coiled cephalopod to appear but it is an early one. Unfortunately it is not very common. Fretp Trip VIII Not many formations are to be seen on this Trip, and fossils are few, or non-existent. The chief value of the excursion lies in the fact that the formations which are exposed can be visited in the order in which they were originally deposited. The second, third and fourth sections of this excursion are the lowest sediments of the Third Great Event. They were deposited by the first invasion from the east over the Beauharnois anticline—first the insoluble sand, upon that, sand and dolo- mite when sufficient of the solubles were concentrated for precipitation, and upon that the dolomite covering all the sand (p. 7). PRECAMBRIAN SPUR AT CARP Distance: Ottawa to east of Carp 21 miles. Take Highway 17 to the corner where one road continues south and the other turns west, just east of Carp village. On the right is a long, low point of Precam- brian rocks, a part of the spur which projects in a southeastern direction from Fitzroy Harbour to South March (p. 20). The Feldspar Quarry in Field Trip H is also within the same spur. There is no particular quarry in the rocks in this locality, but a study of the region exhibits a variety of rocks of the Canadian Shield. SANDSTONE QUARRY Distance: Corner to Sandstone Quarry 2 miles. Drive north, returning on Highway 17 for 2 miles. On the east of the road is a quarry in the Nepean sandstone. Indeed, up to the corner the sandstone is ex- posed at short intervals along both sides of the road. This is the same sandstone as that of the Campbell quarry (p. 23). It is the first sediment deposited upon the Precambrian rocks after the First Long Erosional period. HARWOOD PLAINS Distance: Sandstone Quarry to Harwood Plains 2.3 miles. Drive north to the corner where the road to Dunrobin leaves Highway 17. Turn west and drive to the corner at Harwood Plains, stopping en route wherever it seems desirable. On both sides of the road and back in the fields and woods are exposures of the March formation. This is the same mixed sand and dolomite formation as that seen in Field Trip If (p. 20). Most of the exposures are flat-lyings and the: interbedded sandy dolomite and dolomite is not very evident. Witson: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 43 WINDING ROAD Distance: Harwood Plains to corner, meeting road from the north 2.7 miles. The road winds this way and that, up and down small slopes, reaching its lowest elevation just east of Constance Lake. It is bordered on either side by good exposures of Oxford dolomite (p. 7), until it turns west towards the junction with the next road on the north. These three formations then, Nepean, March and Oxford, lie undisturbed in the order in which they were deposited by the first sea that invaded the basin after the long erosional period, subsequent to the Precambrian (p. 7). Another formation, the Rockcliffe, is exposed at the corner. Between the deposition of the last exposure of the Oxford and the first of the Rockcliffe a relatively short erosion interval occurred. The sea withdrew over the Beauharnois anticline, stayed long enough in the Montreal basin to deposit about three times the thickness of rock and then withdrew farther to the east. After a relatively short emergence the land again subsided. The sea again returned depositing some 890 feet of sediments in the Champlain valley and more than 700 feet in the Montreal area before it again spilled over the Beauharnois anticline into our basin. The beds of grey Rockcliffe sandstone at this corner, then, are deposits of the second invasion from the east. PINHEY ROAD Distance: Corner to the Pinhey road 2.3 miles. Take the north road to the next intersection. Turn west, towards the Pinhey farm. From this corner west are scattered outcrops on either side of the road. The rock differs from that seen so far. Occasional dolomitic beds occur, but most of it is limestone. This is a part of the lower deposits of the Ottawa limestone of the Third Invasion which entered this basin, this time over the Frontenac axis. OTTAWA RIVER Distance: Pinhey Road to top of hill above Ottawa River 2.5 miles. Cortinue west to the next intersection and turn north to the Ottawa River. Stop at the top of the hill leading down to the river. Look at the rock carefully as you descend. At the top it is very similar to that seen along the Pinhey road, but it changes rapidly in the descent to the river: limestone and shale, dark shale, then a greenish shale, occasional dolomitic layers, often containing sand. Some- where between the dolomitic layers and the shore is the line between the base of the Ottawa limestone of the third invasion and the topmost sediments, in this area, of the second invasion. Outcrops occur along the slope of the river bank to the west, the part exposed varying according to the position of the irregular covering of overburden and trees. To understand the number of differing types of rock within such a limited area it is necessary to visualize the conditions. The second invasion had retreated leaving shale and sandstone. It had never transgressed the Frontenac axis, nor even extended as far west as the first invasion. So when the third invasion began to enter over the Frontenac axis its shores first lapped the ancient Precambrian rocks, dissolving some and pushing onward some of the insolubles. In time it 44 THE CANADIAN Fietp-NaTurRAList Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 reached the margin of the deposits of the first invasion, dissolving and reworking them, then it crossed the sandstones and shales of the second invasion carrying with it the mingled solubles and insolubles of all the types over which it had passed. Small wonder that the first few feet at the line of contact were a mixed lot. ROAD CUT Distance: Ottawa River to road cut 1.75 miles. Return south. Pass the intersection with the Pinhey road and continue to the road cut. The same limestone of the basal beds of the third invasion outcrops inter- mittently along the roadside. It is a continuation of that seen on the Pinhey road, but it is better exposed in the road cut. These beds are considerably higher and somewhat more uniform than those near the river bank. > CROSSROAD Distance: Road cut to first crossroad about 1% mile. Continue south to the next crossroad. Right at the corner is an outcrop of the Rockcliffe sandstone previously observed in this excursion. An irregular terrace crosses the peninsula. The Rockcliffe sandstone can be followed from this spot back to the corner visited on the fourth lap of this excursion, maintaining approximately the same elevation. Deeper in the woods between these two points is a cliff of it, probably worn out when the river was at a higher level making this peninsula an island. It can be seen that above the Rockcliffe sandstone, the limestone, a deposit of a later invasion, forms another terrace along the road at a higher elevation. Both formations are exposed irregularly because they are covered by loose, unconsolidated material. ROAD OUTCROP, DUNROBIN TO HARWOOD PLAINS e Distance: Crossroad to Dunrobin 1.6 miles, Dunrobin to Harwood Plains 3.6 miles. Continue south through the swamp and across the bridge to Dunrobin. The stream is the outlet for Constance Lake and flows into Constance Bay. It and the swampy lowland through which it passes are probably an old course followed by the Ottawa River when the water was higher. Cross the railway track and follow a low ridge, on the left (north) side of the road and almost paralleling it. This is another and a better exposure of the Oxford, the uppermost formation of the first invasion, though not the top of it. It passes almost imperceptibly into the underlying March as you go east to Harwood Plains. ISOLATED OUTCROPS BREBEUF PARK Take the Aylmer road from Hull. Drive to the village of Val Tétreau. About the centre of the village a road leads down to Brébeuf Park on the Ottawa River. Rock outcrops all along the shore. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 45 a) These rocks belong to the third invasion that entered the basin over the Frontenac axis. They correspond to the upper part of the formation exposed in the Duntile quarry (p. 24), and contain the same type of fossils. b) To the east the rocks rise above the shoreline and dip at different angles. Climb over them and you come to a bay. Through the bay runs the Gloucester fault, the raison d’étre of its existence (p. 14). The tumbled rocks are the broken edges of the fault. Most of these slices represent beds higher than those of the flatlying shelves on the shore. Across the river the continuation of the fault can be traced by the dip of the rocks at the filtration plant, and on the surrounding islands in front of a corresponding bay on the Ottawa side of the river. NORTH SHORE OF THE OTTAWA RIVER Leaving Val Tétreau drive out the Aylmer road. Turn down to the river at Deschénes, the Gardens or at Aylmer. The shore is lined with good exposures of the Rockcliffe sandstone, the deposit of the second invasion from the east (p. 8). This is the same sandstone as that at the Britannia Yacht Club (p. 24) and at Rockcliffe (p. 30). In some places and in some layers a brachiopod, Camarotoechia plena, is to be found. It is the same form as that occurring at stop 2b on the way to the Rockland quarry (p. 34). SOUTH SHORE OF OTTAWA RIVER Another series of fossil-bearing outcrops occurs along the south shore of the Ottawa River, opposite Brébeuf Park. The place can be reached by going north on Parkdale Avenue. These rocks are practically the same here as those on the north shore, the deposits of the third invasion over the Frontenac axis. Higher beds skirt the bay to the east. This bay, too, is caused by the Gloucester fault, consequently the rocks dip towards it, dragged down by the down-dropped block to the east upon which the city of Ottawa stands. Walk west from here. Older and older beds are brought to the surface. Gradually the fossils disappear as the older beds are exposed, until finally the sandstone lens at the Yacht Club is reached in which there are no fossils. RIVER BED EAST OF RUSSELL Take the road to Russell. Just east of the village descend to the river bed. Follow it up to the second north-south bridge. The rocks dip slightly to the east with the result that the farther you proceed downstream the younger are the rocks exposed. In that distance you pass from the rocks of the second invasion up almost to the middle of the deposits of the third invasion. Fossils become increasingly abundant as the higher rocks are encountered. QUARRY AT TOP OF SECOND INVASION, EAST OF ROCKLAND After passing through Eastview and the part of Ottawa that continues east of it, take the Old Montreal Road a little beyond Green’s Creek. Drive through Orleans and stop just over the crest of the hill immediately before Cumberland. 46 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 The top of the hill has one of the beautiful views of the slope to the Ottawa River, across the river and on to the hills beyond which are really the roots of ancient mountains. It also shows the electric towers marching over the hills, over the water and up over the height on the south side crossing the country beyond to carry light, heat and power to the people all along the way. a) Just over the crest of the hill, on the south side of the road is a gash in the side of the slope, partly overgrown with grass, exposing some of the thinly interbedded shale and limestone beds of the upper part of the sediments of the second invasion (see p. 8). Some specimens of Camarotoechia plena, characteristic of this part of this invasion, can be retrieved by careful search. b) One feature of the geology of the countryside is to be seen all along this route. During the Second Great Erosional Period (see p. 12) there was a great rending and breaking of the earth’s crust. Blocks of the crust fell or were some- what pushed up in relation to the neighbouring blocks. The results can be seen here in the surface conditions of the country. The top of almost every hill over which the road passes is the top of a displaced block. Looking across a valley, following the direction of the road, another hill can be seen—the top of the next block. With the eye follow the line of the hill towards the river. The hill outline becomes lower, but the rock at the base of the hill can be seen, often tapering to a narrower width. The new road to the north cuts through many of these blocks just before they disappear beneath the river. But the fact that they are separate blocks is better seen from the old road. The ridge to the right is deceiving. Instead of a sharp rise and drop from block to block, a more or less level scarp seems to skirt the road to the south. Why? The debris of the Champlain sea (p. 16) has filled in between the blocks and levelled the surface. Back of that scarp in many places is a level tract of sand. c) Continue on the old road beyond Rockland, till a rather sharp turn in the road exposes a small quarry in the hillside. Just beyond the quarry a small gravel road runs to the river on the north side. Again, in this quarry, the thinly interbedded dark shales and limestones are exposed. This outcrop is a little higher than that occurring just before Cumberland. The same characteristic fossil is there. It will be remembered (see p. 24) that around the city of Ottawa and west of it, the beds of this invasion were composed of a fine grey sandstone seen at the Britannia Yacht Club and at Rockcliffe. The sandstone is present here but buried beneath the interbedded limestone and shale deposits. It can be seen at the lower elevation of the new road in many places. The shale and limestone occur only east of the city. Picture the encroaching sea pushing its shore westward, depositing shale and sandstone as it moves westward, but all the time dissolving the solubles it encounters, or those that are carried into it by streams. In time the soluble material becomes concentrated and is deposited in thin layers at first. Farther east, where the sea has been for a longer time the concentration would be greater, the beds become thicker, the shale is covered more and more by limestone. East of Hawkesbury, south of the highway, is an exposure where the thick limestone beds almost eliminate the shale. WILSon: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 47 PART THREE SOME TYPES OF FOSSILS FOUND IN THE AREA The fossils described here are those which are most often found in field trips in the neighbourhood. There are many other rarer forms, but they often involve a long and frequently frustrating search. In addition most of them are farther afield than one day’s outing would permit. PLANTAE ? (Plate I, Fig. 12) Vd) I | VI = “Ly Some primitive plant-like forms are found in the rocks deposited by the seas that invaded our basin again and again. If they are true plants they are algae, but many authorities are doubtful. Their nature cannot be proved because they show no cell structure, but, as they look like plants and because they are fairly common in some beds, they are included here. At this stage in the earth’s history no land plants had been evolved. One of the more common types, Licrophycus, apparently grew in clumps, rooted or floating. It had simple, leaf-like outgrowths arising from a centre like any plant and attained a height of six or eight inches. It is easy to visualize the clumps floating in the water like the ‘weeds’ of the Sargasso sea, or more or less stationary, covering the seafloor with their “leaves” upborne by the supporting water and gently rising and falling or mixing with one another, or even torn apart in a storm to be left lying helter-skelter broken as we find them now. Another of the more common forms, Bythotrephis (not illustrated here), had a somewhat irregular, flat ‘leaf’ which may have floated like kelp. It, too, had irregular branching leaves, if leaves they were. As a fossil it is a dark network on the rock, looking like carbonaceous material. 48 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST — Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 PORIFERA Sponges and Near Sponges (Plate I, Fig. 9-11) S Sy ZE Eo SSS ij : The sponges found in this area are of varying shapes and sizes. All except one rare form are compact, whether one or three inches in diameter. Sponges in general are spherical or somewhat vase-shaped. A sponge is a lowly creature. It has neither mouth, digestive system, nervous system, nor internal organs. There is an outer and an inner skin with varying amounts of soft matter between, the mesogloea. The whole encloses a central cavity, either circular, oval or star-shaped in section. The cavity has an opening at the top. The outer and inner skin are pierced by pores leading through straight or rambling canals into the inner cavity. The latter is lined with little whip-like hairs or cilia armed with stinging cells. The motion of the cilia draws in water through the canals. Oxygen is absorbed from the water and the stinging cells kill the microscopic food in the water, and at the same time cause an outgoing current for waste matter through the opening at the top. Scattered throughout the soft matter, for support, are siliceous spicules, or, more rarely in fossils, calcareous spicules. They may be single, three- or four- pronged, or very irregular. Quite a number of sponges occur in the rocks of the Third Invasion, both in the Leray-Rockland beds and in the Cobourg beds. They vary greatly in size and | shape: small and large, spherical forms, cylindrical forms, obliquely growing forms (possibly the result of crowding) and one rare branching form. One sponge is found in the unconsolidated clay deposits of the Champlain sea, the last invasion to date. The spicules are single, often one to two inches in length. They were evidently the support of a spherical form the soft parts of which have disintegrated, and the spicules have fallen flat like the radii of a circle. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 49 Near Sponges (Plate II, Fig. 1) T Wf Yi Y Yee YY “in ths 4 Yi Ly, ()- SASS: [ASS Receptaculites is an orphan. It has no living descendant, but is generally thought to be more closely related to the sponges than to any other known group. Though not very prolific in many other parts of the world it is fairly common in this area, particularly in the Leray-Rockland beds. For that reason it is included. The species of Receptaculites found here is a disk-shaped fossil with a funnel- like centre, the whole about three inches in diameter and an inch or less in height. The upper and lower surfaces are composed of thin, rhomb-like plates growing out from the central funnel in a flat spiral. Each upper plate has a lower plate opposite it. The two opposite plates are connected by a hollow pillar, contracted near the lower end. The upper part of the hollow pillar opens into four canals within the upper plate, each canal leading to one of the four sides of the plate and meeting the opening of the corresponding canal in each of the four adjacent plates, thus providing a connected canal system. At the base the hollow pillar again divides into four, but here the four canals lie on top of the inner surface of the lower rhomb-like plate and are directed towards its four corners, again meeting the ends of the corresponding canals at the four corners of the adjacent lower plates. The canal system evidently was concerned with water circulation, but because there is no known living represent- ative of the group nothing is known of the soft parts of the creature. In some cases the plates of the upper or lower surface are found. Other fragments are broken transversely across the inner pillars exhibiting only a group of regularly arranged small circles. The two aspects are very different. Unless the structure is known it is hard to believe that they belong to the same species. Ischadites and Pasceolus are two other orphans, not included here because they are rather rare. When present they are found in the Cobourg beds. They, too, are thought to be more closely related to the sponges than to any other group. 50 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 STROMATOPOROIDEA (Plate II, Fig. 2) This group is something of an orphan. It has no living representative, and like the Receptaculites no one can be quite sure of its relationship to other fossils. Most authorities, however, put it in a group or phylum which includes modern Hydrozoa as its lowest type and Corals as the highest type, though it is so different from either that it has even been suggested that the group might be different types of algae. Many of the coral reefs of ancient times contain as many ‘Stroms’ as corals, and in many instances, those reefs are great oil reservoirs. ‘Stroms’ are not very im- portant here. They occur as isolated individuals, never in reefs. The various forms are often very massive, or they may be small encrusting species. Their structure is microscopic, being composed of a series of concentric layers or laminae penetrated by radial pillars, or hollow rods. Different species have a different arrangement of the pillars or rods, as the case may be. Some pillars are very short, extending only from one concentric layer to the next, others vary in the number of layers they penetrate. On the surface some have minute pores with or without small star-like clusters of radial canals. ‘Stroms’ have been found here in beds of the Third Invasion about 130 feet or so above the base of the deposits. They occur at the Pakenham quarry, the Duntile quarry, and the Rockland quarry. Witson: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 51 ANTHOZA Corals (Plate Il, Fig. 3-8) Two types of corals, simple and compound, occur in some of the localities to be visited. The simple coral has been the home of one isolated individual. Most of these are horn-shaped. They are even called ‘horn corals,’ sometimes. Each individual is pointed at the base where it is attached to another coral, to a piece of rock, or to a shell. The outer shell of the coral expands upward rather rapidly with growth attaining approximately three-quarters of an inch or more in diameter at its full height of one and one-half an inch. The outer shell, secreted by the outer skin or mantle of the soft parts, supports the whole. Internally the lower part of the shell is strengthened by the secretion of vertically placed septa. These septa extend to the centre in some forms. Their ends twist together forming a confused pillar- like structure which still further strengthens the shell, and, in many, projects slightly upward as a boss which forms the floor of the living chamber. Another form of simple coral strengthens itself by limiting the septa to the inner margin of the horn-shaped shell and secreting flat plates almost from wall to wall across the centre. Above the boss or the last flat plate is the living chamber. Here the animal dwelt extending its tentacles from the open, upper end. A compound coral is a group of corallites each smaller than one of the simple corals, but all bound together by an outer shell, forming a colony. The outer shell is frequently destroyed in the fossil forms. A colony may be any size up to a foot or more in diameter. In most cases each corallite of the colonies found in the area has a prismatic wall of five or six sides, or young individuals within the colony may even be three- or four-sided because, having budded from older individuals, they have not room for full development until the more or less hemispherical colony has grown upward and outward acquiring a greater radius in which there is more room for growth. The septa of the compound corals do not, as a rule, extend to 52 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NaTURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 the centre as in some individual, simple forms. They are just long, inconspicuous ribs or striae on the inner wall of the corallite. Thus they do not meet in a central columnella. As the colony grows upwards, each corallite in its prismatic tube-like home secretes a succession of tabulae or tiny floors cutting off its past so that when the colony is seen from the side, row upon row of corallites are visible, each with its transverse plates succeeding one another throughout its whole length. One type of compound coral found here, Tetradium, has a misleading form. It appears to have septa, most commonly four in number. + But these are not true septa. They are formed by the penetration of the wall into the corallite. They continue to grow until they meet in the centre and divide the corallite into four small indivi- dual corallites. Such is the method of reproduction of Tetradium—by fission as compared with the more usual types of compound corals that reproduce by budding from the side of the older corallites. CONULARIIDS (Plate II, Fig. 9) The conulariids are another orphan group. They are represented in our basin mainly by the genus Conularia. Each specimen is made up of four plates, each plate shaped like a long isosceles triangle. The plates are attached to one another on their long edges, having a groove along the line of attachment. The result is a slender, four-sided pyramid, but with the large end uppermost. At this upper end a portion of each plate is free from its adjacent plates, triangular in shape so that it could fold over the opening. Together the four triangles make a covering entirely enclosing the creature within its four fancy walls. At the small end, in some forms of the group, a flange-like expansion at the bottom suggests that they were attached to something. The tip, in some forms of the conulariids, is separated from the main body by a diaphragm cut through the four walls and the interior. The purpose of the diaphragm is not evident but the result is that the two parts frequently become detached. The outer surface of this small end is smooth but the main shell is often highly ornamented. Down the middle of each plate is a ridge. From the ridge to its outer edge there are fine, closely placed horizontal striae. Between the striae are very short, still finer, vertical striae. The whole group has been placed here and there, with the worms, near the gastropods, near the corals, in fact in or near many different groups, because, like a number of other fossils found here, there is no living representative to show the organization of the soft parts. More recently, it has been suggested that the group may be cousin of the jelly-fish type belonging to the Scyphozoa, not far from the corals. In this area some specimens are found intermittently at several levels of the beds of the Ottawa limestone, but most commonly in the Leray beds, as exposed in the Duntile quarry, and in similar beds at other localities. WILson: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 53 VERMES (Plate I, Fig. 1; Plate II, Fig. 10) The word ‘Vermes’ is a general one for worms. There are many divisions and sub-divisions of worm groups. But the general name is appropriate here because there isn’t any worm, just a hole where the worm is supposed to have been. No- body knows exactly what kind of worm it was, if any. The Nepean sandstone, the base of the First Invasion deposits, is riddled with these burrows in some places. It is not possible to describe them because they are just hollow, tube-like holes in the sandstone. One good place to see them is south from Eagleson’s Corners, the next corner east from Hazeldean. At this corner turn south, and, after passing the first house on the east cross into the second field and follow the long ridge of rock south almost to the old shed. The ridge is formed by the March beds and shows fine examples of the large inclusions of secondary crystalline calcite. Farther south, near the shed, the Nepean sandstone outcrops beneath it, in places filled with these ‘worm’ holes. After examining the worm holes turn towards the house nearer the road, pass through a gateway into another field and note the sandstone outcrop just beside the fence that lies between the exposure and the barn. The sandstone is made up of great swirls, each with a hard quartzite centre. The beds below are flat, and the beds above, across the field, are flat. Explanations are in order. Several have been suggested but none proved. One possibility is a slump before consolidation, but why the almost uniform size of the quartzite centres, and the uniformity in the size of the swirls ? Another suggestion is that the un- consolidated sand has been pushed by ice on the seafloor. The same objection holds for this theory, and the additional one that no other evidence has been found in- dicating ice’ at the time. 54 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 This place might be included in Field Trip II, if desired. Another doubtful type of worm is shown here. It is a bit incomplete, but shows a hard chitinous or horny shell with very fine, irregularly spaced, wavy lines crossing it transversely. It is broad and very flat, having uneven sides suggesting that it may have grown in a cluster. The form is not very common but can be found in the Cobourg beds. BRYOZOA (Plate II, Fig. 11-18) One of the most common groups, and one of the most difficult to identify generically and specifically is the Bryozoa. Bryozoa still live, so their internal organs are known. The fossil forms often look like corals, though they are much more minute and are distinctly higher forms of life. Bryozoa live in a colony, but each individual is an entity in its tiny apartment home, and the form of the home has to be examined with a microscope. The outer surface of a colony looks like a collection of minute pores, whatever the shape of its apartment house. It may be hemispherical, growing upward and outward. It may be in the form of round cylindrical branches with its small openings, or zooecia, all around the branch, or as flat branches with the zooecia opening on either side and none on the sharp edges. In that case the two pore sides have no connection with one another, being separated within by a flat partition. Or, the colony may be a flat growing network with interspaces, in which case, the pores are on one side only, the other side being roughly striated, perhaps to make it more stable as it lies flat. In other cases Bryozoa are encrusting, generally on other shells. Each individual bryozoan in its organization is very like the following brachio- pods, and for many years they were put together. But brachiopods are single, and much larger than the tiny individuals of the bryozoans which also differ in living in colonies. So more recently they are considered to be entirely separate groups. Bryozoa can be found in our basin at almost any level in the 700 feet of de- posits of the Third Invasion. They are especially numerous in the old quarry west of Finch. They, also, occur in numbers in the loose blocks of the Seventh Invasion in the bank of the North Castor River west of Finch. WILSon: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 55 BRACHIOPODA (Plate I, Fig. 4-8; Plate III, Fig. 1-22) Living brachiopods are too rare to have acquired a popular name. Each brachiopod has two shells, or, in other words is bivalved. The valves are unlike. One may be convex, the other flat or concave. One may have a fold down the middle and the other a complementary trough or ‘sinus’ down the middle. On the other hand each valve, however it differs from its mate, is divided equilaterally, if an imaginary line is drawn from the beak to the middle of the opposite side. Some forms open and close along a straight margin or hinge on either side of the beak (Plate III, Fig. 15). Others come to a point, opening and closing just at the beak. The two valves are ornamented in the same manner, in some genera being smooth except for concentric growth lines, in other cases ornamentation is by fine or coarse striae radiating from the beak. The creature was originally attached to a rock or another shell by a muscle issuing at the beak. The larger, opposite margin was free to open and shut to take in the food-laden water. Internally, near the beak of one valve are two shelly projections. They fit into two sockets in the other valve. The two processes are called ‘teeth’ though they have nothing to do with food. The name probably arose from the microscopic ferocity with which they project. Some forms even show the scars where the opening and closing muscles have been attached. In addition, other processes extend from near the beak into the cavity formed by the two valves. To these were attached the cilia-bearing apparatus for bringing in the water with its life-giving oxygen and food. These processes are fairly simple in most of the brachiopods found around here, but have a variety of shapes in later, more highly developed genera. They may be spiral, or forming a loop, or two spirals joined by a transverse bar. Zygos- pira, one of the latter type is found here, but the inner mechanism is rarely revealed. 56 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 One of the more primitive brachiopod groups (Plate I, Fig. 4; and Plate III, Fig. 1, 2) opened by a lateral movement, one valve sliding sideway upon the other. Even though more primitive the method seems to have been effective because re- presentatives of the group still survive in the Pacific ocean while only one small group remains of the much more numerous, highly specialized forms. Brachiopods may be found here in the rocks of every invasion, though they are most prolific in the sediments of the Third Invasion. PELECYPODA Clam Types (Plate III, Fig. 23-33; Plate V, Fig. 5-9) Like the brachiopods the pelecypods have two shells, or valves. But there the similarity ends. The median line from the beak to the middle of the opposite margin does not divide the shell equilaterally as in the brachiopod, and except in rare cases not found here, the two shells are alike in shape and outline except that one is left and the other right. This can be easily verified by holding a complete individual with the beak pointing away from the observer. In this position the beak, or the part in front of it, is the anterior, and the whole shell is bilateral. The ornamenta- tion is the same on both valves and may consist of concentric growth lines only, with or without striae radiating from the beak, or in other cases, a marked ridge extends from the beak to the posterior end or to the lower margin. Internally like the brachiopods, they have ‘teeth’ at the anterior or on either side of the beak. The ‘teeth’ are of various sizes and shapes and function as a fulcrum upon which to open and close the sheil to obtain water for food and oxygen. The muscles for opening are along the hinge line at or on one or both sides of the beak. Contraction of this muscle opens the shell at the opposite margin. The closing muscles are nearer the lower margin (as it is conventionally oriented in all illustrations) and placed towards the anterior and posterior ends, in the same position in each valve. Pelecypods, like brachiopods, are conventionally illustrated with their beaks up, but this is not the way they live. The beak is in an oblique position, the anterior end being lower than the posterior. Many forms are even attached to the rocks or some stable surface by a muscle from near the beak leaving the opposite margin free to open for taking in water and food. Pelecypods have survived the ages. They are more numerous to-day than they have ever been. Living forms make it easier to interpret the features found on the fossils. They are not common among the fossils of the First or Second Invasions, but can be found at almost any level of the Third Invasion, though not so numerous as brachiopods. They are fairly common in the Fifth and some are good horizon markers of the Sixth Invasion. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 57 GasTROPODA Snail Type (Plate I, Fig. 2, 3; Plate III, Fig. 34; Plate IV, Fig. 1-5) The common snail is an example of a gastropod. Unlike brachiopods and pelecypods all gastropods have one valve only, and it is usually coiled. The shape of the coil is varied, both in the living and in the fossil forms. One group, rarely found in these rocks, is a simple cap-shaped form, the initial coil at the top being minute or its place at the top being indicated by an excentric point. Another group is involute, that is coiled in a plane, so that the later growth envelopes the immature coils, completely covering them, or leaving only a small portion visible at the sides. Other forms are asymmetrically coiled, some having a low spire, and some having a high spire. Ornamentation, too, is varied: trans- verse growth lines, coarse or fine striae revolving with the growth of the shell, or even nodes. If the fossil is held with the large opening at the base towards the observer it will be seen that most forms have a right-hand coil. A very few coil to the left, one genus of which occurs in the region. The bivalved brachiopods and pelecypods open and close their valves to obtain water and oxygen. The gastropod pushes his foot out of the large opening at the base of the shell. On top of his foot is his head. In many modern forms on top of his head are two stalked eyes. On top of his back is his shell. Thus he searches for his food. So the gastropod has no need of the mechanism for opening and closing the shell. Some forms, like the left-hand coiled one bear on the foot a small shelly plate, the operculum. When the animal is withdrawn into the shell the operculum on the bottom of the foot closes the opening and protects him. Gastropod fossils found here are all marine, but there are groups now living in freshwater, and some, like the land snail, live on land, taking their oxygen from the air. 58 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 CEPHALOPODA (Plate IV, Fig. 6-8; Plate V, Fig. 1) 2 The octopus and the squid are modern cephalopods, though without a shell. Fossil cephalopods have shells or they would not be preserved. The forms, in their long dimension, may be straight, curved, or coiled. In a transverse section they may be circular, elliptical or almost flat. Others are small, slightly curved and swollen at the top. One rather rare coiled form lived in the sea of the Fourth Invasion and is occasionally found in the black shales. But the greatest number in this basin are tapering with straight sides. Externally cephalopods may be ornamented by longitudinal or transverse ridges or fine striae. A few are fluted. Whatever their adult shape, or size, or ornamentation they all began in a small initial chamber. Not being able to push out the walls of its little room each indi- vidual as it increased in size, added a larger chamber beyond by further secretion of the shell material from its outer skin. As it moved onward into the new and larger room it deposited a floor or septum behind, cutting off a part of the smaller end of the home vacated. Thus chamber after chamber was added. Each living chamber into which it moved was larger and wider than the previous one. Floor after floor covered its past. But, in each case, in the floor or septum an opening was left so that all the deserted rooms, or parts of rooms were connected. In many cases the outside shell layer is destroyed, and the edges of the septa can be seen. The inner tube that conncts all the chambers is called a siphuncle, and it can have a number of shapes. Some are straight, some are nummuloid, that is like a string of beads each segment a round or somewhat flattened bead, of different sizes and shapes in different genera. The sides of the segments or beads are gently curved outward at each chamber contracting a little as the siphuncle passes through the septum. Cephalopods are most prolific here in the Leray-Rockland beds of the Third Invasion, particularly the forms with the bead-like siphuncles, and the short, curved forms which are swollen in the uppermost living chamber. One tapering form is found quite commonly in the black shales of the Fourth Invasion. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 59 TRILOBITA Just Trilobites, like nothing else (Plate IV, Fig. 9-13; Plate V, Fig. 2-4) warns 2s I 2 A Ate ae Trilobites have been extinct for several hundreds of millions of years, but the environment in which the fossils are found indicates that they were all marine. The word trilobite comes from the three-fold character of the specimens. The body is divided lengthwise into three parts (trilobed) by two furrows which extend from the front to the posterior: the axial lobe, and two pleural (side) lobes, one on each side of the axial lobe. A few forms have indistinct furrows and are almost smooth. A trilobite is also divided transversely into three parts. It consists of a head (cephalon), a body (thorax), and a tail (pygidium). Each of these parts is composed of a number of segments, varying in the different genera. The head also consists of three pieces: the cranidium composed of the glabella with the attached fixed cheeks representing the axial lobe, and the free cheeks probably corresponding to the pleural lobes. The segmentation of the cranidium in some genera is revealed in the small furrows on the glabella. Between the fixed and the free cheeks is a suture line which extends to the anterior margin where the sutures from the sides are united. In the other direction the sutures reach the back of the head, or in some turn outward just back of the eye to the margin at the side of the head. Trilobites had a hard chitinous (horny) covering. Like the cephalopod the trilobite could not enlarge itself as it grew. But unlike the cephalo- pod it shed its shell and grew a larger one. In short, it moulted. It is thought that the suture line skirting the cranidium is the break. Because parts of the head and parts of the tail are fused they withstand weathering better than the thorax. For some reason the tails are usually more often found than the heads. The thorax later generally breaks further into numerous segments. The cranidia are frequently found without the other parts of the head. The eyes are generally on the upper surface of the head on the free cheeks. 60 THe CANADIAN FIELD-NaTuRALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 Some early forms appear to have been blind. Most trilobites, however, have compound eyes with many facets. The facets may be separate, each protected by cornea, or one cornea may cover all the facets. The under side (ventral side) shows that the margin of the cephalon is turned under forming a rim. From the anterior of it a long plate extends backward covering the mouth. The position of the plate and mouth shows that the trilobite was a scavenger, feeding on the bottom. The thorax, too, has the three-fold division, the axial lobe and the two pleural lobes. It is composed of transverse segments, each segment fitting into the next in such a manner that when living the creature could roll itself into a ball. The num- ber of segments varies from two to forty-four. The division of these transverse segments is more definitely preserved than in the head and tail. Each segment has a pair of appendages on the ventral side of the body. These appendages, however, are rarely preserved. One noted specimen has been found in the rocks of the Third Invasion near Ottawa. There may be others. The pygidium varies greatly in size according to the genus. The trilobed characteristic is still maintained in most genera but usually not so marked as in the thorax. The axial lobe may be evident for part of the length only. In some later forms, however, the axial lobe continues and ends in a spine. The pleural lobes, also, in many, are not so clearly marked. The transverse segmentation is evident on most forms of these rocks, though in some it is not always visible right to the posterior. In such cases, also, it gradually disappears near the margins of the pleural lobes. Some trilobites are ornamented with spines, nodes, and various protuding processes, but most of those in these older rocks have little in that line. One form in the lower part of the Third Invasion, the Pamelia, has a spine on its pygidium. Another form in the black shales of the Fourth Invasion has a spine at the back of its head, another on the third thoracic segment, and another on its pygidium. On the other hand, one group found in these rocks has even lost most of its trilobed character. Trilobites are rather highly developed forms and yet they are found in the earliest fossil-bearing rocks, sediments which were deposited during the first great invasion of Canada on the east and west of the continent before any invasion here. From where did they come? One would expect more simple forms in those very early rocks. They must have developed in the Precambrian era. Then why do we not find them there? There may be several reasons. It must be remembered how disturbed those Precambrian rocks were, a condition which would not lend itself to the preservation of fossils. Another probable reason is that their ancestors may have had soft bodies, easily obliterated. The outer hard covering may have been a later development. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 61 BALANUS (Plate V, Fig. 10) Balanus (a barnacle) belongs to the Crustaceans. Crustaceans for the most part have jointed appendages like the shrimp. Barnacles do not in the least look like other Crustaceans when they are grown up, but when they first hatch from the ege and during the early part of their lives when they are free-swimming they are not so different. After each moult the shape somewhat changes until finally the barnacle attaches itself to something by its flattened base, to a ship, to the piles of a dock, or to a rock. By this time its outer form is completely altered. The basal plate and the side plates are immovable, but when it wishes to get some food two little triangular doors at the top open and out come the tentacles to wave the water in. Balanus only appears in the later seas, and is found here in the sand and clay beds of the Champlain sea. GRAPTOLOIDEA Graptolites (Plate IV, Fig. 14, 15) Graptolites are deceiving. They look like small black, serrated stems. In reality they are one of the most advanced of the Invertebrates. Vertebrates have the spinal cord protected by the vertebrae. Some lower forms have a process in front of the mouth and a nerve cord along the back. They are neither true Invertebrates nor true Vertebrates. So they have been named Hemichordata. Some graptolites have been found recently with a suggestive process in front of the mouth, and graptolites are therefore considered to be primitive forms of Hemichordata. Those we find in this basin are small, flat, black stems with tiny cups opening on one or both sides. The stems are short and very narrow. Each tiny cup overlaps the next and each holds an individual, but as they bud off the central stem the connection is maintained throughout the stem, for it is hollow. Groups of stems, in some cases, were attached to a central bladder to keep them afloat. One large group, the dendroid graptolites, grew out in a branching colony. The branches divided and subdivided. They were strengthened by small transverse dissepiments or rods connecting the branches. Some authorities think that the initial branch was attached to some floating material, and that the colony hung down like a filmy curtain. Other authorities think the initial branch was rooted and that the colony grew up like a tiny bush. Graptolites are good horizon markers because most of them floated on the surface as plankton with their own bladder-like swimming wings, or were attached to floating algae, and were carried far and wide by the winds and waves. So the forms of any one period were widespread. We find them here in the black shales of the Fourth Invasion. And, while they are not numerous, they make it possible to say these beds were deposited at the same time as certain beds in the Arctic and beds in Wales and other places equally far apart. 62 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 ECHINODERMATA (Plate IV, Fig. 16-18) The word Echinodermata means ‘spiny skinned.’ Anyone familiar with a starfish or a sea urchin will recognize the aptness of the word. All but the most primitive groups of the ‘spiny ones’ have a radial symmetry with arms in fives or multiples of five. The anal opening, covered by the anal plate, is for the expulsion of waste matter, and is situated between two arms and opposite the middle arm, with two others on each side, when there are five arms. The form, then, is oriented with the anal plate at the posterior and the opposite middle arm the anterior, thus exhibiting a bilateral symmetry. The worm-like larvae of the living echinoderms show that the bilateral system was the first to appear. Recent studies have suggested that the Echinodermata are higher in the scheme of invertebrates than was at first suspected. CYSTOIDEA AND EDRIOASTEROIDEA (Plate IV, Fig. 16, 17) Cystids and edrioasterids are a queer lot. They are the most primitive of the Echinodermata. Some of them never developed the five-armed pattern. They are all extinct leaving no descendant. But the form of the fossils indicates that they were forty-second cousins, or thereabouts, of the crinoids, and the starfish. By and large they are rare, but we have a few here occurring in some of the layers in the Cobourg beds. A number have been found in the quarries, mostly covered over now, off Cambridge Street near Carling Avenue. Most cystids are flat in one dimension and a bit unpredictable in outline in the other. One end of the cystid comes more or less to a point, in most but not all cases, ending in a stem which may have been attached to the bottom or to something else. They have a mouth at the margin opposite the attachment end, and two or three arms, though the arms vary in number. One of the more advanced forms has five free arms, thus approaching the crinoids. The arms have grooves down their central axis leading to the mouth. The purpose was to direct the food and oxygen-bearing water to the mouth. The outer shell is made up of irregularly arranged angular plates. In some cystid genera the arms are recumbent, partly embedded in the plates beneath. One plate, or a group of plates, covers the anal opening. Edrioasterids are similar in many ways but on the whole are more advanced and more symmetrical. They are disks attached to the sea-bottom by one side, the mouth and arms being on the upper side. The arms are five in number embedded in the plates and radiating from the mouth. In some genera the arms all whorled anti-clockwise, having the anal plate between two arms. In other genera one arm whorls clockwise and the other four anti-clockwise. The anal plate lies between the two arms that turn towards one another, an approach to the bi- lateral symmetry. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 63 CRINOIDEA (Plate IV, Fig. 18) Crinoids have living descendants in some places in the Mediterranean Sea. At first the fossils were thought to be plants and were called sea lilies because of their radial symmetry with their long, slender, tentacled arms gently swayed by the movement of the water. But crinoids are living creatures, about second cousins to the sea urchins and the starfish. To visualize a crinoid as it lived think of a star- fish. A starfish has its mouth down. In your mind’s eye attach a stem to what is now the upper surface of the starfish. Reverse the creature and attach the other end of the stem to the seafloor. The mouth and the arms are now directed upward. This is the position of the crinoid. The crinoid, however, differs from the starfish in many ways. Its arms are free above. Like all Echinodermata the outer frame is made up of plates. Most fossil forms had a long stem-like attachment composed of bead-like plates strung end to end through a hole in the centre of each plate. The lower end was attached to the seafloor. Some even had processes projecting like roots. The present crinoids have very similar stems but they float unattached. At the upper flower-like end the soft parts of the body are enclosed in the ‘calyx,’ as it is called. It is made up of protective plates and usually is globular in shape. It varies greatly in size and in the number of plates. At the top of the calyx is an anal plate, covering the opening for the ejection of waste matter, or in some cases it takes the form of a long tube of irregular plates with the anal plate at the end. On the top of the calyx are the mouth plates around which are the arms, always in fives or branching into multiples of five. A groove runs lengthwise down the arms to the mouth, a passage for the food-bearing water. The creature moved with the undulating water gathering it in by the tentacles, thence the water passed down the grooved arms to the mouth to absorb food and oxygen, and then the waste water passed out through the anal plate. Its bead-like stem gave it a wider range than it would have had if attached by the base of the calyx. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT The photographs in the plates have been published in earlier papers. I would like to thank the Geological Survey of Canada for permission to reproduce them here. I am also indebted to the National Museum of Canada for the graphic illus- trations of fossils in Part Three drawn by J.L. Crosby. The maps and diagram- matic figures were drawn by J.G.E. Gagnon. AuicEe E. WIiLson. 64 Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic Fic. 7, 8. re, 99: Fic. 10. Fic. 11. Fic. 12. ime, i, IG: Ie, By Fic. 4. Inte) Gy Fic. 6. IME, ZH THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 EXPLANATION OF PLATES (Except where stated otherwise, figures are natural size.) PLATE I First to Third Invasion FIRST INVASION Scolithus canadensis (Billings), supposed to be a worm boring, occurring in some places in the Nepean sandstone (p. 53). Raphistomina canadensis (Billings), from the March beds, lot 3, con. IV, Oxford tp., Ontario. The lower side of a gastropod (p. 57). Ecculiomphalus disjunctus (Billings), from March beds, lot 3, con. IV, Oxford tp., Ontario. The upper side of a gastropod (p. 57). Lingulepis acuminatus (Conrad). A reprint. It has been found south of Eagleson’s Corners, in Nepean or March beds. A brachiopod (p. 55). SECOND INVASION . 5, 6. Hebertella pulchella Wilson, Fig. 5 XX 2, found in the limestone beds of the St. Martin (p. 55). These specimens came from Barnhart Island near the power dam. The same forms may be found east of Ottawa. A brachiopod (p. 55). Camarotoechis plena (Hall), showing both sides of one specimen. Fig. 7 has a fold and Fig. 8 has a complementary hollow or sinus. Compare the shape of the beak with that of Hebertella. A brachiopod (p. 55). THIRD INVASION Stelliella billingsi Hinde, from Cobourg beds on Booth Street, Ottawa. A complete sponge (p. 48). Stelliella ottawaensis Wilson, from Cobourg beds on Booth Street, Ottawa. A cross section of another species of the same genus, showing the central cavity and a section of the canals (p. 48). Stelliella crassa Hinde, < 10, from an unspecified locality at Ottawa, probably from Cobourg beds, showing the siliceous spicules for support of the soft parts (p. 48). Licrophycus ottawaensis Billings, 4/5, from an unspecified locality at Ottawa, probably from Cobourg beds. It is thought to be an alga, a low form of plant life (p. 47). PLATE II Third Invasion — Continued Receptaculites occidentalis Salter, from Leray-Rockland beds at Rockland, Ontario. One of the forms of uncertain affinities thought to be near the sponges (p. 49). Stromatocerium rugosum Hall, from Leray-Rockland beds at Paquette Rapids, Ottawa River. Another orphan. Its affinities not certain, but thought to be near the modern Hydrozoa (p. 50). Lambeophyllum profundum (Conrad), from Leray-Rockland beds at Paquette Rapids, Ottawa River. A simple coral more or less horn-shaped (p. 51). Streptelasma corniculum Hall, occurring from the Lowville beds right up to the Cobourg beds, in any exposures. Another simple horn-shaped coral, showing a longitu- dinal section of the interior (p. 51). Calapoecia canadensis Billings, from Leray-Rockland beds at Pakenham, Ontario. A coral colony having many pores in the walls of the corallites (p. 51). Tetradium fibratum Safford, occurring from the Pamelia to the Rockland beds. A coral colony common at Pakenham and at Rockland, Ontario (p. 51). Tetradium fibratum Safford, a cross section, > 5.5, occurring at Pakenham and at Rockland, Ontario. A coral colony showing the walls penetrating the interior of the corallite. If the walls had reached one another four new corallites would haye been formed from each corallite (p. 51). Fic. 10. Fic. 11. WiItson: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 65 Lyopora halli (Nicholson), from Leray-Rockland beds at any exposure. A coral colony showing the tabulae across the corallites. This form lacks the pores seen in Fig. 5 (p. 51). Conularia trentonensis Hall, from an unspecified locality near Vankleek Hill, possibly from Cobourg (?) beds or loose. Another orphan group. Showing the pyramidal shape and the ornamentation (p. 52). Lechthalyus ? curiosus Wilson, X 3, from Cobourg beds at Lydia and Rochester streets, Ottawa. A supposed worm case (p. 53). Prasopora sp. from Sherman Fall beds at any exposure, showing the general form. A bryozoan (p. 54). Fic. 12, 13. Prasopora grandis (Ulrich), < 10, occurring as in Fig. 11. Fig. 12, a longitudinal section showing diaphragms and cysts along the zooecia. Fig. 13, a transverse section showing the circular zooecia and cutting some of the cysts irregularly (p. 54). A bryozoan. Fic. 14, 15. Escharopora frondosa Wilson, < 10, from Leray-Rockland beds at Rockland. Fig. Fic. 16. 14 shows an enlarged polished section of the zooecia of one side. Fig. 15 shows a longitudinal section at right angles to Fig. 14, revealing the zooecia extending out from each side of a thin dividing plate. A bryozoan (p. 54). Hemiphragma tenuimurale Ulrich, x 10. A reprint, showing a longitudinal section of a round branching bryozoan (p. 54). Fic. 17, 18. Rhynidictya sp. Reprints; occurring from Leray-Rockland beds to Cobourg beds, Fig. at any exposure, showing the imperforated edges of a thin branching form. Fig. 17 x 10, Fig. 18 nat. size. A bryozoan (p. 54). PLATE III Third Invasion — Continued 1 to 22 are brachiopods (p. 55). Note the similarities and the differences in the size, hinge line and ornamentation. Fic. 1. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic. 2 3 Fic. 4. 5 6 Fic. 7 Fic. 8, 9. Lingula cobourgensis Billings, from Cobourg beds wherever exposed. This is one of the more primitive forms that opens sideways. Lingula briseis Billings, from Cobourg beds at the corner of Lydia and Rochester streets, Ottawa. It also occurs in the Sherman Fall beds. Pholidops trentonensis Hall, from Val Tetreau, occurring anywhere from the Hull to the Cobourg beds. Platystrophia amoena longicardinalis McEwan, from Leray-Rockland beds, also found up to the Cobourg beds. Sowerbyella sericea (Sowerby), found from Lowville to Cobourg beds in any locality. Resserella rogata (Sardeson), occurs anywhere from Lowville to Cobourg beds. Plectorthis plicatella laurentina Wilson, from Cobourg beds at the Research Council Laboratories, Sussex Street, Ottawa. It is also found in Sherman Fall beds. Doleroides pervetus ottawanus Wilson, occurs anywhere in Leray-Rockland beds. Fic. 10, 11. Hesperorthis tricenaria (Conrad), occurs anywhere in Leray-Rockland beds and recurs in Cobourg beds. Fic. 12, 13. Glyptorthis bellarugosa (Conrad), occurs anywhere in Leray-Rockland beds. This Fic. 14. Fic. 15. Fic. 16. Fic. 17, specimen from Rockland quarry. Note in Fig. 12 the small projections with sockets behind them, and the small straight plate between them. The latter is the place of attachment for one end of the opening muscle. In Fig. 13 note the rugose orna- mentation. Rafinesquina alternata (Conrad), occurs anywhere from the Leray to the Cobourg beds. Rafinesquina deltoidea (Conrad), occurs anywhere in Sherman Fall and Cobourg beds. It even returned early in the Fourth Invasion. Note the way in which the margins bend as compared with the flatter Rafinesquina alternata. Dinorthis iphigenia (Billings), from an unspecified locality. It occurs anywhere in Rockland to Cobourg beds. 18. Rhynchotrema increbescens (Hall), from Leray-Rockland beds, Merivale Road, Ottawa. It occurs anywhere from Lowville to Cobourg beds. Fig. 18 is x 4 to show the long internal prongs to which is attached the feathery lophophore that produces the current to bring in the food- and water-bearing water. This specimen is from Leray-Rockland beds at Paquette Rapids, Ottawa River. Fic. 19, 20. Zygospira recurvirostris (Hall), X 3, from Hull or Sherman Fall beds, Brewery Creek, Hull, Quebec. It occurs anywhere from Lowville to Cobourg beds. Fic. 21, 22. Cyclospira bisulcata (Emmons), X 2, from Sherman Fall beds behind the old axe factory, Hull, Quebec. It may occur in Sherman Fall or Cobourg beds. * *K * 66 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 Fig. 23 to 33 are pelecypods (p. 56). Note the lack of bilateral symmetry and that they have equal valves except that one valve is right and the other left, a feature shown in Fig. 30. Fic. 23. Cyrtodonta subcarinata Billings, a right valve from Leray beds at Pointe Claire, Que- bec. It occurs anywhere in Lowville or Leray beds. Fic. 24. Cyrtodonta huronensis Billings, left valve, may occur at any exposure of Lowvyille or Leray beds. Fic. 25. Cyrtodonta canadensis Billings, left valve, from Leray-Rockland beds at Paquette Rapids, Ottawa River. It may occur anywhere in Leray or Rockland beds. Fic. 26. Orthodesma decorosum Wilson, left valve, from Pamelia beds in Ramsay tp., Ontario. Note the protuberance on the anterior of the shell, a scar where one of the muscles was attached. Fic. 27, 28. Cztenodonta gibberula Salter, right valve, from Leray-Rockland beds on Allumette Island, Ottawa River, Quebec. Fig. 27 from the exterior; Fig. 28 from the interior, showing the hinge with the scars of the place of attachment of the anterior and posterior muscles for closing the shell, also the row of ‘teeth’ and sockets. The ‘teeth’ are not used for eating but as a fulcrum for opening and closing. Fig. 29, 30. Ctenodonta nasuta Salter, from Leray-Rockland beds, Allumette Island, Ottawa River, Quebec. Fig. 29, right valve, showing the long anterior projection; Fig. 30, showing the two valves and the hinge line. Note the slight turn of the beak indicating which is the anterior. The form occurs from Pamelia to Cobourg beds. Fic. 31. Vanuxemia canadensis Wilson, right valve, from Hull or Sherman Fall beds, about 4 miles west of L’Orignal, Ontario. It occurs anywhere from Leray to Sherman Fall beds. Fic. 32, 33. Vanuxemia inconstans Billings, from Leray beds at the Fourth ,Chaite of the Bonne- chére River, Ontario. Fig. 32, right valve, from the exterior; Fig. 33, left valve, from the interior, showing the ‘teeth’ or fulcrum. Compare this type of ‘teeth’ with those of Fig. 28. The form occurs anywhere in Leray or Rockland beds. 7k * of GASTROPODA Note the difference in direction of the coil of this gastropod and those in Fig. 1 to 5 on Plate IV (p. 57). Fic. 34. Maclurites logani (Salter), from Leray-Rockland beds at Paquette Rapids, Ottawa River. Note the left-hand coil when the opening faces the observer. Compare with Fig. 1 to 3 on Plate IV. Also note the operculum, the small shell attached to the foot closing the opening when the creature is withdrawn into its shell home. The form may occur anywhere in Leray or Leray-Rockland beds, and it recurs in Cobourg beds. PLATE IV Third Invasion — Concluded GASTROPODA — Continued Fig. 1 to 5 are gastropods. Note the direction of the coil. Fig. 1 to 3 are right-hand coils when the opening faces the observer. Fig. 4 and 5 are coiled in a plane, that is, each coil is directly over the preceding one and partly envelopes it (p. 57). Fic. 1. Trochonema umbilicatum canadense Ulrich and Scofield, from Leray-Rockland beds at Paquette Rapids, Ottawa River. Note the angular shoulders and the shape of the opening. The form occurs anywhere in Leray or Rockland beds and recurs in the Cobourg beds. Fic. 2. Hormotoma bellicincta (Hall), from Leray-Rockland beds at Paquette Rapids, Ottawa River. Note the compactness of the whorls. It occurs anywhere from the Lowyille to Cobourg beds. Fic. 3. Hormotoma trentonensis (Hall), from Cobourg beds at the west end of Fifth Avenue, Ottawa. It occurs in the Sherman Fall and Cobourg beds. Fic. 4, 5. Phragmolites compressus Conrad, from Leray-Rockland beds on Allumette Island at Paquette Rapids, Quebec. Note the central revolving rib and the ornamentation on the sides. It occurs in Leray and Rockland beds. * * * CEPHALOPODA Fig. 6 to 8 belong to the cephalopods (p. 58). Fic. 6 Gonioceras occidentalis Hall. A reprint, showing the sudden change in the direction of the sutures on the right side. A corresponding change occurs on the left when it is preserved. It occurs anywhere in Leray or Rockland beds. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fic. Fig. 12. 13. Fig. 14. 15. WILSON: GEOLOGY OF THE OTTAWA DISTRICT 67 Actinoceras cf. bigsbyi Bronn. A reprint, a small piece of a large form cut down the centre to show the interior of the septa, the broad bead-like siphuncle connecting the initial chamber with the living chamber, and the central cavity—the white part, piercing the siphuncle. It occurs anywhere in Leray and Rockland beds. Ormoceras allumettense (Billings), from Leray-Rockland beds at Paquette Rapids, Ottawa River, showing the interior with septa and bead-like siphuncle connecting the initial and living chamber. It occurs from the Pamelia to the Leray-Rockland beds K * * TRILOBITA 9 to 13 are trilobites (p. 59). Isotelus ottawaensis Wilson, showing the rounded anterior and a broken posterior, but not showing the longitudinal trilobation as clearly as Fig. 10, from Cobourg (?) beds from an unspecified locality at Ottawa, Ontario. Flexicalymene senaria (Conrad). A reprint, showing the longitudinal trilobation, the parts of the cephalon (head), the thorax (body), and the pygidium (tail). It occurs at any exposure from the Leray to the Cobourg beds. Bumastus milleri Billings, from Leray-Rockland beds near L’Orignal, Ontario, showing a faint longitudinal trilobation, the complete thorax and tail, but part of the head concealed by rolling. It occurs from the Pamelia to the Rockland beds. Bathyurus trispinosis Wilson, from Leray beds at Pakenham, Ontaria, showing the large tail spine, but it has three smaller spines on the back of the head. Bathyurus extans (Hall), from Leray beds near L’Orignal, Ontario, showing the trilo- bation and segments of the tail. It can be found in both Pamelia and Lowville beds. *K > * GRAPTOLOIDEA 14, 15 are graptolites (p. 61). Diplograptus amplexicaulus cf. pertenius Ruedemann, < 8, from Cobourg beds, Ro- chester Street, Ottawa, showing the sicula of the initial theca (cup) and the sharp spine-like edge of the theca. Climacograptus inuiti similis Wilson, < 6, from Cobourg beds at the National Re- search Council Laboratories, Sussex Street, Ottawa, showing the horizontal top of the cup, the straight sides, and the spine at the base of each cup. * * 3K ECHINODERMATA Fic. 16-18 each belong to one of three different types (p. 62). 16. Wie 18. te De Lepidiconia lorifrons Raymond, an edrioasterid from the Cobourg beds from an un- specified locality at Ottawa, showing the anti-clockwise turn of the arms. Amygdalocystites florealis Billings, a cystid from Cobourg beds on Booth Street, Ot- tawa, showing its irregular but ornamented plates. Cremacrinus inaequalis (Billings), a crinoid from an unspecified locality at Ottawa, showing the free arms (p. 63). PLATE V Fourth to Final Invasion FOURTH INVASION Geisonoceras sp. a cephalopod (p. 58), occurring anywhere in the Eastview formation, and in the lowest part of the Billings formation. They are usually poorly preserved in the black shales and frequently they are coated with pyrite. Ogygites latimarginatus (Hall), a irilobite (p. 59), showing the longitudinal trilo- bation well. Tails of this form are often very numerous, occurring anywhere in the Eastview formation. Fic. 3, 4. Triarthus spinosus Billings, a trilobite (p. 59), from an unspecified locality in Glou- cester tp., Ontario, the head only, showing the one head spine. 68 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Vol. 70, No. 1, 1956 FIFTH INVASION No fossils are illustrated from the Fifth Invasion. There are not many in this district. Some very poorly preserved specimens of Pelecypoda have been found at one exposure in the bed of a creek near the red church south of Hawthorne, Ontario. SIXTH INVASION Fic. 5. Byssonychia radiata Foerste, < 114, a reprint of a pelecypod. The rocks of the in- vasion are only sparsely exposed in the area, but some loose specimens may be found in the north bank of the North Castor River at the bridge about 2 miles west of Russell, Ontario (p. 56). SEVENTH INVASION This is represented by the red shales north of Russell, Ontario (p. 10). Until recently no fossils were found in it. The forms, brachiopods, bryozoans, and ostracods have not yet been worked out. FINAL INVASION It will be remembered that the Second Erosional Period of several hundreds of million years (p. 16) occurred after the Seventh Invasion, followed by the advance of the glaciers. As ihe glaciers retreated the continent was slow in emerging and the sea again invaded from the east. Fic. 6. Mytilus edulis Linnaeus, a pelecypod (p. 56) occuring in the sands of the Champlain sea at the Foster sandpit near Uplands, Ottawa, Ontario. Fic. 7. Yoldia arctica Gray, a pelecypod from the unconsolidated sediments of the Champlain sea. This particular specimen came from Pointe Claire, Quebec. Fic. 8. Hiatella (Saxicava) arctica Linnaeus, a pelecypod from the sandpits at Uplands, Ottawa. Fic. 9. Macoma balthica (Linnaeus), from the sandpits at Uplands, Ottawa, also a pelecypod. Fic. 10. Balanus crenulatus Bruguiere, a barnacle (p. 61) from the sandpits near Uplands, Ottawa, Ontario. PLATE IT Wu \\ Pirate III PLATE IV PLATE V Sato we: a y = = ee he ee Men, FPA al Ps bay ¥ fe ci . S ’ 1 = nm > ¢ i) x ° 5 % — : ADT en fe : == \ — a i Scale o f Miles eer “@ w oO i Dunrobinyy : Za 3 Hardwood Ca 2 Plainsyy \ \ w IN es BRITANNIA YACHT H Leitrim OF Bearbrook 20 AQ mUCe. Po Ep O Manotick WL A R Morewood 45°00’ of c ) ¢ \ C}\ Mississippi J Lake At Winchester Q Chesterville}, 76° 20 Route Map of Geological Excursions around Ottawa. AFFILIATED SOCIETIES BRITISH COLUMBIA BIRD AND MAMMAL SOCIETY President: KENNETH RACEY; Vice-President: H.M. LAING; Secretary: IAN McT. COWAN, Dept. of Zoology, University of British Columbia, Vancouver 8, B.C. CALGARY NATURALISTS CLUB President: Miss JEAN MacASKILL; Vice-President: Dr. JOHN R. HAYNES; Secretary-Treasurer: Miss MARGARET COPE, 1719 13th Ave. S.W., Calgary, Alta. McILWRAITH ORNITHOLOGICAL CLUB President: F. HOWARD KEAST; Vice-President: W.W. JUDD: Treasurer: J.C. LAUGHTON: Record- ing Secretary: Miss MARY JANE HEIGHWAY; Migration Secretary: JAMES LEACH; Corresponding Secretary: Mrs. W.R. JARMAIN. 59 Ridout St. S., London, Ont. Meetings 8.00 p.m., Public Library, third Monday, October to Mcy. NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MANITOBA President: Mrs. W.A. CARTWRIGHT; Vice-President: BURT KOOYMAN; Treasurer: HAROLD MOSSOP: General Secretary: ED. DOWTON, 47 Cunnington Ave., Winnipeg 8, Man. PROVANCHER SOCIETY OF NATURAL HISTORY OF CANADA President: J. AURELE BIGONESSE; Vice-Presidents: J. KENNEDY HILL, FRANCOIS HAMEL; Secretary- Treasurer: GEORGE A. LECLERC, 628 Fraser Street, Quebec, Que. PROVINCE OF QUEBEC SOCIETY FOR THE PROTECTION OF THE BIRDS President: MJ. DUNBAR: £Vice-Presidenis: J.-L. VANCAMP, J.P. ANGLIN; Treasurer: W.H. RAW- LINGS; Secretary: Miss R.S. ABBOTT, Box 3, Senneville, Que. TORONTO FIELD NATURALISTS’ CLUB President: JOHN MITCHELE; Vice-President: WAL- TER TOVELL: Director Junior T.F.N.C.: MARY ROBSON; Secretary-Treasurer: Mrs. J.B. STEWART, 21 Millwood Road, Toronto 7, Ont. VANCOUVER NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY President: A.R. WOOTTON; Vice-President: J.J. PLOMMER; Treasurer: F. SANFORD; Secretary: C.B.W. ROGERS. Meetings 8.00 p.m, Room 100, Applied Science Building, University of British Columbia. ADVICE TO CONTRIBUTORS Manuscripts Manuscripis should be typewritten on one side of noniransparenit poper measuring 8% by 11 inches. Authors are requested to use at least one Given name. All text matter, including quotations, footnotes, tables, literature references, and legends for figures, should be double-spaced. Scientific QMames should be underlined. Every sheet of the manuscript should be numbered. Webster's New International Dictionary is the authority for spelling. References are made by the author-date system. They should be listed alphabetically and typed at the end of the main body of text. Tables should be titled and numbered consecu- tively in arabic numerals. Tables and legends for the figures should be placed after the list of refer- ences. Each table and all the legends should be On separate pages. Iustrations All figures, including each figure of the plates, should be numbered consecutively in arabic nu- merals. The author's name, title of the paper, and figure number should be written in the lower left comer of the sheet on which the illustration ap- pears. The legend should not be incorporated in the figure. Line drawings should be made with India ink on white drawing paper, blue iracing linen, or blue-lined co-ordinate paper. Co-ordinate lines that are to appear in the reproduction should be ruled in black ink. Descriptive matter should be leitered, not typewritten, and all parts of the drawing should permit easy legibility even if a reduction is made. One-column illustrations are reproduced 25% inches wide; full-page illustraiions, 542 inches wide. Photographs should have a glossy finish and show sharp contrasts. For reproduction as a com- plete plaie they should be mounted without space between prints. For large drawings and mounted photographs the ratio of height to width should conform to that of the journal page (54% by 8% inches) but the height should be adjusted to allow for the legend. Reprints Reprints, with or without covers, may be bought. The cost is given on the reprint order form which is attached to the galley proofs. THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB FouNDED In 1879 The objects of the club are to foster an acquaintance with and a love of nature, to encourage investigation and to publish the results of original research and observations in all branches of natural history. The patron is His Excellency, the Right Honorable Vincent Massey, C.H., Governor General of Canada. MEMBERS OF COUNCIL W.K.W. Batpwin, President, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario Loris S. RussE.x, First Vice-President EpwaArp L. BousFIELD, Second Vice-President Raymond J. Moore, Treasurer, Science Service Building, Ottawa, Ontario Homer J. Scoccan, Secretary, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario I.L. Conners, C. FRANKTON, Auditors Miss ANNE Banninc, Miss AnNA Brown, Miss RutH Horner, Miss VioLeT HUMPHREYS, Miss VERNA Ross, Miss PAULINE SNURE, Miss Mary Stuart, the Reverend F. E. Banm, Messrs. R.M. ANDERSON, J.W. ARNOLD, J.S. BLEAKNEY, B. Borvin, A.E. BourcuIGNoN, K. Bowxes, A.W. Cameron, W.J. Copy, I.L. Conners, W.G. Dore, C. FRANKTOoN, R. Frira, W.E. Goprrey, H. Grou, J.W. Groves, R.A. Hamitton, W.I. In~tman, W.H. LANCELEY, H. Liroyp, W.W. Marr, T.H. Manninc, H. Marsuati, D.A. Munro, A.E. Porsuzp, H.L.J. Ruopes, P.A. Ruppevi, D.B.O. Savine, H.A. Senn, V.E.F. Souman, E.A. TuRNAU (eee THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST SCIENCE SERVICE BUILDING, OTTAWA, ONTARIO Rosert A. Hamitton, Editor W.J. Copy, Business Manager Associate Editors: F.J. ALcock (Geology), Joun W. ArNotp (Entomology), W.A. BELL (Paleontology), SHERMAN BLEAKNEY (Herpetology), Austin W. Cameron (Mammalogy), Wituiam G. Dore (Botany), J.R. Dymonp (Ichthyology), W. Earn Goprrey (Ornitho- logy), A. G. Huntsman (Marine Biology), A. LaRocqgue (Conchology) The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published quarterly by the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club with the assistance of affiliated societies listed on the inside back cover. Manuscripts representing personal observations or the results of original research in any branch of na- tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors should consult the most recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside back cover. Advertising rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors are obtainable from the business manager. ee MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION The annual membership fee of $3.00 covers subscription to the journal. Institutions, however, may subscribe at the same rate as that for membership. Single current numbers of regular issues are ninety cents. The price of this issue is one dollar. Money orders should be made payable to the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Office Department at Ottawa, Ontario | VOLUME 70 APRIL-JUNE 1956 NUMBER 2 The CANADIAN jw) FIELD-NATURALIS be Articles * Bird and Mammal Notes from the Interior Ungava Peninsula Cart R. Extunp 69 * Birds Observed at Goose Bay and Elsewhere in Labrador V. C. Wynne-Epwarbs 76 Drummond’s Vole in Manitoba STuarT CRDLE 78 Reports Christmas Bird Census for 1955 85 Seventy-Seventh Annual Meeting of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club 91 Notes Birds Wintering at Calgary, 1954-55 W. Ray Sarr 93 Western Flycatcher in Alberta W. Ray Sart 94 Brown-headed Chickadees in the Gulf of St. Lawrence E. F. ArkMAN 94 Richardson’s Merlin Nesting in Manitoba Stuart CRIDDLE 94 Nesting of Golden Eagle on Vancouver Island Hamitton M. Laine 95 Record of Willett for Vancouver Island Hamitton M. Laine 95 Unusual Horned Owl Nesting Hamitton M. Laine 96 A Harp Seal from the Leda Clay West of Hull, Quebec C. M. STERNBERG 97 @-Myrtle Warbler at Baker Lake, N.W.T. Fr. CHARLES CHOQUE 97 The White-winged Crossbills of Newfoundland KENNETH C. PARKES 98 “Records of Two Microtine Rodents from the Quebec Tundra A. W. F. BanFietp 99 “Record of Perch from Great Slave Lake, N.W.T. Dona.p C..Scorr 99 Financial Statement, Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, 1955 100 Published by THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB OTTAWA ONTARIO THE OTTAWA FIELD -NATUR - Founpep IN 1879 ae all ee of natural gees. The aed is His selene, the Rig! MaSey, C.H., Governor General of Canada. _ MEMBERS OF COUNCIL = WKW. -Batpwin, President. National Museum of Canada, Ottawa Loris S. RussELL, First Wice Presdear EDWARD L. BousFIELp, Second Vice- President _ Homer J. ‘Scoccan, "Secretary, National jes of Canada, 0 I.L. Conners, C. FRANKTON, Auditors _ ne aeetis wa t Miss ANNE BANNING, Miss ANNA Brown, Miss Ror Honven, “HL Laorn, W.W. Mar, he Mannmne, HL gen J THE CANADIAN FIELD-N/ SCIENCE SERVICE BUILDING, OTT: Rosert A. Hatton, Editor Rare Me au Associate Editors: F-.J. Acock (Geology), Me oun W (Paleontology), SHERMAN BLEAKNEY (Herpetology), iM Witt G. Dore. (Botany), J.R. Dymonp (Ichthyology), logy), A. G. Huntsman (Marine Biology), A. LaRocque The Canadian Field- Naturalist is published quarterly he the Club with the assistance of affiliated societies listed on the inside representing personal observations or the results of origina tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authc recent issue and the Meee for ponttatess on ae the business manager. — Me ibid MEMBERSHIP AND SUBSCRIPTION — The annual membership fee of $3. 00 ‘covers. iiteneieen: to the jour , however, may subscribe at the same rate as that for membe s i of regular issues are ninety cents. Money orders should be made Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. ny on Wid HURON The Canadian Field-Naturalist VOLUME 70 APRIL-JUNE 1956 NUMBER 2 ~ BIRD AND MAMMAL NOTES FROM THE INTERIO tis. pany UNGAVA PENINSULA Cart R. EKLUND U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Atlanta, Georgia Received for publication July 29, 1955 During the summer of 1949 a study was made of the interior Ungava Peninsula in northern Quebec for the purpose of deter- mining waterfowl-species distribution and productiveness. The study was part of the annual co-operative survey of waterfowl breeding grounds conducted jointly by the Canadian Wildlife Service and the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, as reported by Crissey, - et al. (1949). The survey was undertaken in co-operation with the Arctic Institute of North America and was financed by a grant from the Institute with funds provided by the United States Government. The field party consisted of Leon D. Cool, former Game Management Agent-Pilot of the Fish and Wildlife Service, and the writer. A limited collection of 65 bird skins re- presenting 21 species, and 33 mammal skins and skulls of 4 different species was made, incidental to the waterfowl survey. I am indebted to Dr. John Aldrich and Allen J. Duvall of the Fish and Wildlife Service for help in identification of the bird specimens, and to Dr. David Johnson and Charles Hand- ley, Jr. of the U. S. National Museum for examination of the mammals. Food habits of the waterfowl collected have been re- ported upon by Polunin and Eklund (1953). The field work was carried out between June 29 and August 3, 1949. A single-engine Fairchild 24 airplane equipped with pon- toons was used. The main bases of opera- tion were the military air base known as “Crystal I”, on the Koksoak River near Fort Chimo, and Payne Lake, in the interior at Latitude 59° 19’ N., Longitude 73° 27' W. The U. S. Air Force parachuted oil and gasoline at our base on Payne Lake. This enabled most of the aerial transects to be run from this point, and permitted fairly exten- APR 1 sive coverage of the peninsula. Studies were confined generally to that portion of the peninsula south of Hudson Strait between Hudson Bay and Ungava Bay. Primary emphasis was placed on the interior of the region, where biological investigations have been extremely limited. Aerial tran- sects were also flown, however, in the tidal areas, and in the interior south and south- east of the peninsula as defined. This region has two major habitat types — tundra and forest-tundra. The tundra region lies general- ly northward of the middle and eastern por- tions of the Leaf River, while the forest-tun- dra extended northward from our southern- most station at Lake Aigneau at Latitude 57° 11’ N., to between Latitude 59° and 59° N. DESCRIPTION OF COLLECTING STATIONS Collections of birds and mammals were made at seven ground stations in the interior (see map of Survey Area), as well as along the coast at Payne Bay Hudson Bay Post, Diana Bay and Wakeham Bay. No bird notes are included from the coastal areas, however, since considerable studies have already been made here and our observations were quite limited. This paper is concerned with ob- servations and collections at the following locations as shown on Air Navigation Maps, National Topographic Series (8 miles to the inch), published by the Canada Department of Mines and Resources: LAKE AIGNEAU — Latitude 57° Longitude 70° 09’ W. A camp was occupied July 1 and 2 at the south end of the lake near the river’s inlet. According to the classification of Hustich (1949), the lake lies in the forest-tundra, and its N.; The Canadian Field-Naturalist for January-March (Can. Field Nat. 70: 1-68. 1956) was issued March 25, 1957 269 LIRA, afte Q 7 UNiVERS! ’ A [Vol. 70 09S THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 70 ay¥v1 AYOOsYS £ GNVTAYVN 3yHvV71 9 y3Ald AVAT S Y3AIM WNLINONNAOd ¥ NVOINUVid 3NV71 € 3xV1 ANAVd 2 AVANSIV 3aXv7 | SNOlivLS QONNOYS Ssellw 39 8189S 00z oot os VddV AFAAINS oSS 009 S9 N 004 oSL \ if 29S - / a, a“ e 1 : eee rah) \ @) q ys —— = & & i BS © 2 ow? ‘O) @ = Sia a =| Z Be = ) } 2 a Re) a3 g 0 = eS FN 8 eo “@ » | : je} ag ee y / \ > P40 @ aN Ae -- o8S ( Ge-7 Se i yh a i) “, bY % Bu, U) * ourey me cS (0°) G) @ * 2 VIA SNINId te VAWONA <> 2keg weyouem 4 rv) on, fe) 2 <5 f Bt JAOy Zz v (o) a ? Se v ey Ny Bb WY + ? ? S SS ? O ? Na +9 4 eo G9 o0L ° 208 April-June 1956] THE CANADIAN is characterized by black spruce, larch, wil- low, and alder occurring in patches and along water edges. Higher portions of the ground were barren. This was the most heavily wooded of all the areas visited. PAYNE LAKE — Latitude 59° 19’ N., Longi- tude 73° 27’ W. This was our advance base for flight tran- sects and we maintained a camp intermittent- ly from July 8 to 27 on a sand beach on the east end of the lake at the outlet of the Payne River. This area was apparently a favorite camping spot for the Payne Bay Eskimos as was evidenced by numerous tent rings. There was no evidence of recent usage. We observed at the river oulet what appeared to be goose blinds, consisting of blocks of mosses and lichens piled in walls. Payne Lake is the largest of the Ungava lakes within the tundra region, as defined, and the vegetation on the surrounding terrain is characterized by plants such as mosses, lichens (principally Cladonia), sedges (Ca- rex spp.), willow, dwarf birch (Betula glan- dulosa), bake-apple or cloudberry (Rubus chamaemorus), Labrador tea (Ledum spp.), ‘and blueberry (Vaccinium wuliginosum var. alpinum). Ground elevations are under 800 feet, and the terrain is gently undulating. LAKE PTARMIGAN — Latitude 60° 46’ N., Longitude 71° 47’ W. This is an unofficial name for our most northerly interior station which we occupied at the southeast end of a four-mile long lake, from July 16 to 18. Camp was established approximately 30 miles southeast of Hudson Strait. The terrain is hilly, and more ex- posed rock was in evidence here than at any of the other camp sites. Mosses, lichens, and Labrador tea were dominant, and other plants such as alpine holy-grass (Hierochloe alpina), tall cotton- ‘grass (Eriophorum angustifolium), sedges, and blueberry were among the more common species. Aquatic plants seemed entirely lack- ing. POVUNGNITUK RIVER — Latitude 59° 51’ N., Longitude 76° 12’ W. We landed on a two-mile long lake through which the river flowed, and made collections for only several hours on July 21. Where the river flowed out of the lake we observed several thousand Arctic charr breaking the smooth water surface. Below this point there is a fall in the river of some 15 to 20 feet. FIELD-NATURALIST 71 Vegetation is typical of the tundra and relatively dense in comparison to the Lake Ptarmigan area. The terrain is more rugged than that at Payne Lake, and the shore along the river much sandier than along most Ungava lakes and rivers which we saw. LEAF RIVER — Latitude 57° 46’ N., Longi- tude 73° 07’ W. Landing on a wide section of the river where there was little current, we collected and observed during the afternoon of July 25. This is a typical forest-tundra with fairly thick stands of black spruce, larch, willow, and alder along the river edge, thinning gradually toward the higher land. The terrain is rolling. A common aquatic plant found in a shallow pond off the river was buckbean (Menyanthes trifoliata), and from the number that had been pulled up it appeared the geese might have been feeding on this perennial herb. LAKE MARYLAND — Latitude 60° 27’ N., Longitude 73° 20’ W. This is an unofficial name for a lake, near Klotz Lake, on which we landed on July 26. Observations and collections were made at the east end of the lake near an outlet of a tributary of the North Payne River. We observed a number of tent rings indicating the site was a favorite camping spot for Eskimos. The elevation of the area is between 500 and 800 feet, and the terrain is more rugged than that of any other site visited. There is considerable exposed rock, comparable to the Lake Ptarmigan region. Common plants included the usual mosses and lichens, rigid sedge (Carex bigelowii), Richardson’s ane- mone (Anemone richardsoni), bake-apple, Arctic wintergreen (Pyrola grandiflora), white heather, blueberry, and rock or moun- tain cranberry (Vaccinium Vitis-Idaea var. minor). Alpine holy-grass is common on the dry higher areas. GREGORY (OCTOPUS) LAKE — Latitude 58° 29’ N., Longitude 70° 06’ W. On July 27, enroute from Payne Lake to Fort Chimo we were forced down at Gregory Lake due to a heavy fog coming in from Ungava Bay. As the result, we spent six hours collecting along the lake shore. Polu- nin (1949, p. 127) and his party spent some time in this area in 1946. He called it Octo- pus Lake. This was our most northern forest-tundra site. 72 THE CANADIAN BIRDS No attempt has been made to review all the literature on the birds of this region. As implied previously, very limited ornitho- logical work has been carried out in the interior, particularly in the tundra. W. E. Clyde Todd has conducted considerable field work in the southern and western parts of the peninsula and his material is in the pro- cess of being published. Manning (1949) col- lected birds along the east coast of Hudson Bay as well as in some interior portions of western Ungava. His paper includes an ex- cellent resume of previous ornithological investigations in the Ungava area. Extensive studies have been made by Turner (1885) especialaly at Fort Chimo, and by Hantzsch (1908) in the region near Killinek (Port Burwell), Labrador. Hildebrand (1950), and Gabrielson and Wright (1951) have pub- lished on observations in the Ungava Bay region, principally in the vicinity of Fort Chimo, George River, and False River. These are but a few of the publications, most of which pertain to the coastal sections. The following birds were recorded at the interior stations described. In addition to specimens collected, sight records, including aerial observations of waterfowl, are also listed. COMMON LOON Gavia immer (Briinnich). Seven birds were observed on an aerial flight around Payne Lake. Another was seen at Gregory Lake. RED-THROATED LOON Gavia Stellata (Pontoppidan). One bird was seen with a brood on the Povungnituk River. UNGAVA CANADA GOOSE Branta canadensis -interior Todd. A typical specimen of this subspecies was collected at Payne Lake, Three others were collected at Gregory Lake, approximately ten miles from tidewater of Ungava Bay (Leaf Lake). The Gregory Lake specimens were taken from a flock of 18 flightless birds. Two of these specimens showed intergradation to- ward the lighter-plumaged Branta c. cana- densis (Linnaeus); the third was typical of the Ungava Canada Goose. Manning (1949, p. 169) discusses breeding records of this subspecies along the western portions of the peninsula, and it, together with the inter- gradations, probably is more uniformly dis- tributed over the area covered in this study than the Maritime or Eastern Canada Goose, FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Branta c. canadensis. We did not collect any of the latter. I am of the opinion Greg- ory Lake is close to the boundary line of intergradation, and Ungava Bay might be considered the boundary between the two subspecies. The Canada Goose comprised 66 per cent of all waterfowl observed within the tundra region and 16 percent within both tundra and forest-tundra. The species was fairly well distributed throughout the peninsula except in the extreme north. Three juveniles (subspecies unknown) were banded at our station on the Leaf River. These birds were taken by driving them into a gill net. BLACK DUCK Anas rubripes Brewster. A flightless drake was collected on a small pond near Gregory Lake. The species was never observed at any of the interior tundra stations, but one was seen at Lake Aigneau. It represented 26 per cent of all waterfowl seen on the aerial transects in the interior forest-tundra and 58 percent of all the ducks and geese found in what might be termed tidal forest- tundra. We counted 858 of these birds along the tidal marsh on the False River where it flows into the southern end of Ungava Bay. PINTAIL Anas acuta Linnaeus. On July 2 a Pintail with a brood of 8 in the one-week old age class was observed at close range near Lake Aigneau in a small, shallow pond a short distance from the edge of the lake. Manning (1946, p. 80) saw the downy young of the species on King George Island in Hudson Bay and believed that it breeds in considerable numbers in the Povungnituk region. The only other place we observed the bird was on a small pond near Payne Lake where only one was seen. Hildebrand (1950, p. 58), and Gabrielson and Wright (1951, p. 131), observed them during the breeding season on the False River and near the Koksoak River estuary at the southern end of Ungava Bay. GOLDENEYE Bucephala sp. What was thought to be a Barrow’s Goldeneye (Bucephala islandica) Gmelin, was shot down in the Payne River at the outlet of Payne Lake; unfortunately we could not retrieve it. We also observed goldeneyes at Lake Aigneau, and they re- presented 6 percent of all waterfowl seen on the aerial transects within forest-tundra and 5 percent within the tundra region. Within April-June 1956] 117 miles of a flight enroute to the air base in forest-tundra habitat along the Wheeler and Whale Rivers, we saw 35 goldeneyes. OLD SQUAW Clangula hyemalis (Linnaeus). This was the most common nesting duck in the interior tundra region and it accounted for approxi- mately 50 percent of all the ducks seen in this type of habitat. A specimen was col- lected at Payne Lake. Although the num- bers were not great the bird was observed in the interior on all the aerial transects except on the most northern one from Wakeham Bay. In the flight around Payne Lake 37 adults and 15 juveniles were seen. The nesting bird seems to prefer small ponds near larger lakes or rivers, and all broods which we saw were in such areas. On July 22 a duck with a brood of 5 in the one to two weeks old age class was observed on a half-acre pond 150 yards from the north side or Payne Lake. BLACK SCOTER Oidemia nigra (Linnaeus). A flock of 22 was observed at Lake Ptarmigan, and 3 were seen on Payne Lake. COMMON MERGANSER Mergus merganser Cassin. The species was observed at Payne Lake and Lake Aigneau, as well as in the False River-Whale River area. RED-BREASTED MERGANSER Mergus serrator Linnaeus. Although none were collected, the Red-breasted Merganser was more common than the previous species. A brood was seen on the Payne River, and over 100 were observed on the flight along the Whale and George Rivers. Both species of mergansers represented 11 percent of all waterfowl seen in the forest-tundra. UNGAVA WILLOW PTARMIGAN Lagopus lagopus ungavus Riley. This grouse was collected in the forest-tundra at Lake Aigneau, Leaf River, and Gregory Lake, and in the tundra habitat at Payne Lake. The year 1949 apparently was one of the high years in the cycle judging from the many birds seen. While walking about a mile along the shore of Gregory Lake I flushed 19 broods. Most of the birds were not wary. ROCK PTARMIGAN Lagopus mutus rupestris (Gmelin). This species was also common although much less so than the Willow Ptarmigan. The THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 73 bird was collected at Payne Lake and Lake Ptarmigan and was observed at Povungnituk River and Lake Maryland. SEMIPALMATED PLOVER Charadrius hiaticula semipalmatus Bona- parte. Specimens were collected at Leaf River and Lake Aigneau, and it was observed at Gregory Lake. The species was not seen at any of the tundra stations. LEAST SANDPIPER Erolia minutilla (Vieillot). The “mud peep” was fairly common in the forest-tundra and six specimens were taken at Lake Aigneau and one at Leaf River. SEMIPALMATED SANDPIPER Ereunetes pusillus (Linnaeus). One _ speci- men was collected at Payne Lake, where it was a common nester. NORTHERN PHALAROPE Lobipes lobatus (Linnaeus). Two birds were collected at Lake Aigneau, and the species was observed at Payne Lake and Povungni- tuk River. LONG-TAILED JAEGER Stercorarius longicaudus pallascens Loppen- thin. While not particularly numerous, this bird was a familiar sight at most of the tundra stations and two records were ob- tained at Payne Lake and one at Lake Mary- land. None were seen in the forest-tundra. HERRING GULL Larus argentatus Pontoppidan. An immature gull of this species was banded at Payne Lake. During the interior aerial transects in tundra and forest-tundra gulls (sp. ?) were more uniformly distributed than other birds. Most of the gulls seen from the air appeared to be Larus argentatus but ident- ification was not positive. Unidentified gulls were noted, also, at all ground stations and 36 were seen on the 231-mile flight around Payne Lake. ARCTIC TERN Sterna paradisaea Pontoppidan. Our only record was one collected at Lake Aigneau. NORTHERN HORNED LARK Eremophila alpestris alpestris (Linnaeus). This was one of the most common birds ob- served. A total of six were collected at the tundra as well as the forest-tundra stations excepting Povungnituk River and Leaf River. Young were observed in the nest at Payne Lake. 74 THE CANADIAN AMERICAN ROBIN Turdus migratorius Linnaeus. No specimens were collected, and the species was seen only at Gregory Lake, near the upper limit of the forest-tundra. Manning (1949, p. 206) in reference to a manuscript by Coates states that what appears to be a Black-backed Ro- bin (Turdus migratorius nigrideus Aldrich & Nutt) was collected in this area in 1946. I can appreciate the difficulty Coates must have had taking it. A fruitless two-mile chase in the soft tundra taught me the hard way that this is an extremely wary bird in northern Ungava ! AMERICAN WATER PIPIT Anthus spinoletta rubescens (Tunstall). One was collected at Lake Ptarmigan, at Povung- nituk River, and another at Lake Maryland. This species seemed to favor rough, boulder- strewn country, which is somewhat. typical of these stations. A juvenile bird, probably less than one week old, was observed at Lake Maryland on July 26. BLACK-POLLED WARBLER Dendroica striata (Forster). A specimen was taken at Lake Aigneau. None were ob- served in the interior tundra. LABRADOR SAVANNAH SPARROW Passerculus sandwichensis labradorius Howe. Two records were obtained at Payne Lake and another at Povungnituk River, and the bird was observed at Lake Ptarmigan. It was common each place. EASTERN TREE SPARROW Spizella arborea arborea (Wilson). One was collected in the forest-tundra at Leaf River, two were taken in the tundra at Povungnituk River, and another was recorded at Lake Maryland. WHITE-CROWNED SPARROW Zonotrichia leucophrys leucophrys (Forster). One was collected at Lake Maryland and an- other was taken at Leaf River. The bird was observed at Gregory Lake. LAPLAND LONGSPUR Calcarius lapponicus lapponicus (Linnaeus). This species was the most common of the family Fringillidae and it was observed at all the tundra stations. One specimen was collected at Payne Lake and another was ob- tained at Lake Ptarmigan. Young were seen in a nest at Payne Lake. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 EASTERN SNOW BUNTING — Plectrophenax nivalis nivalis (Linnaeus). Although I expected to find the Snow Bunting common throughout the tundra re- gion of the Ungava area, it was seen at only two stations. Two were taken at Lake Ptar- migan, and the bird was seen at Lake Mary- land. Their favored habitat appears to be rocky, boulder-strewn hillsides, such as oc- cur at both these stations. Some observers report it as common in the barren regions during the nesting season, but in the region which we studied, I believe it is common at this time only in the more northern portions of the peninsula. MAMMALS ARCTIC HARE Lepus arcticus Ross. None was seen at any of the ground stations, and none was seen during the aerial flights — although it should have been visible from the low-flying alti- tude usually maintained. COLLARED LEMMING Dicrostonyx hudsonicus (Pallas). 1949 was apparently a high year in the lemming population cyele for this area. Lemming runways were numerous everywhere, and the species was recorded at all stations except Lake Ptarmigan where, however, the signs were abundant. Twenty-two collections were made at Payne Lake. Since this was a high year in the cycle, I particularly wanted to carry out a popula- tion density and movement study. To accom- plish this, 50 sheet-metal, collapsible, Sher- man-type live traps were set out in squares at 60-foot intervals, and animals taken were toe-clipped. Unfortunately, owing to mech- anical failure of some of the traps which had been poorly constructed, the study had to be abandoned. LEMMING MOUSE Synaptomys borealis innuitus (True). A lemming mouse, or bog-lemming, was taken at Payne Lake, and another was collected on the coast at Payne Bay Hudson Bay Post. This latter may be a northernmost record for Synaptomys in Ungava. RED-BACKED MOUSE Clethrionomys gapperi ungava (Bailey). One was collected at Payne Lake and another was taken at Lake Aigneau. April-June 1956] MEADOW MOUSE Microtus pennsylvanicus labradorius Bailey. One was obtained at Lake Maryland. We also took a specimen at Wakeham Bay during a stop on a coastal aerial transect. WEASEL Mustela erminet Linnaeus. One weasel was seen in a stand of black spruce at the Air Base near Fort Chimo. OTTER Lutra canadensis (Schreber). Tommy Craw- ford, Hudson Bay Post Factor at Payne Bay, told me the Eskimos occasionally trapped an otter in his region, and we were fortunate enough to observe one at close range during an aerial transect along the shore of Lac Faribault, in the tundra region, at approxi- mately Latitude 58° 55’ N., Longitude 71° 54’ W. CARIBOU Rangifer -arcticus (Richardson). According to the Eskimos, the tundra area studied sup- ported a heavy population of Barren Ground Caribou in the early 1900’s. However, during all of our 2,476 miles of aerial transects flown at a height of 150 feet, of which 791 miles were over forest-tundra and 1,685 miles were over tundra, we did not see a single animal. We flew an additional thou- sand miles over this same type of country at a height of about 500 feet. I have had considerable opportunity to census White- tailed Deer in relatively heavy stands of deciduous trees after the leaves have fallen and, although some deer are undoubtedly missed they are not too difficult to see even when there is no snow on the ground. Cari- bou should be equally or more easily visible, and I believe that we would have seen them had they been in the tundra. The Payne Lake area is purported to have been one of the most famous caribou-hunting grounds of the northern interior, and at this station were seen many of the rock structures built by Eskimos to resemble persons. Antlers were also found. Most of the structures con- sisted of two or three rocks piled one on top of the other. These were evidently used by the Ungava Bay Eskimos, and those which we saw at Payne Lake were set up along ridges to divert the caribou into a converging point where they could be more easily shot. We also observed similar-type “scaribous” to the northward at the Lake Maryland station. These appeared to have THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 75 been better constructed than those at Payne Lake. They were also observed as we flew along the North Branch of the Payne River, and these may have been the same as those seen by Flaherty (1918) in his westward traverse of the peninsula in 1912. He called them “deer decoys” and described the structures as “groups of large erratic boul- ders, each boulder topped with a smaller one and which when viewed from a distance looked not unlike a herd of grazing deer.” Based on my observations as well as those of others, I believe Flaherty was in error in interpreting those structures as decoys which attracted caribou. Stefansson (1943) says “the Copper Eski- mo called these structures ‘Inuksuit’ mean- ing likeness of men. In hunting the caribou an ambush is made at an angle of two long lines of monuments, the monuments being set up from 50 to 150 yards apart according to the characteristics of the topography. The angle between the two converging lines of stone was usually 14 to 15 degrees.” Bir- kett-Smith (1929) in describing caribou hunting by Eskimos west of Hudson Bay says “converging lines of small stone cairns several kilometers long, are built up, three or four stones being piled one on top of the other. On top of the cairns are placed grass sod with the black soil upwards. Women and children make their way behind the herd and frighten it . in between the rows which are so placed that the animals, on coming over a ridge suddenly find them- selves between them. They then think that the cairns are men and the sod their head ... hence their name ‘Niaqucat’.” Mathias- sen (1933) called these converging lines cari- bou fences. A Literature Cited Birkett-Smith, K. 1929. The Caribou Eski- mos Material and Social Life and their Cultural Position. Gyldendal, Copen- hagen, pp. 110-111. Crissey, W. F., et al. 1949. Waterfowl popu- lations and breeding conditions — sum- mer 1949. United States Department of the Interior, Fish and Wildlife Ser- vice, Special Scientific Report: Wild- life No. 2, pp. 19-23. Flaherty, Robert J. 1918. Two traverses across Ungava Peninsula, Labrador. Geographical Review, Am. Geog. Soc., Vol. VI: 129. 76 THE CANADIAN Gabrielson, Ira N. and Wright, Bruce S. 1951. Notes on the birds of the Fort Chimo, Ungava District. The Can- adian Field-Naturalist, Vol. 127-143. Hantzsch, Bernhard. 1908. (Translation from German by M. B. and R. M. Anderson, 1928). Contribution to the knowledge of the avifauna of North-eastern La- brador. The Canadian Field-Naturalist, Vol. 42 (1). Hildebrand, Henry. 1950. Notes on the birds of the Ungava Bay District. The Can- adian Field-Naturalst, Vol. 64 (2): 55- 67. Hustich, I. 1949. Phytogeographical regions of Labrador. Arctic, Vol. 2 (1): 41. Mathiassen, Therkel. Contributions to the geography of Baffin Land and Mel- ville Peninsula. Rep. 5th Thule Exped. 1921-24. Gyldendal, Copenhagen, Vol. 1, No. 3, Fig. 5, p. 48. Manning, T. H. 1949. The birds of North- eastern Ungava. Hodder and Stough- 65 (4): FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 ton Ltd. as an appendix to “A Summer on Hudson Bay” by Mrs. Tom Man- ning, pp. 155-224. 1946. Bird and mammal notes from the east side of Hudson Bay. The Can- adian Field-Naturalist, Vol. 60(4):71- 85. Polunin, Nicholas. 1949. Arctic Unfolding. Hutchinson and Co., London and New York, pp. 127-135. Polunin, Nicholas and Eklund, Carl. R. 1953. Notes on food habits of waterfowl in the interior of Ungava Peninsula. The Canadian Field-Naturalist, Vol. 67 (3): 134-137. Stefansson, Vilhjalmar. 1943. The Friendly Arctic. The Macmillan Co., New York, p. 401. Turner, Lucien M. 1885. List of the birds of Labrador including Ungava, East Main, Moose and Gulf districts of the Hudson Bay Company, together with the islands of Anticosti. Proc. U. S. National Museum, Vol. VIII: 233-254. “BIRDS OBSERVED AT GOOSE BAY AND ELSEWHERE IN LABRADOR V. C. WYNNE-EDWARDS University of Aberdeen, Aberdeen, Scotland Received for publication March 1, 1954 From July 6 to 11, 1953, when traveling on a grant from the Arctic Institute of North America, I stayed at Goose Bay. Most of the following observations were made in the im- mediate vicinity of the air base, but a few additional notes made elsewhere in Labra- dor at various dates have been added. As would be expected, there is a Canadian-zone element in the fauna of Goose Bay, at the head of Hamilton Inlet, which disappears more or less completely in the 120 miles between there and the outer coast. NIGHTHAWK Chordeiles minor One seen on July 8, pursued by redpolls, and three or more on the evening of the 10th. Austin (1932, p. 150) says ‘“‘a casual visitor.” Not noted by Loomis (1945) or Orr (1948). TREE SWALLOW Iridoprogne bicolor Three were seen on July 9, under condi- tions permitting certain identification. The tree swallow has been recorded north to Davis Inlet (Gabrielson and Wright, 1951, p. 137), and probably Chimo. HERMIT THRUSH Hylocichla guttata I found a hermit thrush singing on July 8, and heard it often subsequently in the same place; the song was unmistakable. There appear to be few records of this spe- cies in the region (Austin, 1932, p. 170; Orr, le.). The olive-backed (H. ustulata) was the common thrush at Goose Bay; the gray-cheek- ed (H. minima) was never heard and appeared to be entirely absent. As would be expected, near the outer coast in southern Labrador, for example at Cartwright (Orr, l.c.) and April-June 1956] THE CANADIAN St. Mary’s (where I found it in July 1934), the gray-cheeked is the predominant thrush. PALM WARBLER Dendroica palmarum On July 8 I found a pair of these warblers in the open black-spruce bog below the R.C.A.F. townsite. They hung around in a persistently agitated manner, as if they had a nest nearby, and at times came within a few feet of me. There was ample time to write down a detailed description of them. The russet crown, yellowish stripe above the eye, grayish cheeks and brown upper parts, and the habit of constantly flicking the tail, identify the species. The throat and up- per breast were bright yellow, faintly spotted with darker color, and the under tail coverts were again bright yellow — a description which perhaps better fits palmarum than hypochrysea, as they are commonly charact- erized. One of them attempted to catch an Erebia butterfly. I have not been able to find any previous record of this bird in Newfoundland Labra- dor. The only other warblers seen at Goose Bay were the blackpoll (D. striata) and Ten- nessee (Vermivora peregrina); both were plentiful. In 1937 I noted the blackpoll as far north as Nain, where its song was still to be heard on August 16; and I saw a male Wilson’s warbler (Wilsonia pusilla) at St. Mary’s in 1934, where it had previously been observed in 1906 by Townsend and Allen (1907, p. 410). WHITE-THROATED SPARROW Zonotrichia albicollis = At Goose Bay the white-throated and white- crowned (Z. leucophrys) sparrows were about equally plentiful, judging by the songs heard; near the outer coast the latter is much the commoner of the two. OTHER EMBERIZINAE Of the other sparrows, Lincoln’s (Melos- piza lincolnii) and the slate-colored junco (Junco hyemalis) were also common at Goose Bay; but I could find only one pair of tree sparrows (Spizella arborea), and no fox spar- rows (Passerella iliaca) nor Savannah spar- rows (Passerculus sandwichensis). In Aug- ust 1937 at Nain I saw tree sparrows feeding FIELD-NATURALIST 77 fledged young on the 16th and heard a fox sparrow singing still on the 17th; white- crowned sparrows were common there also. On July 9, 1934, at Niger Sound, near Battle Harbour, I found a fox sparrow’s nest with three eggs, about three feet from the ground in a thicket of stunted spruce; the nest was composed of spruce twigs, lined with fine grasses and black fibers. SLATE-COLORED JUNCO Junco hyemalis The following curious fact is perhaps worth recording. On July 18, 1937, I was on one of the Torngat mountains rising on the north side of Nachvak fiord, the height of which by aneroid was 3200 feet; and during the whole time I was at the summit taking pho- tographs and building a cairn, about twenty minutes, a junco stayed anxiously around, often only a few feet from me. Stray indi- viduals have previously been recorded even farther north, for example in southern Baffin Island (Taverner, 1934, p. 128), but for a bird whose normal range extends only to the limit of trees this bleak frost-shattered mountain top, almost entirely devoid of ve- getation, seems a strange dwelling place. ADDITIONAL SPECIES OBSERVED In addition to the birds already mentioned the robin (Turdus migratorius), ruby-crowned kinglet (Regulus calendula), common redpoll (Carduelis flammea) and white-winged cross- bill (Loxia leucoptera) were common at Goose Bay. I saw no chickadees there, though Parus hudsonicus was found at Nain and Battle Harbour in August 1937. REFERENCES 1932. The birds of Newfound- Mem. Nuttall Orn. Cl. No. 7. Austin, O.L., Jr. land Labrador. 229 p. Gabrielson, I.N. and B. Wright. 1951. Notes on the birds of the Fort Chimo, Ungava district. Can. Field Nat. 65:127-140. Loomis, E.G. 1945. Notes on the birds of north- ern Newfoundland and Labrador. Auk. 62:234- 241. Orr, Virginia. 1948. Notes on the birds of Sand- wich Bay and vicinity, Newfoundland Labra- dor. Auk. 65:220-225. Taverner, P.A. 1934. Birds of the Eastern Arctic. In “Canada’s Eastern Arctic,” Dept. of the In- terior, Ottawa, p. 113-128. Townsend, C.W. and G.M. Allen. Labrador. 1907. Birds of Proc. Boston Soc. N. H. 22:277-428 78 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIS7 A [Vol. 70 ~ DRUMMOND’S VOLE IN MANITOBA STUART CRIDDLE Aweme, Treesbank, Manitoba Received for publication May 2, 1955 My first introduction to Drummond’s vole Microtus pennsylvanicus drummondii (Audu- bon and Bachman) was made under striking- ly different physiographical conditions to those which prevail in the district today. spring and early summer evenings the voices of countless numbers of bullfrogs, toads and salamanders pouring forth their nuptial songs of love from every pond made music which was perhaps a trifle harsh yet deci- At that time, 1882, all the lower areas had water in them. Some were merely small ponds, or pools, only a few inches deep, while others in proportion were almost small lakes covering many acres and up to three feet or more in depth. All these ponds have long since dried up and the water-loving animals and plants which then inhabited them have vanished from the district. Many species of ducks, grebes, coots, rails and shore birds, terns, bobolinks and blackbirds nested in or close about the ponds and a few sandhill cranes and Canada geese nested within a few miles of us. Muskrat houses dotted all the large ponds and odd beaver lodges were present in a few. Mosquitoes swarmed in tens of millions and during the dedly pleasing in its cheerful simplicity. Today the ponds in which we learned to swim are gone and instead of water the low places now hold dense stands of balsam pop- lar and trembling aspen. Some of the trees are twenty inches or more through and over sixty feet tall. Mice were also plentiful in those early days, from the luxuriant growth at water edge to the sparsely covered prairie uplands. It may have been one of these small voles which first awoke my interest in mam- malogy. Voles are a fighting species and when cornered will tackle anything regarless of size. I love pluck and this may have drawn my attention to these most interesting and pugnacious little creatures. April-June 1956] THE CANADIAN. DISTRIBUTION IN MANITOBA ' With the exception of two small areas, one across the northern boundary of the province and the other close along the Onta- rio-Manitoba border, Drummond’s vole is found in all suitable parts of the province. BRIEF DESCRIPTION Drummond’s vole (Fig. 1) is a strong pug- nacious little animal, well fitted for life under widely different climatic and food conditions. Its winter fur is dense, long and soft but in summer it grows much shorter and is somewhat rough. The ears are round- ed, medium size and in winter are well pro- tected by the long fur about them. Eyes are deep set, black and small. Legs are strong, well formed and rather short. The tail is short and tapers from base to tip. COLOR Drummond’s vole, like many Manitoba mammals, birds and insects, varies very greatly in color and size, so that only a general color description can be given. The upper parts are dark gray over-washed with a rusty or deep brown which tends to lighten down the sides. The belly is a clouded white, the dark underfur showing strongly through the white. I have specimens which are a rich rusty brown, others a dark gray lightly washed with different shades of brown and still others quite light gray with a yellowish, or even pinkish, tinge to the longer fur or guard hairs. Usually the specimens taken from the drier uplands are grayer in color and perhaps a trifle smaller than those from the swampy lowlands. But this does not al- ‘ FIELD-NATURALIST 79 ways hold true, as I have taken very light specimens from swamps and quite dark in- dividuals from the prairies. However, speci- mens from the Manitoba prairies are deci- dedly lighter with more rusty brown about them than are those from the northern re- gions such as Gillam and Churchill. The lat- ter perhaps average slightly larger than their southern relations. MEASUREMENTS In an effort to obtain a nearly accurate scale of measurements for the Aweme dis- trict I secured and measured a large num- ber of fully mature voles and from them selected the measurements of twenty males and twenty females for the table below (Table 1). I have different specimens in my collection from distant parts of the pro- vince to enable a table of worthwhile aver- ages being made, so have selected fully mature specimens to represent the districts from which they came. By doing this I feel that a much better record of size is obtained than if I had used a series of specimens regardless of age or sex. It is interesting to compare my records with those given by Vernon Bailey in his masterly work, A Biological Survey of North Dakota, (No. 49 in the series “North Ameri- can Fauna,” 1926). For the subspecies drummondii Bailey records the following averages: total length, 145.0 mm; length of tail vertebrae, 39.0 mm; length of hind foot, 17.8 mm. For M. p. pennsylvanicus the aver- age lengths are: total, 171.0 mm; tail ver- tebrae, 46.0 mm; hind foot, 21.2 mm. Table 1. — MEASUREMENTS OF MATURE VOLES FROM MANITOBA Length (mm) No. of Tail Hind Weight District specimens Sex Total vertebrae foot (grams) Aweme 20 3 197.0-151.0 46.0- 40.5 21.0 - 17.5 45.5 - 30.2 Av. 162.8 Av. 43.0 Av. 17.8 Av. 37.2 Aweme 20 2 178.0-144.0 51.5-41.0 21.5 -17.5 49.9 - 30.2 Av. 159.0 Av. 45.5 Av. 18.3 Av. 35.9 Souris 1 Q 186.0 49.5 ed 53.6 Tiger Hills 1 3 173.0 47.5 18.5 41.2 South Junction i 3 161.0 50.4 20.5 32.5 Sandy Lands 1 é 174.1 49.3 21.5 Not recorded Hilbre 1 3 172.9 46.9 17.8 42.5 Gillam 1 3 163.5 34.0 20.0 Not recorded Churchill 1 ES 170.0 44.0 21.0 Not recorded Churchill 1 3 164.0 39.0 20.0 Not recorded 80 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST BREEDING AND YOUNG When voles live well away from man and his farming activities, unseasonable weather may cause them to advance or retard the breeding season by two or three weeks in the spring time and by nearly as much in the fall of the year. However, during normal seasons sexual activities commence in either late March or early April and continue without intermission until towards the end of September. While I have found young of different ages all through the winter, these have been from grain stacks, straw piles or areas adjacent to farm buildings. I have no record of young being found on the open prairies or lowlands during the winter, so that it is quite evident that when living inder natural conditions Drummond’s vole does not breed during the colder months. Females which have wintered over, and are therefore fully adult animals, have from three to four litters a season, occasionally five, with an average of approximately six young to a litter. The young females of the first litter breed twice before the close of the season and those of the second litter once. These juvenile females average four young to a litter, so that the adult mother and her daughters may produce a family of between fifty and sixty young in a normal breeding season of six months. At birth the young are a dark pink. They are blind, toothless and naked, and have very short legs and tail. They are able to squirm about and utter low squeaky sounds. They are large feeders and grow rapidly. As soon as they are covered with short fur they leave the nest to scatter well away from each other. The urge to abandon the natal nest as soon as possible is inherited by many small animals and there is no questioning the fact that by doing so they have a much better chance of survival than they would have if huddled together in the nest a day longer than necessary. NESTS Usually there is very little difference in the relative size and comfort of the nests made for summer or winter use, although the places in which they are made does vary greatly. Summer nests are usually found beneath protective coverings of one sort or another, or else underground in an aban- doned pocket gopher, ground squirrel or badger hole, while the winter nest is more often than not made on the surface beneath [Vol. 70 the snow. Dead grass of the previous sea- son’s growth which has become slightly softened by exposure is preferred and while that used for lining may be either finely shredded or cut up, it is often left as gathered from the plant. Softer materials such as cotton from prairie anemone, thistle down, feathers or animal fur are seldom used in lining the nest. Occasionally when there are ample supplies of food and nesting materials close at hand the nest will be quite large and well made, but when such ma- terials are scarce it is a flimsy structure made from any dry material within reach. Such nests are usually temporary affairs used only until the food close about them has become exhausted. The voles will then move on to a new position a few yards ahead and make a new nest. This nomadic life beneath the snow may continue all win- ter and by spring a long chain of nests will be exposed as the snow retreats, showing the large amount of work a few voles have done during the cold months of winter. The nest has several useful functions. First of all it is used as a natal chamber. In the summer it keeps the voles dry and comfortable and in winter it prevents con- tact with the snow. When two or three voles are closely snuggled together in sleep their body heat and long soft fur keep them comfortably warm through the coldest nights of winter without the aid of a well-made nest. RELATIVE ABUNDANCE The first object of this part of the study was to determine, if possible, the extent of the violent fluctuations which are known to take place among our small mammals every few years and to find out if these fluctuations occurred in periodic sequence or not. To secure information on these questions I decided first to keep daily re- cords of all the mammals killed on the farm and adjacent lands, secondly to examine those species thought to be beneficial with- out injuring them and thirdly to maintain a close watch on those living in the wilds. My original objectives were soon extended to include relative age, sex and the number of young carried by pregnant females. When started, this seemed to be a simple plan for gaining the information wanted, but it was soon realized that there were many unavoid- able conditions constantly cropping up which could not be controlled and which affected the seasonal activities and catch to a large April-June 1956] THE CANADIAN degree. What was hoped to be a simple undertaking turned to be a most complex study. Factors such as sudden climatic changes, loss from diseases and predaceous animals and occasional winter rains and heavy thaws which iced over their food, all affected the populations of the different species by an undetermined amount during the twenty-three years of the study. Included in the 22,997 mammals recorded during the study are 6575 Drummond’s voles. These, like all the specimens, are catalogued in the following order: adult male, juvenile male, adult female, and juvenile female. The object in making these age distinctions was to try and determine the percentage of adults to young and to determine the ratio of one sex to the other. Besides giving this in- formation, Table 2 gives the totals for each year and shows the great disparity in these totals. While no smooth rhythm can be found in the figures given, there are slight signs of a ten-year cycle having taken place. FIELD-NATURALIST 81 There are, however, far stronger indications that when conditions are favorable the voles increase very rapidly and when reverse con- ditions prevail they decline just as fast. Table 3 records the greatest monthly catch for each year of the study. From Table 4 it will be seen that Drummond’s vole has from one to nine young at birth. The largest num- ber of pregnant females were captured in August and the most frequent size of litter was from four to six. FOOD In an effort to find out which one of the many plants eaten by Drummond’s vole was preferred I soon realized that such a plant must have a wide distribution and be able to thrive in a majority of the localities which were inhabited by the vole. After examining a large number of winter and summer feeding grounds I found that the highly adaptable and widely distributed blue grass Poa pratensis met these requirements Table 2. — DRUMMOND’S VOLE TAKEN IN MANITOBA, 1928 - 1950. Year Adult Juvenile Adult Juvenile Total Rainfall (in.) Remarks a a Q Q April to October S23 0... 5: 151 511 169 315 1146 16.28 Abundant MOZO ee... 66 75 59 82 282 8.39 Common 1930) 26.5. 29 23 30 21 103 12.50 Scarce OBI 2, cee. 29 17 33 17 96 13.13 Scarce 1932) cian. 65 26 47 34 172 10.60 Scarce POBBe Mosc: 39 21 43 29 132 14.38 Searce 1934 ......... 20 11 24 13 68 7.80 Rare M935; esi. 114 86 135 118 453 18.02 Very common O36) 6 ccesce: 131 87 144 138 500 10.40 Very common 128 es 128 120 208 161 617 17.61 Abundant NQ38 oeelecc 29 27 36 27 119 8.55 Scarce W939) 22.0..05.. 69 68 81 72 290 14.10 Common 1940 .......... 42, 37 44 52 175 16.12 Rather scarce 2 94 158 102 146 500 16.64 Very common 5). 27 54 26 54 161 12.23 Rather scarce 110) eee 48 44 40 52 184 16.72 Fairly common 1944 ...... 84 134 170 128 516 17.63 Abundant 1945 .......... 51 35 62 39 187 13.28 Fairly common 1946 ......... 47 56 61 69 233 11.35 Common 1947 .000...... 59 60 69 73 261 11.97 Common 1948 .......... 42 42 58 42 184 14.10 Fairly common 1949 .......... 42 18 30 32 122 9.50 Scarce ith 22 14 20 18 74 19.86 Rare 1428 1724 1691 1732 6575 3152 3423 6575 82 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Table 3. — GREATEST MONTHLY CATCH OF DRUMMOND’S VOLES TAKEN IN MANITOBA, . 1928-1950 Year Month Adult ¢ Juvenile 9? Adult 9 Juvenile ¢ Total O28 ASOD Ulises whee 66 155 58 152 431 O29) GAME A es. etosscocs es 4 37 9 32 82 193 0RESeptitn. ese 12 16 14 13 55 TG BIE SXEVNES, Gedssscnpocassccnbos 10 10 5 8 33 OSI ASD tape css ca 22 15 23 20 80 POSS AUS hse ae: 10 15 12 24 61 1034 MoAie he, eh 7 3 5 6 gegen 1935) BOC ese 38 44 75 61 218 1986ie AUSs Henke eees 21 27 22 44 114 OST miSepti cee. 52 61 63 87 263 1938) “Sept: a... 28..288 13 18 11 18 60 1939 4Septi«..86. enw 53 64 64 67 248 1940 Sept. wu... 8 18 12 25 63 19ST OCR ie See 59 97 57 89 302 L942 VOCt bss 2A 7 20 8 18 53 O43 eSep ttre. b ee 27 32 24 37 120 1944 ‘“Septirkastionietis 44 97 71 84 296 QA AMIS is cctusunenc tassios 17 16 19 15 67 1946 Sept. oe. 25 38 30 41 134 OA a SOD Uy ere ee ite! 22 33 26 40 121 O43 CSeDti ies) Nec 4 12 ul 12 35 TES )21.0 m/e aR 9 6 5 10 30 ODO AUG Recerca eek 6 7 8 8 29 536 841 628 911 2916 Ocal eres 1377 1539 2916 Table 4. — FREQUENCY OF PREGNANT FEMALES ACCORDING TO THE MONTH OF CAPTURE AND THE NUMBER OF EMBRYOS IN THE UTERUS. Month of Females carrying Total Total capture 1 2 3 4 5 6 q 8 9 females embryos embryos Mareh ........ 0 0 0 i 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 Aprilia... 0 0 0 3 8 2 2 1 0 16 86 May 11087 0 0 0 1 3 7 6 0 0 17 103 June ...000 0 0 0 2 2 4 3 2 0 13 719 SELLY, 0 0 1 4 3 5 0 2 1 16 89 August ...... 0 2 12 24 PAT! 27 6 3 0 101 499 September . 1 2 9 14 18 18 1 1 0 64 301 October 0 il 2 5 5 24 0 0 0 15 65 November . 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 December . 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 9 tae | ° a ps) _— =" fo) N o1 ol TS fo) fon) fo) fos) = co vo} = iw) ASS lor) — NO (vt) =] April-June 1956] much better than any other native plant. It commences to grow first thing in the spring, makes strong growth in the fall and remains partly green all winter. Moreover it provides good coverage and nesting material. Be- sides blue grass there are many other spe- cies of grasses, sedges and herbaceous plants which provide green food during the grow- ing season and a few persist through the win- ter. Besides green food there are many other things eaten, fer Drummond’s vole is a truly omnivorous feeder. Among the more important of these are seeds which are eaten whenever procurable. Many species of insects are especially important during prolonged periods of hot dry weather when they provide moisture which cannot be se- cured from other sources at such times. Wild fruits are eaten in season. Fleshy root-stalks and near-surface tubers provide much winter food, and on the prairie the three flowered avens Geum triflorum is im- portant. I have known large patches of this interesting plant to be eaten over so close- ly that it was all but killed. Flesh and toadstools are eaten but they are of little value. Deer antlers and bits of bone are gnawed, probably for the mineral salts they contain. Usually bark is only eaten during the winter and then in small amounts, but when the plants which normally produce an abundance of food fail to mature or become iced over by freezing rain or melting snow the voles are forced to feed on bark. At such times they may damage valuable shrubs and young trees. However unless one has had wide acquaintance with their normal winter habits it is almost impossible to de- termine whether the mischief has been done by this vole, Microtus, or the red-backed vole, Clethrionomys, which always depends largely on bark for its winter food and in most cases is responsible for such damage. While Drummond’s vole will eat bark from small trees it prefers young shoots or twigs which can either be cut off close to the ground or from older wood. The twig is slowly drawn forward as the bark is eaten. Once a stripped portion gets in the way it is cut off and soon a neat little pile of stripped wood is built up. These piles can often be found among prairie rose and sand cherry bushes in the spring. Tall seeding grass and ripening grain stems are cut down in a similar manner; the vole moves with THE CANADIAN IIELD-NATURALIST 83 it to some protective cover under which the stalk is cut into short lengths until the head is reached and the seeds eaten from it. As far as I know this peculiar practice of cutting the useless wood or straw into short lengths is only done by Microtus or I have failed to find signs of other species having done so. Of the many introduced grasses, awnless brome Bromus inermis and crested wheat grass Agropyron cristatum are preferred and the former has become an important food plant over the vast area it has spread. Alfalfa is greatly favored by the vole. When abundant they may severely damage grow- ing crops of this rich legume and may feed exclusively in the stack during the winter. Grain of all kinds is eaten in preference to most other forms of food and I have seen severe damage done to swathed and stooked grain which had been left in the field over winter. SWIMMING In the early days while hunting about the nearby ponds we occasionally noticed one of these voles take to the water, and as they swam so well they were called water voles. Probably because there was so much rank growth about the ponds and the water was shallow we never noticed them dive be- low the surface. However one day while walking along the Assiniboine river I saw a small animal dive from the bank and go down a foot or more, then swim like a silver streak for six or eight feet before coming to the surface. I mistook it for a rare water shrew and in my eagerness to secure it for my collection nearly fell head first into the river. On capturing it I got well bitten and discoverd that I had only cap- tured a Drummond’s vole. Since then I have seen several others plunge into the water and it is quite evident that they are as much at home in the water as they are on dry land. FIGHTING Drummond’s vole is a pugnacious little animal that will fight to the last gap in an effort to save its life when cornered. I have often seen one catch a dog by the nose or lip and hang on like grim death and one can seldom handle an adult without getting severely bitten. Among themselves they fight like little demons using both tooth and claw and most old males show 84 THE CANADIAN scars received in battles they have fought. While hawks, owls and crows catch them with ease, gulls are often driven off by adults as the following incident will show. One morning while working on the land I saw an old male thrown out by the plow. He at once dashed for cover but was spot- ted by a following gull who settled and ran for the vole, the vole in turn charged at the gull which retreated in haste. Other gulls quickly came down and soon formed a tight circle about the vole who stood with scis- soring teeth and threatening demeanor, daring any one of them to approach, and when one attempted to do so he would rush at it like a little ball of fury and drive it back. This went on until the gulls gave up and departed. Then the vole quickly bur- rowed under a nearby clod to safety. ECONOMIC STATUS Like many species of small rodents Drum- mond’s vole prefers seeds, especially culti- vated grain to all other kinds of food. While many of the seeds have little value or are gathered from noxious weeds such seeds provide only a small amount of the food consumed when cultivated grain can be had. A few years ago I looked over a large field of wheat that was surrounded by brush and heavy grass. The field had been swathed rather late and heavy rains had prevented further work on the field that fall, Snow covered the crop in early winter and spring moisture prevented the farmer from work- ing on the field until mid-June. By then the crop was so badly damaged by drum- mondi and deer that it was not worth har- vesting. The voles had made hundreds of nests, had cut a great deal of the straw into short lengths, eaten a few grains from a head and discarded the rest. The waste of grain was terrific, many, many times the amount that was eaten. I have occasionally found damage done to alfalfa and other grow- ing crops and, under certain adverse winter conditions small orchard trees and flowering shrubs and plants may be severely damaged, FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 or killed back beneath the snow. In the northern parts of their range be- yond the bounds of agriculture, Drummond’s vole takes its place with many other small rodents in feeding valuable fur bearing ani- mals, also hawks and owls, which would hunt more important game if there were no small rodents to be caught. Therefore we have to place Drummond’s vole in both beneficial and harmful categories. However, due to its destructiveness to agricultural products it must be classed among the many minor pests of southern Manitoba. CONTROL When in sufficient numbers the many species of predators, weasels, owls, hawks and crows with the help of a few others, will take care of the natural increase of most of our small rodents. However there are times when conditions are so favorable for reproduction that all the predators have little effect on their enormous numbers. When this occurs considerable damage will be done unless preventive measures are taken. Perhaps the best method for control is to destroy the breeding places adjacent to gardens, young orchards or anything that should have special protection, by keeping grass and weeds cut and by removing all trash from the area. When this cannot be done, a few post holes between two and three feet deep scattered about will help. Such holes with a few shallow pans of poi- soned grain well protected from birds and weather will take care of most small rodents until winter sets in. They will not, however, give sufficient protection after the ground becomes covered by snow aS some voles travel long distances beneath it and may end up in a herbaceous garden or orchard of young trees. Trampling the snow well down around the small trees will prevent much damage, but special trees and shrubs should have wire cloth or heavy paper wrapped closely about them to a height of a foot or more depending on the depth of the snow. : April-June 1956] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIS1 85 CHRISTMAS BIRD CENSUS FOR 1955 West Middle Sable, N.S. (West Middle Sable, Louis Head and beach, Little Harbour, Hemeon Head, Matthews Lake; all within 7.5 mi. of school in W. Mid. Sable; mixed woods, largely coniferous, 53%; ocean shore, 9%; sheltered brakish water, 16%; sand beach, 9%; scattered rural community, 13%.) — Dec. 28, 1955, 7.45 am. to 4.45 p.m.; 95% cloudy, temp. 21° to 26°; wind N to NE, 5-10 m.p.h.; ground covered with 9 in. snow, less near ocean; ponds frozen, extensive ice on sheltered brackish water. 2 observers, 1 at feeding-station and 1 in field party. Hours afield 9 on foot; party miles, 16 on foot. Horned Grebe, 1; European Cormorant, 78; Canada Goose, 2400; Black Duck, 279; American Golden-eye, 35; Buffle-head, 6; Old- squaw, 1; Common Eider, 26; White-winged Seoter, 1; Surf Scoter, 1; American Mergan- ser, 3; Ruffed Grouse, 1; Great Black-backed Gull, 13; Herring Gull, 230; Hairy Wood- pecker, 2; Horned Lark, 10; Canada Jay, 1; Blue Jay, 3; Raven, 1; Crow, 19; Black-capped Chickadee, 6; European Starling, 7; Bronzed Grackle, 1; Cowbird, 3; Slate-colored Junco, 26; White-throated Sparrow, 1; Song Spar- row, 1; Snow Bunting, 63. Total, 28 species; 3219 individuals. Also seen in area in count period: Sharp-shinned Hawk, Great Horned Owl, Brown-capped Chickadee, Robin, North- ern Shrike, Myrtle Warbler, Evening Gros- beak, Tree Sparrow, Fox Sparrow. —Harrison F. Lewis and Laura N. Lewis. Hudson Heights, Hudson and Como, Que. (Same area as in 1953). — Jan. 2, 1956, 7.30 am. to 4.30 p.m.; sunny; temp. —10° to 10°; wind N, 6 m.p.h. increasing to 15 in p-m.; 10 in. snow; all water frozen. 23 Observers in 9 parties. Total party hours, 43 (16 on foot, 3 by car, 14 on skis); total party miles, 82 (26 on foot, 27 by car, 29 on skis). Ruffed Grouse, 3; Great Horned Owl, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 14; Downy Woodpecker, 7; Canada Jay, 1; Blue Jay, 80; Black-cap- ped Chickadee, 137; White-breasted Nut- hatch, 19; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 4; Brown Creeper, 1; American Robin, 2; Northern Shrike, 1; Common Starling, 59; House Sparrow, 66; Evening Grosbeak, 150 (32 + 118 est.); Pine Grosbeak, 31; Common Red- poll, 342; Slate-colored Junco, 6; Tree Spar- row, 5; Snow Bunting, 35. Total, 20 species; 977 individuals. Seen in area: Dec. 30, Ame- rican Goldfinch, 1; Jan. 1, Snowy Owl, 1; Jan. 3, Pileated Woodpecker, Red-shouldered Hawk. —Vi. Bryan, Mr. and Mrs. E.D. Croll, Mr. and Mrs. R.H. Cundill, H. Cundill, R. Cundill, Mr. and Mrs. G.A. Golden, A. Grubert, C. Hope, B. Knox, A.R. Lepingwell, Mrs. D.L. Macaulay, D. Macauly, R. MacDuff, H. Har- pole, Vi. Mullan, Mrs. G. Riley, May Riley, Mr. and Mrs. H.V.L. Peterson, Mrs. R.W. Wright (compiler). Montreal, Que. (Mount Royal, St. Helen’s Island, Nun’s Island, Grove Hill, north and south shores of St. Lawrence River from Mercier Bridge to Victoria Bridge). — Dec. 26, 1955, 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m.; mostly over- cast; temp. 9° to 16°; wind SW, av. 14 m.p.h.; 8-9 inches of snow; heavy shore and brash ice on river. 24 observers in 6 parties. Total party hours, 32. Total party miles, 81 (25 on foot, 54 by car, 2 by boat). Mallard, 2; Black Duck, 175 (part. est.); Am. Golden-eye, 297 (part. est.); White- winged Scoter, 6; Am. Merganser, 62; Spar- row Hawk, 2; Ring-necked Pheasant, 20; Glaucous Gull, 1; Great Black-backed Gull, 3; Herring Gull, 18; Great Horned Owl, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 11; Downy Woodpecker, 10; Horned Lark, 7; Crow, 2; Black-capped Chickadee, 48; White-breasted Nuthatch, 5; Brown Creeper, 8; Am. Robin, 14; Cedar Waxwing, 35; Gray Shrike, 3; Starling, 84; House Sparrow, 198 (part. est.); Pine Gros- beak, 2; Common Redpoll, 10; Pine Siskin, 2; Snew Bunting, 75 (est.). Total: 27 spe- cies; about 1,101 individuals. Seen in area within week: Screech Owl, 2. —A. Bain, Miss S. Boyer, J.D. Cleghorn, Mrs. H.E. Chalk, T.B. Cooper, J. Cooper, A.D. Dawson, P.H. Du Boulay, J. Evans, Miss G. Hibbard, B. Holmes, A.W. Kelly, J. Lowther, I. McLaren, Mr. and Mrs. G.H. Montgomery, J. Montgomery, Mrs. P. Roberts, J.W. Robin- son, J. Rolland, D. Ryan, Dr. D.E. Sergeant, M. Seymour, Miss W. Wilson (Province of Quebec Society for the Protection of Birds). Quebec, Que. (Same area as in 1954, Ste. Foy to Quebec Bridge, Quebec seaport to Island of Orleans bridge, Plains of Abraham and Quebec Zoological Garden; town suburbs 25%, fields 17%, coniferous forests 5%, de- ciduous woods 8%, mixed woodlands 35%, shores 10%). — Dec. 26, 1955, 7:15 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.; cloudy, temp. 3° to 15°; wind NW, 6-8 m.p.h.; 14-18 inches of snow on ground; small rivers frozen, large moving icefields on St. Lawrence river. 23 observers in 5 parties. Total party hours, 29 (26 on 86 THE CANADIAN foot, 3 by car). Total party miles, 67 (27 on foot, 40 by car). Ruffed Grouse, 4; Herring Gull, 25; Ice- land Gull, 9; Great Black-backed Gull, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 4; Downy Woodpecker, 4; Blue Jay, 7; Black-capped Chickadee, 19; White-breasted Nuthatch, 1; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 1; Brown Creeper, 1; Robin, 12; Cedar Waxwing, 32; Starling, 129; House Sparrow, 528; Bronzed Grackle, 1; Evening Grosbeak, 24; Pine Grosbeak, 90; Common Redpoll, 121; Slate-colored Junco, 1; Tree Sparrow, 6. Swamp Sparrow, 1. Total: 22 species, 1,022 individuals. Seen in area: Dec. 25, Gray Shrike, 1; Dec. 27, Am. Crow, 2 and White winged Crossbill, 1; Dec. 28, Glaucous Gull, 1; Dec. 29, Arctic Three-toed Woodpecker, 1.) —B. Asselin, Miss G. Boucher, Miss P. Bouf- fard, Miss M. Bourret, Miss G. Cadrin, Miss G. Carrier, R. Cayouette (compiler), R. Du- mais, Mr. and Mrs. J.-M. Gauvreau, P. Ger- main, P. Hamel, P. Leclerc, L. Lemieux, R. Lepage, G. Lepage, L.-A. Lord, Miss P. Pi- card, Miss L. Samson, R. St-Laurent, Miss R. Vallée, Miss T. Vézina, P. Vézina (Club des Ornithologues). St. Félicien, Lake St. John region, Que. — Dec. 26, 1955; clear, sunny; temp. 18°. One observer. 6% miles on foot (2 miles in town). Black-capped Chickadee, 3; Starling, 11; House Sparrow, 203; Pine Grosbeak, 2; Red- poll, 27. Total, 5 species, 246 individuals. —Edmund A. Welch. Brockville, Ont. (Brockville to five miles west along the St. Lawrence River). — De- cember 18, 1955, 8 a.m. to 4.30 p.m. Weather from 8 a.m. to 1 p.m. continuous light snow; from 1 p.m. to 4.30 p.m. cloudy, intermittent snow, some sunny periods. Temp. 25° to 32°; wind light; depth of snow on level 4” to 5”; creeks and marshes frozen; river open. Black Duck, 2; Greater Scaup, 377 +; Com- mon Golden-eye, 68; Herring Gull, 54; Pi- leated Woodpecker, 3; Hairy Woodpecker, 2; Downy Woodpecker, 3; Blue Jay, 1; Black- capped Chickadee, 11; White-breasted Nut- hatch, 4; Brown Creeper, 2; Starling, 231; House Sparrow, 152. Total, 13 species; about 910 individuals. —David Hurrie. Carleton Place, Ont. (A circle of 72-mile radius centered on Bridge St. at the Missis- sippi River). — December 31, 1955, 10 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.; overcast, occasional sun; wind W, light; temp. 4° to 10°; six inches of FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 snow. 23 observers in 6 parties. Total party hours, 34; total party miles, 218% (18% on foot, 210 by car). American Goldeneye, 40; Hooded Mer- ganser, 1; American Merganser, 7; Ruffed Grouse, 8; Ring-necked Pheasant, 3; Rock Dove, 161; Hairy Woodpecker, 6; Downy Woodpecker, 7; Blue Jay, 30; Common Ra- ven, 1; American Crow, 6; Black-capped Chickadee, 52; White-breasted Nuthatch, 9; Brown Creeper, 1; Northern Shrike, 6; Star- ling, 158; House Sparrow, 359; Evening Grosbeak, 108; Purple Finch, 2; Pine Gros- beak, 16; Redpoll, 199; Pine Siskin, 2; American. Goldfinch, 1; Tree Sparrow, 2; Snow Bunting, 739. Total species, 25; total individuals, 1,924. —John Bird, A.E. Bourguignon, Howard M. Brown, Miss S. Clark, Charlotte Dill, Leonard Elliott, D.A. Findlay, D.D. Findlay, D.G. Find- lay, D.H. Findlay, D.K. Findlay, Mrs. D.K. Findlay, George E. Findlay (compiler), Janet Findlay, Sheila Findlay, W.F. Findlay, W.R. Findlay, Bettey Halpenny, E.S. MclIlwain and MclIlwain, Jr., Eric L. Mills, E.H. Ritchie, Michael Spencer. Hamilton, Ont. (Same area as in former years). — Dec. 26;, 7:30 a.m. to 7:30 p.m; cloudy with sunny intervals; temp. 27° to 17°; wind varying from W to NE to WNW, 3 to 8 m.p.h.; ground bare in open, with snow in woods; marshes frozen, harbor partly open. 42 observers in 22 parties. Total party hours, 125 (111 on foot, 14 by car), total party miles, 363 (140 on foot, 223 by car). Common Loon, 1; Horned Grebe, 2; Great Blue Heron, 1; Blue Goose, 1; Mallard, 113; Black Duck, 128; Canvas-back, 17; Greater Seaup, 303; Lesser Scaup, 10; Am. Golden- eye, 145; Buffle-head, 16; Old-squaw, 5; White-winged Scoter, 4; Ruddy Duck, 1; Am. Merganser, 512; Red-breasted Merganser, 1; Cooper’s Hawk, 2; Red-tailed Hawk, 27; Rough-legged Hawk, 3; Sparrow Hawk, 14; Ruffed Grouse, 3; European Partridge, 4; Ring-necked Pheasant, 36; Glaucous Gull, 3; Great Black-backed Gull, 198; Herring Gull, 6,400; Ring-billed Gull, 7; Screech Owl, 7; Great Horned Owl, 6; Snowy Owl, 1; Long- eared Owl, 5; Belted Kingfisher, 1; Yellow- shafted Flicker, 1; Red-headed Woodpecker, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 14; Downy Wood- pecker, 55; Horned Lark, 4; Blue Jay, 97; Am. Crow, 74; Black-capped Chickadee, 274; White-breasted Nuthatch, 18; Red-breasted Nuthach, 10; Brown Creeper, 25; Winter Wren, 2; Carolina Wren, 2; Mockingbird, 1; April-June 1956] Am. Robin, 3; Hermit Thrush, 1; Golden- crowned Kinglet, 12; Cedar Waxwing, 34; Northern Shrike, 5; Common Starling, 2,900; House Sparrow, 1,400; Eastern Meadowlark, 2; Purple Grackle, 7; Cardinal, 86; Evening Grosbeak, 2; Purple Finch, 6; Pine Gros- beak, 11; Common Redpoll, 34; Pine Siskin, 780; Am. Goldfinch, 51; Red Crossbill, 35; White-winged Crossbill, 11; Eastern Towhee, 1; Slate-colored Junco, 731; Am. Tree Spar- row, 586; Field Sparrow, 2; White-throated Sparrow, 4; Swamp Sparrow, 4; Song Spar- row, 34; Snow Bunting, 2. Total, 72 species; about 15,300 individuals. Also seen in count period: Bald Eagle, Tufted Titmouse and White-crowned Sparrow. —Frank Bell, R.D.F. Bourne, Dennis Brooks, Miss Stella Brown, Don Bucknell, W.I. Campbell, Kenneth J. Cox, Robert Curry, James A. N. Dowall, W.A.T. Gilmour, Leslie A. Gray, Ian Halladay, Peter Hamel, John Hencher, David Hick, George Holland, An- gus B. Jackson, Miss Margaret Lamb, Thom- son Lawrie, Robert MacLaren, Miss Eleanor Malcolm, Julius Mannheimer, C. Douglas Mc- Callum, George O. McMillan, George Meyers, Glen Meyers, Mr. and Mrs. John J. Miller, Mrs. Carl Morden, John W. Moule, Albert B. Nind, George W. North (compiler), Laurel E. North, Mr. and Mrs. C.L. Powell, David K. Powell, Robert K. Sargeant, Douglas Smith, Robert Stamp, Miss Laura Stewart, Miss Mabel Watson, J. Harvey Williams (Hamilton Nature Club). Huntsville, Ont. — December 18, 1955, 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.; temp. 20° at 8 a.m., falling to 10° in the afternoon; cloudy in morning, clear in afternoon; calm; all small bodies of still water frozen, rivers and larger lakes partly open; 15 inches of snow. 18 observers in 8 parties. Common Golden-eye, 7; Ruffed Grouse, 3; Herring Gull, 1; Betled Kingfisher, 1; Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 19; Downy Woodpecker, 12; Canada Jay, 1; Blue Jay, 65; Black-capped Chickadee, 100; White- breasted Nuthatch, 16; Red-breasted Nut- hatch, 12; Northern Shrike, 1; Starling, 103; English Sparrow, 126; Evening Grosbeak, 92; Pine Grosbeak, 12; Redpoll, 111; Siskin, 36; White-winged Crossbill, 27;- Snow Bunting, 80. Total, 21 species; 826 individuals. —M. and Mrs. Jack Bird, A. Conway, P. Con- way, Mr. and Mrs. E. Farnsworth, D. Flet- cher, J. Kay, Mrs. Langridge, A.C. May, N. May, Mrs. Mills, B. McAlpine, Mr. and Mrs. E.G.R. Rogers, R. Rutter, Mr. and Mrs. W. Waters (The Huntsville Nature Club). Kingston, Ont. (A 714-mile radius centering on Macdonald Park, and including Cataraqui THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 87 River and Creek, shores of Lake Ontario and St. Lawrence River. Wolfe Island was not covered this year since the lake was frozen unusually early and the ice was still unsafe. Farmland 23%, urban centers 6%, marshes 15%, water 23%, mixed woodlots 33%). — Dec. 31, 1955, 7:30 a.m. to 5:15 p.m.; variable cloud, increasing throughout day; temp. 7° to 14°, wind NNE, 5-15 m.p.h.; ground co- vered with 2 to 4 inches hard snow and % inch fresh powder snow; all waters and marshes frozen except Cataraqui River just below Kingston Mills. 18 observers in 7 par- ties. Total party hours, 57 (25 by car, 32 on foot); total party miles, 344 (285 by car, 59 on foot). Black Duck, 21; American Golden-eye, 15; Hooded Merganser, 1; American Merganser, 35; Goshawk, 1; Cooper’s Hawk, 1; Red- tailed Hawk, 1; Bald Eagle, 1; Marsh Hawk, 2; Sparrow Hawk, 3; Ruffed Grouse, 18; Herring Gull, 2; Great Horned Owl, 1; Belted Kingfisher, 1; Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 10; Downy Woodpecker, 20; Blue Jay, 32; Black-capped Chickadee, 260; White-breasted Nuthatch, 18; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 7; Brown Creeper, 3; Robin, 1; Northern Shrike, 2 Starling, 156; House Rusty Blackbird, 2; Evening Pine Grosbeak, 12; Redpoll, Goldfinch, 108; White- winged Crossbill, 237; Tree Sparrow, 325. Total, 33 species; about 1,840 individuals. Seen in area: Dec. 24, Great Black-backed Gull; Dec. 26, Cedar Waxwing; Dec. 29, Hungarian Partridge; Jan. 1, Swamp Sparrow, Eastern Meadowlark; Jan. 2, Crow, Pine Siskin. —A. Bell, J. Cartwright, M.H. Edwards, A.J. Erskine (compiler), Janet Erskine, A.E. Gar- wood, Ann Hutchison, A.E. Hyde, Isabel Hyde, W.G. Lamb, B. Lindgren, L.H. Low- ther, Nora Mansfield, Helen Quilliam, D.R. Rogers, G.M. Stirrett, A. Strong, S. Teeple (Kingston Nature Club). London, Ont. — December 31, 1955. Partly cloudy to cloudy, occasional snow flurries; wind, light, S.E.; temp. 18° to 22°. 38 ob- servers in 12 parties. Great Blue Heron, 2; Mallard, 3; Black Duck, 36; American Golden-eye, 118; Com- mon Merganser, 10; Sharp-shinned Hawk, 2; Cooper’s Hawk, 3; Red-tailed Hawk, 20; Bald Eagle, 2; Marsh Hawk, 2; Ruffed Grouse, 2; Bod-white, 11; Common Pheasant, 33; Ame- rican Coot, 2; Mourning Dove, 158; Screech Owl, 2; Horned Owl, 4; Long-eared Owl, 5; Saw-whet Owl, 1; Belted Kingfisher, 11; Yellow-shafted Flicker, 1; Hairy Wood- Sparrow, 111; Grosbeak, 62; 370; American 88 THE CANADIAN pecker, 10; Downy Woodpecker, 60; Horned Lark, 1; Blue Jay, 91; Crow, 2; Black-capped Chickadee, 278; White-breasted Nuthatch, 17; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 7; Brown Creep- er, 13; Winter Wren, 6; Robin, 2; Golden- crowned Kinglet, 5; Cedar Waxwing, 8; Northern Shrike, 3; Starling, 203; House Sparrow, 860; Cardinal, 228; Evening Gros- beak, 3; Purple Finch, 6; Redpoll, 90; Pine Siskin, 112; American Goldfinch, 235; White- winged Crossbill, 25; Red-eyed Towhee, 1; Slate-colored Junco, 324; Tree Sparrow, 267; White-crowned Sparrow, 1; Swamp Sparrow, 2; Song Sparrow, 30; Snow Bunting, 426. Total, 51 species; 3,742 individuals. Seen recently in area: Dec. 30, Brown Thrasher; Jan. 1, Snowy Owl, White-throated Sparrow; Jan. 2, Red-winged Blackbird. —James Leach, Migration Secretary. Oshawa, Ont. (From west city limits of Oshawa, to Newcastle, on Lake Ontario, form- ing a radius of 20 miles from the center of Oshawa, to Lake Scugog to Pontypool). — Dee. 18, 1955, 8:00 a.m. to 4.00 p.m.; temp. 25° to 28°; light clouds in morning and after- noon, mostly clear and sunny, snow from 4 to 6 inches; wind W, 10 to 15 m.p.h. 20 ob- servers in 5 parties. Total party hours 138, total miles in cars 260, on foot 22. Great Blue Heron, 1; Mallard, 100; Black Duck, 600; Greater Scaup, 3; Common Golden-eye, 33; Buffle-head, 2; Old-squaw, 450; Common Merganser, 18; Red-breasted Merganser, 2; Cooper’s Hawk, 1; Red-tailed Hawk, 1; Red-shouldered Hawk, 1; Pigeon Hawk, 2; Sparrow Hawk, 5; Ruffed Grouse, 3; Common Pheasant, 48; Great Black-backed Gull, 5; Herring Gull, 447; Rock Dove, 112; Mourning Dove, 3; Great Horned Owl, 5; Barred Owl, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 10; Downy Woodpecker, 20; Horned Lark, 4; Blue Jay, 35; Crow, 21; Black-capped Chicka- dee, 136; White-breasted Nuthatch, 7; Brown Creeper, 2; Northern Shrike, 12; Starling, 333; House Sparrow, 399; Eastern Meadowlark, 1; Cardinal, 1; Evening Gros- beak, 70; Purple Finch, 4; Pine Grosbeak, 4; Redpoll, 70; Pine Siskin, 23; American Goldfinch, 155; Slate-colored Junco, 101; Tree Sparrow, 203; Swamp Sparrow, 1; Song Sparrow, 3; Snow Bunting, 30. Total, 47 species, 3,489 individuals. —Miss C. Abbott, A. Bunker, Miss E. Bunker, Miss A. Carruthers, F. Dilling, R. Fleming, Miss B. Henry, F. Ireson, Mr. Laird, B. Neal, G. Owen, D. Rice, G. Scott, A. Stasko, Mr. and Mrs. K. Sands, L. Sturch, J. Theberge, T. Tozer, R. Tozer (Oshawa Naturalists Club). FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Ottawa, Ont. (742-mile radius). — Decem- ber 26, 1954, 8.00 a.m. to 4.30 p.m.; intermit- tent sunshine; temp. 10-15°; wind W, 10-15 m.p.h.; 8-10 in. of snow. 28 observers in 9 parties. Total party hours, 5734; total party miles, 327% (54 on foot, 273% by car). Black Duck, 2; Am. Golden-eye, 172; Am. Merganser, 20; Sharp-shinned Hawk, 1; Red- shouldered Hawk, 1; Sparrow Hawk, 1; Ruffed Grouse, 8; Hungarian Partridge, 14; Ring-necked Pheasant, 9; Glaucous Gull, 1; Rock Dove, 101; Great Horned Owl, 2; Snowy Owl, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 5; Downy Woodpecker, 9; Horned Lark, 3; Canada Jay, 2; Blue Jay, 24; Am. Crow, 7; Black- capped Chickadee, 100; White-breasted Nut- hatch, 7; Brown Creeper, 2; Am. Robin, 4; Northern Shrike, 4; Starling, 2,659; House Sparrow, 2,140; Bronzed Grackle, 1; Evening Grosbeak, 70; Pine Grosbeak, 60; Hoary Redpoll, 3; Common Redpoll, 132; Pine Sis- kin, 6; Tree Sparrow, 2; Snow Bunting, 689. Total, 34 species; 6,263 individuals. Seen in area: Dec. 27, Screech Owl; Dec. 25, Barred Owl. —H. Anderson, Miss A. Banning, J. Bird, Mr. and Mrs. A.G. Bland, A.E. Bourguignon, Miss S. Clark, Mrs. F.W.G. Clark, Miss M. Flynn, Dr. and Mrs. C. Frankton, Mr. and Mrs. R.E. Frith, W.E. Godfrey, J.W. Groves, Mrs. S.D. Hemsley, Miss V. Humphreys, H. Lloyd, D.A. MacLulich, B. Millman, P. Mill- man, E. Mills, F. Munro, Miss V. Ross, D.B.O. Savile, Mr. and Mrs. J.E. Tener (Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club). Pakenham, Lanark Co., Ont. — Dec. 29, 1955, 8.30 am. to 4.00 p.m. sunny with a few cloudy periods during day; temp. 8° to 18°; light west wind; 2 inches of snow. 4 observers (25 miles by car, 12 miles on foot). Ruffed Grouse, 2; Ring-necked Pheasant, 3; Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Hairy Wood- pecker, 2; Downy Woodpecker, 3; Blue Jay, 11; Black-capped Chickadee, 15; White- breasted Nuthatch, 4; House Sparrow, 52; Evening Grosbeak, 1; Pine Grosbeak, 10; Common Redpoll, 84; Pine Siskin, 2; Ameri- can Goldfinch, 14; Snow Bunting, 10. Total: 15 species, 247 individuals. —J.S. McGiffin, R.M. McKenzie, Ross, Verna M. Ross. Edna G. Peterborough, Ont. (Jackson Park, Lily Lake, Green Hill, Little Lake, Otonabee R., Nassau, Warsaw Rd.; Chemong Park, Bridge- north; Burnham Park, Rifle Range; lower Otonabee River, Crawford Grove; Cavan Swamp. Open farmland, 54%; marsh, 23%; water, 4%; mixed woods, 13%; deciduous April-June 1956] coniferous woods, 4%). — De- cember 26, 9 am. to 5 p.m.; sunny, bright, and clear; temp. 10° to 20°; wind NW, 5-15 m.p.h.; 1” to 2" light snow; lake frozen; river frozen except in stretches where water flowed swiftly. 25 observers in 6 groups. Total party hours, 28; total party miles, 98 (80 by car; 18 on foot). Pintail, 1; Am. Golden-eye, 3; Am Mer- ganser, 9; Red-breasted Merganser, 1; Rough- legged Hawk, 1; Sparrow Hawk, 2; Ruffed Grouse, 6; Rock Dove, 42; Hairy Woodpecker, 14; Downy Woodpecker, 12; Pileated Wood- pecker, 3; Blue Jay, 22; Canada Jay, 1; Am. Crow, 2; Black-capped Chickadee, 143; White-breasted Nuthatch, 6; Northern Shrike, 1; Common Starling, 36; House Sparrow, 167; Pine Grosbeak, 4; Pine Siskin, 30; Evening Grosbeak, 200; Am. Goldfinch, 85; Tree Sparrow, 73; Snow Bunting, 35. Total species, 25; total individuals, 949. —L. J. McKeever and F. R. Pammett, com- pilers (Peterborough Nature Club). woods, 2%; Rutherglen, Ont. (From township of West Ferris, villages of Bonfield and Rutherglen, areas around Lake Nipissing and Pimisi Bay, rivers Kaipuskong, Mattawa, Amable du Fond, and Ottawa, to town of Mattawa; open farmland 10%, mixed second growth forest 50%, marshes and bogs 5%, lakes and rivers 15%, settlements 20%.) — Dec. 28, 7:45 a.m. to 4:15 pm.; blue sky to partly cloudy; temp. —24° to 16°; wind E veering to SW, W. E, 25 m.p.h.; ground covered with 8-10 inches soft powdered snow; all fresh water except rapids and the Ottawa River frozen. 2 observers. Total hours 16 (14% on foot, 1% by car); total miles 62 (17 on foot, 45 by car). American Golden-eye, 3; American Mer- ganser, 2; Canada Goose, 2; Pileated Wood- pecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 14; Downy Woodpecker, 3; Canada Jay, 2; Blue Jay, 15; Raven, 2; American Crow, 2; Black-capped Chickadee, 49; Brown-headed Chickadee, 1; White-breasted Nuthatch, 2; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 3; Common Starling, 8; Evening Grosbeak, 44; Common Purple Finch, 1; Pine Grosbeak, 14; Pine Siskin, 3; American Goldfinch, 2. Total, 20 species, about 173 individuals. —Hazel Petty, Louis de Kiriline Lawrence, compiler (Nipissing Field-Naturalists). Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario and Michigan. (The Canadian side of St. Mary’s River and the waterfront on the American side). — December 27, 1955, 7 am. to 430 pm; temp. —1° to 18°; wind east, 8 m.p.h.; over- THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 89 cast with sunny intervals. 11 observers in 6 parties. Total party hours, 11 (1 on foot, 10 by car); total party miles 47 (2 on foot, 45 by car). Am. Golden-eye, 3; Am. Merganser, 33; Herring Gull, 9; Snowy Owl, 1; Great Gray Owl, 1; Yellow-shafted Flicker, 3; Pileated Woodpecker, 2; Canada Jay, 1; Blue Jay, 11; Common Raven, 2; Am. Crow, 1; Black- capped Chickadee, 30; White-breasted Nut- hatch, 1; Common Starling, 74; Northern Shrike, 1; House Sparrow, 7; Evening Gros- beak, 29. Total, 17 species; 209 individuals. —Dr. G.H. Bergold, R. Dennison, Mrs. Iola Fountain, Mrs. N. Henderson, Miss B. Jef- fery, Ken Loftus, Miss H. Nattress, Otto Mc- Naughton, J.D. McPhail, Dr. G. Stehr (com- piler), Joseph Thomson. Toronto, Ont. (Area within thirty miles of Museum building, as in past years). — De- cember 26, 1955; daybreak to sundown; ground snow-covered, creeks and ponds fro- zen; Toronto Bay mostly frozen; temperature 14° to 27° (8° to 12° in the suburbs); strong north wind; 120 observers in 26 parties (routes standardized over the years). Great Blue Heron, 1; Mallard, 882; Black Duck, 646; Pintail, 1; Wood Duck, 1; Can- vas-back, 1; Greater Scaup, 4,289; Lesser Scaup, 2; Am. Golden-eye, 214; Buffle-head, 63; Old-squaw, 673; Am. Merganser, 34; Gos- hawk, 2; Sharp-shinned Hawk, 1; Cooper’s Hawk, 4; Red-tailed Hawk, 29; Red-shoul- dered Hawk, 1; Rough-legged Hawk, 5; Marsh Hawk, 1; Sparrow Hawk, 37; Ruf- fed Grouse, 8; Ring-necked Pheasant, 140; Virginia Rail, 1 (the 133rd species noted on the Toronto census in the 31 years the Brodie Club has been taking it); Coot, 1; Glaucous Gull, 2; Iceland Gull, 1; Great Black-backed Gull, 11; Herring Gull, 1,669; Ring-billed Gull, 168; Mourning Dove, 2; Screech Owl, 2; Horned Owl, 13; Long-eared Owl, 8; Short-eared Owl, 2; Saw-whet Owl, 4; Belted Kingfisher, 2; Yellow-shafted Flicker, 2; Pileated Woodpecker, 2; Hairy Woodpecker, 44; Downy Woodpecker, 105; Blue Jay, 118; Crow, 25; Black-capped Chickadee, 680; Hudsonian Chickadee, 1; White-breasted Nut- hatch, 37; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 29; Brown Creeper, 15; Carolina Wren, 3; Robin, 4; Hermit Thrush, 1; Eastern Bluebird, 1; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 4; Cedar Waxwing, 1; Northern Shrike, 23; Starling, 2,617; House Sparrow, 2,228; Eastern Meadowlark, 11; Red-winged Blackbird, 9; Rusty Black- bird, 10; Bronzed Grackle, 1; Eastern Cow- bird, 1; Eastern Cardinal, 132; Evening 90 THE CANADIAN Grosbeak, 46; Purple Finch, 13; Pine Gros- beak, 7; Hoary Redpoll, 5; Common Redpoll, 2,242; Pine Siskin, 814; American Goldfinch, 312; White-winged Crossbill, 51; Slate-co- lored Junco, 641;- Oregon Junco, 8; Tree Sparrow, 970; Field Sparrow, 3; White- throated Sparrow, 4; Swamp Sparrow, 4; Song Sparrow, 48; Snow Bunting, 130. Total species, 78; total individuals, 20,323. —P. Addison, W. Addison, J.L. Baillie (or- ganizer and compiler), H. Barnett, J. Barnett, L. Barnett, D. Beacham, J. Beacham, O.D. Boggs, O.D. Boggs, Jr., D. Bryant, D. Burton, L. Butcher, R. Campbell, W. Campbell, G. Clark, C.H.D. Clarke, J. Clarke, W. Clarke, R. Corlett, L. Crawford, E. Damude, L. Damude, A. Dawe, M. Devitt, O. Devitt, F.H. Emery, A. Falls, B. Falls, T. Farley, J. Ferguson, B. Foster, C. D. Fowle, G. Francis, A. Gatti, B. Geale, D. Geale, J. Geale, C. Goodwin, J. Hal- lam, H. Halliday, M. Halliday, Paul Harring- ton, Peter Harrington, R. Hensall, C. Hoby, F. Hoover, C. E. Ireson, L. Jackman, R. James, F. Keim, R. Knight, G. Lambert, L. Langstaff, J. Large, H. Lawrence, B. LeVay, F. LeVay, J. LeVay, N. LeVay, R. Lindsay, F. Lovesy, H. Lumsden, M. Macdonald, J. Mac- kintosh, G. Malkin, K. Mayall, R. McCleary, D. McCowan, L. McDougall, W. McGregor, T. MclIlwraith, I. Metcalfe, I. Millar, A. Mil- lar, A. Mitchener, F. Mueller, M. Nourse, — O’Conner, P. Page, R. Pannell, J. Parker, R. Pepall, D. Perks, A. Reid, H. Richards, D. Ri- pley, R. Ritchie, R. Saunders, D. Scovell, M. Shelton, J. Sherrin, T. Shortt, B. Smith, Don Smith, Doug Smith, F. Smith, R. A. Smith, Ron Smith, W. Smith, H. Southam, D. Speirs, J. M. Speirs, R. Standfield, D. Sumner, M. Tasker, R. Tasker, E. Taylor, R. Taylor, C. Teetzel, R. Trowern, G. Van-tets, T. Warren, E. Wasserfall, W. Wasserfall, B. Wescott, D. A. West, J. D. West, Michael West, H. Whyte, W. Williams and J. Woodford (Mem- bers and friends of the Brodie Club). Crescent Beach, B.C. (Parts of coast and bush between Crescent Beach, Ocean Park, and White Rock, including Nicomekl River at Elgin. White Rock pier, Semiahmoo In- dian Reserve, and Manten’s Nursery). — De- cember 29, 1955, 8:15 am. to 4 p.m.; temp. 22° at sunrise; little wind; sunshine all day; sea calm. 7 observers in 2 parties, and 2 observers at feeding station all day. 30 miles by car and on foot. Common Loon, 49; Red-throated Loon, 3; Holboell’s Grebe, 2; Horned Grebe, 36; Western Grebe, 15; Brandt Cormorant, 8; Great Blue Heron, 5; Brant, (heard not seen); Mallard, 77; Pintail, 147 +; Green- winged Teal, 52; Baldpate, 2; Canvas-back, 15; Greater Scaup Duck, 117; Am. Golden- eye, 42; Barrow Golden-eye, 2; Buffle-head, 78; Old-squaw, 17; Harlequin Duck, 11; FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 White-winged Scoter, 500 +; Surf Scoter, 450 +; Am. Scoter, 50; Am. Merganser, 4; Red-breasted Merganser, 13; Red-tailed Hawk, 1 (dark phase); Sparrow Hawk, 1; Ring- necked Pheasant, 1; Red-backed Sandpiper, 62; Glaucous-winged Gull, 260; Gull, 1 (Ring-billed?); Short-billed Gull, 3; Pigeon Guillemot, 3; Marbled Murrelet, 4; Short-eared Owl, 1; Belted Kingfisher, 1; Red-shafted Flick- er, 3; Pileated Woodpecker, 2; Northwestern Crow, 30; Black-capped Chickadee, 39; Chest- nut-backed Chickadee, 8; Winter Wren, 3; Be- wick’s Wren, 3; Varied Thrush, 5; Kinglet (sp. ?); Ruby-crowned Kinglet, 1; Northern Shrike, 1; House Sparrow, 40; Brewer’s Blackbird, 18; Evening Grosbeak, 4; Pine Siskin, 20; Spotted Towhee, 8; Oregon Jun- co, 32; White-crowned Sparrow, 3; Fox Spar- row, 7; Song Sparrow, 21. Total, 53 species, 2 uncertain; 2,281 individuals. Northern Shrike first record in the 18th Christmas Bird Census for Surrey, B.C. —M. W. Holdom, Miller Lougheed, Moira Neil, Wendy Neil, H. Newnhouse, John Si- meon, Richard Simeon, Tom Stevens, E. E. Woodford. Vernon, B.C. (West to Okanagan Landing, north to Buckerfield’s Ranch, south to Rattle- snake Point, Kalomalka Lake, and east to Coldstream Ranch). — Dec. 26, 1955, 9.15 a.m. to 3.15 p.m.; overcast with fog in after- noon and steady rain beginning about 11 a.m.; wind light; 16 inches of snow; temp. 33°-39°; Okanagan and Kalomalka Lakes with shore ice, Swan Lake completely frozen. Fourteen observers in four parties. Western Grebe, 1; Mallard, 114; Baldpate, 18; Lesser Scaup, 1; Common Golden-eye, 12; Buffle-head, 3; American Merganser, 9; Sharp-shinned Hawk, 3; Rough-legged Hawk, 1; Marsh Hawk, 2; Pigeon Hawk, 1; Spar- row Hawk, 5; European Partridge, 127; Pheasant, 385; American Coot, 641; Wil- son’s Snipe, 2; Herring Gull, 2; Rock Dove, — 32; Mourning Dove, 37; Pygmy Owl, 1; Saw-whet Owl, 2; Belted Kingfisher, 2; Red- shafted Flicker, 50; Pileated Woodpecker, 1; Hairy Woodpecker, 1; Downy Woodpecker, 2; Horned Lark, 99; Steller’s Jay, 6; American Magpie, 48; American Raven, 2; American Crow, 19; Clark’s Nutcracker, 5; Black-cap- ped Chickadee, 59; White-breasted Nuthatch, 2; Red-breasted Nuthatch, 3; Pygmy Nut- hatch, 9; Dipper, 2; Winter Wren, 1; Robin, 72; Varied Thrush, 1; Western Bluebird, 12; Townsend’s Solitaire, 5; Golden-crowned Kinglet, 5; Bohemian Waxwing, 72; Cedar Waxwing, 4; Northern Shrike, 5; Starling, April-June 1956] 16; English Sparrow, 500; Red-winged Black- bird, 61; Brewer’s Blackbird, 95; Evening Grosbeak, 253; House Finch, 3; Rosy Finch, 15; Common Redpoll, 603; Pine Siskin, 1; American Goldfinch, 89; White-winged Cross- bill, 25; Slate-colored Junco, 2; Oregon Jun- eco, 328; Tree Sparrow, 22; Harris’s Spar- row, 2; White-throated Sparrow, 1; Song THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 91 Sparrow, 36; Snow Bunting, 1. Total, 64 species; about 3,939 individuals. —Miss K. Bartholomew, Mr. and Mrs. S. Con- drashoff, J. T. Fowle, Miss T. Gabriel, J. Grant, J. Obana, F. Paul, J. Quirk, Dr. D. A. Ross, Miss B. Ross, J. Holmes, A.N. Hum- phries, B.A. Sugden (The North Okanagan Naturalists’ Club). REPORT OF COUNCIL AT THE SEVENTY-SEVENTH ANNUAL MEETING OF THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, DECEMBER 7, 1955 Since the last Annual Meeting, there were five meetings of Council, all at St. Patrick’s College: December 138, 1954, with 20 mem- bers present; February 14, 1955, with 14 members present; May 11, 1955, with 15 members present; October 12, 1955, with 19 members present; and November 18, 1955, with 17 members present. Appointments were made for 1955 as fol- lows: Editor of the Canadian Field-Naturalist — Dr. H. A. Senn. Business Manager of the Canadian Field-Na- turalist — Mr. W. J. Cody. Chairman of the Publications Committee — Dr. J. W. Groves. Chairman of the Excursions and Lectures Committee — Mr. P. A. Ruddell. Chairman of the Reserve Fund Committee — Mr. Hoyes Lloyd. Chairman of the Special Lectures Commit- tee — Dr. E. L. Bousfield. Chairman of the Membership Committee — Mr. W. J. Cody. Chairman of the Bird Census Committee — Mr. R. D. Harris. Chairman of the Macoun Field Club Commit- tee — Dr. E. L. Bousfield. Chairman of the 75th Anniversary Commit- tee — The Rev. F. E. Banim. Representatives, Canadian Section, Interna- tional Committee for Bird Preservation — Messrs. D. A. Munro and W. E. Godfrey. Report of the Publications Committee During the period December 1, 1954, to December 1, 1955, two numbers of Volume 68 and one number of Volume 69 of the Canadian Field-Naturalist were published, with a total of 132 pages. Papers, notes and reviews were distributed as follows: Papers Notes Reviews Botanys ise. Cae ee 3 1 — Bntomolosyas 1 1 — Herpetology | .......:.......... 1 — — Invertebrate Zoology .. 1 1 — Mammalogy ................... 8 1 — Ornithology, 8% 03-. 2 12 2 Miscellaneous ................ 1 — 4 Seventeen maps and other illustrations were used. The account of the geology of the Ottawa District being prepared by Dr. Alice E. Wil- son under the suonsorship of the Club is well advanced. The manuscript is nearly completed; the Geological Survey is finish- ing the photographs, and Mr. John Crosbie of the National Museum is preparing some line drawings to appear in the text. The stock of back numbers has now been removed from the Motor Building to new and more convenient quarters, where a re- organization will be carried out as soon as shelving is available. Report of the Excursions and Lectures Committee The business of the committee included selection of winter programs and summer excursions, the annual Dinner, the Newslet- ter, the management of the Study Groups, and finances. One new member, Miss De- borah Haight, was elected treasurer of the committee. There were two all-day excursions, one to the Lodge at Beattie Point, Shirley Bay, the other to Pakenham, where more than 40 members toured the surrounding countryside and listened to talks by Dr. Alice Wilson and Miss Edna Ross. A Members’ Night was held in March at the Ottawa Normal School, where 45 members enjoyed illustrated talks 92 THE CANADIAN on various topics. Over 80 members attended the Annual Dinner held in April, when Fa- ther Banim’s account of his recent trip to Europe was greatly enjoyed by all. Exhi- bits were on hand showing various phases of the work of the Macoun Field Club. It was decided to publish the Newsletter quarterly, and three issues of the 1955 season have appeared so far. This represents 26 pages of interesting and informative articles prepared by 15 members. Displays were made at most of the Audubon Screen Tours to advertise the Club and promote local membership. The Bird Group is the largest of the study groups, and enjoyed seven meet- ings at the home of Mr. and Mrs. A. E. Bour- guignon. Five early morning Bird Walks were held in the Dow’s Lake area under the guidance of Messrs. A. E. Bourguignon, W. E. God- frey, J. E. Smith, anad Rowley Frith. These were well attended by Club members and students of the Ottawa Normal School. About 35 members attended an evening excursion held at Stittsville in order to observe the Woodcock. The birds put on an excellent performance. The other study groups have also been active, particularly the Fern and Moss Groups. Report of the Reserve Fund Committee There have been no changes in the Reserve Fund since the last Annual Meeting. Report of the Special Lectures Committee Three Audubon Screen Tours completed the 1954-55 series: January 14 — Secrets of the Sea, by G. Clifford Carl. February 24 — Into the North Woods, by Tom and Arlene Hadley. April 12 — Rhapsody in Bluegrass, by Walter Shackleton. The following lectures of the current season complete the program for 1955: October 14 — Paul Bunyan Country, by Walter J. Breckenridge. November 3 — Newfoundland, by Dick Bird. Report of the Membership Committee No formal meetings were held. It was felt by the chairman that no membership cam- paign on a large scale should be undertaken FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 until publication of the Naturalist was brought closer to the desired goal. The most recent membership count is as follows: Indi- Insti- Honorary viduals tutions and Life Oftaware (ti) Sees 165 18 10 Canada (nonlocal) .. 217 58 — Wig. BAN. atu ie cette Pee DG) 92 3 AY KC ke PS ae Aa 1 8 i Elsewhere ...............- 9 17 — 448 193 14 Total s:2 weenie Fo eee 655 Paid-up Associate Members for 195 D kN as 33 Report of the Macoun Field Club Committee The present committee consists of Miss V. Humphreys, Mr. J. S. Bleakney, and Mr. J. Darling, appointed by the National Museum; Mr. H. Groh, Mr. D. C. Maddox, and Mr. W. K. W. Baldwin, appointed by the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club; and the Chairman, Dr. E. L. Bousfield. As in previous years, meetings were held at weekly intervals in the National Museum. The Senior group numbered 21 active mem- bers under the chairmanship of Eric Mills and with a committee of four. The Inter- mediate group of 28 and the Junior group of 23 were headed by Jim Ingles and John Seoggan, respectively. The program for all three groups included 21 regular meetings, of which 7 were field trips to the Club’s Lodge at Beattie Point, Willis’ quarry and other nature trails around Ottawa. The meetings were well attended, and the Club is much indebted to members. of the Museum staff, the O. F.-N. Club, and many interested persons who gave talks, conducted meetings, and provided leadership. and transportation on the field trips. At the seventh annual birthday party, held in the National Museum on April 16, badges were presented to 23 new members, and prizes. were awarded to the Junior and Intermediate winners of the attendance and merit game. These and other successful contestants were treated to a special party held in May at the home of the chairman. On April 26, selected members made their first television production, highlighted by a film of a hike to the Lodge, and on February 22 still others staged a second successful per- April-June 1956] formance. Members also appeared on several other programs of the CBC series “Let’s Go to the Museum.” Activities also included the publication of two issues (numbers 8 and 9) of “The Little Bear,” edited by Mr. Groh and Mr. Maddox, and ushering for the Audu- bon Screen Tour series at Glebe Collegiate. Exhibits of collections and hobbies of the members have been displayed at the annual banquet of the O. F.-N. Club and on other occasions. The Club has continued to cor- respond with former members, who are now spreading the ideals and aims of the Club to other parts of Canada. Report of the Bird Census Committee Results of the Christmas bird census in the Ottawa district and the Christmas Bird Census for all of Canada will be published in a forthcoming issue of The Canadian Field-Naturalist. [Editor’s note: See p. 85 of this issue. ] Report of Special Committee for Celebration of the 75th Anniversary In celebration of the Anniversary: (a) All newspapers of the Capital area and the Canadian Press were given material upon which they could draw for articles. They were most generous of space, and the public of Ottawa was given several excellent accounts of the Club and its work. (b) Murphy-Gamble’s Department Store put one of their display windows at the disposal of the Club for the period November 1 to 6. An excellent display was made there, and THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 93 there were also many exhibits on the ground- floor of the store. (c) Honorary memberships were conferred on Dr. Alice Wilson, and on Mr. Herbert Groh. (d) The Newsletter gave considerable space to the event. (e) Over 100 persons attended the banquet which was held on November 8 in the As- sembly Hall at Lansdowne Park. A splendid address was delivered by Prof. T. F. Mcll- wraith, Head of the Department of Anthropo- logy at the University of Toronto and Cura- tor of Anthropology at the Royal Ontario Museum of Natural History. This address will be published in The Canadian Field- Naturalist in commemoration of the occasion. (f) Expenditures exceeded ticket receipts by approximately $40.00, but this was more than covered by a supplementary fund of over $80.00 contributed in commemoration of the event by members and friends of the Club. W. K. W. Baldwin President. H. J. Scoggan Secretary. —___—_¢-_____ AN ERROR NOTED Subscribers are advised to correct the name of the fifth president of the Ottawa Field- Naturalists’ Club in the list on page 74 of the Canadian Field-Naturalist, Volume 69 (July- September issue, 1955). The entry should read: John Macoun. NOTES Birds wintering at Calgary (1954-55). — A Ross’s Chen rossi, goose winutered on the Bow river and the former Inglewood sanctua- ry on the outskirts of Calgary. It accompa- nied a flock of about 15 Canada geese, all wild birds. While in the confines of Ingle- wood the geese fed from the hand making identification positive. On the river they were more wary. Although Ross’s geese have been kept at Inglewod and at the Cal- gary Zoo I believe this is the first instance of the species voluntarily spending the win- ter in this latitude. Warm water. residues poured into the Bow from large industrial plants prevent the river from freezing over for a few miles east of Calgary and provide suitable winter- ing habtat for an increase number of spe- cies. At least six killdeer, Charadrius voci- ferus, wintered here during 1952-53. The winter of 1954-55, one killdeer was present. Mallards, Anas platyrhynchis, numbering thousands have yintered here for many years. In recent years they have been joined by increasing numbers of American golden- eyes, Bucephala clangula, and American mergansers, Mergus merganser. During winter of 1954-55 a baldpate, Mareca amerv- cana, also remained. — W. RAY SALT, Univ. of Alberta, Edmonton. 94 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST Western Flycatcher in Alberta.—During the summer of 1954 several nests of a species of flycatcher were found on the shale banks of Gorge Creek near the Alberta Government Biological Station which is situated at an alti- tude of over 5000 feet in the foothills of the Rockies about 20 m. west of Turner Valley, Alberta. No specimens were taken and the flycatcher was not positively identified. In 1955 three similar nests were found in the same locality. On July 31, David Boag, a bio- logist at the Station, found a dead flycatcher below one of the nests in which were dead young several days old. This adult female was preserved. On August 10, I collected an adult female and an immature male from a group of flycatchers along Gorge Creek. These specimens have been identified by W. E. Godfrey of the National Museum of Canada as Western Flycatchers Empidonax difficilis difficilis. The Western Flycatcher has not been previously recorded from Al- berta; in fact the above records constitute a considerable extension of the range of the species northward as well as eastward. — W. RAY SALT, Department of Anatomy, University of Alberta. Brown-headed Chickadees in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. — On October 27, 1955, when the S.S. “Mapledell” was in the Gulf of St. Law- rence, bound for Montreal, 2 chickadees ar- rived on board. With the help of Mr. Cleg- horn of the Redpath Museum (McGill Uni- versity) I subsequently identified them as Brown-headed Chickadees (Parus hudsoni- cus). They were first noticed about the bridge during the afternoon, the ship being then between West Point of Anticosti and Pointe des Monts. The weather at the time was overcast with light to moderate northerly wind. In the evening I found one in the wheel- house, and took him down to my room, where he spent the night, and in the morn- ing the other one was still in the wheel- house. I think the former was an adult, and the latter a young bird. Both birds were remarkably tame and showed not the slightest fear of people. The one that was in my room frequently landed on my head or shoulder when flying about, and I had only to put my hand to either of them to get them to perch on my finger. My Chief Officer took a photograph [Vol. 70 of the young bird so perched. The bird was quite undisturbed by the camera about 10 inches in front of it. The bird in my room slept in a corner under a book case. His head was tucked away somewhere. and his feathers all fluffed up so that he had the appearance of just a ball of feathers with a tail projecting at one part. The shape of the mass was almost perfectly spherical. The feathers on the back and breast of both birds (but especially the smaller one) were of very fine texture. They both left the ship (in the river) on the forenoon of October 28. In June, 1952, S.S. “Empress of France’, in the Strait of Belle Isle, in misty weather, about 2 dozen White-winged Crossbills (Loxia leucoptera) were on board. I noted at the time the same lack of fear of people in these birds. Two which got inside the promenade deck perched quietly on my finger while I carried them to the open deck. — E.F. AIKMAN, (Captain S.S. Mapledell). Richardson’s Merlin nesting in Manitoba. — On May 5, 1955, while doing some work in the spruce woods sand-hills, some four miles E.S.E. of Aweme, a female Richardson’s Merlin Falco Columbarius richardsonz) flew out of a dark clump of spruce and at once showed her displeasure at our presence by a brilliant display of air manoeuvers un- equalled by any other bird I have seen. Aftr making each spectacular stoop and re- gaining height again she would suddenly hover and then slowly move forward with short but extremely rapid bent wing strokes, uttering a rather high pitched twittering cry as she did so. An old crow’s nest some 17 feet up in a large spruce was soon located and while climbing the tree and examining the nest she repeatedly stooped at me, coming within a few feet of my head each time. The old nest had been well renovated with small twigs around the edge and inner shredded poplar bark and grass for lining so that the nest was soft and comfortably warm. The four brownish eggs were well marked with darker blotches and wavy lines. Their approximate measurements are 39.5 mm. long by 32 mm. across. I believe this is the first time Richard- son’s Merlin has been found nesting in Mani- toba. My brother Evelyn and son Percy were co-finders of the nest. — STUART CRIDDLE, Treesbank, Manitoba. April-June 1956] Nesting of Golden Eagle on Vancouver Island. — Though there are several fall and winter records of the Golden Eagle (Aquila chry- saétos) on Vancouver Island, nothing seems to have suggested breeding till recently. On September 15, 1950, while in the foothills far up the Oyster River my attention was drawn to the yelping notes of two Golden Eagles soaring high over the slashings. This note, so familiar from contact with breeding Goldens in the Rainbow Mountains and else- where, seemed at least suggestive. When on June 26, 1954, David Williamson of Camp- bell River called to get information re a suspected Golden Eagle nest near Upper Campbell Lake, his observations called for investigation. He had discovered the nest while cougar hunting; at that time he saw three young in the nest; they were moving about, were about the size of a half-grown Glaucous-winged Gull and whitish in color. I agreed to go with him later and advised that early August should be about right to see the young birds well feathered. Thus on Aug. 1 I met Williamson near Campbell River, transferred to his hunting jeep and he drove back through the near- endless slashings to the eagle’s mountain. Williamson had seen only one parent at any time and the bird seemed very wary; so we climbed the steep slope and following the timbered crest of the ridge approached the nest above it from the back. The nest was located in a big Douglas fir high on the steep southern face but was not visible from the road. My companion leading, first reconnoitered with the 8 powers and reported two black- ish young in the nest. We moved down a few yards to better view, but when I took over with the glasses I found the nest plat- form vacant; but at the base of the nest- heap was a blackish object which gave us much speculation. There was a small bright yellow spot near the top, another larger at the bottom, and a gleaming white spot in the middle, all of which at length resolved into the yellow bill and toes and white wing- spot of one of the young. At this stage of plumage advance the white showed on the OUTSIDE of the folded wing. The _ pro- portions in the picture, however, seemed fantastic. That a near-flight eaglet could appear so diminutive seemed almost beyond belief. The distance — and we were almost level with the nest — I judged about seven- ty-five yards and Williamson thought it THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 95 much less. I can only ascribe the pheno- menon to the sweep of distance across the valley, the large girth and great height of the nest tree, the probable bulk of the huge nest and our very considerable underesti- mate of the distance. The youngster was in plain view, perched on a peg jutting from the lower edge of the bulky nest structure which appeared three or four times the height of the bird. The latter, appearing very black against the nest background, posed as though frozen on his perch; only a close watch with the glasses revealed that the yellow bill-spot changed relative position as the head was turned in slow motion. While we were puzzling over our di- mensions problem, another young eagle flapped into view and passed over the nest. It escaped the field of vision of William- son who at the moment held the glasses, but I had a perfect eye view of the bird, noting its rather heavy immature flap, the white basal spot of the primaries and white base of tail. Doubtless this was one of the two seen in the nest on our first approach. I now attempted to set up the camera for a telephoto shot at the nest and its one occupant, but on noisily removing a limb to get a view, the third eaglet launched itself on the wing and again showing the flight pattern of the other, flapped away in the opposite direction to disappear in a mo- ment behind the timber. So photography failed; but doubtless this eyrie will be used in another year as it probably has in several of the past. I was disappointed not to hear the voices of these eaglets — for the nest notes of the Golden and Bald are utterly different — but even so I left the site with- out the slightest doubt as to the identity of these birds. In November of this sfme year John Green of Courtenay reported that while deer- hunting in this same general area he saw two Golden Eagles feeding on the carcass of a bear. When questioned he declared he could see their “stockings” plainly in his rifle-scope. Probably two of the family of five at large in the region. — HAMILTON M. LAING, Comox, B.C. Record of Willet for Vancouver Island. — As there seems no authentic record of the Western Willet (Catoptrophorus semipalma- tus inornatus) for British Columbia and the 96 THE CANADIAN bird is relegated to the Hypothetical List of Munro and Cowan, 1947, it is of interest to record the taking of a specimen at Comox on January 26, 1950. The bird evidently intended wintering here as such a bird was described by Vincent Bracewell some weeks earlier, having been seen at the Slough near Courtenay. It was first seen by the writer January 25, on the Croteau Beach at about half tide. From old association there was no doubt of identity but efforts to get the bird failed. How next day it weathered the most terrific blizzard of this record winter of deep snow and extreme cold was not plain. There were no exposed beaches, the sludge and bay ice being too heavy to be moved out by the tide and feeding grounds were covered. But on the evening of the 26th with the first open beach shallows the willet returned again from westward and was shot near the foot of the bay. It proved an adult female in fair condition, its stomach well filled with crawfish. Specimen now in Laing collection. — HAMILTON M. LAING, Comox, B.C. Unusual Horned Owl nesting. — On May 15, 1947, the local Vancouver Island district game warden, Mr. Rex Hayes, asked me to accompany him on an investigation of a report of a _ ground-nesting Horned Owl (Bubo virginianus) in the Oyster River re- gion. The location was about twelve miles inland, south of the river and close to the power line then under construction. Turning north from the old Camp 3 Road we got particulars from the workman who had re- ported the nest, and soon as we spread out and combed the designated knoll, a horned own flushed ahead of us and we were in possession of the nesting site. The nesting knoll was a slight raise in 1 large stretch of very flat, open burned country. For this was in the heart of the old slashings, and burned over in at least two devastating fires. There was little re- forestation except to willow-clumps. The only real timber was in a swamp nearby where fire had failed to penetrate. The nest itself was at ground level in the low hol- lowed base of a burned-out Douglas fir stump. There was no vestige of lining and no apparent reason for the choice of site, except that at the time of incubation it would have been warm. The snaggy rim was a good windbreak and the charcoal walls absorbed a good deal of sun heat. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Two half-grown young of slightly unequal size were in possession. The nest was fairly clean, with little evidence of food litter. The second parent now appeared and the two perched close by in some rampikes and voiced disapproval, in the hoot, — one deep in tone, the other treble — the meow, and also a note so shrill as to resemble a whistle. While I was busy with camera equipment to beat oncoming rain, one parent, I judged the female, made repeated sorties against the warden’s head necessitating some expert ducking. Had he turned his back no doubt she would have struck him. It was evident now these mates were of different color, the larger and darker female being apparently black enough for good Bubo v. saturatus whereas the male seemed outside the color bounds of that race. There was also a lighter tone to the larger of the nest-mates. The larger one also did most of the bill-snapping and belligerent, fluffed-out posing. Heavy wind and rain cut our observations short for the day. But that evening the workman phoned Hayes that the young owls were out of the nest, so next forenoon with a promise of better weather, we returned. We found the stump site empty and could find no sign of the parents. For an hour we circled the nest site extending the search and then one of the parents was routed from among some rampikes. Later we found the larger of the two young and then the other. These young during the night evi- dently had walked 150 yards in air line, doubtless much farther through the rough- age and with a shallow ravine to cross. Dropping experiments showed that they had no use of the wings. On this search we discovered the second of their interesting perches. Yesterday one bird had been seen to fly up to a fire-black- ened stub and vanish. The _ binoculars showed that the fire had burned out a size- able pocket on the side of the stub at an elevation of about twenty feet. The owl fitted so well into the pocket and the grey- and-black color scheme that even the camera lens failed to find him. Today about a hun- dred yards from the nest we found an unusual amount of white excrement below a small green fir. Doubtless their loafing tree. The greenery provided both shelter from the weather and seclusion, also a good view of the nest. The point of main interest to the game branch was to discover the food of these April-June 1956] THE CANADIAN raptors in an area practically devoid of small mammals of use to them. So in our search we collected as many regurgitated pellets as we could find. They all contained bird bones that were judged blue grouse, mostly broken, even in the case of wing and leg. We noted that no hooting cocks could be heard from the nest site though the sound was on the air practically everywhere else. Though we saw no feather patches denoting pluckings near the nest, the workmen said they had come on some nearby. Evidently the grouse were plucked near where cap- tured and the remains packed home whole or in part. A few feathers only were found at the nest. I could find no sign of mammal remains. So the warden used his .22 and the family came home to a place in the specimen collection. As an added check, Hayes later sent the pellets to the University of British Columbia laboratory where Dr. Ian McT. Cowan reported “blue grouse, 100 per cent’. — HAMILTON M. LAING, Comox, B.C. A Harp Seal from the Leda Clay West of Hull, Quebec. — In August, 1954, Rolph Ro- lofs, a camper at Woodland Boys Camp, 23 miles (by road) west of Hull, found a string of seven vertebrae. He gave these to Pierre Taschereau, a counselor, who turned them over to Mr. D.C. Maddox, the Camp Geolo- gist. Recently, Mr. Maddox and Mr. H. Groh handed the specimen to me for identification and recording. It represents dorsal verte- brae six to twelve of a harp seal, Phoca groenlandica. The bones are splendidly pre- served and complete except for the tips of the neural spines and of four of the trans- verse processes. These tips were destroyed by erosion before discovery. Indurated clay holds the centra together and surrounds some of the neural arches, but otherwise the bones are exposed. They are from a moderate-sized animal and probably repre- sent a young adult. The specimen has been presented to the National Museum, Ottawa, and bears catalogue number 8924. Mr. Groh gives the locality, for the speci- men, as on the north side of the Ottawa River, upstream from Woodland Boy’s Camp, where a deep bay has been cut out of the farmlands, exposing a cliff of Leda Clay. Numerous round and flattened con- cretions are continually being eroded from this clay bed. Fossil shells, including Sazi- cava rugosa, are often found in or attached to the concretions. Apparently conditions FIELD-NATURALIST 97 here are like those east of Ottawa, near the mouth of Green’s Creek, where similar con- cretions are continually weathering out of Leda Clay. Several species of fish and mam- mals have been reported from this Late Pleistocene clay, but the great majority of vertebrates from the Green’s Creek locality, represent the little fish, Malotus vellosus, which is living today in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Among the first vertebrate fossils re- ported from the Leda Clay of the Ottawa Valley was the hind limbs of a seal, col- lected by Peter McArthur from nine miles east of Ottawa. E. Billings sent this speci- men to Dr. Joseph Leidy who reported it in Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, Vol. 8, pp. 90-91, 1856. In the Canadian Naturalist, Vol. 8, No. 6, 1878, J.W. Dawson described a speci- men of harp seal, Phoca groenlandica, from the same area as the Billings specimen, and suggested that both belonged to the same species. Other specimens of the harp seal have been collected from the Leda Clay at various localities. In 1889 Ruggles Wright and H. M. Ami collected most of the skeleton of a young harp seal from a sandy layer in Wright’s brick yard just west of Hull, Que. Only fragments of the skull were secured but the left ramus of the lower jaw, with teeth, showed that it was a harp seal. Ami mentioned it in an article in the April, 1897, number of the Ottawa Naturalist. This spe- cimen, Cat. No. 6830, N.M.C., is on exhibit in the National Museum. In the same case is a head, neck and fore limb of a martin, < Martes americana, collected by Ami from the Leda Clay at Green’s Creek. In Bull. 123, Nat. Mus., Canada, pp. 259- 61, 1951, I reported several specimens of white whale and other mammals, from Pleistocene deposits of the Ottawa and St. Lawrence River valleys. — C. M. STERN- BERG, Ottawa. ALR Myrtle Warbler at Baker Lake, N.W.T. — A bird unknown to the Eskimos was identified by me, according to “Birds of Canada” by P. A. Tavernier, as being unmistakably a Myrtle Warbler, Dendroica coronata. The bird came into the Mission on May 14, 1955. He was very fond of flies and crumbs. — FR. CHARLES CHOQUE, o.m.i., Catholic Mission, Baker Lake, N.W.T., via Churchill, Man. 98 THE CANADIAN The White-winged Crossbills of Newfound- land. — The possibility that the White-winged Crossbills of Newfoundland might be subspe- cifically separable from Loxia |. leucoptera Gmelin of the mainland has been suggested by Noble (1919, p. 557) and by Aldrich and Nutt (1939, p. 38). Since I had already assembled a large series of these crossbills for study in another connection, it occurred to me to look into the matter of the New- foundland population. Additional material was therefore borrowed until I had available 31 Newfoundland and 282 other specimens for comparison. By a curious coincidence, both Noble and Aldrich and Nutt based their findings on two Newfoundland specimens each, in both cases an adult male and a juvenal male. The Aldrich-Nutt specimens are now in the collection of Carnegie Museum, and Noble’s specimens were borrowed from the Mu- seum of Comparative Zoology. In both cases the authors suggested that the Newfound- land population might prove to be signifi- cantly darker (in both the adult and juvenal plumages) than that of the mainland, al- though Noble was less confident of the significance of his limited material than were Aldrich and Nutt of theirs. The juvenal plumage of the White-winged Crossbill gives the appearance of dark streaks on a pale background, due largely to the contrast between the dark centers and light edges of the individual contour feathers. In fresh, unworn juvenal plumage, these light margins are strongly washed with buffy, approximating on the underparts the Pale Orange-Yellow or Warm Buff of Ridgway (1912). With wear these light edgings are not only reduced by abrasion but bleached and. faded to white (although this is usually adventitiously darkened with soot and dirt). The general effect is to make the bird appear darker, especially dor- sally (where the dark shaft stripes are broader), both by the reduction of the light margins and the increased contrast of the dark centers with the bleached edges. The Aldrich-Nutt juvenal specimen, taken September 1, is the most heavily worn (and consequently darkest appearing) bird in this plumage in the entire series before me. Noble’s specimen, taken July 26, is only slightly less worn, and, in spite of Noble’s statement to the contrary, is adventitiously darkened. There is much variation in the amount of wear exhibited by the juvenal FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 feathers at the onset of the post-juvenal molt. As mentioned above, the Aldrich-Nutt specimen was taken September 1, and is very worn; it shows no feathers of the first winter plumage. On the other hand, a speci- men from Wolfville, Nova Scotia, in Carnegie Museum had barely begun its post-juvenal molt on December 4, yet the juvenal feathers are much less worn than those of the Al- drich-Nutt bird. A specimen taken at Moose Factory, Ontario, on October 13 has large patches of the first winter plumage visible, yet the juvenal feathers appear scarcely worn at all. Of four available juvenal males from Newfoundland, only one is in fresh plumage. This specimen is not darker than mainland birds in similar plumage. The darkest, by far, of the juvenal males before me was taken at Moose Factory on June 30, and is in fresh plumage. The series of juvenal females is some- what better. With six relatively unworn Newfoundland and six comparable mainland birds available, a slight difference in dorsal color is apparent. The pale edgings. of the crown and interscapular region of the New- foundland birds average somewhat whiter. However, one of the six, from Stephenville Crossing, Nfld., is an excellent match for Moose Factory birds, and there is much variation in both series. In summary, there appears to be no basis in the color of the juvenal plumage to warrant subspecific separation of the Newfoundland population of the White-winged Crossbill. Turning now to the adults we find again that the slight tendency toward color dif- ferentiation in the Newfoundland birds is best expressed in the females. In adult males no geographic significance can be at- tached to the considerable variation of the shade of red or pink of the body plumage. Some mainland males exhibit a reduction of the black of the interscapular region to an extent not shown in any of the 11 New- foundland males seen, but many mainland males equal and several exceed the New- foundland birds in the extent of the black areas of the plumage. The seven adult females available from Newfoundland are a brighter yellow-green on the upper parts than the great majority of females from elsewhere, although they can be matched by certain specimens from Alberta and Ontario. None of the seven is in the grayish plumage which is so common April-June 1956] THE CANADIAN in mainland females. This could easily, how- ever, be a sampling accident, especially since the four brightest and most uniform of the Newfoundland females were all taken in January and February, 1917, at Grand Lake by the late A. C. Bent, and are pre- sumably from the same flock. The three females from other localities are duller. It would seem, then, that the minor aver- age color differences observed are insuffi- cient basis for the subspecific separation of the Newfoundland population of the White- winged Crossbill. It is interesting to note that these tendencies toward color dif- ferentiation are most apparent in the female, both in the adult and the juvenal plumage, and have nothing to do with the characters supposed by Noble and Aldrich and Nutt to be found in the males. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS: Specimens’ were assembled for this study through the courte- ous co-operation of the following: William C. Dilger (Cornell University), Herbert Fried- mann (U.S. National Museum), E. Thomas Gilliard (American Museum: of Natural History), Raymond A. Paynter, Jr. (Museum of Comparative Zoology), and L. L. Snyder (Royal Ontario Museum). LITERATURE CITED Aldrich, J. W. and D. C. Nutt 1939. Birds of eastern Newfoundland. Sci. Publ. Cleveland Mus. Nat. Hist., 4, no. 2, pp. 13-42. Noble, G. K. 1919. Notes on the avifauna of Newfound- land. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 62, no. 14, pp. 544-568. Ridgway, R. 1912. Color standards and color nomen- clature. Publ. by the author, Wa- - shington, D.C. KENNETH C. PARKES, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh 13, Pennsylvania. Records of two microtine rodents from the Quebec tundra. — A camp was established at Payne Lake, latitude 59°30'’N., longitude 74°W., in the Ungava region of northern Quebec, from July 27 to August 4, 1954, in connection with an investigation of the Un- gava caribou. I was assisted in this study by Mr. Jacques Normandin, Quebec Depart- ment of Game and Fish. Payne Lake is situated in typical tundra environment ap- FIELD-NATURALIST 99 proximately 100 miles north of tree-line which occurs along the banks of the Leaf River. A few Museum Special traps were set out several evenings on the tundra near the camp and a small number of microtine ro- dents were secured and preserved. The col- lection consisted of three red-backed voles (Clethrionomys gapperi ungava), one bog lemming (Synaptomys borealis innuitus), and two collared lemmings (Dicrostonyx hudsonicus). The sub-specific determina- tions are made solely on a geographical basis. The specimens were donated to the Na- tional Museum of Canada. The capture of the red-backed vole and the bog lemming at Payne Lake extends the known range of these two rodents about 200 miles northwest from the Fort Chimo area, according to the recent range maps present- ed by Hall and Cockrum (1953). Fort Chi- mo is situated in the forest region. It is interesting to note that in north- western Quebec the red-backed vole has in- vaded the tundra habitat which is occupied by the tundra red-backed vole (Clethriono- mys rutilus) elsewhere in northwestern North America. It is postulated that the forest species C. gapperi has been able to colonize the Quebec tundra habitat because the northwestern tundra C. rutilus was not present to compete for the ecologic niche. Only one red-backed vole examined was normal in coloration, the pelage of the other two were in the “grey” phase, which seemed to be the commoner coloration in this region. LITERATURE CITED Hall, E. Raymond and E. Lendell Cockrum, 1953. A Synopsis of the North American Microtine Rodents. Univ. Kansas Publ., Mus. Nat. Hist., 5(27):373-498. — A. W. F. BAN- FIELD, Canadian Wildlife Service, Ottawa, Ontario. “Record of Perch, Perca flavescens, from Great Slave Lake, N.W.T. — On November 28, 1954, a single specimen of yellow perch, Perca flavescens (Mitchill) was caught by a one and one-half inch mesh gill-net in Great Slave Lake at 62° 7' N. lat., 115° 55’ W. long. The northern limit of perch was previously reported as Lake Athabaska. The specimen was a three and one-half year old mature male with a standard length of 11.9 em. and a weight of 28.9 gm. — DONALD C. SCOTT, Central Fisheries Research Station, Winni- peg. 100 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 FINANCIAL STATEMENT OF , THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB, DECEMBER 7, 1955 CURRENT ACCOUNT Assets | Liabilities Bal. in Bank, Dee. 1/55 .................... 2,837.30 Audubon Screen Tours, guarantee 750.00 Bills receivable 4 2.2 ..ceeeeceescteceeee 90.11 Bills outstanding ©... WW... 49.06 Lodge, estimated value .................... 200:00 Balance! o20.): iene k.. eee 2,328.35 $3,127.41 $3,127.41 Receipts Expenditures Bal. in Bank, Nov. 26/54 ............... 3,745.57 Can. Field-Nat. (3 noe) PG ef .. 1,584.00 Fees: Tlustrations eee 222.81 i Separates Ho 8 Nera 423.00 Current wie an 1,433.53 Postage & Stationery —...... 203.29 Advance and Business Manager’s Honorarium .... 15.00 Arrears ...... .. 232.89 Excursions & Lectures Comm. _..... 100.00 Newsletter (2 nos.) | wee 67.25 PASS OG Hp faere pH. A epee Re Illustrations Wilson Book ............. 225.00 Separates ek testes 40.39 Bank Discount __.......... 2, de ae 22.50 Single & Back mmbers se 21472 Woreign' Exchange) 2.2). yee 11.10 75th Anniversary (net) ................. 43.99 Migcer aneeus ct (apenas Be : udubon Screen Tours (net) ...... : Miscellaneous oe eee 41.65 Bal aneBanic licens 5) eee 993730 $6,087.74 $6,087.74 RESERVE FUND Assets Liabilities Hydro-Electric Power Comm. Ont., Bonds, 3% ........ 3,000.00 Bal. in Bank, Dec. 1/55 esc 570.51 NIL $3,570.51 Receipts Expenditures Bal. in Bank, Nov. 26/54. ............... 475.80 Rent safety deposit box ................... 5.00 Bank! interest 44.33 .425.4.5.5 8 ee 9.71 Bal. in Bank. Dec. 1/55 ccccccccccccesees 570. Bondiwinterestiy,. oe ase pee 90.00 a cdaetaorriarie ; of $575.51 $575.51 PUBLICATION FUND Assets Liabilities Hydro-Electric Power Comm. Ont., BondsaSlouwe > alah tee 1,500.00 Bal. in Bank, Dec. 1/55... . 346.46 NIL $1,846.46 Receipts Expenditures Balin ankem NOs «26/040 een 295.43 : Bank interest HARBORS VERN ol Weed NTRS. 1 eB 6.03 Bal. in Bank, Dec. 1/55 iiielefale(eldatetats(bie(etn etatatel 346.46 Bondainterest.:. 4230 ee. Bes ee 45.00 $346.46 $346.46 Audited and found correct. (Signed) I. L. CONNERS C. FRANKTON R. J. MOORE Treasurer Auditors Dec. 1, 1955. ILL i ATED SOCIETIES - ANI! _ PROVANCHER SOCIETY OF NATURAL OCIETY Aah Sr i HISTORY OF CANADA HM, Porcetacct a, KURELE BIGONESSE; Vice-Presidents: AN, ‘Dept, of J. KENNEDY HILL, FRANCOIS HAMEL; Secretary- umbia, ‘Vancouver _ Treasurer: GEORGE A. LECLERC, 628 Fraser Street, RU wel RNR a Quebec, Que. ee "PROVINCE OF QUEBEC SOCIETY FOR THE PROTECTION OF THE BIRDS | peseents MJ. DUNBAR; Mice Becurlsnis: Tk _ VANCAMP, J.P. ANGLIN; | ‘Treasurer: W.H. RAW- __-LINGS; _ Secretary: Miss _ ABBOTT, (Box) /'3; Rin Senneville, ne MS ve ; Me _ TORONTO FIELD ‘NATURALISTS’ gi * Preston JOHN “MITCHELE; | ike Piosident: WAL- WEE} TOVELL: - Director cee TEN. Ci MARY at Millwood Rood, “Toronto 7, "Gay _ VANCOUVER NATURAL HISTORY Ay Oe ats Hp SOCIETY — i | ? } President: AR. - WOOTTON: ie Vice Presidont: 1. _ PLOMMER; ‘Treasurer: Re _ SANFORD; Secretary: —CB.W. ROGERS. ai. wi} us ‘Meetings 8.00 Pm. Rosa 100, Applied Science qBaiidincr, Seana, of British Columbia. y ‘comer oP ne sheet on when the allaamation ap- , el ) "pears. The aes should aos oe ane Suara Gye a bie the: figure. Wi nN a ai 4 blue- peeg) Ngee or _ Co-ordinate eae | is not typewritten, ‘and all sae of ‘the cnet ‘should _ permit easy legibility even if a reduction is made. One-column illustrations are reproduced 25% inches wide: full-page illustrations, 5% inches wide. _ Photographs should ewe Keay ieigsay finish ‘ond _ show essen contrasts. i For emer as a com-— ie for iY eh For pale ‘sleet aa ebbiad celiecatotis the ratio of height to width should conform to that of _ the journal, page (Ye by 8 inches) but the height ; Wy A cca ee res to allow for the jeoeaa r NOSE, MiP nn iy is an ine attached to be galley roofs. a ee eat eat a iat me mat The Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club has for sale... THE CANADIAN ENTOMOLOGIST f { { { { { Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume 21 22 (1889) (1890) 23 (1891) 24. 25 26 27 (1892) (1893) (1894) (1895) Volume 28 (1896) Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume 29 30 31 32 40 Al 42 Address enquiries to... (1897) (1898) (1899) (1900) (1908) (1909) (1910) Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers Number Numbers Number Issues are unbound and in fair condition... 1-12 1-2, 4-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-12 J-12 1-12 1-11 ]-12 J-11 1-2, 4, 6-12 11 7-8 ) W. J. Cody, Business Manager The Canadian Field-Naturalist Science Service Building OE OO ONE OE OE OOS BOE OE BE IN Ee Ottawa Ontario { | i 2 ) i { i : i ) i ) f 2 ) ) i ) ) { ) \ ‘ ue tape a9 See f ae AMS. COMP. 100| VOLUME 70 JULY-SEPTEMBER. 1956 LIBRARY NUMBER 3 The CANA FIELD-NATURALIST Articles & New Plant Records for Northern Alberta and Southern Mackenzie District W. J. Copy 101 & Notes on Some Birds and Mammals of the Colville River, Alaska Epwarp B. REep 130 @ Some Distributional Notes on Canadian Birds W. Eart Goprrey 136 og Annotated List of Birds of Part of the Back River, N.W.T. Joun S. TENER 138 Notes Orobanche uniflora L. from Yarmouth County, Nova Scotia W. L. Krawe 141 Clay-colored Sparrow Nesting in Grey County, Ontario A. J. MircHEeNnerR 141 Great Gray Owl Near Black Sturgeon Lake, Ontario K. R. Exxiott, R. F. James and N. D. Martin 141 A First British Columbia Record of the Cragonid Shrimp T. H. Burrer 142 Additional Records of Bats in Saskatchewan N. 5S. Novakowsk1 142 & Mackenzie River Migration Epcar T. Jones 143 New and Unusual Bird Record for Alberta Eocar T. Jones 143 Some Ornithological Records for Wood Buffalo Park and the Mackenzie District, N.W.T. E. 0. H6HN 144 Reviews 145 Prairie Ducks — Pheasants in North America — Upland Trails — Travels and Traditions of Waterfowl — The Geography, Birds, and Mammals of the Perry River Region — The Marine and Fresh-Water Plankton Published by THE OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALISTS’ CLUB OTTAWA ONTARIO _ Massey, CH. Governor General of Poteet aes, sereakieation Hone to. ye 8 Tes all branches of natural history. The patron is WKW. Beak President, ‘Natonal Museum of Canada Otte Loris S. RUSSELL, First ies President PLC! aoe ie Epwarp L. BousFieLp; Second Vice-President © 9 Raymonp J. Moore, Treasurer, Science Service Building, yttay Homer J. Scocean, Secretary, National Museum of ae i) Be Conners, C. Frankton, Auditors K. Bowits: AW. CAMERON, WJ. oe ‘Con W.E. GopFREY, H. Grou, J.W. Groves, R.A. H _H. Lioyp, W.W. Marr, T.H. MANNING, RHovEs, P.A. aes Dy Le 0. SAVILE, Nae F RoBertT A. Hancwr0N, Editor taaiewarts Oa uel ee ecop inte Editors: F. i: “Aucock Oe joe Ww. sa (E (Paleontology), SHERMAN BLEAKNEY (Herpetol of ey), Austin W. Wittam G. Dore (Botany), J.R. Dymonp (Ichthyolog: Ala: logy), A. G. HUNTSMAN (Marine Biology), aN a The Canadian. Ficld-Naturalist is publishe ¢ - Club with the assistance of affiliated societies liste representing personal observations or the results of al tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers a | recent issue and the information ne contributors | oe the bases manager. The annual Se a fae Me “$3: 00 « covers. ‘ however, may subscribe at the same rate as that of regular issues are ninety cents. Money orders should b Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. PANE aati Authorized as second-class mail. Ex the Post A The Canadian VOLUME 70 JULY-SEPTEMBER 1956 OS, EO 7 | he) sf) Field- Naturali ib in: "NEW PLANT RECORDS FOR NORTHERN ALBERTA AND SOUTHERN MACKENZIE DISTRICT* W. J. Botany and Plant Pathology Laboratory, Ottawa, Ontario Received for publication September 16, 1955 The specimens upon which this paper is based were collected during the years 1949- 53 as part of a co-operative project between the Canada Department of Agriculture and the Canada Defence Research Board. In 1949 the author, with Mr. J. B. McCanse, was based at Yellowknife on the north shore of Great Slave Lake. In 1950 he was sta- tioned at Fort Smith on the Slave River at the Alberta— Mackenzie District border. Here he was accompanied by Mr. C. C. Loan. In 1951 Mr. W. H. Lewis worked at Hay River on the southwest shore of Great Slave Lake and in 1953 the author, accompanied by Mr. R. L. Gutteridge, made short stops at Lac la Biche and Fort McMurray in northern Al- berta. The main localities from which specimens are cited are as follows: 1949 : Yellownife 62°27’N, 114°22’W Outlet of Prosperous Lake 62°33’N, 114°13’W Prelude Lake 62°35’N, 114°00'W Dome Lake 62°45’N, 113°15"W Snare River Power House 63°33’N, 115°55"W Indin Lake 64°17’N, 115°12’W Beaverlodge Lake 64°44’N, 112°12"W Gunbarrel Inlet, Great Bear Lake 65°37’N, 118°30’°W Contact Lake 66°00’N, 117°20’W Port Radium, Great Bear Lake 66°05’N, 118°03’W 1950: Ft. Smith 60°00’N, 111°53’W Seven Mile Lake, 27 miles west of Ft. Smith 60°02’N, 112°38"W Little Buffalo River, 32 miles west of Ft. Smith 60°02’N, 112°48"W 1 Contribution No. 1491 from the Botany and Plant Pathology Division, Science Service, Canada Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, Ontario. The Canadian Field-Naturalist for April-June 1956 April 5, 1957. MBER 3 f Ni HVE BA Z Copy Salt Plain, west of Ft. Smith 60°03’N, 112°25’'W Salt River 60°06’N, 112°15'W Ft. Fitzgerald, Alta. 59°52’N, 111°37'W Ft. Chipewyan, Alta. 58°42’N, 111°10'W 1951 : Lower Hay River 60°51’N, 115°42’W Alexandra Falls on Hay River 60°30’N, 116°17'W Louise Falls on Hay River 60°30’N, 116°13"W Brabant Island, Great Slave Lake 61°03’N, 116°35°W Long Island, Great Slave Lake 61°43’N, 114°53’W Big Island, Great Slave Lake 61°05’N, 116°40’W Moraine Point, Great Slave Lake 61°36’N, 115°38’W 1958 : Lac la Biche, Alta. 54°46’N, 111°58’'W Fort McMurray, Alta. 56°44’N, 111°23’W Complete sets of the specimens collected during these years are preserved in the Herbarium of the Department of Agriculture at Ottawa (DAO). A few sheets preserved in the Herbarium of the National Museum of Canada (CAN) are cited for purposes of discussion. Unless otherwise stated, the collection num- bers cited throughout this paper are those of the author. OPHIOGLOSSACEAE BorrycHIuM MULTIFIDUM (Gmel.) Rupr. var. MULTIFIDUM MACK: very rare in rich black sandy soil in sod among scrub Salix spp., Ft. Smith, 4768. Previously known in the Mackenzie Basin only at Sand Point on Lake Athabaska and at Ft. Simpson. This is the second record for Mackenzie District. (Can. Field Nat. 70: 69-100. 1956) was issued 101 102 THE CANADIAN POLYPODIACEAE DRYOPTERIS FRAGRANS (L.) Schott var. REMOTIUS- CULA Komorov ALTA: mossy areas along rocky exposed ledges; common; Caribou Island, Slave River 59°43’N, 111°31'W, Loan 26. Var. remotiuscula has apparently not previously been recorded for Alberta. POLYPODIUM YVIRGINIANUM L. MACK : scattered in crevices in rock hillside, Yellowknife, 3016; rare in deep moss in pro- tected hollow on rocky hillside, Latham Island, Yellowknife Bay, 2316; rare in hollow of rock, small island off east shore of Yellow- knife Bay, 8 miles south of Yellowknife, 2434; very scattered, rooted in moss in hollow of rocky hillside, Snare River Power Station, 2617; rooted in moss among boulders, Beaver- lodge Lake, 2733; rare in shallow soil among boulders on hillside Gunbarrel Inlet, Great Bear Lake, 2848. Not previously recorded north of Great Slave Lake. EQUISETACEAE EQUISETUM PALUSTRE L. MACK: common in exposed mud ditch, Low- er Hay River, Lewis 619; common in moist sand, Hardisty Island, Great Slave Lake, 2919. Recorded by Hooker (1829-1840) as “‘to the shores of the Arctic Sea” but no collections have previously been reported from the shores of Great Slave Lake. EQUISETUM HYEMALE L. var. AFFINE (Engelm.) A.A. Eaton (E. prealtum Raf.) MACK: scattered in sand in the Pinus bank- siana forest and in open areas just west of Ft. Smith, 3668 and 3739; in sand in cut- over scrub area, rare, Bell Rock, 8 miles west of Ft. Smith, 3733; common along exposed sandy riverbank, Old Settlement, Hay River, Lewis 682. Reported by Raup (1947) from the Upper Slave River and from Simpson. The above mentioned specimens represent the second report of this species for Mackenzie District. SELAGINELLACEAE SELAGINELLA RUPESTRIS (L.) Spring. ALTA.: rare in patches in very shallow soil over igneous rock, Ft. Fitzgerald, 4427 and 4432. This is an extension of range of some 75 miles north and northwest from Lake Atha- baska. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 ISOETACEAE IsOETES MURICATA Dur. var. BRAUNIT (Dur.) Reed MACK: rooted in muck in 2 ft. water, rare, bay north of town, Yellowknife, 3500; in fine sand in 15 inches water, Jackfish Lake, Yel- lowknife, 3273; fairly common in 1—2 ft. water, north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 3536; fairly common in 18 inches water, sand bottom, mouth of Yellowknife River, 3278. Not previously recorded for the area hbe- tween Lake Athabaska and Great Bear Lake; the second collection for Mackenzie District. PINACEAE PINUS BANKSIANA Lamb. MACK.: trees to 30 ft. in crevices of igneous rocky hillsides and sandy gravel hillsides throughout the area, Yellowknife, 2098 and 2379; trees to 25 ft. seattered in shallow soil on rock hillside, Yellowknife River Power House, 3309; very common in crevices on rocky hillside, Dome Lake, 3186; occasional in shallow soil on rocky hillside, Snare River Power Station, 2615; sand ridges on east side of Mackenzie River approximately 26 miles due southeast of Fort Norman, 64°41’N, 124°51’W, Angus Sherwood, Sept. 1, 1953. A full discussion of the distribution of this species in Mackenzie District is given by Raup (1947). Prevous records from north of Great Slave Lake are, however, not sub- stantiated. Mr. Angus Sherwood, who is post- master at Norman Wells, has written the fol- lowing interesting information regarding his collection: ‘“...These specimens are from a young tree, 6” in diameter at 1’ above the ground surface. Time did not allow me to walk back from the lake to the sand ridges where the old growth trees stand. The limit of growth for the mature trees is about 16” dia. taken above the root swell at the butt. There are several groves of these old trees on the well drained sand ridges... I have checked with many natives, who as you know are very observant and all have told me that these pines are the last...” The known northern limit of Jack Pine in Mackenzie District would thus appear to be 64°41’N. Junirerus communis L. var. DEPRESSA Push (J. communis L. var. montana sensu Raup pro parte). MACK: fairly common in shallow soil on rock hillside, Indin Lake, 3367; scattered in shallow soil on rocky hillside, Gunbarrel In- let, Great Bear Lake, 2847; sand muck, Saw- mill Bay, Great Bear Lake, Corcoran 13; along Brock R. approx. 8 miles directly east July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN of its mouth [south end of Darnley Bay, Arctic Coast], Ross Mackay s.n. 1951. Reported by Cody and Chillcott (1955) from Matthews Lake; the map in Raup (1947) shows a lack of collections of Juniperus com- munis from the east end of Great Bear Lake and also between Great Bear Lake and Great Slave Lake. The Brock River collection is apparently an extension of range of some 450 miles eastward from near the Mackenzie River Delta and north from the south shore of Great Bear Lake. JUNIPERUS HORIZONTALIS Moench MACK.: prostrate, trailing in crevice on rock hillside, common on some hillsides, In- din Lake, 3371; Yellowknife 2054, 2072, 2209 and 2472. Preble (1908) reports Juniperus sabina as extending “throughout the forested belt,” but Raup (1947) recorded that he had only seen specimens from Wrigley and Nahanni Mt. below Great Slave Lake. TYPHACEAE TYPHA LATIFOLIA L. MACK: occasional on lakeshore in 1 ft. water, Seven Mile Lake, 27 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4671; common on exposed shore of river West Channel, Hay River, Lewis 1123; common in shallow water rooted in ooze, Rat Lake, Yellowknife, 3559. Raup (1947) reports this species as “noted in Fl. Bor.-Am. as occurring ‘Throughout Cana- da to Fort Franklin,’” but goes on to say that there is no other evidence of its presence on the upper Mackenzie. In addition to the spe- cimens cited above, several sterile stands were observed in the vicinity of Yellowknife, as well as a sterile stand just below the power dam in the Yellowknife River north of Prosperous Lake (62°40’N, 114°15’W). The record of the presence of Typha latifolia in Mackenzie District is now substantiated. SPARGANIACEAE SPARGANIUM MINIMUM (Hartm.) Fries MACK: dried up pond, Ft. Smith, Loan 36; rooted in ooze in small bay of Fame Lake, Yellowknife, 3558. Raup (1947) cited a Mackenzie River speci- men by Onion and stated that this specimen was the only record for the species north of Lake Athabaska. The specimens listed here are apparently the first Mackenzie Dis- trict collections with specific locality data. FIELD-NATURALIST 103 POTAMOGETONACEAE POTAMOGETON FILIFORMIS Pers. var. BOREALIS (Raf.) St. John MACK: in 15 inches water rooted in fine sand, rare, Jackfish Lake, Yellowknife, 3272; rooted in muck in 2 ft. water in bay on north side of town, Yellowknife, 3499; fairly common rooted in sand in 1—2 ft. water at north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 3534. Previously known in Mackenzie District from only two collections: Fairchild Pt. and N.W. shore of Great Slave Lake. It is cer- tainly expected to occur along the upper Mackenzie River. POTAMOGETON FOLIOSUS Raf. var. MACELLUS Fern. MACK: rooted in mud in shallow lake by old townsite, Yellowknife, 3552 and 3555. Previously known from Wood Buffalo Park, Alta. and Great Bear Lake (Raup 1947). POTAMOGETON ALPINUS Balbis var. (Raf.) Ogden MACK: rooted in sand in 2—3 ft. water at north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 3533; rooted in mud in shallow lake by old town- site, Yellowknife, 3551, 3554 and 3556; in pond of small creek in 15 inches water, rare, In- din Lake, 3471; rooted in deep ooze in 15 inches water at edge of small lake, Indin Lake, 3454. TEN UIFOLIUS Not previously recorded in the area bet- ween Lake Athabaska and Great Bear Lake (Raup 1947). ALISMACEAE SAGITTARIA CUNEATA Sheldon MACK : occasional at edge of river suspended in 1 ft. water, Lower Hay River, Lewis 968; Sagittate leaves mostly floating, rooted in muck of Baker Creek at Giant Mine, Yellow- knife, 3484. Previously collected only once in Mackenzie District, and that in the Paleozoic country on the northwest shore of Great Slave Lake. ALISMA TRIVIALE Pursh (A. plantagoaquatica L. subsp. brevipes (Greene) Samuels.) ALTA: river shore in wet silt, rare, Ft. Fitz- gerald, Loan 205. This extension of range northward from Chipewyan on Lake Athabaska to just south of the Alberta—Mackenzie border would lead us to suspect that it might also be found in southern Mackenzie District. 104 THE CANADIAN GRAMINEAE Bromus INERMIS Leyss ALTA: common in disturbed ground by railway yards, Lac la Biche, 6976; MACK: occasional in exposed dried pond, Airport, Lower Hay River, Lewis 735. This introduced grass is evidently spreading northward into our area. It is recorded both by Groh (1949) and Turner (1949). New to the flora of Mackenzie District. GLYCERIA GRANDIS S. Wats. MACK: scattered along dried-up slough south of town of Ft. Smith, 4515; moist clay of river bank, Little Buffalo River, 32 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4758; moist edge of exposed pool, Lower Hay River, Lewis 1111B; scatter- ed in clumps in moist ground by bay, Yellow- knife, 3056; by small lake near old townsite, rare, Yellowknife 3557. The florets of No. 4758 are a pale yel- lowish green rather than purple as in the typical plant; this specimen should therefore be referred to forma pallescens Fern. No. 3557 has some spikelets measuring up to 8 mm. in length and is thus approaching var. komarovii Kelso. Raup (1947) records only one collection from Mackenzie District (Re- solution). The species reaches its northern limit on the north shore of Great Slave Lake and has apparently not previously been re- corded from east of the Paleozoic boundary in our area. GLYCERIA PULCHELLA (Nash) K. Schum MACK: rare in wet sand of roadside ditch, Yellowknife, 2678; rare in shallow water among sedge on north shore of Latham Island, Yellowknife, 3081; scattered in moist gravel by stream, west side of Kam Lake, Yellow- knife, 2987B. Apparently restricted to areas in close proximity to the main Mackenzie River sys- tem in Mackenzie District; not previously re- corded from east of the Paleozoic boundary. GLYCERIA BOREALIS (Nash) Batchelder ALTA: scattered in moist drying-up muskeg 14 mile south of Ft. Smith, N.W.T. in Alberta, Loan 201. This is a northward extension of range from the Upper Slave River lowland locality cited by Raup (1936). Its presence here just south of the Alberta—Mackenzie border indi- cates that it will almost certainly be found in Mackenzie District. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 PUCCINELLIA HAUPTIANA (Krecz.) Kitagawa ALTA : shallow soil over igneous rock, rare, Ft. Fitzgerald, 4435. This is a Siberian species which extends through Alaska and Yukon. The only other record for Alberta is that of Swallen (1944) from Banff. ScoLOCHLOA FESTUCACEA (Willd.) Link (Fluminia festucacea (Willd.) Hitch.) MACK: exposed shore, southwest exposure, rare, Big Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 1101. Recorded by Fernald (1950) as “‘s. Mackenz. and B.C., s. to Ia.” but Raup (1936) does not list any specimens from farther north than the Upper Slave River lowland in northern Alberta. The species was certainly expected to occur in Mackenzie District. Poa INTERIOR Rydb. MACK: clumps in rock crevice, Prosperous Lake, 2866 (det. Swallen); common in sand in open area east of Ft. Smith, 4054; scattered in moist sand on south slope of Slave River, Ft. Smith, 4528; moist peat, exposed, sparse, Moraine Point, Lewis 487. Not recorded by Raup (1935, 1936) for either Wood Buffalo Park or the Athabaska —Great Slave Lake region; apparently new to the flora of Mackenzie District. Poa STENANTHA Trin. MACK: clumps, fairly common in pure sand, Yellowknife, 2376 (det. Swallen); fairly com- mon in shallow soil over rock, Joliffe Island, Yellowknife, 2462 (det. Swallen). Not previously recorded from Mackenzie District. Poa cusicki Vasey ALTA: clumps in shallow soil over igneous rock, Government Dog Camp, Chenal de Quatre Fourches (58°38’N, 111°20’W), 3655. Apparently not previously recorded from northern Alberta. DisTICHLIS SPICATA (L.) Greene var. STRICTA (Torr.) Beetle (D. stricta (Torr.) Rydb.) MACK: rather rare in wet clay of roadside ditch, Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, 4570. Previously known from the Salt Plain in Wood Buffalo Park, Alta., and certainly to be expected north of Alberta—Mackenzie border. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. AGROPYRON TRACHYCAULUM (Link) Malte var. NOVAE-ANGLIAE (Scribn.) Fern. MACK: very scattered in very moist clay, Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, 4567 (det. H. A. Senn). July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN Apparently the first record of this variety east of the Mackenzie Mountains. AGROPYRON TRACHYCAULUM (Link) GLAUCUM (Pease & Moore) Malte MACK: sand of bank along river shore west of town, Ft. Smith, 4632; common along roadside on escarpment 3 miles west of Salt Plain approx. 30 miles west of Ft. Smith, Loan 129; fairly common in clumps in sandy gravel, Little Buffalo River, 32 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4764; scattered on sand hillside, Jackfish Lake, Yellowknife, 3207; shallow soil in hollow of rock, rather rare, Latham Island, Yellowknife, 3078; clump on open hillside, Yellowknife River Power House, 3305 (all det. H.A. Senn). This variety has apparently not previously been recorded from Mackenzie District, but is evidently widespread, although not com- mon, in the southern portions. Malte var. AGROPYRON TRACHYCAULUM (Link) Malte var. UNILATERALE (Cassidy) Malte MACK: common in clearing in jack pine— aspen woods, sandy loam, Ft. Smith, Loan 114; clump in disturbed ground along roadside on western edge of Salt Plain bordering escarpment, west of Ft. Smith, 4583; clump in sandy gravel, Little Buffalo River, 32 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4754 (all det. H.A. Senn). Recorded by Raup (1935, 1936) from Wood Buffalo Park, Allta., and certainly to be expected in the area lying just north of the Alberta—Mackenzie border. Raup (1947) also cites a specimen from Brintnell Lake in the Mackenzie Mountains. AGROPYRON PECTINIFORME Roem. & Schult. MACK: fairly common in clumps in pure sand, Ft. Smith, 4157; introduced as grass around building, Yellowknife, 3088. At Yellowknife a patch 20 ft. square planted from seed was maintaining itself by a dwel- ling; it was apparently not spreading; intro- duced; not previously recorded for Macken- zie District. AGROPYRON REPENS (L.) Beauv. var. REPENS MACK: rare on sand hillside overlooking Slave River, Ft. Smith, 4607. Introduced; not previously recorded from Mackenzie District. CoLtpopIuM FULVvUM (Trin.) Griseb. (Arctophila fulva (Trin.) Rupr.) MACK: in 6 inches water, Pearson Point [east end of] Great Slave Lake, Fredeen 68. Previously known in the Mackenzie basin from only one collection from the south FIELD-NATURALIST 105 shore of Great Slave Lake, Black Bay, E. of mouth of Rocher R. (Raup 1936). ELYMUS CANADENSIS L. MACK: exposed sandy ridge, West Channel, Hay River, Lewis 949. This is apparently the only collection from Mackenzie District made since Richardson’s collection on Great Slave Lake. ELYMUS MACOUNI Vasey MACK: very rare, edge of scrub birch— willow area, Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, 4580. This hybrid between Agropyron trachy- caulum and Hordeum jubatum might be found anywhere the parents are found together. Both these species occur far to the north- ward in Mackenzie District, but the hybrid has apparently not previously been collected north of Wood Buffalo Park, Alta. (Raup 1936). SPHENOPHOLIS INTERMEDIA (Rydb.) S. pallens sensu Raup) ALTA: disturbed ground by roadside, rare, Ft. Fitzgerald, 4436; MACK: exposed well- drained waste land, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 911. Previously known as far north as central Wood Buffalo Park, Alta.; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. Rydb. ( ? AvENA FATUA L. var. piLosissima S. F. Gray MACK: exposed sandy slope of roadside, solitary, Lower Hay River, Lewis 1104. Introduced; not previously recorded for Mackenzie District. CALAMAGROSTIS LAPPONICA (Wahl.) Hartm. MACK: shallow humus over rock, rare, Pre- lude Lake, 3143; in dry moss in hollow of rock, Joliffe Island, Yellowknife, 3109. Apparently not previously known from the area around Great Slave Lake, Raup (1947) includes in discussion of the varieties of this species described from North America. CALAMAGROSTIS NEGLECTA (Ehrh.) G. M. & S. MACK: Fairly common in dry sand, Yellow- knife, 3059; very scattered in moist ground by bay, Yellowknife, 3057; common, rooted in wet moss on sedge—grass flats by lower town, Yellowknife, 3339. Apparently not previously known from the area around Great Slave Lake. ARCTAGROSTIS ARUNDINACEA (Trin.) Beal MACK: exposed sandy slope, common, 24 miles south of Lower Hay River, Lewis 944; 106 THE CANADIAN exposed dry sandy slope of roadside, Lower Hay River, Lewis 599; edge of woods, com- mon, Long Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 751; exposed sand shore, common, Brabant Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 1036. Apparently not previously collected in the region around Great Slave Lake, but certainly to be expected in the western portions. PHLEUM PRATENSE L. ALTA: sand by buildings, rare, Ft. Fitzgerald, 4101; MACK: small clumps in disturbed sand by airstrip, rare, Ft. Smith, 4359; scat- tered on sand hillside, Ft. Smith, 4529; occa- sional along any sandy roadside, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 556; moist peat ridge, occasional, Lower Hay River, Lewis 747; common along exposed dry roadside, Lower Hay River, Lewis 877; sandy gravel, rare, airstrip, Yellowknife, 2707; in gravel, rare, Yellowknife, 2960; scattered in sandy gravel along roadside north of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 2967. Previously known from Wood Buffalo Park, Alta.; introduced; not previously re- corded for Mackenzie District. MunHLENBERGIA SQUARROSA (Trin.) Rydb. (M. richardsonis (Trin.) Rydb.) MACK : bordering a scrub birch--willow area, rare, Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, 4581. Previously known from Wood Buffalo Park, Alta. (Raup 1935) and along the Bear River (Porsild 1943). This is the second record for Mackenzie District. Oryzopsis PUNGENS (Torr.) Hitche. MACK: very scattered in clumps in open sand west of town, Ft. Smith, 3669 and 4039; rare in sand by roadside in cut-over scrub area, Bell Rock, eight miles west of Ft. Smith, 3734. Previously known from central Wood Buffa- lo Park, Alta.; new to the flora of Macken- zie District. SripA SPARTEA Trin. var. CURTISETA Hitche. ALTA: sandy soil, top of bank overlooking Athabaska River, Ft. McMurray, 7278. This is apparently the northern limit of this variety in eastern Alberta. In northwestern Alberta, E.H. Moss has collected it at Smoky River east of Grande Prairie, slope of Saddle River Valley at Wanham, Meickle River north of Manning, Keg River, near Meander River and at Paddle Creek west of Fort Vermillion (specimens in DAO). It is not recorded by Raup (1934) or Groh (1949). FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 HiEROCHLOE opoRATA (L.) Wahl. MACK : common in sod, outlet of Prosperous Lake, Yellowknife River, 2188; low wet soil on shore of lake, rare, Indin Lake, 3410. This species has apparently not previously been noted from east of the Paleozoic bound- ary in Mackenzie District. CYPERACEAE ERIOPHORUM GRACILE W.D.J. Koch ALTA: floating bog around small lake in muskeg 12 miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald, 4263; fairly common in floating bog around small lake 2 miles southwest of Ft. Smith N.W.T. in Alberta, 4028. Apparently not previously known in Alber- ta north of the Edmonton-—Lesser Slave Lake district (Raup 1934, Turner 1949); its pre- sence just south of the Alberta--Mackenzie border would indicate that it may quite pos- sibly be found in southern Mackenzie District. Scirpus pALuposus A. Nels. MACK: in depression bordering saline plain, Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, Loan 313. Previously known from the Salt Plains in Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta, and certainly expected to extend north of the Alberta--Mac- kenzie border. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. : ELEOCHARIS PAUCIFLORA (Lightf.) Link var. FERN- ALDIZ Svenson MACK: predominant in moist moss along shoreline, Long Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 768; forming ‘several large patches in wet sand on beach, shore of Sand Lake, Yellowknife, 3136. Previously known in Mackenzie District from two regions: east end of Great Slave Lake (Raup 1936) and Great Bear Lake (Porsild 1943). CAREX CAPITATA L. ALTA : rare, under aspen in sand along road- side 4 miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald, 4725; fairly common in deep wet moss at edge of spruce forest 7 miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald, 3860; scattered in clumps in deep moss of burnt over black spruce muskeg 12 miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald, 4533; MACK: occa- sional in peat at edge of marsh, Brabant Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 1044; occa- sional in wet moss along sheltered shoreline, Long Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 780; drier ground near pot holes, Gros Cap Island, Great Slave Lake, Reeder 1791; open peaty area, common, Yellowknife, 2402; moist shal- July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN low soil along shoreline, Indin Lake, 3379, 3459. This species is found in the wooded country from Newfoundland to Alaska, but is appa- rently little known in our area. Raup (1935, 1936, 1947) records it from Methye Portage and Wood Buffalo Park, Alta. and the Canol Road and east end of Great Slave Lake in Mackenzie District. Carex MARITIMA Gunner (C. incurva Lightf.) MACK : bog, Pearson Point, Great Slave Lake, Fredeen 9. Previously known from the arctic coast and Great Bear Lake (Raup 1947); this col- lection represents an extension of range of some 350 miles to the southeast. CAREX CHCRDORRHIZA Ehrh. ALTA : fairly common in floating bog around small lake in muskeg area 12 miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald, 4546; scattered in floating bog around small lake, 1% miles southwest of Ft. Smith N.W.T. in Alberta, 4238. Previously unknown in the region between Lake Athabaska and Great Bear Lake (Raup 1947). CAREX DISPERMA Dewey MACK: wet open peat area near Con Mine, in mats, common here, Yellowknife, 2405; wet peat area, rare, Snare River Power Sta- tion, 2628. Previously recorded for Mackenzie District from Clewi R. (Raup 1935), Simpson (Raup _ 1947), Aklavik and Great Bear Lake (Porsild 1943). CAREX BONANZENSIS Britt. MACK: along roadside in ditch, Lower Hay River, Lewis 408. This is a Yukon-Siberian species that has previously only been recorded twice from Mackenzie District: Simpson (Raup 1947) _ and Aklavik (Porsild 1943). CAREX AENEA Fern. ALTA: very shallow soil over igneous rock, rare, Ft. Fitzgerald, 4433; MACK: disturbed humus pushed up beside road, rare, Bell Rock 8 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4396; common in sand in clumps, airstrip, Yellowknife, 2689; gravel roadside by cemetery near airport, common, Yellowknife, 3274 (det. Hermann); wet sand, shore of Sand Lake, Yellowknife, 3122; disturbed ground around buildings, rare, Indin Lake, 3411. Raup (1947) tentatively referred an imma- ture specimen collected at Simpson to this FIELD-NATURALIST 107 species, but otherwise it was previously un- known north of Lake Athabaska (Raup 1936). CAREX SYCHNOCEPHALA Carey MACK: exposed sandy slope of roadside, rare, Lower Hay River, Lewis 967; alluvial soil at mouth of Baker Creek, rare, Yellow- knife, 3494, Previously known in our area from two collections; central Wood Buffalo Park, Al- berta and Lake Athabaska; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. Carex suPINA Willd. ssp. SPANIOCARPA (Steud.) Hultén MACK: dry hillside, Gros Cap Island, Great Slave Lake, Reeder 1777; sand and gravel hill- side, common, Jackfish Lake, Yellowknife, 2670; very shallow soil:in rock crevices, scat- tered locally, near Negus Mine, Yellowknife, 2418; shallow soil on rocky hillside, very common, Eldorado Mine, Port Radium, 2780; in small clumps on sandy island, southwest of head of Bathurst Inlet (66°04’N, 108°28’W), Woodruff 74. Previously known in our area from a Ri- chardson specimen from Great Bear Lake, the east end of Great Slave Lake and Lake Athabaska (Raup 1936, 1947). CAREX PECKII Howe ALTA: in poplar woods, Lac la Biche, 6930, 6964; sandy soil in open Populus tremuloides-- Abies balsamifera woods, Big Island, Lac la Biche, 7059; open white spruce woods, Lac la Biche Mission, 7024. The northernmost records for this species in Alberta are the present collections and one from Lesser Slave Lake District (Raup 1934). There is however, a record from Mooshide Mountain in Central Yukon, some 1000 miles to the northwest, which would indicate that this species should be searched for in the intervening territory. CAREX DEFLExA Hornem. MACK: sand and gravel along roadside just west of new townsite, Yellowknife, 2522; in pure sand near swimming beach at Sand Lake, Yellowknife, 3142; in crevices of rock, rare, Dome Lake, 3185; very shallow soil in hollow on rocky hillside, rare, Snare River Power Station, 2623; in clumps in humus- rich disturbed ground around buildings, Indin Lake, 3440. Porsild (1943) reported this species as new to the Northwest Territories on the basis of his collections from Great Bear Lake. Raup 108 THE CANADIAN (1947) later collected it at Brintnell Lake and Red Mountain in the Mackenzie Moun- tains. To the south it is known from Lake Athabaska. The present collections help fill in our knowledge of the distribution of this species in Mackenzie District. CAREX ROSSII Boott MACK: in humus in hollows and crevices of rocky hillsides and in sand and gravel, Yel- lowknife, 2428, 2530, 2667, 2686, 3275; in pure sand, rare, Snare River Power Station, 2634. The known range of this species is extended some 300 miles northwest from Ft. Smith. CAREX SPRENGELIT Dewey ALTA: rare in waste ground along roadside, Ft. McMurray, 7248. Recorded by Turner (1949) from Ft. Sas- katchewan (specimens in DAO); this collec- tion represents a northward extension of the known range in Alberta of some 200 miles. CAREX LASIOCARPA Ehrh. var. AMERICANA Fern. ALTA : occasional to common in floating bog around small lake 1% miles southwest of Ft. Smith N.W.T. in Alberta, 4026, 4244. This is an extension of the known range into northern Alberta of some 100 miles from the south shore of Lake Athabaska in Sas- katchewan. Turner (1949) records it from Ft. Saskatchewan near Edmonton, Alberta. See Raup (1936, 1947) for a discussion of the possible occurrence of this species and C. lanuginosa in Mackenzie District. CAREX RAYMONDII Calder ALTA : black sandy soil in Populus -- Salix -- Picea glauca woods, rare, 1 mile southwest of Ft. Smith N.W.T. in Alberta, 4498; MACK: clumps in sod in sand by roadside, Seven Mile Lake, 27 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4640; moist crevices in calcareous rocks, common, Alexan- dra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 643. The specimens listed above are paratypes of the species described by Calder (Rhodora 54:246-250. 1952). Specimens cited under C. atratiformis by Raup (1935) from Wood Buf- falo Park probably belong here. CAREX BUxBAUMII Wahl. MACK : low wet soil on shore of lake, local- ized, Indin Lake, 3409. Not previously recorded from the area between Lake Athabaska and Great Bear Lake; the second record for Mackenzie Dis- trict. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Carex MEDIA R. Br. (C. vahlii Schkuhr var. inferal- pina (Wahl.) Fern.) MACK: bog, Pearson Point, Great Slave Lake, Fredeen 47; damp soil, Gros Cap Island, Great Slave Lake, Reeder 1792; rich black soil near north end of Kam Lake, fairly common, Yellowknife, 2527; rich black peaty muck north of town, rare, Yellowknife, 2552; humus over rock, rare, Yellowknife River Power House, 3301. Apparently not previously recorded from the region around Great Slave Lake. CAREX ROSTRATA Stokes MACK: several large stands in 10 inches water along lakeshore, Indin Lake, 3430; shallow marsh in 4 inches water, 36 miles south of Aklavik, Stevens s.n. Aug. 7, 1947. Raup (1947) cites a Richardson specimen collected on the Mackenzie River but states that the northern limit is yet unknown. Hooker (1829-40) gives the distribution of this species (C. ampullacea) as “Cumberland House, Bear Lake...” The specimens re- corded here are apparently the only collec- tions north of Great Slave Lake with exact locality data. ARACEAE AcoRUS CALAMAS L. ALTA: muck along river’s edge, Beaver River 2 miles south of Briarville P.O., 7154; rare in wet meadow, Lac la Biche, 6864. Not recorded by Raup (1936) but reported by Turner (1949) at Liiy Lake, 23 miles northwest of Fort Saskatchewan, some 100 miles southwest of Lac la Biche. LEMNACEAE LEMNA TRISULCA L. MACK: rare, suspended in water at edge of lagoon, Lower Hay River, Lewis 580; among broken reeds at mouth of small creek on west shore of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 3546. Previously known from central Wood Buf- falo Park, Alta. (Raup 1935) and from Mac- kenzie River Delta (Porsild 1943) and cer- tainly to be expected in the intervening area. JUNCACEAE Juncus Bpurontius L. MACK: wet sand bank of Slave River, rare, Ft. Smith, 4532; moist peat soil, partially exposed, common, Lower Hay River, Lewis 1103; scattered in moist clay soil, Yellowknife, 3338; common, rooted in muck of flats by bay, Yellowknife, 3549; in wet sand of broad road- July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN side ditch on road to airstrip, local, Yellow- knife, 3262. Not previously recorded from the area between central Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta and Ft. Simpson (Raup 1935, 1947), but re- corded by Hooker (1829-40) as occurring “throughout Canada to Bear Lake.” JUNCUS FILIFoRMIS L. MACK: moist crevice of calcareous rock, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 374; among pebbles at water’s edge, rather rare, Yellowknife River Power House, 3291. Recorded by Hooker (1829-40) as “Saskat- chewan to Bear Lake...’ but Raup (1947) reported that he had seen no specimens from north of Wood Buffalo Park [Alberta]; these are the first substantiated records from Mackenzie District. LILIACEAE ZYGADENUS ELEGANS Pursh MACK: along Brock River approximately 8 miles directly east of its mouth, Ross Mackay sn. July 25, 1951; on glacial till along the Hornaday River approximately 26 miles di- rectly southeast of its mouth, Ross Mackay s.n. July 21, 1951. According to the map in Raup (1947) these collections extend the known range some 150 miles eastward along the arctic coast. LILIUM PHILADELPHICUM L. var. ANDINUM (Nutt.) Ker. ALTA: a single plant, 7281, with perianth segments yellow, 20--30 small reddish-orange dots near the base of each segment and yel- lowish stamens, was found growing with the typical form in Populus--Picea woods at Ft. McMurray. This would appear to be approach- ing what Raup (1934) has described as forma ammaculatum. SMILACINA TRIFOLIA (L.) Desv. MACK: Moist peat area in front of hospital, very rare, Yellowknife, 2603; in wet moss, rare, Snare River Power Station, 2629. This species is found in the Mackenzie River basin at least as far north as the Simpson region, but it has apparently not previously been recorded from east of the Paleozoic boundary in Mackenzie District. ORCHIDACEAE HABENARIA viripis (L.) R. Br. (Muhl.) Gray MACK : fairly common in shade of Equisetum arvense in scrub spruce woods at base of sand escarpment overlooking Slave R., Ft. var. BRACTEATA FIELD-NATURALIST 109 Smith, 3928, 4073; sand in Populus--Salix bush, very rare, airport, Ft. Smith, 4347; sand at edge of poplar-spruce woods, rare, Seven Mile Lake, 27 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4643. To the south, this species has been collected in central Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta (Raup 1935); in Mackenzie District, Raup (1947) re- cords it from two localities, one on the Liard between Nahanni Butte and Simpson and the other on the Mackenzie at Nahanni Mt. SPIRANTHES ROMANZOFFIANA Cham. MACK: very rare in moist moss of muskeg, Indin Lake, 3455. This is perhaps from the northeastern limit in Mackenzie District. CORALLORHIZA MACULATA Raf. ALTA: rare on steep slope in poplar woods 2 miles east of Lac la Biche, 6948. This species was not recorded for northern Alberta either by Raup (1934, 1936) or Turner (1949), although it was certainly to be expect- ed for Raup (1934) records a specimen from almost the same latitude at Rocky Mountain Canyon near Hudson Hope, B.C. SALICACEAE SALIX SERISSIMA Fern. MACK : shrub 4--5 ft. in open scrub area south of town, Ft. Smith, 3814. This is a northwestward extension of range from the north shore of Lake Athabaska in Saskatchewan; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. This species can be separated from S. laszan- dra, which also occurs in the area, by its shorter aments and white-pubescent bracts. S. serissima was collected in flower at Ft. Smith on June 15; S. lasiandra was collected in flower along the Slave River at Ft. Fitzge- rald a few miles to the south on June 6, and in fruit at the same location on June 18. SALIX ARCTOPHILA Cockerell MACK: Pearson Point, Great Slave Lake, Fredeen 118; prostrate shrub among rocks at mouth of small creek, Indin Lake, 3467. SALIX MACCALLIANA Rowlee MACK: shrub to 6 ft., very scattered in sand in open pastured scrub area just south of townsite, Ft. Smith, 3816, 3975. Previously known from the Salt Plains in Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta, and certainly expected to occur north of the Alberta--Mac- kenzie border. New to the flora of Macken- zie District. 110 SaLix LUTEA Nutt. MACK: shrub 2-3 m high along river on stone--clay slope, West Channel, Hay River, 228, 229. Raup (1947) records a collection of this spe- cies from Lower Slave River; the present collections are apparently the first from the shores of Great Slave Lake and the second from Mackenzie District. SALIX PSEUDOMONTICOLA Ball MACK : shrub to 5 ft. scattered in sand in open scrub area south of town, Ft. Smith, 3818. Raup (1935) records two collections of this species from Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta, to the southwest. Its presence in southern Mackenzie District was certainly to be expect- ed. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. SALIX BARRATTIANA Hook. var. ANGUSTIFOLIA Anders. MACK: shrub 8 ft. in hollow between out- crops on west side of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 2204 (det. Ball). S. barrattiana is a cordilleran species. Raup (1947) and Porsild (1945) have recorded S. barrattiana and its var. marcescens from the Mackenzie Mountains. This record of var. angustifolia from Yellowknife is apparently the easternmost for any of the forms of S. barrattiana. It is new to the flora of Mac- kenzie District. Var. angustifolia differs from the typical variety, among other characters, in having the leaves narrower and acute rather than rounded to the base. SALIX PEDICELLARIS Pursh var. HYPOGLAUCA Fern. MACK: 6 ft. shrub, rare in moist peaty area by shore of Sand Lake, Yellowknife, 2604. Apparently not previously collected east of the Paleozoic boundary in Mackenzie District or in the area between Lake Athabaska and the Lower Mackenzie River. SANTALACEAE GEOCAULON LivipuM (Richards.) Fern. MACK : common in peaty soil on wooded hill- sides, Snare River Power station, 2609; shal- low humus-rich soil on rock hillsides, fairly common, Indin Lake, 3394; scattered in moss, Beaverlodge Lake, 2731. Apparently not previously collected in the Pre-Cambrian north of Great Slave Lake, although it is recorded by Hooker (1829-40) as occurring “to lat. 69° on the Mackenzie River.” These specimens are probably from near the northeastern limit in Mackenzie District. THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 POLYGONACEAE RuMEX ?PALLIDUs Bigel. MACK: clay bank of river, rare, Salt River [west of Ft. Smith], 4595; roadside, Salt River, Loan 142. These specimens appear to be somewhat in- termediate between R. sibiricus and R. palli- dus. The mature valves in Loan 142 measure 3.3--4.5--(5.0) mm in length, usually extend- ing to a pointed tip beyond the 2.2-3.0 mm long callus. R. sibiricus is described as having valves 3--4 mm long, not much longer than the callus. Rechinger (1937) in his mo- nograph of the genus Rumex included inland Alaska and Yukon specimens with the eastern North American maritime R. pallidus. Hultén (1941-1952) in Flora of Alaska and Yukon re- ferred these specimens to his R. szbiricus. He also tentatively referred an immature Raup collection from Wood Buffalo Park to this entity. Our specimens have the flowers and fruits closely approximate and not widely separated in whorls as in the Brenner [type ?] specimen depicted by Rechinger. The speci- mens at hand may possibly represent an en- tity as yet undescribed. PoLYGoNUM ACHOREUM Blake ALTA: common along roadsides, Lac la Biche, 6951; common along roadsides, Ft. McMurray, 7244; MACK: fairly common in waste ground along roadsides and around buildings, Ft. Smith, 4773; exposed slope of roadside, Lower Hay River, Lewis 1112; in sandy gravel, rare, airstrip, Yellowknife, 3230. Turner (1949) has numerous collections of this species from the Fort Saskatchewan area and Groh (1949) has recorded a collection from Keg River. Raup (1934, 1936, 1947), however, does not record it from the area to the north, which would indicate that it has been introduced into that country only recently. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. PoLYGONUM AMPHIBIUM L. var. STIPULACEUM (Coleman) Fern. forma FLUITANS (Kat.) Fern. (Polygonum hartwrightii Gray) MACK: forming large patch 15 ft. in dia- meter in 15 inches water, Indin Lake, 3408. This is apparently the northernmost record for this species and the only collection from east of the Paleozoic boundary in Mackenzie District. Previously known from Great Slave Lake and Simpson, and to be expected some distance northward down the Mackenzie River valley. July-September, 1956] POLYGONUM LAPATHIFOLIUM L. including var. SALICIFOLIUM Sibth, (Polygonum persicaria L. var. minus Hook.) MACK: moist ditch by roadside, rare, Lower Hay River, Lewis 880; exposed slope of road- side, occasional, Lower Hay River, Lewis 1114, 1115; sandy soil by roadside, rare, Yellow- knife, 3515; prostrate in moist peat of garden area, Yellowknife, 3330; in wet moss among sedges by bay, rare, Yellowknife, 3512; moist soil by lake shore, decumbent, Indin Lake, 3399. Polygonum persicaria var. minus is record- ed by Hooker (1829-40) as occurring to Great Bear Lake, but apparently the only specimen collected previously from Mackenzie District is one by Raup from near Simpson. It may be expected northward along the Mackenzie River valley. POLYGONUM SCABRUM Moench. MACK: moist black humus over sand, rare, by garden area at north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 3544. Introduced; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. Not previously known north of the Edmonton district (Turner 1949). PoLYGONUM CONVOLVULUs L. ALTA: very shallow soil over igneous rock, scattered, Ft. Fitzgerald, 4430; MACK: very scattered in sand, waste area by Hudson Bay Co., Ft. Smith, 4774; scattered in moist shal- low peat over sand, north end of Kam Lake by garden area, Yellowknife, 3530. Introduced; new to Mackenzie District. To the south, previously known from the upper Slave River Lowland (Raup 1936). CHENOPODIACEAE CHENOPODIUM GIGANTOSPERMUM Aellen ALTA: shallow soil over igneous rock at quarry, rare, Ft. Fitzgerald, 4111. Our specimen appears to belong to this entity although it is of lush growth and quite immature. C. gigantospermum is known to the south around Edmonton and in the Peace River district. CHENOPODIUM BERLANDIERI Mog. var. ZSCHACKEI (Murr.) Murr. MACK: common in moist shallow peat over sand, north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 3029. Some of the specimens recorded by Raup (1936, 1947) under C. album probably belong here, as may also part of the basis of the re- cord in Hooker (1829-40) “From Lake Huron to Bear Lake.” THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 111 MONOLEPIS NUTTALLIANA (R. & S.) Greene ALTA: railway embankment, Lac la Biche, 6912; a single lush plant 2 ft. in diameter in disturbed ground by railway yards, Lac la Biche, 7107; fairly common in sod of pas- ture in sand, Halfway House 7 miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald, 3865; MACK: in rich moist humus, rare, north end of Kam Lake, Yellow- knife, 3524. Turner (1949) has reported this species as a common weed in gardens, on roadsides, etc., in the Fort Saskatchewan area and Groh (1949) has recorded it from Keg River, Car- cajou and Fort Vermillion. It is a weed that is evidently spreading northward. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. SPINACIA OLERACEA L. ALTA: rare, along roadside in town, Lac la Biche, 6793; MACK: in sand, waste ground along fence line, very rare, Ft. Smith, 4142. Apparently a garden escape; this species appears not previously to have been recorded as growing outside cultivation in Canada. ATRIPLEX PATULA L. var. HASTATA (L.) Gray MACK: exposed saline plain, common, Salt Plains west of Ft. Smith, Loan 304. Previously known on the Salt Plains in Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta and certainly to be expected in similar habitats north of the Alberta--Mackenzie border. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. SUAEDA DEPRESSA (Pursh) S. Wats. MACK: exposed saline plain, poor drainage, Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, Loan 306; bor- dering slough in saline plain, common, Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, Loan 316. Both Nos. 306 and 316 were collected on the same day, Aug. 21, 1950, the specimens of No. 306 measured up to 14 inches in height and were dark green in color, those of No. 316 taken from the immediate vicinity of the saline depressions measured 2 to 4 inches in height and were reddish green. Inundation of the ground occupied by the latter plants in the early part of the season probably accounts for these differences at least to some extent; increased salinity might also have some effect. Suaeda depressa has been recorded by Raup (1935, 1936) from the Salt Plains south of the Alberta-Mackenzie border and was cer- tainly to be expected in similar habitats north of the border. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. 112 THE CANADIAN CARYOPHYLLACEAE STELLARIA MEDIA (L.) Cyrill. MACK: prostrate on moist peat of garden, Yellowknife, 3328; a week in garden, shallow peat over sand, scattered, Yellowknife, 3521. Introduced; with the exception of a collec- tion from Ft. Simpson, unknown north of Chipewyan; the second record for Mackenzie District. STELLARIA CRASSIFOLIA Ehrh. MACK: in wet moss, Tochatwi Bay, Great Slave Lake, Fredeen 10; in dry gravel by roadside, rare, west side of Kam Lake, Yel- lowknife, 2992; small clump 1 ft. in diameter in moss in shallow moist soil at mouth of creek, west side of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 3985. Apparently not previously recorded from the area around Great Slave Lake. STELLARIA ATRATA (J. W. Moore) Boivin var. atraTa (S. longifolia sensu Raup pro parte) MACK: Lower Hay River, Lewis 962; Long Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 787. Recorded from Mackenzie District by Boivin (Sv. Bot. Tidskr. 47(1):43-46. 1953) on the basis of these collections. (J. W. Moore) Boivin var. (S. longifolia sensu Raup pro STELLARIA ATRATA ECILIATA Boivin parte) ALTA: Ft. Fitzgerald, 4116; 9 miles south of Ft. Smith, N.W.T., Loan 87; 13 miles north of Pine Lake, Wood Buffalo Park, 4278; MACK: Ft. Smith, 4217; Bell Rock, 8 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4383; Wynn’s Mill, Long Island, Slave River, 3988; Lower Hay River, Lewis 331, 536, 588; Brabant Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 1018; Yellowknife, 2509, 2550, 2597, 2676. These specimens were cited by Boivin (loc. cit.) as paratypes of his new variety. CERASTIUM ARVENSE L. MACK : in small mats in sand in sod around farm buildings, Ft. Smith, 4063, 3979; fairly common in sod, Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, 3790, 3687. Previously known from Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta (Raup 1935) and from Mackenzie River Delta and Great Bear Lake (Porsild 1943) and certainly to be expected in the intervening area. CERASTIUM VULGATUM L. var. HIRSUTUM Fries ALTA : common on moist wood shavings with Equisetum arvense, Carex sp. and grasses, Lac la Biche, 6829. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 This is an introduced plant that is now of quite common occurrence in eastern Canada. It has not however, reached any great abun- dance in the prairie provinces. Turner (1949) records several collections from Fort Saskat- chewan and Pigeon Lake, but it is not re- corded from Alberta by Raup (1934, 1936, 1947) or Groh (1949), although Raup (1934) does record a Dawson collection from north of Finlayson Lake, lat. 59° in northern Bri- tish Columbia. The collection from Lac la Biche is apparently from the northernmost known locality in Alberta. ARENARIA CAPILLARIS Poir. MACK: sandy dry land, Sawmill Bay, Great Bear Lake, Corcoran 2. This is an extension of some 600 miles east- ward from a station in Yukon; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. SPERGULA ARVENSIS L. MACK: sandy gravel, airstrip, Yellowknife, 3228. Introduced; new to the flora of Mackenzie District; the nearest records for this species are apparently in the Edmonton district (Tur- ner 1949), some 600 miles to the south. SILENE MENZIESII Hook. MACK: in sand in shade of Populus, rare, Ft. Smith, 4067. This species is apparently very rare in our area. It was first collected here by Richard- son at “Portage d’embarras, Slave River” [one of the portages between Ft. Fitzgerald and Ft. Smith] and then not collected again until found at Simpson by Raup in 1939. The Ri- chardson locality is reestablished with our collection. NYMPHAEACEAE NYMPHAEA TETRAGONA Georgi (N. tetragona ssp. leibergii (Morong) A.E. Porsild); Porsild, (Can. Field Nat. 53:48-50, 1939); Raymond, (Seventh Pac. Sc. Cong. 5:1-10. 1953) ALTA: rooted in ooze of small lake 1% miles southwest of Ft. Smith N.W.T. in Al- berta, 4231, 4500. New to the flora of Alberta. The previously known distribution of this rare species has been reviewed by both Porsild (loc. cit.) and Raymond (loc. cit.). An additional locality unknown to them is in southeastern Manitoba. MAN: in river, Rennie, Bill and Nina Elder sm. Aug. 6, 1952. This is the second record for Manitoba. July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN RANUNCULACEAE CALTHA NATANS Pallas ALTA : floating in small slough 4 miles north of Rich Lake P.O., 7180; MACK: water along shore, Gros Cap Island, Great Slave Lake, Reeder 1799; forming large patch 15 ft. in diameter, rooted in muck in very shallow water of ditch, Yellowknife, 3486; rooted in shallow muck over gravel, leaves formerly floating on water, small stream on west side of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 2980; Great Slave Lake area, east of mouth of Taltson R., Harper sn. 1914 (CAN). Hooker (182940) records this species as “Creeping on the surface of deep sphagnous bogs, in the woody central districts from Ca- nada to lat. 60°; rare. Dr. Richardson, Drum- mond.” The habitat given by Hooker seems to be incorrect. Porsild (Can. Geog. J. 42 (3):137. 1951) lists C. natans as a component of the strand communities east of the mouth of the Mackenzie River. There are, however, no specimens of this species in the Herbarium of the National Museum of Canada from north of Great Slave Lake. There are ample collec- tions of C. palustris var. arctica from this region and the record of C. natans from there is probably an error for that entity. The spe- cimens cited here are apparently the first records for Mackenzie District. ANEMONE MULTIFIDA Poir. Boivin (Can. Field Nat. 65:1-3. 1951) has distinguished a number of varieties and forms of this species based primarily on tepal color. The following may be recorded from our area: ANEMONE MULTIFIDA var. HUDSONIANA DC. forma HUDSONIANA MACK: West Channel Hay River, Yellow- knife, Indin Lake. Forma SANGUINEA (Pursh) Fern. ALTA: 4 miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald; MACK: Ft. Smith, West Channel Hay River, Moraine Point Great Slave Lake, Yellowknife, ~2 miles up Yellowknife River, Gordon Lake, Port Radium on Great Bear Lake. ANEMONE MULTIFIDA var. SAXICOLA Boivin MACK: Moraine Point Great Slave Lake, Yellowknife. Not previously recorded for Makenzie Dis- trict. ANEMONE MULTIFIDA var. SANSONI Boivin forma SANSONII MACK: Ft. Smith, Alexandra Falls on Hay River. FIELD-NATURALIST 113 Not previously recorded for Mackenzie Dis- trict. Forma GALACTIFLORA Boivin MACK: Ft. Smith. Not previously recorded for Mackenzie Dis- trict. ANEMONE RICHARDSONI Hook. MACK: shaded moist localities, rapids on north shore of Christie Bay, Great Slave Lake, Fredeen 20. Apparently not previously recorded from the area around Great Slave Lake. RANUNCULUS CIRCINATUS Sibth. var. (Drew) Benson MACK: common in 2--4 ft. of quiet water, rooted in muck, Salt River, 4185; in 2--3 inches water rooted in muck, sedge grass flats by old townsite, Yellowknife, 2586; fairly com- mon, rooted in ooze, small lake by old town- site, Yellowknife, 2673; rare in 3 ft. water, rooted in muck, bay on north side of town Yellowknife, 3498. The only other record of this entity from Mackenzie District is a collection made by Porsild from Mackenzie River Delta. SUBRICGIDUS RANUNCULUS GMELINIT DC. var GMELINII MACK : prostrate on wet mud bank of river, rare, Little Buffalo River, Lewis 329; prostrate herb on surface of water in marsh, occasional, Brabant Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 1096; forming mat 4 ft. in diameter on rich black peaty muck, Yellowknife, 2553; floating in shallow water rooted in muck and prostrate on very wet muck, road into Kam Lake, Yel- lowknife, 2259, 2310; in very shallow water along outlet of Jackfish Lake, local, Yellow- knife, 3211. Not previously recorded from the area between Peace River Landing, Alberta and Great Bear Lake. RANUNCULUS RHOMBOIDEUS Goldie MACK: rare on Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, 3689. Previously known from the prairies in central Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta, and cer- tainly to be expected in similar habitats north of the Alberta — Mackenzie border; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. RANUNCULUS ABORTIVUS 1 MACK: moist sand of roadside ditch, rare, .Seven Mile Lake, 27 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4646. This is a northward extension of range from southern Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. 114 RANUNCULUS UNCINATUS D. Don var. UNCINATUS ALTA: rare in moist Populus — Salix burnt over area 1 mile southwest of Ft. Smith, N.W.T. in Alberta, 4510; MACK: scattered along lakeshore in moist silt, Seven Mile Lake, 27 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4679. These collections represent a northward extension of the known range from the lower Peace River near the western boundary of Wood Buffalo Park. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. RANUNCULUS PENSYLVANICUS TL ALTA: very scattered in moist sandy soil around small lake on Pine Lake Road 13 miles north of Pine Lake, Wood Buffalo Park, 4288. This is an northwestward extension of range of some 75 miles from stations cited by Raup at the west end of Lake Athabaska. It could quite conceivably be found at least as far north as the southern limits of Mackenzie District for Hooker (1829-40) records it as “equally diffused” with R. hispidus (R. ma- count). RANUNCULUS CYMBALARIA Pursh. var. CYMBALARIA MACK: low moist ground along lake shore, Resolution, Fredeen 105; moist moss at edge of river, occasional, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 639; moist peat at edge of pool, Old Settlement, Hay River, Lewis 676. Hooker (182940) recorded this species as “... from Canada to near the Arctic Sea, lat. 68°...”, but Raup (1947) stated that he had seen no authentic material from north of the Little Buffalo River. The specimens cited here authenticate the northward range to the south shore of Great Slave Lake. It may yet be found to the north, at least along the upper Mackenzie River. THALICTRUM TURNERI Boivin MACK: moist edge of aspen — spruce forest, occasional, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 375; moist shelter of Salix by river, common, Lower Hay River, Lewis 727, 728 (all det. Boivin). The immature specimens from Ft. Simpson referred tentatively by Raup (1947) to T. occidentale, are quite possibly T. turneri, since T. occidentale, according to Boivin, is a Rocky Mountain species. The other speci- men reported by Raup, Crickmay 47 from Liard River between Nahanni Butte and Simp- son, is a paratype of T. turneri. THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 FUMARIACEAE CoRYDALIS SEMPERVIRENS (L.) Pers. MACK: Gordon Lake, Denton s.n.; in rock crevices, scattered, Dome Lake, 3167; shallow soil in crevice of rock, Snare River Power Station, 2611; very shallow moss layer over rock, rare, Beaverlodge Lake, 2730; scattered in disturbed ground around buildings, Indin Lake, 3342; scattered in shallow soil on rocky hillside, Gunbarrel Inlet, Great Bear Lake, 2834. Hooker (1829-40) records this species as “Throughout Canada as far as lat. 64°” and Raup (1947) cites a Crickmay specimen col- lected along the Mackenzie River between Wrigley and Blackwater River. There do not, however, appear to be any records of col- lections in the Pre-Cambrian country north of the north shore of Great Slave Lake. The northernmost record is apparently Gunbar- rel Inlet at 65°37’N. CorYDALIS AUREA Willd. ssp. AUREA MACK: sandy beach, Redcliff Island, Great Slave Lake, Fredeen 145; open woods, Gros Cap Is., Great Slave Lake, Reeder 2860; sheltered rock crevices, Yellowknife Bay, Mc- Intyre 1815; in sandy gravel and disturbed ground, Yellowknife, 2081, 2157, 3267; in sand, Snare River Power Station, 2635; shallow soil on rocky hillside, rather rare, Indin Lake, 3423; mucky sand, Sawmill Bay, Great Bear Lake, Corcoran 16; light shallow soil over rock on hillside, under tall white spruce, only one plant found, Gunbarrel Inlet, Great Bear Lake, 2849. Hooker (182940) records this species as “Throughout Canada to lat. 64° (Dr. Richard- son) in the woody country.” Raup (1947) records a specimen collected by Crickmay along the Mackenzie River between Wrigley and Blackwater River, but there have ap- parently been no previous collections re- corded from east of the Paleozoic boundary. The specimen from Sawmill Bay, 65°43’N is the most northerly record. CRUCIFERAE SUBULARIA AQUATICA L. MACK: very wet sedge meadow, Yellow- knife, 3049; fairly common in 4 inches water among thick mat of moss, Yellowknife, 3509; quite common but very insignificant on wet flats just south of old townsite on Yellow- knife Bay, Yellowknife, 7316; in 4 inches water rooted in clay, Indin Lake, 3432. July-September, 1956] The only other collection recorded for Mackenzie District is from McTavish Arm, Great Bear Lake (Porsild 1943). LEPIDIUM SATIVUM L. ALTA: disturbed ground by railway yards, adjacent to garden area, Lac la Biche, 7109; roadside recently seeded to grass Griffin Creek, south of Brownvale, Peace River District, Groh 1013. Escaped from cultivation; not previously recorded for northern Alberta. THLASPI ARVENSE L. MACK. sand by roadside, rare, Bell Rock, 8 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4404; dry exposed roadside, occasional, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 307; exposed well-drained sand- loam field, common, Old Settlement, Hay River, Lewis 449; in sand and in shallow layer of humus over sand near garden area, north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 3525, 3545; sandy gravel, rare, airstrip, Yellow- knife, 3232. An introduced weed; to the south, previous- ly known from the Government Hay Camp on Slave River; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. DESCURAINIA SOPHIA (L.) Webb. ALTA: fairly common in sod in sand 7 miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald; MACK: exposed waste land, occasional, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 915; exposed well-drained fields, predominant, Old Settlement, Hay River, Lewis 994, fairly common around build- ings, Latham Island, Yellowknife, 2451; disturbed ground around buildings, rare, Indin Lake, 3457; disturbed ground around buildings, Contact Lake, 2749. An introduced weed that is evidently spread- ing quickly throughout our area; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. DESCURAINIA RICHARDSON (Sweet) O. E. Schulz MACK: disturbed soil along roadside, rare, Latham Island, Yellowknife, 2662; scattered along roadside, Eldorado Mine, Port Radium, 2792. According to Raup (1936, 1947) and Det- ling (Amer. Midl. Nat. 22: 481-520. 1939) Hooker (1829-40) was confused in his treat- ment of this and the following species under the names Sisymbriwm canescens ‘and S. brachycarpum. The specimen cited here from Great Bear Lake is an extension of range of some 250 miles westward into the Pre-Cam- brian from the Ft. Norman locality recorded by Raup. THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 115 DESCURAINIA PINNATA (Walt.) Britt. var. BRACHY- CARPA (Richards.) Fern. ALTA: weed in grain field, Ft. McMurray, 7217; MACK: very scattered in sand, waste ground along fenceline, Ft. Smith, 4137; sand on beach of Slave River, rare, Ft. Smith, 4565. Hooker (1829-40) gives the range of Sisym- brium brachycarpum as “From Canada to the Arctic Sea...”. This range, however, is not borne out by recent collections. The only Mackenzie District specimen cited by Detling (loc. cit.) is a Preble collection from Ft. Resolution and Raup does not record it in any of his papers on our area (1934, 1935, 1936, 1947). Groh (1949) records it from North Fort Vermillion, Alta. BrassicA JUNCEA (L.) Coss. MACK: humus-rich disturbed ground by buildings, rare, Indin Lake, 3434. Introduced; not previously recorded for Mackenzie District. BRASSICA RAPA L. MACK: sand in cultivated area, rare, north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 3520. Introduced; not previously recorded for Mackenzie District. CARDAMINE PENNSYLVANICA Muhl. MACK : in silt under overhanging cliff, Little Buffalo River, 32 miles west of Ft. Smith, Loan 56; dried portion of exposed pond, oc- casional, West Channel, Hay River, 534, 706. According to Raup (1935, 1947) this species is common in upland muskegs in Wood Buf- falo Park. Hooker (1829-40) records it as ““..to the shores of the Arctic Sea” but ap- parently these are the first collections with specific locality data from Mackenzie District. CARDAMINE PARVIFLORA L. var. ARENICOLA (Britt.) O. E. Schulz MACK: gravel road bank, rare, road in to Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 2313; sandy soil at edge of road, the lush specimens were grow- ing among tall grass, fairly common but localized, just west of new townsite Yellow- knife, 2508; fairly common in pure sand near swimming beach at Sand Lake, Yellowknife, 3141. Fernald (1950) records the following range for this entity: ‘n.Fla. to Tex., n. to. s. N.S., sw. N.B., centr. Me., sw. Que., Thunder Bay Dist., Ont., Wisc. and Minn.; Oreg. to s. B.C.” Groh (1949) recorded it from Notikewin in the Peace River District, Alberta (specimen in DAO), apparently the first record for Alberta. The Yellowknife collections form 116 THE CANADIAN a northward extension of range of some 400 miles from the Notikewin stand. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. CAPSELLA BURSA-PASTORIS (L.) Medic. MACK: exposed sandy shore, Brabant Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 1000; Yellowknife Bay, McIntyre 1822; scattered in sandy gravel, airstrip, Yellowknife, 3227; moist sandy soil beside old road, rare, north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 2229; common in rich moist black peaty soil of cultivated area, Yellow- knife, 2334; disturbed ground around build- ings, rare, Indin Lake, 3352. An introduced weed; previously known in Mackenzie District from Ft. Smith, Resolution and Ft. Simpson (Raup 1947), and recorded by Hooker (1829-40)” ... as far north as Great Bear Lake.” This latter is a rather doubtful statement, but may nevertheless be true. CAMELINA SATIVA (L.) Crantz. MACK: cultivated field, sandy soil, rare, Ft. Smith, 3962; fairly common in sand in grain field, Ft. Smith, 4688. An introduced weed; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. NESLIA PANICULATA (L.) Desv. MACK : fairly common in sand in grain field, Ft. Smith, 4687; open fields, sandy loam soil, common, Ft. Smith, Loan 246. Previously known in Mackenzie District from a single collection from near Ft. Simp- son (Raup 1947). DRABA PRAELTA Greene MACK : shallow soil among rocks on hillside, rare, Indin Lake, 3415. Previously recorded for Mackenzie District from Smith Arm, Great Bear Lake (Porsild 1943), and in the Mackenzie Mountains by Raup (1947). DRABA NEMOROSA var. LEIOCARPA Lindb. MACK: Indian camp site, Yellowknife Bay, McIntyre 1821; a small patch growing under steps of house, Joliffe Island, Yellowknife, 2080; very shallow soil on steep rocky hillside, rare, Latham Island, Yellowknife, 2653; shal- low soil by path, rare, rapids at mouth of Prosperous Lake, Yellowknife River, 2185; Apparently not previously recorded from east of the Paleozoic boundary in Mackenzie District. Arapipopsis GLAuCA (Nutt.) Rhyb. (Sisymbrium salsuginosum Pall., Thellungiella salsuginea (Pall.) O. E. Schulz). MACK: Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, com. mon, 3691, 3784; sand by roadside, rare, fork FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 of Pine Lake and Little Buffalo River roads, 23 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4269. Raup (1935) records this species as com- mon on the Salt Plain prairies of Wood Buff- alo Park, Alberta. It was therefore certainly to be expected to occur in similar habitats just north of the Alberta—Mackenzie border. Porsild (1943) also records it from the Arctic Coast. ARABIDOPSIS MOLLIS (Hook.) O. E. Schulz (Arabis hookeri Lange) MACK: humus-rich soil in crevice in bare rocky hillside, only 1 plant found here, Yel- lowknife, 2064; shallow soil in crevice of rocky hillside, rare, Joliffe Island, Yellow- knife, 2480. This is a southward extension of range from the east end of Great Bear Lake. ARABIS GLABRA (L.) Bernh. ALTA: rare in disturbed ground along rail- way right-of-way, Lac la Biche, 6902; Beaver- lodge, Jenkins 183, 462, 506, Groh s.n. Aug. 29, 1934; field border, Keg River, Groh 2932; low grassland areas south of south slope of Caribou Mountains, Moss 9422. In northern Alberta, previously recorded only from Fort Saskatchewan (Turner 1949). ARABIS HIRSUTA (L.) Scop. var. PYCNOCARPA (Hop- kins) Rollins MACK: shallow soil in crevice of rocky hill- side, near Giant Mine, Yellowknife, 2344; scattered in humus-rich black sandy soil north of town, Yellowknife, 2546. Not previously recorded from east of the Paleozoic boundary. ARABIS RETROFRACTA Graham var. RETROFRACTA (A. holboellii Hornem. var. retrofracta (Graham) Rydb.) MACK: scattered on open hillside, Contact Lake, 2750. This may possibly be identical with the col- lections from Great Bear Lake which Porsild (1943) has named A. holboelli, but our plants are biennial while Porsild describes his plants as perennial. The nearest records for A. retrofracta are those of Raup (1947) from the upper Mackenzie River some 300 miles to the southwest. ARABIS RETROFRACTA Graham var. COLLINSII (Fern.) Boivin ALTA: very shallow soil over igneous rock, Government Dog Camp, Chenal de Quatre Fourches, 3661; shallow soil on rocky point, below Demicharge Rapids, Slave River, 3627; MACK :: exposed sand slope of roadside, com- July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN mon, 24 miles south of Lower Hay River, Lewis 322; in shallow soil of crevice in igneous rock, Yellowknife, 2085; shallow soil in hollows of rock, rare, near Giant Mine, Yellowknife, 2352; rather rare in shallow soil in crevice of rocky hillside, Joliffe Island, Yellowknife, 2479. Not previously recorded for either northern Alberta or Mackenzie District. DROSERACEAE DROSERA ROTUNDIFOLIA L. MACK: in west moss, rare, Contact Lake, 2760. Hooker (1829-40) records this species “... as far north as the Arctic Circle,” but Raup does not record any specimens from north of Great Slave Lake. CRASSULACEAE TILLAEA AQuatica L. MACK: flats by old townsite, Yellowknife, 3511, 7318. For a discussion of this species see Cody, W. J., A history of Tillaea aquatica (Crassula- ceae) in Canada and Alaska, Rhodora 56:96- 101, 1954. SAXIFRAGACEAE SAXIFRAGA NIVALIS L. - MACK: in wet moss on ledge of north-facing cliff, rare, Yellowknife, 3225; in moist moss over rock, rare, Dome Lake, 3187. This is an arctic—alpine species which has not been collected previously in the Great Slave Lake region. The nearest known local- ities are in the Mackenzie Mountains and at Great Bear Lake. Rises AMERICANUM Mill. ALTA: moist ground in hollow, Lac la Biche, 6838; scattered on bank by lake, Lac la Biche, 6787; shrub to 4 ft. in open sedge-grass mea- dow, Big Island, Lac la Biche, 7073; gravelly shore, Cold Lake, Groh 1112. Not previously recorded for northern A\I- berta. ROSACEAE AMELANCHIER ALNIFOLIA Nutt. (A. florida sensu Raup, A. sanguinea sensu Porsild). MACK: shrub 1 ft., rooted in crevice of rocky hillside, north end of Kam Lake, Yellow- knife, 2235; shrub 16 inches, humus-rich soil at water’s edge, rare, Yellowknife, 2272; sand and gravel hillside, rare, Jackfish Lake, Yel- lowknife, 2671; foot of steep rocky hillside by water, south shore of Latham Island, Yellow- knife, 2331, 2655; shrub 12 inches, shallow FIELD-NATURALIST 117 soil over rock, local, 2 miles up Yellowknife River, 2177; shrub 10 inches, in sand, rare, outlet of Prosperous Lake, 2895. Although known northward along the Mac- kenzie River to Good Hope, this species has apparently not previously been collected east of the Paleozoic boundary. Rusus warEus L. var. ACULEATISSIMUS Regel & Tiling (R. idaews var. canadensis Richards., R. idaeus var. strigosus (Michx.) Maxim.). MACK: Gordon Lake, Denton s.n. no date; shrub 2 ft. around old cabins in disturbed soil. Gunbarrel Inlet, Great Bear Lake, 2851; shrub 15 inches, in crevice at foot of cliff, scattered, Eldorado Mine, Port Radium, Great Bear Lake, 2794. These specimens are apparently from the northeastern limit in Mackenzie District. This species has not been recorded previously from the Pre-Cambrian region north of Great Slave Lake. RUBUS PUBESCENS Raf. var. PARACAULIS (Bailey) Boivin. ALTA: beneath willows and alders near border of lake, Mile 97 Mackenzie Highway, Moss 9139; MACK: moist peat and moss in clearing of spruce wood, occasional, Alexan- dra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 380; exposed wooded area near road, Lower Hay River, Lewis 249. Previously known from the vicinity of Ed- monton (Turner 1949); this is a verification of the doubtful Preble and Cary specimen that Raup (1947) tentatively placed under R. acaulis; new to the flora of Mackenzie Dis- trict. FRAGARIA GLAUCA (S. Wats.) Rydb. MACK : sheltered southern exposure of bank, Yellowknife Bay, McIntyre 1804; humus-rich soil on rock hillside, rare, Yellowknife, 2275; shallow soil in crevice of rock hillside, rare, Joliffe Island, Yellowknife, 2481; shallow humus-rich soil in hollow of rock, rare, north end of Kam Lake Yellowknife, 2234. Hooker (1829-40) gives the range of F. canadensis as “‘... Woody county between lat. 52° and 64>, north. Or Rickardson = = a There are however, apparently no previous records of F. glauca from east of the Paleozoic boundary in Mackenzie District. PoOTENTILLA MULTIFIDA L. MACK: sandy areas west of Ft. Smith, 3846, 4195, 4312. Duplicates of these collections were distri- buted as P. bipinnatifida Douglas, but are best referred here although they are not quite 118 THE CANADIAN typical. The specimens cited here are al- most upright in stature, measuring up to 16 inches in height, and have broader leaflets than other collections at hand from Ft. Fitz- gerald, Ft. Smith, Hay River, Yellowknife and Gros Cap Island. PoTENTILLA PENSYLVANICA L. MACK : shallow soil in crevice on rock hill- side, Yellowknife, 2465, 3094; shallow soil over rock, outlet of Prosperous Lake, 2894. The only other record from east of the Paleozoic boundary appears to be that of Harper (Raup 1936) from Taltson R. south of Great Slave Lake. POTENTILLA TRIDENTATA Ait. ALTA: shallow soil over igneous rock, rare, Ft. Fitzgerald, 4425; MACK: pure sand by roadside, rare, 1 mile west of Seven Mile Lake, approx. 28 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4666. Hooker (1829-40) records this species “...in Canada, and thoughout the woody country, from Lake Huron... as far as lat. 60°...” Raup (1947) states that there have been no recent collections north of Wood Buffalo Park [AlI- berta] although there is a Richardson speci- men in Herb. N. without locality data. This is apparently the first substantiated record of P. tridentata for Mackenzie District. GEUM PERINCISUM Rydb. var. PERINCISUM (G. ma- crophyllum Willd. var. perincisum (Rydb.) Raup). MACK: disturbed ground around buildings, Yellowknife, 2457, 2684, 3478. Not previously recorded east of the Paleo- zoic boundary in Mackenzie District. GEUM RIVALE L. ALTA: under Populus on slope of river bank, Beaver River, 2 miles south of Briarville P.O., 7170. Apparently the only other record of this species from northern Alberta is that of Raup (1934) on the basis of a Brinkman col- lection from Lesser Slave Lake (No. 4210 (DAO) ). AGRIMONIA STRIATA Michx. ALTA: flats of stream, under balsam poplar, Assineau River, Lesser Slave Lake, Moss 9283; gravelly shore, Cold Lake, Groh 1107; High Prairie, Croh s.n. Sept. 15, 1934; 1% miles west of Craigend P.O., 7186. These specimens are evidently from near the northern limit in Alberta; previously re- corded from Fort Saskatchewan by Turner (1949). FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 LEGUMINOSAE Mepicaco SATIvA L. ALTA: scattered along roadsides in town, Lac la Biche, 6788; MACK: on sand hillside [overlooking Slave River], rare, Ft. Smith, 4066, 4521; exposed sandy areas, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 625, 932. Turner (1949) records this species from the Ft. Saskatchewan area; Groh (1949) records it for the area between Peace River and Fort Vermillion but does not cite specimens or specific localities. Not previously recorded for Mackenzie District. MeEpIcAGoO LUPULINA L. var. GLANDULOSA Mertens & Koch ALTA: only one plant found along sand roadside 2 miles east of town of Lac la Biche, 6947; MACK: sand in garden, rare, Ft. Smith, 4686. Apparently the only other record of this species for Northern Alberta is that of Turner (1949) from Ft. Saskatchewan; a new intro- duction to Mackenzie District. MELILOTUS OFFICINALIS Lam. var. OFFICINALIS ALTA: along ditch near railway yards, Lac la Biche, 6974; common along roadsides, more frequent than M. alba, Ft. McMurray, 7230; MACK : fairly common on sand hillside [over- looking Slave R.], only place found, Ft. Smith, 4065, 4520; exposed sandy slope of roadside, occasional, 24 miles south of Lower Hay River, Lewis 945; exposed slope of roadside, occasional, Lower Hay River, Lewis 1107; sandy gravel along roadside, north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 2966. Recorded by Groh (1949) from several localities in the Peace River District, and by Turner (1949) from Ft. Saskatchewan. It is probably to be found in many localities in northeastern Alberta where it has escaped from cultivation; new to the flora of Macken- zie District. MELILoTUS ALBA Desr. var. ALBA. ALTA: scattered along roadsides, Ft. Mc- Murray, 7229; MACK: on sand hillside [over- looking Slave R.], rare, Ft. Smith, 4524; ex- posed sandy slope of roadside, occasional, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 913; ex- posed field, common, Old Settlement, Hay River, Lewis 1137; exposed slope of roadside, occasional, Lower Hay River, Lewis 1106; in sandy gravel, only one plant found, airstrip, Yellowknife, 3236; rare in moist ground of broad roadside ditch between townsites, Yel- lowknife, 7319. July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN Recorded by Groh (1949) from a number of localities in the Peace River District and also by Turner (1949) from Ft. Saskatchewan; Raup does not record it from farther north. Introduced and escaped cultivation; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. TRIFOLIUM PRATENSE Te ALTA: in moist soil by small slough along railway, Waterways, 7298. Recorded by Groh (1949) as an escape from the Ft. Vermilion Substation, and by Turner (1949) from Ft. Saskatchewan. TRIFOLIUM REPENS L. ALTA: small patches along ditches in town, Lac la Biche, 6794. The only other record of this species grow- ing outside cultivation in northern Alberta is that of Turner (1949) from Ft. Saskatchewan. TRIFOLIUM HYBRIDUM L. var. HYBRIDUM ALTA: rare along ditches in town, Lac la Biche, 6795; in sand with Equisetum arvense near base of bank of Slave River, Ft. Smith, 3922; exposed slope of roadside, rare, Lower Hay River, Lewis 1105; sandy gravel along roadside, north end of Kam Lake, Yellow- knife, 2969. Probably an escape from cultivation; pre- viously known in northern Alberta from Ft. Saskatchewan (Turner 1949); new to the flora of Mackenzie District. ASTRAGALUS sTRIATUS Nutt. (A. adsurgens sensu Raup). MACK: common on sand and gravel hillside, Jackfish Lake, Yellowknife, 2663, 2669, 3204. Not previously recorded east of the Pale- ozoic boundary in Mackenzie District; the only other record for the District is from near the mouth of the North Nahanni River (Raup 1947). To the south, it is known from Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta and southward. AsTRAGALUs GontATUS Nutt. (A. hypoglottis sensu Raup). MACK: dry exposed clearing, occasional, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 647. The only other record for Mackenzie Dis- trict is from the junction of the Nyarling and Little Buffalo Rivers (Raup 1947) although it is certainly to be expected in many localities in the southwestern part of the District. According to Raup it is common in Wood Buffalo Park [Alberta]. ASTRAGALUS EUCosmMUS Robinson MACK: open field, occasional, Old Settle- ment, Hay River, Lewis 452: exposed dry field, Old Settlement, Hay River, Lewis 662; FIELD-NATURALIST 119 moist sandy soil in partially cleared area, Yellowknife, 2282; moist alluvial flats of Baker Creek at Giant Mine, Yellowknife, 2339, 3481; sandy gravel by roadside, rare, road to airport, Yellownife, 3255; in sandy gravel, rare, road into Kam Lake, Yellow- knife, 2975; forming clump in shallow soil on hillside, rare, Eldorado Mine, Port Radium, 2799. Not previously recorded for the area he- tween Wood Buffalo Park [Alberta] and Great Bear Lake but certainly to be expected there. ASTRAGALUS YUKONIS M.E. Jones ALTA: among grass on slope leading down to Athabaska R., Ft. McMurray, 7225; MACK: prostrate in broad dry roadside ditch, rare, between Salt River and Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, 4180; dry sandy slope of roadside, common, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 566; forming large prostrate patches up to 4 ft. in diameter in sand by roadside, local, only place found, north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 2260, 3252. This species, which was described on the basis of specimens from Yukon Territory, has only been recorded three times for the whole Mackenzie basin: Mackenzie River Del- ta (Porsild 1943) and Simpson (Raup 1947) N:W.T. and Calumet, Alta. (Raup 1936). OXYTROPIS DEFLEXA (Pall.) D.C. var. sericeEA T. & G. (O. retrorsa Fern.). MACK: lakeshore, rare, Seven Mile Lake, 27 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4676; very scatter- ed on clay hillside, Seven Mile Lake, 27 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4454; scattered in silty soil in scrub area, local, Yellowknife, 2717, 3248. Not previously recorded from the area be- tween McMurray in northern Alberta and Great Bear Lake. Our specimens belong to the small-flowered phase noted by Barneby (Calif. Acad. Se. 27: 200, 1952). Vicia craAcca L. ALTA: waste ground by buildings, rare, Ft. MeMurray, 7312. Apparently the only other record of this introduced species in northern Alberta is that of Turner (1949) from Ft. Saskatchewan. GERANIACEAE GERANIUM BICKNELLII Britton MACK: edge of aspen-pine woods, occasional, Louise Falls on Hay River, Lewis 908; wood- ed hillside, Gros Cap. Is., Reeder 2897; shal- low soil over rock, rare, Yellowknife, 2715, 2944; in sand near cemetery by airport, rare; Yellowknife 3266; sandy gravel by roadside, road into Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 2312, 2971. 120 THE CANADIAN Previously known in Mackenzie District from a single collection made by Raup at Ft. Smith (Raup 1936, 1947). EUPHORBIACEAE EUPHORBIA SERPYLLIFOLIA Pers. ALTA: gravel railway bank, Lac la Biche, 6872. Apparently introduced; not previously re- corded from the area north of Ft. Saskatche- wan (Turner 1949). CALLITRICHACEAE CALLITRICHE VERNA L. (C. palustris L.). MACK: shallow water of stream, rooted in muck, Little Buffalo River, 32 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4737; suspended in water, West Channel, Hay River, Lewis 1129; forming large mat, rooted in muck at edge of smail dried-up pond, Yellowknife, 3485; fairly com- mon in 2-3 inches water, rooted in muck, sedge-grass flats south of town, Yellowknife, 2588; in 4 inches water rooted in clay, rare, Indin Lake, 3428. The only other record of this species be- tween Lake Athabaska and Great Bear Lake is from the northwest shore of Great Slave Lake (Raup 1936). CISTACEAE HupsoNnIA TOMENTOSA Nutt. MACK: in pure sand, localized, golf club, Yellowknife, 3477. The flowers on our plant are sessile or on very short pedicels and hence belong to the typical variety and not the var. intermedia Peck, to which Raup (1936) has referred specimens from Lake Athabaska. The calyx in our plant is maroon, particularly toward the tips, a character which does not seem to have been noted elsewhere. This has been observed in a number of specimens preserved in the Divisional Herbarium but the speci- mens having this character do not seem to have any geographic range, rather occupying the range of the typical plant which has a green calyx. Hooker (1829-40) gives the range of H. tomentosa “...to as far north as Slave Lake, in several places. Dr. Richardson.”, but this is apparently the first authentic record from Mackenzie District. ELAEAGNACEAE SHEPHERDIA CANADENSIS (L.) Nutt. MACK: along Brock R. approx. 8 miles di- rectly east of its mouth, Ross Mackay s.n. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 1951; about 15 miles west of the Horten R., and 15-20 miles from the barren grounds, 67°42’N, 123°00’W, Ross Mackay s.n., 1951. The map in Raup (1947) shows collection localities just east of the Mackenzie River Delta and on the north shore of Great Bear Lake. The collections cited here are a range extension of some 200 miles eastward and 150 miles northward from these localities. ONAGRACEAE EPILOBIUM GLANDULOSUM Lehm. var. ADENOCAULON (Haussk.) Fern. MACK: fairly common in moist peat, Yellow- knife, 3327; common in peat over sand, north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 3522; scattered in shallow soil over rock and in gravel along stream, west side of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 2989; moist shallow soil on hillside, Indin Lake, 3424. Apparently not previously recorded from east of the Paleozoic boundary in Mackenzie District, although Raup (1947) states that “Hooker’s record for E. tetragonum, ‘. . . throughout the plains to lat. 64°...,’ prob- ably should be referred to this species, at least in part.” HALORAGIDACEAE MyRIOPHYLLUM EXALBESCENS Fern. MACK : rooted in ooze in very shallow water of small lake by old townsite, common, Yel- lowknife, 3007. Apparently no specimens have been record- ed from the area between Wood Buffalo Park (Alberta) and Mackenzie River Delta, al- though Hooker (1829-40) recorded M. spica- tum “‘... as far north as Great Bear Lake.” MyYRIOPHYLLUM VERTICILLATUM L. var. PECTINATUM Wally. ALTA: rooted in ooze of small lake in mus- keg area 12 miles north west of Ft. Fitzgerald, 4549: MACK: suspended in water in sheltered slough, common, West Channel, Hay River, Lewis 1128. The range of this species is given by Fern- ald (1950) as Nfld. to B.C.; not previously re- corded for northern Alberta or Mackenzie District. HIPPURIDACEAE Hippuris VULGARIS L, MACK: in small pond in hollow of rock along river, Snare River Power Station, 2641. Not previously recorded in the Pre-Cam- brian north of Great Slave Lake. July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN ARALIACEAE ARALIA NUDICAULIS L. MACK: sheltered slope of aspen-spruce forest, occasional, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 386. This is apparently the only record for Mackenzie District other than the report by Hooker (1829-40): “... throughout the woody country to lat. 64°. Dr. Richardson...” UMBELLIFERAE SANICULA MARILANDICA L. ALTA: in sod of parkland by river, Beaver River, 2 miles south of Briarville P.O., 7146; moist depression on railway right-of-way, Lac la Biche, 6852; cleared ground by roadside hear Beaver Lake, 3 miles southeast of Lac la Biche, rare, 7131. Recorded by Turner (1949) from the Ed- monton district. The northern limit of this species in eastern Alberta is apparently Lac la Biche. Carum carvi L. ALTA: common in flower, but most fruit still immature on June 25, gravel beach, Lac la Biche, 6957. Introduced; the only other record of this species in northern Alberta appears to be that of Turner (1949) from Ft. Saskatchewan. CICUTA MACKENZIEANA Raup MACK: rooted among rocks in 8 inches water, fairly common at mouth of small creek, Indin Lake, 3405. The nearest record for this species is at Yellowknife (Raup 1936), some 100 miles to the south, where the author has also collected it. It is, however, known along the Mac- kenzie River (Raup 1947) and in the Eskimo Lake Baisin (Porsild 1943). ERICACEAE LEDUM GROENLANDICUM Oeder MACK: shallow disturbed ground over rock, very common throughout area, especially in muskeg, Indin Lake, 3345; shrub 1% ft., very common in moss and shallow soil over rock under Picea glauca, Beaverlodge Lake, 2728; shrub 15 inches, scattered in shallow soil on rocky hillside, Gunbarrel Inlet, Great Bear Lake, 2830. These collections are from near the eastern limit of range between Great Bear Lake and Great Slave Lake in Mackenzie District. RHODODENDRON LAPPONICUM (L.) Wahl. MACK: muskeg, Gordon Lake, Denton s.n., no date; shrub 15-18 inches, rare in hummocky muskeg, Indin Lake, 3453. FIELD-NATURALIST 121 This is an arctic species, the range of which includes the eastern part of Great Slave Lake. The tall stature of the Indin Lake specimen was probably the result of the protected environmental conditions. CHAMAEDAPHNE CALYCULATA (L.) Moench. MACK: edge of pond, Gros Cap Island [Great Slave Lake], Reeder 2874; shrub 15 inches, shallow soil in hollow of igneous rock, Yellow- knife, 2153; shrub 18 inches, peat area by lake, airstrip, Yellowknife, 2366; shrub 15 inches, shallow soil at water’s edge, rare, Prelude Lake, 3160; shrub 15 inches, in rock crevices at water’s edge, Dome Lake, 3169; Gordon Lake, Denton s.n., no date; shrub 18 inches, rather rare in muskeg on borders of small lake, Indin Lake, 3451; shrub 1 ft., moist soil along shoreline, fairly common, Beaver- lodge Lake, 2736. Although this species is known far to the north at Great Bear Lake and in the Eskimo Lake Basin (Porsild 1943) and Hooker (1829- 40) states that it occurs “throughout the woody, and part of the barren country,” there do not appear to be any specimens with exact locality data for the area between Great Slave Lake and Great Bear Lake. The collections cited here may be from near the eastern limit in this area. Raup (1936) records a speci- men from Resolution on the south shore of Great Slave Lake. It undoubtably occurs east of this locality in Mackenzie District but there do not appear to be any records. ARCTOSTAPHYLOS UvA-URSI (L.) Spreng. MACK: fairly common in peat area, Snare River Power Station, 2612; shallow soil over rock, fairly common, Indin Lake, 3347; sand, Sawmill Bay, Great Bear Lake, Corcoran 12. These collections are probably from near the eastern limit of range between Great Bear Lake and Great Slave Lake. It is also known from Matthews Lake 64°05’N, 111°15’W (Cody and Chillcott 1955). VACCINIUM MYRTILLOIWES Michx. Richards.) ALTA: shrub to 1 ft., scattered in very shal- (V. canadense ‘low soil over igneous rock, Ft. Fitzgerald, 4117; under aspen in sand along roadside 4 miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald, 4726; shrub 10- 20 inches, rare, open areas with Arctosta- phylos and overstory of Pinus banksiana, Halfway House, 7 miles north of Ft. Fitz- gerald, Loan 80; scattered on sand hillside 12 miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald, 4534; MACK.: sandy loam soil in white spruce-aspen woods, common locally, height 10 inches, Seven Mile Lake, 27 miles west of Ft. Smith, Loan 59. 122 THE CANADIAN Hooker (1829-40) records this species as occurring north to Great Bear Lake, but Raup (1936) stated that he had seen no specimens from north of the specimens cited by him [central Wood Buffalo Park, Alberta]. Preble (1908) stated that he collected it at Smith Landing [Ft. Fitzgerald] on June 13, 1903. Presumably the first authentic record for Mackenzie District is that cited here from Seven Mile Lake. PRIMULACEAE ANDROSACE SEPTENTRIONALIS L. MACK : common on sand and gravel hillsides, Yellowknife, 2079, 2110, 2665, 3203; shallow soil on rocky hillside, scattered, Indin Lake, 3418; sandy soil, Sawmill bay, Great Bear Lake, Corcoran 18; scattered in shallow soil on rocky hillside, Gunbarrel Inlet, Great Bear Lake, 2841; very shallow soil on rocky hill- side, fairly common, Eldorado Mine, Port Radium, 2768. Previous records of the occurence of this species in Mackenzie District are from Resolu- tion on Great Slave Lake (Raup 1936) along the Mackenzie River (Raup 1947, Hooker 1829-40) and the Arctic Coast (Macoun and Holm 1921, Cody 1954). LYSIMACHIA TH YRSIFLORA L. MACK: in shallow water along banks of stream, local, west side of Kam Lake, Yellow- knife, 2981. Not previously recorded east of the Paleo- zoic boundary in Mackenzie District. TRIENTALIS EUROPAEA L. var. ARCTICA (Fisch.) Ledeb. MACK: moist spruce-poplar woods, rare, Brabant Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 1073. The only other record for Mackenzie Dis- trict is a Russell collection from the junction of Nyarling and Little Buffalo Rivers (Raup 1947), some 100 miles to the southeast. APOCYNACEAE APOCYNUM SsiBiRICUM Jacq. MACK: exposed slope above riverbank, com- mon, West Channel, Hay River, Lewis 973. The only other record for Mackenzie Dis- trict is from Simpson (Raup 1947). To the south Raup states that it is occasional in Wood Buffalo Park [Alberta]. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 BORAGINACEAE LAPPULA REDOWSKII (Hornem.) Greene var. OCCI- DENTALIS (Wats.) Rydb. MACK: sandy gravel, rare, airstrip, Yellow- knife, 3233. Although known as far north as the Eskimo Lake basin (Porsild 1943), this species has apparently not previously been recorded east of the Paleozoic boundary in Mackenzie Dis- trict. HACKELIA AMERICANA (Gray) Fern. ALTA: shallow sand over igneous rock, rare, Ft. Fitzgerald, 4108; MACK: disturbed ground along Slave River, scattered, Bell Rock, 8 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4373; moist clay of river bank, rare, Little Buffalo River, 32 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4751. The known range of this species is extended northward some 50 miles from the upper Slave River locality recorded by Raup (1935, 1936). New to the flora of Mackenzie District. LABIATAE SCUTELLARIA GALERICULATA L. var. PUBESCENS Ben- tham (S. epilobiifolia Hamilton, S. galericulata L. var. epilobiifolia (Hamilton) Jordal MACK: Gros Cap Island, Fredeen 99, Reeder 2875; among sedge rooted in muck by small lake near old townsite, rare, Yellowknife, 2954; among sedge by stream, rather rare, west side of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 2993. There do not appear to be any records of this species with exact locality data from the Pre-Cambrian region of Mackenzie District. The Howe specimen from the north shore of Great Slave Lake cited by Raup (1947) may possibly have come from this region. DRACOCEPHALUM PARVIFLORUM Nutt. MACK: black sandy soil along border of hay field and Salix scrub south of Ft. Smith, 4219; sand by roadside, rare, Bell Rock, 8 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4405; sand by road- side, rare, fork of Pine Lake Road and Little Buffalo River Road 23 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4270; jack pine woods, dry and shady, Little Buffalo River, 32 miles west of Ft. Smith, Loan 341; sandy embankment of road- side, occasional, Alexandra Falls on Hay River, Lewis 437; shallow soil over rock, rare, Yellowknife, 2355, 2945; sandy gravel road- sides, etc., Yellowknife, 2972, 3234, 3269, in sand, very rare, Snare River Power Station, 2636. Raup (1947) cites a Richardson specimen from “between Bear Lake and Cumberland House” and a Kennicott collection from Reso- July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN lution. The Kennicott specimen is apparently the only previous record from Mackenzie Dis- trict with exact locality data. PHYSOSTEGIA PARVIFLORA Nutt. MACK: scattered along banks of river and in damp depressions adjacent to the river, Salt River west of Ft. Smith, 4483, 4596, Loan 137. This is an extension of range of some 50 miles northward from the upper Slave River localities cited by Raup (1936). New to Mac- kenzie District. GALEOPSIS TETRAHIT L. var. BIFIDA (Boenn.) Lej. & Court. MACK: a small colony in shallow peat over sand, north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, Hey Introduced; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. The nearest previous record for this species is at Waterways in northern Alberta (Raup 1936) some 400 miles to the south, where the author has also collected it. SCROPHULARIACEAE VERONICA PEREGRINA L. var. XALAPENSIS (HBK.) Pennell MACK: moist sand of roadside ditch, Seven Mile Lake, 27 miles west of Ft. Smith, 4647. This station is intermediate between the localities recorded by Raup: Chipewyan (1936) and Simpson (1947). Hooker (1829-40) gave the range “Throughout Canada to Mac- kenzie River.” LinaRIA VULGARIS Miller MACK: in sand around Hudson Bay Co. buildings, Ft. Smith, 4089. Introduced; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. Turner (1949) records this species as common in the Edmonton district some 450 miles to the south. CASTILLEJA MINIATA Douglas ALTA: in sod on railway right-of-way, Lac la Biche, 6913; cleared ground by roadside near Beaver Lake; 3 miles southeast of Lac la Biche, 7130; in sod by roadside, east of Lac la Biche Mission, 7042; along railway, Hines Creek, Peace River District, Groh 999; shade of aspens, Beaverlodge, Peace River District, Groh 654; moist thicket, Spirit River, Peace River District, Groh 950. Specimens from Manitoba, Saskatchewan and the lower altitudes of Alberta, belonging to this species, have previously been identi- fied as C. rhexifolia Rydb., which is probably a synonym of C. miniata, while specimens FIELD-NATURALIST 73) from the mountains of Alberta and British Columbia have been determined as C. mi- niata. Pennell (1954) has the following discussion under C. miniata: ‘Hook., Fl. Bor.-Amer. 2:106, 1838. ‘Blue Mountains, N.W. America Dougl. Tolmie.’ Type, Douglas, plant from Bentham’s herbarium, seen in Herb. Kew Gardens; it was credited to the ‘Blue Moun- tains, 1826,’ but its isotype from Hooker’s herbarium, also now at Kew Gardens, was labeled by Douglas himself ‘Common on the low hills west of the Rocky Mountains.’ The type is the prevalent large-flowered species of the northern Rocky Mountains and ranges westward, and it was gathered by me (Pennell 15423) on July 2, 1931 on the Blue Mountains east of Weston, Umatilla County, Oregon, presumably near Douglas’ original station. There must have been some error in Hooker’s text in quoting Douglas as saying that the flowers are ‘generally altogether shorter than in C. pallida, as the corollas are considerably longer than in any species that has been called by that name.” Rydberg (1900) has the following discussion after his description of C. rhexifolia: “This has apparently been included in C. mineata, but is in my opinion not nearly related to that species. It is easily distinguished by the dif- ferent coloration, the broader leaves, the larger flowers and the comparately shorter galea, which is scarcely more than half as long as the tube.” Rydberg (1922) differentiates between C. rhexifolia and C. miniata as follows: C. RHEXIFOLIA C. MINIATA calyx ca 2.5 cm ca 15 em corolla jca 3 cm ca 2 cm galea ca 1 cm ca 1 cm lip ca 4 mm 2.5 mm bracts |usually entire, usually 3-cleft rarely the uppermost|with lanceo- slightly 3-lobed late lobes, if with a broad middlejentire very lobe. acute leaves joblong-lanceolate linear-lanceo- to ovate, 3--5-nerved about 5 cm long, late or linear, acuminate, 5--7 from glabrous to em long, densely pubescent. |sparingly pubescent 124 THE CANADIAN In the Canadian specimens seen, these characters, with the exception of the leaves, which tend to be narrower in the western collections, vary, seemingly without relation one to the other: both large and small flower- ed specimens with floral bracts ranging from entire to 3--5 parted, occur throughout the area. All are referred to C. miniata, the earlier name, although local races may later be found to occur. The types, which are preserved at Kew (C. miniata) and The New York Botanical Garden (C. rhexifolia), have not been seen; both were collected in the Rocky Mountains of northwestern United States, and probably belong to the same species. In Canada, C. miniata ranges north through the foothills and mountains of Alberta and British Columbia at least as far north as the Peace River District and then east through the parklands north of the prairie to Manitoba, but apparently does not reach the United States border in the eastern part of its range. It is also found in the Cypress Hills in southern Saskatchewan and Alberta and Pennell (1934) has reported it from PH 1 Con FIELD-NATURALIST mH \ fe vei y ay [Vol. 70 southern Alaska. A map of the Canadian distribution as known from specimens in the Divisional Herbarium is given in Fig. 1. FUPHRASIA DISJUNCTA Fern. & Wieg. var. DOLOSA Boivin MACK : in moist soil in crevices by lake shore, rare, Indin Lake, 3340 (det. Boivin). The only locality in Mackenzie District re- corded by Boivin (Nat. Can. 75:217-218. 1948) was Great Bear River. RHINANTHUS KYROLLAE Chab. MACK: common in moist exposed location beside river, West Channel, Hay River, Lewis 974; common at edge of woods, Old Settle- ment, Hay River, Lewis 985; occasional on exposed sandy shore, Brabant Island, Lewis 1001; common on moist sand flats by bay, Yellowknife, 3547, 3042. Raup (1936) gives the following discussion of this-species: “Richardson noted R. Crista Galli ‘to the shores of the Slave Lake, and to Fort Franklin,’ and Harper has a record for R. oblongifolius at the ‘mouth of Taltson River, but whether these are all referable to the above is uncertain. The group is poor- \ 2 oma SCALE 500 MILES 200 400 600 RILOMETERS CONIC PROJECTION Distribution of Castilleja miniata in Canada July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN ly understood and badly in need of further material and study.” Raup (1947) and Porsild (1943) have referred Mackenzie River spe- cimens to R. groenlandicus Chab. Our speci- mens do not agree with the description of that species. LENTIBULARIACEAE UTRICULARIA VULGARIS i MACK: in 2 ft. water, Indin Lake, 3406. Not previously recorded from the Pre Cam- brian region between Great Slave Lake and Great Bear Lake. UTRICULARIA MINOR L. MACK : in 4-5 inches water among Equisetum, Yellowknife, 3050. The only other record of this species in southern Mackenzie District is from Fairchild Pt. (Raup 1936). Porsild (1943) records it from Great Bear Lake. UTRICULARIA INTERMEDIA Hayne MACK: in 2 ft. water, Indin Lake, 3407. Not previously recorded from the Pre- Cambrian region between Great Slave Lake and Great Bear Lake. PLANTAGINACEAE PLANTAGO MAJOR L. MACK: disturbed ground around buildings, Yellowknife, 3479. Apparently not previously recorded from the Pre-Cambrian region north of Great Slave Lake. It could be introduced at this locality. PLANTAGO ERIOPODA Torr. MACK: Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, fairly common, 3688, 3785, 4480; rocky exposed slope by river, common, Lagoon, Lower Hay River, Lewis 338; beside river on exposed stony slope, common, Lewis 231. Raup (1936) records this species from the Salt Plains of Wood Buffalo Park [Alberta] and it was certainly to be expected in the area just north of the Alberta--Mackenzie District border. Porsild (1943) has recorded it from the arctic coast. RUBIACEAE GALIUM TRIFIDUM L. MACK: bog, Pearson Point, G.S.L., Fredeen 44: among sedge, rooted in muck by small lake near old townsite, rare, Yellowknife, 2953; rooted in moss in shade at mouth of stream, rare, west side of Kam Lake, Yellow- knife 2988; in wet moss along banks of small creek, Indin Lake, 3470. FIELD-NATURALIST 125 The only other record from the Pre-Cam- brian region of Mackenzie District is from Muskox Lake (Cody and Chilleott 1955). It is, however, known as far north as the Mac- kenzie River Delta (Porsild 1943). GALIUM LABRADORICUM Wieg. ALTA : wet sedge meadow by small lake 112 miles southwest of Ft. Smith N.W.T. in Alber- ta, 450i. This is an extension of the known range northward from the Edmonton district (Tur- ner 1949). There is no doubt that G. labra- doricum will eventually be found in southern Mackenzie District. CAPRIFOLIACEAE VIBURNUM EDULE (Michx.) Raf. (V. pauciflorum Raf.) MACK: shrub 15 inches, scattered in humus- rich soil on hillside, Indin Lake, 3359. Not previously recorded from the Pre-Cam- brian region between Great Slave Lake and Great Bear Lake. LINNAEA BOREALIS L. var. AMERICANA (Forbes) Rehder MACK: scattered in patches, prostrate in very shallow soil over rock, Indin Lake, 3361; shallow soil on rocky hillside, scattered, Gun- barrel Inlet, Great Bear Lake, 2832; 30 miles S. of Aklavik, Stevens s.n., July 15, 1948. These specimens are probably from near the northeastern and northern limit of range in Mackenzie District. LINNAEA BOREALIS L. AMERICANA (Forbes) Rehder forma CANDICANS (House) House ALTA : forming forest mat with Cornus cana- densis and Arctostaphylos in white spruce-- birch- poplar wood, Caribou Island, Slave River, 59°43’N, 111°31’W Loan 6. The typical form also occurred at this loca- lity (Loan 7). Boivin (Nat. Can. 75: 218. 1948) cites a specimen of this white flowered form collected at Banff, and states that it is appa- rently very rare. This is the second record for Alberta. var. LoNICERA INVOLUCRATA (Richard.) Banks ALTA: shrub to 18 inches along railway em- bankment, Waterways, 7290. Raup (1936) records Lac la Biche, some 130 miles to the south, as the northernmost locality at which he had seen this species, and questions the earlier records of Preble (1908) and the locality data on Richardson’s specimen preserved in the Herbarium of the National Museum at Ottawa. Hooker (1829-40) also questions Richardson’s record for he 126 THE CANADIAN writes ‘‘Woody country between lat. 54° and 64°, (but probably confined to the vicinity of the Saskatchewan.) Dr. Richardson...” The present record from Waterways could quite conceivably be a recent introduction for the species was seen nowwhere else in the area but along the railway embankment. COMPOSITAE SOLIDAGO MULTIRADIATA Ait. MACK: about 15 miles west of the Horten R., and from 15-20 miles from the barren grounds, Mackay s.n., July 1951; on glacial till, along Hornaday River approx. 26 miles directly southeast of its mouth, Mackay s.n. July 21, 1951. These stations are some 250 miles east of sites near the Mackenzie River Delta and 150 miles north of sites on the north shore of Great Bear Lake as shown on the distri- bution map in Raup (1947). SOLIDAGO DECUMBENS Greene OREOPHILA (Rydb.) Fern. MACK : exposed dry crevices in rock, rapids on north shore of Christie Bay [Great Slave Lake], Fredeen 103; in crevices on rock hill- side, very scattered, Yellowknife, 3015; occa- sional on sand and gravel hillside, Jackfish Lake, Yellowknife, 2666; shallow soil in cre- vice of rock hillside, rare, Joliffe Island, Yel- lowknife, 3091; shallow soil on rock hillside, Latham Island, Yellowknife, 2656, 3066; shal- low soil over rock, rare, outlet of Prosperous Lake, 2884; scattered on open hillside, Yellow- knife River Power House, 3314; scattered in rock crevices, Dome Lake, 3171; in crevice of rock, rare, Prelude Lake, 3159. Not previously recorded east of the Paleo- zoic boundary in Mackenzie District. var. HAPLOPAPPUS LANCEOLATUS (Hook.) T. & G. var. sublanatus var. nov. ALTA: around mud hole in heavy clay soil, three miles east of Beaverlodge, Jenkins 606; MACK: rare in sod, Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith (60°03’N, 112°25’W),W. J. Cody & C. C. Loan 4576 (Type) and 4168. Monocephalus rarius bicephalus; folia gla- brescentia, in primis a sublanatis lanato-floc- cosa per ambas paginas; caulis a sublanato lanato-floccosus; hypocephalum dense albo- lanatum; tegulae a sublanatis lanato-floccosae, lineares, ab acutis acuminatae; involucrum capitis (12)-15-(17) mm. dia. This northern variety differs from the typi- cal phase by its sublanate to floccose-lanate nature, ususally single heads and narrower tegules. Typical H. lanceolata is known in FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Canada in southern Alberta and Saskatchewan in an area bounded by a line drawn from Pin- cher Creek northeast to the vicinity of Sas- katoon and Big Quill Lake and south to Lisieux. The type is reported to have been collected by Drummond between Carleton House and Ed- monton House. On the basis of the presently known distribution it seems probable that it was collected somewhere along the Saskat- chewan River near Saskatoon. ASTER PAUCIFLORUS Nutt. MACK: very scattered in moist clay, Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, 4572. This species has been collected in similar habitats west of the upper Slave River (Raup 1935, 1936) and was certainly expected to be found north of the Alberta—Mackenzie bor- der. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. ASTER ANGuUsTUS (Lindl.) T. & G. MACK rare in moist sand and gravel by road- side, road to airport, Yellowknife, 3257. The type of Hooker’s “B ramis polycephalis” presumably was collected in the Great Slave Lake area by Richardson. The only other record from Mackenzie District is that of Raup (1947) from near Providence on the Mackenzie River. ERIGERON ANGULOSUS Gaudin var. KAMTSHATICUS (D.C.) Hara (E. acris L. var. asteroides (Anderz.) sensu Raup and Porsild). MACK: sandy gravel soil, Yellowknife, 2547, 2664, 2698, 2965; disturbed ground, very rare, Yellowknife, 2948; shallow soil on rocky hill- sides, 3018, 3076, 3098; shallow soil over rock, rare, Prosperous Lake, 2880; shallow soil over rock, open area, fairly common, Yellowknife River Power House, 3317; in crevice in moist soil, rare, Indin Lake, 3396; moist soil on open hillside, rare, Contact Lake, 2748. Not previously recorded from the Pre-Cam- brian region between Great Slave Lake and Great Bear Lake. ERIGERON ELATUS (Hook.) Greene (E. acris L. var. arcuans Fern.) MACK: moist sandy soil, Yellowknife, 2713; moist black soil with Equisetum arvense along roadside ditch, Yellowknife, 2413; rich black peaty soil, rather rare, Yellowknife, 2571; scattered in very shallow soil over gravel by roadside, road into Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 3001; fairly comomn in humus-rich black soil, north end of Kam Lake, Yellowknife, 2533; in crevice of rock, rare, Yellowknife River Power House, 3280; exposed slope from river- bank, common, West Channel, Hay River, Lewis 731; common on sand ledge beside July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN shore, Brabant Island, Great Slave Lake, Lewis 1014. Only one collection has previously been re- corded from the shores of Great Slave Lake: Fairchild Point (Raup 1936). The species, however, occurs north along the Mackenzie River at least as far as Good Hope (Raup 1947). ERIGERON LONCHOPHYLLUS Hook. MACK: in sod in sand in scrubby pasture south of Ft. Smith, 4320, Loan 43; scattered on wet sand flats by old townsite, Yellow- knife, 3043; moist black soil by shore, rare, Joliffe Island, Yellowknife, 3095. Previously known as far north as central Wood Buffalo Park [Alberta]; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. ERIGERON compositus Pursh var. TRIFIDUS (Hook.) Gray MACK: shallow soil in crevice of rock, very rare, Indin Lake, 3465. Apparently not previously recorded from the area between Great Bear Lake and Great Slave Lake. ERIGERON CANADENSIs L. MACK: scattered in clearing in jack pine- aspen woods in sandy loam, Ft. Smith, Loan 112. A northward extension of the known range of some 100 miles from the west end of Lake Athabaska (Raup 1936); new to the flora of Mackenzie District. ANTENNARIA ROSEA Greene s.l. MACK : on sandy point 2 ft. above water level, Pearson Point G. S. L., Fredeen 109; very scattered in rock crevices, Dome Lake, 3172; very shallow soil over rock along river, rare, Snare River Power Station, 2643. Not previously recorded in the Pre-Cam- brian region north of the shores of Great Slave Lake. ANTENNARIA CAMPESTRIS Rydb. var. ATHABASCEN- sis (Greene) Boivin Specimens from Lac la Biche, Lac la Biche Mission, Chenal de Quatre Fourches (58°38’N, 111°20’W), and Ft. Fitzgerald in Alberta and Ft. Smith and Yellowknife in Mackenzie Dis- trict are referred to this variety. The Howe specimen cited by Raup (1936, 1947) under A. campestris, possibly also belongs here. The type of A. athabascensis was collected by Preble at Fort Chipewyan. ANTENNARIA leontopodioides sp. nov. MACK: small clump in very shallow soil in hollow of igneous rock, rare, Indin Lake, FIELD-NATURALIST 127 64°17’N, 115°12’W, W. J. Cody & J. B. Mc- Canse 3473 (Type in DAO). Humifusa; stolonis curtis suberectis; foliis confertis linearibus vel lineari-spathulatis, 0.8-1.0 em longis, 1.3-2.5 mm latis, in primis plerumque per ambas paginas coactile tomen- tosis vel etiam in coactis niveis tectis, maturis appresso-lanato-tomentosis, senectis griseo- tomentosis, apice acutis mucronibus in tomen- to occultis. Caulis florifer 5-9 cm altus, ple- rumque basus coactile tomentosus (e tomento ad 3 mm crass.), superioribus floccoso-tomen- tosis; foliis caulinariis linearibus 8-11 plus minusve imbricatis sericeo-tomentosis, infer- ioribus mucronatis, superioribus 2-4 summis conspicue scariosis. Inflorescentia glomerata, in primis nutans; pedunculis et involucris basis dense vel coactile tomentosis. Calathia feminea ca. 5 per caulem. Involucrum ca. 5 mm altum; bracteis basis fulvis summis plus minusve roseis, in apice 0.5-1.0 mm latis, mi- nute erosis. Achaenia laevia. Pappus albus barbellatus. Planta mascula ignota. Humifuse; stolons short, suberect; basal leaves crowded, linear to linear-spatulate 0.8-1.0 em long, 1.3-2.5 mm wide, the young ones usually thickly carpeted on both sur- faces with a lanate tomentum or even hidden in a snowy white mass of lanate tomentum, becoming appressed lanate-tomentose at ma- turity, grayish-tomentose in age, the mucro- nate tip hidden by the tomentum; flowering stems 5-9 cm high, usually thickly lanate- tomentose at the base (tomentum up to 3 mm thick), floccose-tomentose above; cauline leaves 8-11, more or less imbricate, linear, sericeous-tomentose, the lower mucronate, the upper 2-4 prolonged into long scarious tips; inflorescence glomerate, nodding when young; peduncles and lower part of the in- volucre covered with a dense or even felty tomentum; heads about 5 per stem; involucre about 5mm high; phyllaries light brown below, more or less pink above, the tips 0.5-1.0 mm broad, the margins erose; seed glabrous, pap- pas white, barbulate; male plant unkown. From A. incarnata with which A. leontopo- dioides appears to be related, it differs in its shorter stolons, shorter flowering stems, glo- merate inflorescence, and the very thick la- nate tomentum of the young leaves and around the bases of the flowering stems; hence the name, leontopodioides, that is, similar to Leontopodium alpinum, the heavily white- lanate edelweiss of the Alps. A specimen collected by A. E. & R. T. Por- sild (CAN) at Great Bear Lake, and referred to A. incarnata by Porsild (1950) is perhaps 128 THE CANADIAN intermediate between A. leontopodioides and that species. From the type of A. incarnata (CAN) it differs in having shorter flowering stems, a more compact inflorescence and shorter stolons. All the specimens cited by Porsild (loc. cit.) under A. incarnata were collected in limestone habitats; the type of A. leontopodioides was collected on granitic rock. BIDENS CERNUA L. MACK: roadside, moist depression in loamy sand, scattered, Seven Mile Lake, 27 miles west of Ft. Smith, Loan 174. Previously known as far north as central Wood Buffalo Park [Alberta]; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. HELENIUM AUTUMNALE L. var. GRANDIFLORUM (Nutt.) T. & G. MACK: exposed slope near riverbank, com- mon, Lewis 972. The first authenticated record from Great Slave Lake and the second from Mackenzie District; see Raup (1947) for discussion of the occurrence of this species in Mackenzie Dis- trict. ACHILLEA sipiricA Ledeb. MACK : alluvial soil at mouth of Baker Creek, rare, Yellowknife, 3493. Apparently not previously recorded from the Pre-Cambrian region north of Great Slave Lake. MATRICARIA INODORA L. ALTA: moist black silt in broad roadside ditch, rare, Ft. Fitzgerald, 4419; a solitary bushy 3-ft. plant in sand by roadside, 1% miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald, 4450; MACK: sand in sod along fenceline, Ft. Smith, 4691; exposed dry field, occasional, Old Settlement, Hay River, Lewis 991. Pyrethrum wmodorum was reported by Hooker (1829-40) ‘as far north as Bear Lake, Dr. Richardson.” Raup (1947) has evaluated this record after seeing Richardson specimens which are without specific locality data pre- served at Gray Herbarium and the Herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden, and has concluded that it is probably referable to Matricaria ambigua (Ledeb.) Kyrl. The record of Pyrethrum inodorum might still, however, be referred to Matricaria inodora but in any event the specimens from Ft. Smith and Hay River represent the first clearly substantiated records for Mackenzie District. Introduced; not recorded by Raup (1936) for the Athabas- ka-Great Slave Lake region. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 MATRICARIA MATRICARIOIDES (Less.) Porter ALTA: disturbed ground along railway right- of-way, Lac la Biche, 6893; scattered in waste ground and along roadsides throughout the town, Ft. McMurray, 7243. MACK: very scat- tered in waste ground along fenceline, in sand, Ft. Smith 4138; common in moist fill along bay, Yellowknife, 3053; scattered in sandy gravel, airstrip, Yellowknife, 3235; scattered in disturbed ground around buildings, Indin Lake, 3343. This species has apparently not been pre- viously recorded for the northeastern section of Alberta or the Northwest Territories; it is evidently spreading rapidly throughout the northwest. ARTEMISIA FRIGIDA Willd. MACK: open sandy plain, rare, Ft. Smith, Loan 266. Previously known from Wood Buffalo Park [Alberta] (Raup 1935) and along the Macken- zie River (Raup 1947). ARTEMISIA LuUDOvicIANA Nutt. (Nutt.) T. & G. ALTA: dry and exposed roadside, Halfway House, 7 miles north of Ft. Fitzgerald, Loan 217; under 6-ft. Salix bordering exposed saline plain, Salt Plain west of Ft. Smith, Loan 308. Not previously recorded for either the Athabaska--Great Slave Lake area or Wood Buffalo Park; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. var. GNAPHALODES SENECIO VULGARIS L. ALTA: roadside in partial shade, Lac la Biche, 6955; rare in disturbed ground along railway right-of-way, Lac la Biche, 6894; Beaverlodge, Albright sn. August 1942, Jen- kins, 165, 358, Lindsay 311; Kakut Lake near Heart Valley, Moss 8442; garden, Grande Prairie, Groh 888; east of Grande Prairie, Groh 2983; MACK: a weed in market gardens, Yellowknife, 3251, 3528. Apparently this weed is advancing north- ward. It was recorded from the Edmonton district by Turner (1949), but was previously unknown from north of that locality. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. SENECIO EREMOPHILUS Richards. MACK: roadside, very sunny and exposed, growing in old burn under aspen regenera- tion, scattered, Salt River, Loan 141. This species is reported by Hooker (1829- 40) as occurring “to Fort Franklin, on the Mackenzie River,’ but apparently there are no specimens with exact locality data from Mackenzie District to substantiate this state- July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN ment. The Loan collection represents the first substantiated record for Mackenzie Dis- trict. Raup (1936) records this species only as far north as the upper Slave River. SENECIO LUGENS Richards. MACK: scattered in moist soil on open hill- side, Contact Lake, 2746; in wet moss, rather rare, Eldorado Mine, Port Radium, 2786. Hooker (1829-40) records this species “First detected at Bloody Fall, ... also from Fort Franklin to the sea-coast. Dr. Richardson.” In Mackenzie District the species is also known in the Mackenzie Mountains (Raup 1947, Por- sild 1945). SENECIO CYMBALARIOIDES Nutt. var. BOREALIS (T. & G.) Greenm. MACK: very scattered in shallow soil on rocky hillside, Indin Lake, 3422; shallow soil on rocky hillside, rare, Gunbarrel Inlet, Great Bear Lake, 2846; sandy dry land, Sawmill Bay, Great Bear Lake, Corcoran 1; scattered in very shallow soil on rocky hillside, Eldorado Mine, Port Radium, 2769. Apparently not previously recorded from the Pre-Cambrian region north of Great Slave Lake. SENECIO INDECORUS Greene MACK: rare in sandy soil and in moist humus, Yellowknife, 2700, 2714, 2957, 2974, 2976; in erevice of rock, rare, Yellowknife River Power House, 3279. Not previously recorded from the Pre-Cam- brian region north of Great Slave Lake. SENECIO PAUPERCULUS Michx. var. (Rydb.) Boivin MACK: moist soil at water’s edge, Indin Lake, 3392. Not previously recorded from the Pre-Cam- brian region between Great Slave Lake and Great Bear Lake. TRAGOPOGON MAJOR Jacq. (T. dubius Scop.) ALTA : railway, Wembley, Groh 885; Beaver- lodge, Groh s.n., Aug. 29, 1934; railway right- of-way, Peace River, 2783; dry bank, roadside, La Glace, Moss 8527; MACK: rare, open waste sand area west of Fort Smith, 4131, 4368. Introduced; apparently not previously re- corded from north of the Edmonton district; new to the flora of Mackenzie District. FLAVOVIRENS TARAXACUM OFFICINALE Weber MACK: along path and in grass of waste ground, localized, Joliffe Island, Yellow- knife, 2476. Previously known only as far north as Chipewyan (Raup 1936); new to the flora of Mackenzie District. FIELD-NATURALIST 129 CrePis TECTORUM L, ALTA: rare in sod along road, Lac la Biche, 6837; rare on sand beach, Lac la Biche, 6841; rare in disturbed ground along railway right- of-way, Lac la Biche, 6900; on sand beach, Lac la Biche Mission, 6983; rare on sand beach, Big Island in Lac la Biche, 7060; scattered in hay field 3 miles east of Pla- mondon, 7090; rare in railway ballast, Water- ways, 7301; MACK: weed in sandy soil of gar- den, Fort Smith, 4143, 4410. This introduced weedy species is apparently spreading rapidly throughout northern Alber- ta. Turner (1949) reports first seeing it in 1934 in the Edmonton area, where it has hbe- come quite abundant; Groh (1949) records an infestation at Fort Vermillion. New to the flora of Mackenzie District. REFERENCES Cody, W. J. 1954. Plant records from Coppermine, Mackenzie District, N.W.T. Can. Field Nat. 63 (3): 110-117. [Journal issued May 4, 1955]. — and J. G. Chillcott. 1955. Plant collections from Matthews and Muskox lakes, Mackenzie District, N.W.T. Can Field Nat. 69: 153-162. [Journal issued Dec. 18, 1956]. Fernald, M. L. 1950. Gray’s Manual of Botany, 8th ed., American Book Co., N.Y. Groh, H. 1949. Plants of clearing and trail between Peace River and Fort Vermillion, Alberta. Can. Field Nat. 63 (4): 119-134. Hooker, W. J. 1829-40. Flora Boreali-Americana. London. Hultén, E. 1941-52. Flora of Alaska and Yukon. Lunds Univ. Arssk. Macoun, J. M. and Th. Holm. 1921. The Vascular Plants of the Arctic Coast of American west of the 100th Meridian, collected by the Canadian Arctic Expedition 1913-18. Report of the Canadian Arctic Expedition 1913-18, Vol. 5: Botany part A; Vascular Plants, 1A-51A. Pennell, F. J. 1934. Castilleja in Alaska and North- western Canada. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phil 86: 517-540. Porsild, A. E. 1943. Materials for a flora of the continental Northwest Territories of Canada. Sar- gentia 4: 1-79. — 1945. The alpine flora of the east slope of Mac- kenzie Mountains, Northwest Territories. National Museum of Canada. Bull. No. 101. Biol. Ser. No. 30. ; — 1950. The genus Antennaria in Northwestern Canada. Can. Field Nat. 64 (1): 1-25. Raup, H. M. 1934 Phytogeographic studies in the Peace and Upper Liard River regions, Canada. Contr. Arn. Arb. Harvard Univ. 6: 1-230. — 1935. Botanical investigations in Wood Buffato Park. National Museum of Canada. Bull. No. 74 Biol. Ser. No. 20. — 1936. Phytogeographic studies in the Athabaska — Great Slave Lake region. I. Catalogue of the vascular plants. J. Arn. Arb. 17: 180-315. — 1947. The botany of southwestern Mackenzie. Sargentia 6: 1-275. Rechinger, K. H., Jr. 1937. The North American species of Rumex. Field Mus. Nat. Hist. Bot. Ser. 17 (1): 1-151. 130 THE CANADIAN Rydberg, P. A. 1900. Catalogue of the flora of Montana and the Yellowstone National Park. Mem. N.Y. Bot. Gard 1: 1-492. — 1922. Flora of the Rocky Mountains and adjacent plains. Ed. 2. The New York Botanical Garden. New York. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Swallen, J. R. 1944. The Alaskan species of Puc- cinellia. J. Wash. Acad. Sc. 34: 16-23. Turner, G. H. 1949. Plants of the Edmonton district ~ of the province of Alberta. Can Field Nat. 63: 1-28 a Y “NOTES ON SOME BIRDS AND MAMMALS OF THE COLVILLE RIVER, ALASKA * Epwarp B. REED Department of Biology, University of Saskatchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan Received for publication May 14, 1956 During the summer of 1955 the writer and Mr. F. W. Jackson of Pinedale, (Wyoming, carried on an investigation of the entomostra- can fauna of the Colville River area in north- ern Alaska. On June 21 we left the junction of the Kiligwa and Colville Rivers in a pneu- matic raft. Oliktok Point on the coast was reached August 23. Incidental observations were made on birds and mammals in addition to our plankton work. Except for the setting of a few snap traps no attempts were made to locate birds or mammals, consequently some of the smaller and more wary animals known to occur in the region were not seen. But considering the paucity of records from this area it is felt that the following accounts are of interest. DESCRIPTION OF AREA The Colville, the largest river on the Arctic slope of Alaska, rises in the De Long Moun- tains of the Brooks Range, and flows roughly eastward to its confluence with the Killik, then northeast to the Anaktuvuk from which point it flows nearly due north to the Beau- fort Sea (Fig. 1). For most of its length the Colville flows through the Arctic Plateau, a region lying between the high mountains of the Brooks Range on the south and the Arctic Plain bordering the Arctic Ocean to the north. The Plateau is characterized by rolling foothills in a mature well-dissected topography. The first camp was at an alti- 1 These studies were made possible by a contract between the United States Government and the Arctic Institute of North America. Reproduction in whole or in part is permitted for any purpose by the United States Government. tude of 1800 feet on a gravel bar along the Colville. In this area the river has cut some 200 feet into the rolling hills; the valley is about one mile in width. The flood plain on the valley floor is dotted with numerous little ponds, oxbows, and seeps. Small willows grow along the Colville and tributary streams, whereas the hills are open and rather dry tundra. The Colville follows a meandering course, often between nearly sheer bluffs. It is free from rocky rapids but there are stretches where the current picks up speed as the river narrows to pass between bluffs. Rapids and rips resulting from currents being deflected by submerged obstacles are frequent. For the last few miles above the Awuna the Col- ville flows through a series of sharp turns flanked by high hills on each side. Below the Awuna the Colville valley widens and the number of flood plain lakes as well as the amount of willows and alders increases, and except for a few miles above the Killik the bluffs do not closely approach the river on both sides at once. At the Colville Bar the river divides into a complex series of braids as the valley widens. From the Bar to Umiat the valley floor is about three miles in average width, and the river is characterized by many chan- nels and islands. Fluctuations in water depth of one inch per hour were not uncommon, presumably the result of storms higher up on the drainage area. In this area the growth of willows and alders is quite dense along the streams and around some of the lakes. Also the sides of the hills above the river 131 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST r July-September, 1956] LNIOd AOLINO WY ANANLAWNY SS a . = iS A 2 MANV3DO DILDUV| BYyseLY “eoTe TBAT 2T[LA[O") *T “Sl VASVIV V4adV YSAlu STIIAIOD m = e 5 en x F pS zd G: “~ > oe anv > } S p Ao ove ai) “e Pg —TTUIAION | DN (> 2 7 EH AY SCDD ae a Ald e ie o9S! 132 THE CANADIAN are, in some places, thickly covered by these bushes. The west bank of the Colville is a nearly continuous bluff that varies in height from 550 at Umiat to 200 feet at the Kikiakrorak. In general the river flows in better defined channels here, although local areas of braid- ing occur and there are many islands. The high-water mark on the banks was some ten feet above the water level of late July and early August so that extensive sand and gravel bars were exposed. East of the river a much less distinct highland is discernible for a short distance past the Anaktuvuk. The mouth of the Anaktuvuk valley is plain but from there the high ground fades away to the east and south. Willows and alders are plentiful here, as at Umiat. The low ground east of the river is dotted with many small lakes. Below the mouth of the Kikiakrorak the cliffs continue first on the west, then the north and finally on the east side as the Colville makes a big bend. At Ocean Point the decreasing bluff dies away completely. Here the rolling hills are left behind and the Colville enters the Arctic Plain. Except for low scattered mounds the terrain is with- out relief. At the mouth of the Itkillik the last willows of any considerable size (4 feet) are seen. The channel from Kikiakrorak to the upper delta is less broken by islands than higher up, but the current is quite slow. About two miles below the Itkillik the Colville begins to break up into the delta distribu- taries. As the river progresses down the delta the channels become more numerous, wider and more shallow. The tundra from the It- killik to Oliktok Point is quite flat and dotted with many lakes and ponds separated by areas of dry tundra. Brirps Yellow-billed Loon Gavia adamsi — First encountered below the mouth of the Kikiak- rorak River on August 6. Common on the river but occasionally seen on some of the larger tundra ponds, not noted below the Forks area. Usually solitary or in pairs. Arctic Loon Gavia arctica pacifica — Com- mon on the river and tundra ponds from start to Oliktok Point. At Kikiakrorak a female was surprised on the nest. At first she crouched down with head and neck pull- ed close to the body. As I approached the nest she slipped into the water and began feigning injury. This consisted of flapping the wings, raising the fore part of the body from the water and giving a series of low FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 croaky notes. After about two minutes of display the bird swam to its mate that had been swimming and calling some sixty yards from shore. The nest was merely a flattened place on top of a small piece of tundra that had slumped into the lake. One pipped egg lay in the nest. The next day the adults accompanied by the young bird were seen on the lake. Red-throated Loon Gavia_ stellata — Like the Arctic Loon, this species was common on the river and on the tundra ponds from the starting point to Oliktok Point. Arctic and Red-throated Loons were often observed together on the river but not on ponds. Loons were particularly numerous about the mouth of the Itkillik River, where mixed groups of up to 10 Arctic and Red-throated Loons could be seen. These included adults and young of the year. Canada Goose Branta canadensis — Re- corded from start to Ocean Point, most fre- quently in the area from Colville Bar to Umiat; on this stretch of river 17 pairs each accompanied by six to nine goslings: were seen. First goslings were noted on July 5 at Colville Bar. No nests were observed. Black Brant Branta bernicla — Six were observed on a backwater of the Colville a short distance above the mouth of the Etiv- luk on June 25. ' Pintail Anas acuta — Recorded at Umiat, Itkillik and Anaktuvuk camps. At the latter a female with seven ducklings was flushed from a very small pond. The young were unable to fly and attempted escape by run- ning into the willows. The sheaths of the flight feathers of one young, captured by hand, were just beginning to split; this was on July 27. Scaup Aythya marila nearctica — Seen at Umiat, June 20 and Kikiakrorak, August 1. Old Squaw Clangula hyemalis — A nest. of coarse grasses, lined with down and con- taining seven eggs was found at Umiat, June 21, at the edge of a small lake. Two pairs were observed on the lake at the starting point. Also noted on tundra ponds at Ipnavik and Kikiakrorak. Harlequin Duck Histrionicus histrionicus — A female with three young believed to be of this species were seen on a large tundra pond at Kikiakrorak, August 1. White-winged Scoter Melanitta deglandi — A flock of 15 was observed on two occasions on tundra ponds at Kikiakrorak and others were seen at Ocean Point. July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN Surf Scoter Melanitta perspicillata — Sev- eral were observed on the ocean from the Colville delta to Oliktok Point. A female and four young were seen at Kikiakrorak. Red-breasted Merganser Mergus serrator — Occasionally seen on the Colville above and below Umiat. Pomarine Jaeger Stercorarius pomarinus — Seen over the tundra as scattered individuals from starting point to Oliktok Point. One nest with five eggs was found on the tundra near first camp. Parasitic Jaeger Stercorarius parasiticus — Seattered from start to Forks area. Long-tailed Jaeger Stercorarius longicaudus — Scattered from Ipnavik to Forks. A flock of eight near the Etivluk mouth was the largest concentration of Jaegers noted during the summer. Glaucous Gull Larus hyperboreus hyper- boreus — Seen nearly daily from starting point to Oliktok Point. Common on islands in the Colville and frequently seen on the larger tundra ponds. Arctic Tern Sterna paradisaea — Recorded from Kikiakrorak and Itkillik River camps. American Rough-legged Hawk Buteo lago- pus — Frequently observed on bluffs along the river from start to Ocean Point. Often nests with young could be seen as we floated past. Golden Eagle Aquila chysaetos canaden- sis — One individual seen near Ipnavik. Peregrine Falcon Falco peregrinus — Like the Rough-legged hawks, falcons were seen on the river bluffs from start to Ocean Point where the last of the bluffs occur. Adult birds would often circle the raft emitting harsh rapid cries. Willow Ptarmigan Lagopus lagopus — Seen and heard at all camps. A flock of fifty birds was flushed from a dense willow thicket above the Ipnavik River. Ptarmigan were particularly abundant at Anaktuvuk, Ocean Point and Oliktok Point, where many broods were seen. Rock Ptarmigan Lagopus mutus — One individual was seen on Redhill at Umiat on June 16. Little Brown Crane Grus canadensis — Heard at Anaktuvuk on July 27; none seen. Semipalmated Plover Charadrius hiaticula semipalmatus — Recorded from Colville Bar to Kikiakrorak. At Ninuluk Creek we inad- vertently pitched our tent about eight feet from a Semipalmated Plover nest. Whenever we approached the nest one of the birds FIELD-NATURALIST 133 would begin peeping, run in front of us and begin feigning injury. This consisted of widely spreading and depressing the rectrices until the tips touched the ground. Simul- taneously the wings were extended outward and downward; then the bird would half flutter and half hop away from the nest. During our stay the four eggs hatched: one the first day, two the second and one the third. At our approach after the young birds were running about, one of the adults would feign injury in front of us while the other attempted to lead the small birds away. The nest was a small unlined hollow in the gravel under an Arctic Lupine. Golden Plover Pluvialis dominica — Re- corded at Umiat, June 16, Kikiakrorak, August 1 and Itkillik, August 14. Black-bellied Plover Squatarola squatarola — One individual seen above Umiat. Wilson’s Snipe Capella gallinago delicata — Seen at Umiat, Anaktuvuk and Itkillik camps. Hudsonian Curlew Numenius phaeopus hudsonicus — One individual seen on a mud flat by a small stream at Ocean Point, August 9. Pectoral Sandpiper Erolia melanotos — Scattered from Awuna River to Anaktuvuk. Baird’s Sandpiper Erolia bairdit — Many were observed feeding on small crustaceans and molluscs along the shore of a large tundra pond at Kikiakrorak. Semipalmated Sandpiper Ereunetes pusil- lus — Seattered from starting point to Forks. Northern Phalarope Lobipes lobatus — Common on ponds from start to Forks. Snowy Owl Nyctea scandiaca — Two seen, one on June 24 on an open hillside above the Ipnavik River, and one perched in a willow on the bank of the Colville below the Etivluk on June 27. Short-eared Owl Asio flammeus — One in- dividual seen flying over wet tundra at Umiat, June 16. Northen Raven Corvus corax — Recorded at Umiat and Anaktuvuk. Gray-cheeked Thrush Hylocichla minima — A nest with five eggs was noted in low willows at first camp. Thrushes were heard and occasionally seen from there to Umiat. Red-spotted Bluethroat Luscinia svecica — One young of the year was seen in alder bushes at Ocean Point, August 9. Yellow Wagtail Motacilla flava — Common along the tundra-willow edge from Kiligwa to Anaktuvuk. The first fledglings were noted on July 6 at the Colville Bar. 134 THE CANADIAN Northen Shrike Lanius excubitor borea- lis — One seen in the vicinity of the Awuna River mouth. Willow Warbler Phylloscopus borealis — Two were observed in the bush along Seabee Creek at Umiat, June 18. Redpoll Acanthis hornemanni and A. flam- mea — No attempt was made to record these species separately. Common from first camp to limit of bushes. Savannah Sparrow Passerculus sandwichen- sis — Scattered from Awuna to Umiat. Tree Sparrow Spizella arborea — Common, from start to Itkillik River. Two nests each with five eggs were noted, one at Umiat, June 17, and the other at first camp June 22. First fledglings were seen on July 6 at Colville Bar. Several fledglings were ob- served at Ninuluk Creek. White-crowned Sparrow Zonotrichia leuco- phrys — Scattered from Etivluk to Ocean Point. Fox Sparrow Passerella iliaca — Scattered from start to Ocean Point. Lapland Longspur Calcarius lapponicus — Common on open tundra from start to Olik- tok Point. A nest containing one young being fed insect larvae by the female was seen near the Kurupa River mouth. First fledg- lings were noted at Ninuluk Creek, July 10. Snow Bunting Plectrophenax nivalis — A few were noted at Oliktok Point. Some birds, either because of their scarcity or the limitations of our movements, were recorded only once or twice. In general the occurrence of redpolls and sparrows coincid- ed with the willow distribution, whereas hawks and falcons tended to be concentrated along the bluffs. Longspurs and jaegers are birds of the open tundra. Willow Ptarmigan were common on the tundra as well as in the bushes. Arctic and Red-throated Loons, Northern Phalaropes and Glaucous Gulls find a continuous habitat on the river and ponds. The lower number of species recorded from near the coast may be the result of decreased availability of habitat and advanced seasonal conditions (Table 1). MAMMALS Grizzly Bear Ursus horribilis — One seen on June 26 above the Etivluk. This individual was moving about in low willows and alders on the hillside above the river. Tracks were commonly seen on the sand bars in the vicinity of first camp, second camp, Colville Bar, above Umiat, and at Anaktuvuk camp. Wolverine Gulo gulo — One was seen on FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 a gravel bar above the Awuna River on June 29. This animal moved back and forth, oc- casionally rearing up on its hind legs as the raft floated past. A second wolverine was seen July 5 just above the Colville Bar. We had an excellent view of this animal stand- ing on the river bank as we floated past about 40 feet off shore. After we were some 200 feet downstream the wolverine swam to the opposite shore and disappeared into the willows. Red Fox Vulpes fulva — Fox tracks were seen at every camp, often in considerable numbers. Red fox were seen at first camp on June 21 and June 26, and July 12 at Ninuluk Creek. At the latter place as we aproached our tent from upstream a red fox was trotting toward camp from downstream. We waited motionless to see what would happen. The fox sniffed at our gear piled in front of the tent and nosed about some empty tin cans. Then, on noticing us for the first time, gave a few short barks and withdrew a little way. We remained still and the fox resumed sniffing about the camp and finally passed within eight feet of us, disappearing into the bushes. While the fox was near, a Semipalmated Plover nesting on the sandbar set up a continual peeping and fluttered near the fox feigning injury. As far as we could tell the fox took no notice of the plover. Arctic Fox Alopex lagopus — One was seen July 25 on a sand bar near the mouth of the Anaktuvuk River. This may have been a blue phase animal as it appeared quite dark. However, the dark appearance may have been accentuated by poor light. Gray Wolf Canis lupus — One was seen on a ridge top above the Colville River near the Awuna, June 28. Wolf tracks were seen at all camps through Ocean Point. Harbor Seal Phoca vitulina — Two were seen in the Colville above the Itkillik on August 12, two more above the Forks on August 18. The seals were wary but curious, following the raft for several minutes but staying a hundred yards or so to one side or behind. Arctic Ground Squirrel Citellus undulatus — Seen from first camp to Forks. Particularly numerous on the bluffs at Anaktuvuk and along the small streams entering the Colville at Kikiakrorak area. Frequently seen along the river bank, usually on broken shale or sandy soil. However, at the Forks burrows were found in tundra cracked and buckled July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 135 TaBLE 1. Some Birps RECORDED ALONG THE COLVILLE RIVER, ALASKA, SUMMER 1955. M E j ee: Engel : a ee Vs oie ; a Mie) Mlb 4 Begins A m4 Pu iY] (o) < < a 5 B % Aa i = ie IS) acs ahah” | iS) SHi0e. Lumsiahs? « pthuiie an giNe slo. antialel Z = a Z cI oO ° MAWIR Mu set Med ay iow) okay eatin® Yellow-billed Loon .........cccccceceeeeeeee * * * PAT CET OTN ac an se coc css coca Leics Sk sans atovdan oan * * * * * * * * * * =F * PREG throated: WOON ...2..c..cccseccsdececesseciescsecces * * * * a * EY * * ne * * Ganada = Goose snes Ch ROLES, a nd cs * * * * * * a * BlackeaBrant gs: .tae:.cienc hae .4... Se sees * Gee RE in ok ke Sits hemacsissaaes bens a * * STORED ~ esahactic ince SeeeRE eee eee ae eer ne ed * * WlaOiSquaweG&. f07 4-2 Gee. ad * * A Harlequin Dueck... .c2e.c! sco. Ai)... ee * White-winged Scoter .........c.ccecceectecees * * SUE | STIRS aa een eee in ee a ee eee a * * Pomarine Jaeger ...........:cccccceceeeeceeeeeseeeenees * * * * * Fret * * * * * Long-tailed Jaeger ..........c.::cccccecscceeseeeesteesees ee + IRAIEASTEL CHIR ACS CLs raises ceemctcs ss .ccesncese ess snes * * KanCOUS sulle eee en SS oe * * * * * * * * * fe ¥ * INGChiGH Merner tee: Velie ree Tye eh. Le) * * American Rough-legged Hawk .................... * * “3 * * * * * * (Golalaany lei Sie ee oe eee eee * Reregrimen Malcon!’ )..22. 20200 oe DE. * * * * * * * * es Willow Ptarmigan oo... * * * * ty * * 3 F * * * DG “TEM nkee i a ec * Semipalmated Plover ..-........0ccccccccceceeeeee * * * r = Golden. Plover! i 0985, 228 2a we ANe = * * NVAISONS un OMIPE, got te ceacs Aone: «bynes acute cee ueyeies * * * itdsoniam £ Curlew, ccc. 2:c2--s.sccesecssactonsesasesess * Rectorale Sandpiper esc ctsceeecce cet eescs a * * * * Bairdise Sandpiper. 0.2058... 0A aa Soke * Semipalmated Sandpiper ..........0.:ccccceee hE * Northern, Phalarope: 22::....-25:.:...s-.csesseesteoesee * = * i * * *: zt “2 z * SHOUT. Onl. cescasetsae ak hea er eee * Short-eared Ow] o.......cccccccccccceesceeceeceenees * INorthernt Raventas)..cts Ree No. n see x “F Gray-cheeked Thrush ..00.....0.0.00.cccceceeeeeeee * * * * * a Red-spotted Bluethroat .......0..0.cccee ee * Wellow, Wactall > -..n3. SABA. .coe ee >: * * ES x * * UN (OEM GINS WEI KE eee ne reeesccss shes ees secteoucnc 5 WhallowasWarbler: s22..202eo eee = Red poles 2H as, SPOS oath dd, * * * ct * F * ee * * SAavannany SPaAnhOW, ese keer eee A = * * * PCCM OD ALLO Wane et ete ee uc At ot * * * i * * * * * White-crowned Sparrow .........ccccccceeee * * * * id z z Ox Sparro witow. VE. Nee eae. oilh e * * * a * * * * Lapland Longspur ........cccccccccccccceseceeeeeeeeeeee * * te * ct ESS * = * By * by frost. Here on August 19 a squirrel with There were no external signs of injury and wet pelage was picked up on the tundra; when placed at the entrance of a burrow the this animal was stiff and could barely move. squirrel managed to crawl from sight. At 136 THE CANADIAN this time the temperature was 32° F. and intermittent rain and sleet had occurred over the past 12 hours. Tundra Vole Microtus oeconomus — Two were caught at Umiat on June 21. One was a mature male (testes 9.0 mm.) and the other a nonpregnant female one-fourth grown. Singing Vole Microtus miurus — Four sub- adults were trapped at Ocean Point on August 8 and 9, measurements for three males are — testes: 2.5, 2.5, 2.5; total length: 124, 125, 129; tail: 22, 20, 20; hind foot: 18, 17, 18; ear to notch: 11, 11, and 12 mm. Much vole sign and several voles were seen on the tundra around first camp; however none were collected. Alaska Moose Alces alces gigas — Moose were seen as follows: June 28, bull a few miles above Awuna; July 4, cow above Col- ville Bar; July 5, three cows, one calf, Col- ville Bar; July 10, calf Ninuluk Creek; July 25, two cows, one calf below Umiat; July 28, bull Anaktuvuk; August 6, bull Ocean Point. Tracks were numerous from Awuna to Anaktuvuk. The skeleton of a bull with huge antlers was found on a small island two or three miles below the mouth of the Kurupa River. Barren Ground Caribou Rangifer arcticus — Most numerous early in the summer. We estimated, based on partial count, that by June 27 2,000 animals, of which about ten percent were calves, had been seen. Most of these were on the north side of the Col- FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 ville moving upstream. In addition the fol- lowing were noted: band of thirty to forty at Ipnavik, scattered small groups and in- dividuals between Etivluk and Kurupa, four swimming the Colville above Umiat, one bull at Kikiakrorak, nine at Ocean Point, three at Itkillik, few at Forks and five at Oliktok Point. A very young, perhaps stillborn, dead fawn was found at the Kurupa mouth. At Kikiakrorak as I was returning to camp from a day of pond sampling I chanced upon a bull lying on a little hummock in the tun- dra. While I was still 300 to 400 yards away and down-wind, the caribou got up and began to trot about, first one way then another but gradually moved on a course which took him down-wind from me. From a point about 200 yards away, the caribou approached until within 100 yards and at this distance followed me for about %4 of a mile, moving at a slow trot, but pausing occasionally to look and always raising his tail before trotting a few steps more. SUMMARY Field notes were obtained on 48 species of birds and 11 species of mammals along 450 miles of the Colville River in Arctic Alaska during the summer of 1955. These observations were made secondarily to other work, hence are not exhaustive but perhaps will add to the growing fund of information regarding arctic and high boreal fauna. SOME DISTRIBUTIONAL NOTES ON CANADIAN BIRDS W. EArt GODFREY National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario Received for publication January 27, 1956 PIED-BILLED GREBE Podilymbus podiceps podiceps (Linnaeus) Near Scotsville, Cape Breton Island, the writer counted nine adults on July 5, 1954, and later, on July 19 and 20, near Grande Anse, saw an adult passing food to a flight- less young bird, the latter certainly indica- ting breeding. This species has not previous- ly been recorded from Cape Breton Island. SNOWY EGRET Leucophoyx thula thula | (Molina) The bill, feet, and wings of a Snowy Egret, freshly killed, apparently by collision with a telegraph wire, on November 5, 1955, at St. John’s, Newfoundland, were forwarded to the National Museum by Leslie M. Tuck. Peters and Burleigh (1951) report five seen (one collected) at Trepassy on August 18, 1948, the only other Newfoundland record. July-September, 1956] LITTLE EGRET Egretta garzetta garzetta (Linnaeus) The skin of a female, shot at Flat Rock, Conception Bay, Newfoundland, on May 8, 1954, was forwarded to the National Museum by L. M. Tuck. This is the first North American record for this Old World heron. GREENLAND WHITE-FRONTED GOOSE Anser albifrons flavirostris Dalgety and Scott A specimen shot at Debert, Nova Scotia, on November 21, 1949, was donated to the Na- tional Museum by Robie W. Tufts. BLUE-WINGED TEAL Anas discors Lin- naeus The writer observed it on Cape Breton Island in 1954 on the following dates (number of individuals in parentheses): On Madame Island June 4 (1); at Indian Bay June 6 (4), Seer) paltan( yi 2). ds" (2) 15 7@Q), 27, C2), 29 (3); July 12 (2 ad., 3 downies), 15 (2); at Nyanza June 6 (4); Margaree Forks, July 7 (1); East Margaree (2 ad., two broods of 12 and 2 young respectively). Breeding of this species does not appear to have been pre- viously recorded from Cape Breton Island. RING-NECKED DUCK Aythya collaris (Don- ovan) Although apparently not previously record- ed from Cape Breton Island this duck is locally not uncommon there in summer, breeding in freshwater marshes. In 1954 the writer counted 26 adults in the marshes of Indian Bay, Inverness County, on June 6 and three at Nyanza on June 15. At the outlet of Lake Ainslie broods of 6 and 9 respective- ly were seen on July 5. On the west side of Lake Ainslie nine downies were noted on July 7. At East Margaree 17 adults and 17 downies were counted on July. Three broods of young were seen on Indian Bay on July 15; and on a small lake near Sydney an adult with 7 young were seen on July 25 and 26. Another range extension is indicated by banding records of the Canadian Wildlife Service made available by T. S. Hennessey. At a banding station near Baie Johan Beetz, at Lae Salé, Quebec, north shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, 88 Ring-necked Ducks were banded in 1949; 9 in 1950; 36 in 1952; 18 in 1953. F. Graham Cooch, who operated the station in 1950, has informed me that he observed two broods of young there on Sep- tember 17 of that year. THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 137 OLD-SQUAW Clangula hyemalis (Linnaeus) Four were observed regularly by the writer between July 17 and 28, 1954, in a bay of Madame Island, Cape Breton, Island, an unusual summer record so far south. ICELAND BLACK-TAILED GODWIT Limosa limosa islandica Brehm. The skin of a female, taken at Dunn’s Pond, Placentia Bay, Newfoundland, on May 20, 1954, was donated to the National Museum by L. M. Tuck. Dr. Alexander Wetmore, who has re- cently investigated the validity of the sub- species islandica, refers this specimen to that race. This is the first record of the species for Canada, the only other North American re- cord being from Greenland. FORSTER TERN Sterna forsteri Nuttall The writer examined a mounted immature specimen in the collection of the Nova Scotia Museum of Science which was taken at May- nard’s Lake, near Dartmouth, Nova Scotia, on September 4, 1924, apparently the first Nova Scotia record. NORTHERN BARRED OWL Strix varia varia Barton A female in the flesh, forwarded to the National Museum by Leonidas Gagne, was picked up unable to fly with badly frozen legs and feet at Lake Patterson, Mistassibi watershed (Lat. 50° 11’ N), on January 17, 1954. EASTERN MOCKINGBIRD Mimus polyglot- tos polyglottos (Linnaeus) At Deroche Pond, Queen County, Prince Edward Island, the writer collected an adult female on August 4, 1952. Although the bird had an incubation patch it may have been a post-breeding-season wanderer. This is the first record for Prince Edward Island (God- frey 1954). CATBIRD Dumetella carolinensis (Linnaeus) In alders along the Aspy River, near Cape North, Cape Breton Island, the writer collect- ed a singing male on June 22, 1954. Another was observed in willow shrubbery at Scots- ville on July 5, 1954. The Catbird has not been previously recorded from Cape Breton Island. BICKNELL GRAY-CHEEKED THRUSH Hylo- cichla minima bicknelli Ridgway Wallace (1939) mentions three specimens taken near Percé, Quebec, in June and July. Two are referable to bichnelli, one to the 138 THE CANADIAN Newfoundland population of the nominate race. On July 12, 1955, R. J. d’Entremont secured three additional specimens in the hills behind Percé. All are referable to bick- nelli. NEWFOUNDLAND YELLOW WARBLER Dendroica petechia amnicola Batchelder The wings and some attached dorsal feathers from a specimen picked up early in August, 1951, by an Eskimo on Southampton Island, N.W.T., were forwarded to the Na- tional Museum by Niall Rankin. SYCAMORE WARBLER Dendroica dominica albilora Ridgway A specimen collected by Leslie M. Tuck at St. John’s, Newfoundland, on November 11, 1955, was donated by Mr. Tuck to the Na- tional Museum. Several other warblers, be- lieved to be of this species, were seen there at the time. The specimen, unsexed, is some- what intermediate in racial characters but seems nearest to albilora. This appears to be the first specimen of this species collected in Canada although sight records have been reported. SCARLET TANAGER Piranga olivacea (Gmelin) A family group consisting of an adult male and female and a juvenal (suggesting breed- ing) were observed near Riviere du Loup, Quebec, on July 21, 1955, by R. J. d’Entre- mont and the writer. The adult male and juvenal were collected. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 RED-EYED TOWHEE Pipilo erythrophthal- mus erythrophthalmus (Linnaeus) A post-juvenal male was secured by S. D. MacDonald at Northport, Nova Scotia, on October 27, 1949. This appears to be the first definite record for Nova Scotia. CHURCHILL SAVANNAH SPARROW Passer- ~ culus sandwichensis oblitus Peters and Griscom An unsexed specimen was collected at Resolute Bay, Cornwallis Island, N.W.T., on September 4, 1954, by J. A. Crosby. This is the northernmost North American record. EASTERN GRASSHOPPER SPARROW Am- modramus savannarum pratensis (Viellot) On June 25, 1952, some five miles north- east of St. Peters, Prince Edward Island, the writer collected an adult male Grasshopper Sparrow. It had been singing, appeared to have a definite territory, and its testes were fully enlarged. No others were seen, how- ever, although a considerable search was made. It has not been previously recorded from Prince Edward Island (Godfrey 1954). REFERENCES Godfrey, W. Earl. 1954. Birds of Prince Edward Island. National Museum, Canada, Bull. 132, p. 155-213. Peters, Harold S. and Thomas D. Burleigh. 1951. The Birds of Newfoundland. Boston, Houghton Mifflin Co., 431 p. Wallace, George J. 1939. Bicknell’s Thrush, Its Taxonomy, Distribution, and Life History. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 41 (6): 211-401. ANNOTATED LIST OF BIRDS OF PART OF THE BACK RIVER, N.W.T. JoHN S. TENER Canadian Wildlife Service, Ottawa, Ontario Received for publication October 3, 1955 From July 31 to August 9, 1955, Mr. Lloyd Beebe, Sequim, Washington, and I were on the Back River system, N.W.T. We flew from Yellowknife, N.W.T. to Beechy Lake, and then down the Back River to the Baillie River where we landed. July 31 and August 1 and 2 were devoted to a wildlife recon- naissance at the junction of the Back and Baillie Rivers, with one day spent in travel- ing ten miles up the latter river. On August 3 we paddled down the Back River arriving at Pelly Lake in the evening of August 7. On August 8 we made a short reconnaissance around our campsite and on the 9th we left by air. Observations of birds and mammals were recorded and plants collected. July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN The observations of two earlier travelers on the relevent portion of the Back River have been published. King’s wildlife ob- servations made during a trip down the river in 1834 were prepared for publication by Richardson and published in Back’s (1836) journal. James Anderson did not publish the journal of his trip down the Back River in 1855, and it was not until 1940-41 that the information contained in it was printed. Clarke (1940-41) edited and published this interesting document. A party from the University of Minnesota spent several weeks in 1953 on a section of the Back River below Macdougall Lake. Their observations of thirty species of birds were published by Breckenridge (1955). Es- sentially the same avifauna was found by both his party and ours. Our trip was necessarily brief. The follow- ing annotated list must be considered as an incomplete record of the avifauna of the region traveled. Identification was by sight only, as no specimens were collected. I am indebted to Mr. W. E. Godfrey, Na- tional Museum of Canada, for reviewing the manuscript and for identifying blue feathers found in a peregrine falcon’s nest as those of a mountain bluebird. YELLOW-BILLED LOON (Gavia adamsi) Only one individual of this species was encountered, an adult one mile above the Hawk Rapids on the Back River, August 6. COMMON LOON (Gavia immer) The first individual of this species was seen August 3 at the mouth of the Baillie River and the second on the 5th near the mouth of the Jervoise River. No other birds were noted. PACIFIC LOON (Gavia arctica) A Pacific loon was observed five miles be- low the Hawk Rapids August 6, and three more were observed the next day opposite the mouth of the McKinley River. These latter birds exhibited the curious behavior of emitting a sharp cry each time they sub- merged. The cry was quite high pitched and stopped only by submersion. RED-THROATED LOON (Gavia stellata) This was the most common loon encounter- ed, birds being observed every day, both on the Baillie and on the Back Rivers. Young of this species were seen flying August 3, below the mouth of the Baillie River. FIELD-NATURALIST 139 WHISTLING SWAN (Olor columbianus) A small flock of three was seen from the air July 31 on the Back River, twenty-two miles below Beechy Lake. CANADA GOOSE (Branta canadensis) Canada geese were well distributed in various sized flocks of what appeared to be molting adults, from Beechy Lake to Pelly Lake. Nearly all of the geese were flying, including those on the Baillie River. On August 5 a flock of 35 contained three small individuals which may have been the sub- species B.c. hutchinsi. LESSER SNOW GOOSE (Chen hyperborea) An individual of this species was identified August 6 with a small flock of four Canada geese five miles below the mouth of the Jervoise River. The five geese were grazing undisturbed when sighted but when alarmed by our presence the Canadas attempted to drive away the snow goose as they walked away from us over a ridge. PINTAIL (Anas acuta) A small flock of three females flew past us August 4, about ten miles above the Jer- voise River mouth. SCAUP (Nyroca sp.) A female, probably of this genus, was sighted August 5 at the mouth of the Jervoise River and two more were recorded four miles below this river the next day. AMERICAN MERGANSER (Mergus mer- ganser) Commonly distributed from Beechy Lake to Pelly Lake. Several males were sighted but most individuals were females and flight- less young. RED-BREASTED MERGANSER (Mergus serrator) Three females were identified on the Bail- lie River August 1. No other individuals of this species were seen. AMERICAN ROUGH-LEGGED HAWK (Buteo lagopus) Two hawks of this species were seen hover- ing over the foot of the third Hawk Rapids. This is the locale where Back observed a hawk, naming the rapids after it, in 1832. Both individuals were in light phase. GOLDEN EAGLE (Aquila chrysaetos) An adult was encountered August 5 near a sand cliff on the south bank of the Back 140 THE CANADIAN River, five miles above the mouth of the Jervoise River. PEREGRINE FALCON (Falco peregrinus) An adult peregrine was sighted at the third Hawk Rapids and a pair, with four young in a nest, was photographed fifteen miles below the rapids. The nest was in a nar- row canyon of the river fifty feet above the water. The young were developing post- juvenal plumage. SEMI-PALMATED PLOVER (Charadrius hiaticula) On August 4 an immature plover of this species rested on the shore of the Back River, 30 miles below the mouth of the Bail- lie. GOLDEN PLOVER (Pluvialis dominica) Three birds of this species were found singing on a hillside of the Back River in the evening of August 3. BAIRD’S SANDPIPER (Erolia bairdiz) Individuals were seen from the Baillie River to Pelly Lake and several small flocks were recorded near the head of this lake on August 8. NORTHERN PHALAROPE (Lobipes lobatus ) An adult was found on a small pond two miles north of the Back River, twenty miles below the Baillie River mouth. PARASITIC JAEGER (Stercorarius parasiticus) Common throughout the area traveled. Young were flying at the time of our trip. An unusual performance by three jaegers was recorded August 2 at the mouth of the Baillie River. An adult cow caribou was feeding on a plateau when the three birds flew toward it and swooped and harried it. The caribou rose on its hind legs and struck at the birds with its forefeet. The jaegers ap- proached from all sides, with the caribou turning in an attempt to meet each bird. The jaegers flew away after about a minute’s sustained attack. LONG-TAILED JAEGER (Stercorarius longicaudus ) Only two individuals of this jaeger were seen, being near the Baillie River mouth on » August 1. HERRING GULL (Larus argentatus) Commonly found from the Ballie River to Pelly Lake. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 ARCTIC TERN (Sterna paradisaea) Common from the Baillie River to Pelly Lake. Young birds were able to fly and small flocks were seen foraging along the Back River below the McKinley River. A pair of terns attacked briefly a caribou fawn at the Baillie River mouth. The fawn rose on its hind legs to fend off the birds, rear- ing its head back as it did so. HORNED LARK (Eremophila alpestris) A few individuals were sighted each day throughout the trip. Immature birds were flying. MOUNTAIN BLUEBIRD (Sialia currucoides) A few feathers of this species, identified by Mr. Earl Godfrey, National Museum of Canada, were found August 6 amid remains of food near a nest of peregrine falcons, fifteen miles below the Hawk Rapids on the Back River. There are three records of particular in- terest of the mountain bluebird in the Mac- kenzie District. Richardson (1831) reported collecting a specimen at Fort Franklin in July 1825. He also reported (in Back, 1836) a specimen collected on Great Slave Lake by King. Williams (1922) recorded seeing a bluebird August 8, 1921, at Rocky-by-the- Riverside, Mackenzie River. The present spe- ecimen constitutes a northeastern record for the species. REDPOLL (Acanthus flammea) Redpolls were relatively numerous along the Back River, being recorded every day. SAVANNAH SPARROW (Passerculus sandwichensis) One individual was seen August 2 at the Baillie River mouth. LAPLAND LONGSPUR (Calcarius lapponicus) Individuals were encountered from the Baillie River to Pelly Lake and small flocks were seen at the latter site. Two extremely emaciated, dead longspurs were found on the tundra near the Jervoise River. SNOWBUNTING (Plectrophenax nivalis) Commonly distributed throughout region traveled. Adults in full winter plumage were noted August 8 at Pelly Lake. SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY Back, G. 1836. Narrative of the Arctic land expe- dition to the mouth of the Great Fish River and along the shores of the Arctic Ocean in the years 1833, 1834 and 1835. London, J. Murray. 663 p. July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 141 Breckenridge, W.J. 1955. Birds of the Lower Agr., N. Am. Fauna. No. 27, p. 499-500. Back River, Northwest Territories, Canada. Richardson, J. 1831. Fauna Boreali-Americana. Can. Field Nat. 69:1-9. II. p. 209. Clarke, C.D.H. 1940-41. Chief Factor James An- Wilkie, R.J. and Breckenridge, W.J. 1955. Natu- derson’s Back River Journal of 1855. Can. ralists on Back River. The Beaver. Spring Field Nat. 54:63-67, 84-89, 107-109, 125-126, 1955, p. 42-45; Summer 1955, p. 9-13. 134-136, 55:9-11, 21-26, 38-44. Williams, M.Y. 1922. Biological Notes Along Preble, E.A. 1908. A Biological Investigation of Fourteen Hundred Miles of the Mackenzie the Athabasca-Mackenzie region. U.S. Dept. River System. Can. Field Nat. 36:61-66. fax NOTES Orobanche uniflora L. from Yarmouth County, Nova Scotia A cluster of Orobanche uniflora L. was found under a dense growth of alder shrubs near Wedgeport, Yarmouth County, Nova Scotia. This confirms A. E. Roland’s assumption that O. uniflora is “scattered from Kings Co. to Pictou, and probably beyond” (Proc. N. S. Inst. Seience 21: 95-642. 1944-45). The specimen (collector’s number 1337, June 6, 1954) has been placed in the Herba- rium of Vascular Plants, University of To- ronto. This note is a supplement to my ‘“Addi- tions to the Flora of Yarmouth County, Nova Scotia” (Can. Field Nat. 69: 129. 1955). W. L. KLAWE Inter-American Tropical Tuna Commission Scripps Institution of Oceanography La Jolla, California Clay-colored Sparrow Nesting in Grey County, Ontario During a field day held by the Toronto Field Naturalist Club on the weekend of May 24, 1952, at Craigleith in Grey County, Ont., a singing Clay-colored sparrow Spizella pallida was discovered by a member of the party, George Francis of Toronto, Ont. The writer made several visits to the location, an old pasture field overgrown with hawthorn bushes, wild rose bushes and wild apple, a typical habitat for this western sparrow, and discov- ered a colony of this species, some three or four pairs. On June 12, 1952, the writer found a Clay-colored Sparrow nesting, in a wild rose bush eight or ten inches from the ground in this locality with a singing male in attendance a few yards from the nesting female. A colored photograph was secured of the nest and four eggs. Although the Clay-colored Sparrow has been recorded twice in adjacent Simcoe County (no nesting record), this ap- parently is the first record of the Clay-colored sparrow nesting in Grey County. 73 Market Street Collingwood, Ontario A. J. MITCHENER Great Gray Owl Near Black Sturgeon Lake, Ontario On July 9, 1954, K. R. Elliott, an en- tomologist with the Black Sturgeon Lake Field Station, flushed a Great Gray Owl Strix nebulosa from the edge of a black spruce forest while walking across country hear black Sturgeon Lake, Ontario. The bird was very large, had conspicuously yel- low eyes, facial discs that extended to the top of the head, and had no ear-tufts. It was roosting less than six feet off the ground in a small, dead spruce, and it al- lowed Elliott to approach within 15 feet be- fore it flew. The experience was recounted to R.F. James and N.D. Martin, two ornitho- logists working in the area, and on July 24, Elliott, James, and Martin returned and found the owl in almost the same place. This time it was seen at less than ten feet by James, who identified it immediately as a Great Gray Owl from the same characteris- tics. It was sitting less than six feet above the ground on a spruce stump, and when flushed it flew a hundred yards out into a cutover area. Elliott circled behind it and chased it back into the black spruce forest. Each time it flew, it did not rise more than three feet above the ground, weaving be- tween bushes and shrubs. After the initial approach, it was not possible to come closer than 200 feet to the bird. On August 7, Martin and a companion revisited the area, but the bird was not found. K. R. ELtiott, R. F. JaMEs and N. D. Martin 142 THE CANADIAN A First British Columbia Record of the Cragonid Shrimp An oceanographic survey of inlets of the British Columbia coast was conducted by the Institute of Oceanography of the University of British Columbia during the summer of 1951. Mr. F. H. C. Taylor of the Pacific Biological Station, Nanaimo, B.C., accom- panied the survey as biological observer. In the biological collections made by Mr. Taylor were included thirty-three species of deca- pod crustaceans, representing nine families. © Seven specimens of the Cragonid Shrimp Sclerocrangon boreas (Phipps) were collect- ed in an otter trawl at a depth of 10 to 20 feet in Dean Channel on July 20, 1951. These individuals constitute a first record in British Columbia waters. Sclerocrangon boreas was recorded previously in the Atlan- tic Ocean from Labrador to Cape Cod, east and west Greenland; the Arctic Ocean, and in the Pacific Ocean to the Aleutians and northeast Siberia. The bathymetric range is 0-140 fathoms (Rathbun, M.J. Decapoda, Canadian Atlantic Fauna, 10 m. 1929). The seven specimens (5 9, 24) from Dean Channel ranged in length 54 mm to 68 mm. These specimens differ somewhat in body proportions from Rathbun’s (op. cit.) de- scription. They showed the carapace length to be 1.25 the carapace width, whereas the carapace length of specimens examined by Rathbun was reported as 1.20 the carapace width. T. H. BUTLER Pacific Biological Station Nanaimo, British Columbia Additional Records of Bats in Saskatchewan In a survey of small mammals conducted in Saskatchewan during the summer and autumn of 1953, two interesting bats were collected. They are ‘Trouessart’s mouse- eared bat Myotis keenii septentrionalis, a female (measured from preserved speci- men) total length 91 mm.; tail vertebrae 39 mm.; hind foot 9.5 mm.; ear 15.2 mm.; tragus 9.0 mm.; and the pale big brown bat Eptesicus fuscus pallidus, a male; total length 109 mm.; tail vertebrae 38 mm.; hind foot 8 mm.; ear notch (dry) 15.9 mm.; tra- gus (dry) 6.0 mm. Two further specimens were a male, total length 108 mm.; tail vertebrae 42 mm.; hind foot 11 mm.; ear (dry) 13 mm.; tragus (dry) 6 mm., and a FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 preserved male specimen total length 103 mm.; tail vertebrae 38 mm.; hind foot 12 mm.; ear 16 mm.; tragus 6 mm. The Trouessart bat was taken in the north- ern settlement of Buffalo Narrows on Churchill Lake in August, 1953. It was found beneath the warped bark of a black poplar on the fringe of a dense stand. Within this stand were found two other spe- cies, the little brown bat Myotis lucifugus lucifugus, also beneath the poplar bark, and the silver-haired bat Lasionycteris noctiva- gans found in an abandoned woodpecker hole. The latter species was represented by a family group including young which were feeding on an accumulation of living dipter- ous larvae at the bottom of the nest. L. noc- tivagans was also collected by D.S. Rawson on Frobisher Lake in the Precambrian area and some 50 miles north of Buffalo Nar- rows. The first pale big brown bat was found in a barn loft on the outskirts of the city of Saskatoon in October, 1953. The two further specimens were taken in buildings on the University of Saskatchewan campus. A check on the distribution of Troues- sart’s mouse-eared bat shows no record of its occurence in either Alberta or Saskat- chewan (Anderson, 1947). This was verified by Dr. R.L. Peterson, Curator, Royal On- tario Museum of Zoology, Toronto, Ontario, who first identified both the Trouessart’s bat and the pale big brown bat. Since Buf- falo Narrows is approximately 60 miles from the western boundary, it is likely that this species occurs also in Alberta. The pale big brown bat has been recorded for southern and central Alberta (Anderson, 1947), Wood Buffalo Park (Soper, 1942), with Regina (Anderson, 1947) the only re- cord in Saskatchewan. The Saskatoon oc- currence therefore extends the known range of the species in this province north by approximately 150 miles. REFERENCES Anderson, Rudolph Martin. Catalogue of Canadian Recent Mammals, Bull. No. 102, Biol. Series No. 31, National Museum of Canada, Jan. 24, 1947, p. 1-238. Soper, J. Dewey. Mammals of Wood Buffalo Park, Northern Alberta and District of Mackenzie. J. Mammal. 23:119-145. 1942. N. S. NovaAkowskI Department of Biology University of Saskatchewan Saskatoon, Saskatchewan July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN Mackenzie River Migration I have long felt that it would be of interest to many Canadian Field-Naturalist readers to hear first hand of the waterfowl migration taking place on the Mackenzie River during the month of September. During this month in 1954, through the courtesy of Mr. Earl Harcourt, owner-operator of Yellowknife Transportation Company, and Rennie Harley, Western Manager of Ducks Unlimited, I had the good fortune to make the 2200-mile trip by boat from Hay River, on the south shore of Great Slave Lake, to Aklavik on the Mac- kenzie Delta and return. Numerous water- fowl observations were made. It appears that a great many migrating waterfowl use the Mackenzie River as their highway to the south. Canada Geese, Snow Geese, some Whistling Swans and a great many of the divers such as Redhead, Canvas-back, Buffle- head, mergansers and scaup were particularly numerous. The most enlightening observation to me was the fact that many rafts of Greater Scaup, almost all males, were using this flyway and concentrating on the weed beds at the west end of Great Slave Lake where the Macken- zie leaves the Lake. These rafts varied in number from 50 to 350 birds. I should like to suggest that there is a strong possibility that the Greater Scaup concentrations at the west end of Great Slave Lake continue their migration on a straight easterly course out the east end of Great Slave Lake and thence on through Manitoba, and the eastern provin- ces. Greater Scaup are very seldom seen on migration through Alberta but apparent- ly do go across the mountains to the Pacific Coast. It was quite apparent that the migrating geese and the majority of the ducks move out of the Western Slave Lake area and Mills Lake area (another concentration area par- ticularly for the geese) in a southerly direc- tion. In the past year or two there have been tremendous concentrations of waterfowl at the Ducks Unlimited project at Upper Hay Lakes in extreme northern Alberta. The vast numbers of White-fronted geese at this stopover would indicate that these birds move in from their barren land nesting grounds and, generally speaking, do not use the Mackenzie River flyway. As an added point of interest I should like to mention that we had the opportunity to observe two rafts of approximately 100 FIELD-NATURALIST 143 birds each of the Old-squaw Duck. This ob- servation was also in the weed bed area at the west end of Great Slave Lake. EpGArR T. JONES 6115 141st Street Edmonton, Alberta New and Unusual Bird Records for Alberta Two new records to the lists of Alberta birds that are worthy of mention, even though very belated, are the following: SAGE THRASHER Oreoscoptes montanus Adult male collected by myself at Walsh, Alberta, on June 15, 1940. As far as is known here, there are no other authentic records of this species from this province. The bird appeared to be without a mate and numerous trips into the immediate vicinity of the collection failed to uncover any evi- dence of nesting activity. DICKCISSEL Spiza americana Adult male collected near Walsh, Alberta, on June 24, 1940. This was one of two adult males seen in the same area, and as both were sing- ing it is most likely that there were setting females on nests in the immediate vicinity. Unfortunately, time was very limited and it was not possible to make a concentrated search for the nests but undoubtedly they could have been found. I understand that there are several other records for Western Canada, but all checking to date has not shown any of them to come from Alberta. The following unusual records may also be of interest: BULLOCK ORIOLE Icterus bullocki Adult male taken at Walsh, Alberta, on July 1, 1940. Several birds of this species were seen in this area, and although this specimen I collected is not a ‘first,’ it is nevertheless interesting to note that the species is fairly frequent in this particular area. BARRED OWL Strix varia Adult male caught in a trap on November 18, 1953, by a half-breed trapper in the Calling Lake area, approximately 140 miles north of Edmonton. This interesting specimen turned up in response to a recent booklet circulated to all the registered trappers of northern Al- berta concerning the Great Gray Owl. The trapper who caught the bird had thought it was a Great Gray (Scotiaptex nebulosa). 144 THE CANADIAN A check of all available data here on the species has revealed that there are several scattered records for the province, but none of recent years. Although the spe- cimen was in poor condition, I mounted it and it will be kept by Mr. Al Oeming of this city. Oddly enough, last year in the month of May, a lone feather of this species was found in the heavy bush country of the Fort Assiniboine area during extensive searches, made by Mr. Al Oeming and myself, for the Great Gray. This feather was kept and has now been positively identified as one from this Barred Owl. For those interested in stomach analyses, 3 Red-backed Mice (Cleth- rionomys gapperi) and 1 Shrew (Sorex cine- reus) were found in the stomach of this specimen. The owl was in a very fat and ap- parently healthy condition. Epcar T. JONES 6115 141st Street Edmonton, Alberta Some Ornithological Records for Wood Buffalo Park and the Mackenzie District, N.W.T. In the course of a plane journey from Ed- monton to Aklavik made in the spring of 1955, as part of an ornithological investigation to Liverpool Bay, N.W.T., supported by a research grant from the Banting Fund ad- ministered by the Arctic Institute of North America, I was delayed for a few days at Fort Smith and again at Norman Wells. A few of my ornithological observations at these localities seem worthy of permanent record. Three of the four reports appear to furnish northernmost distributional records while the fourth is noteworthy because of apparent scarcity of the bird in the region. Upland Plover (Bartramia longicauda). A pair was seen a few miles from the Hay Camp, Wood Buffalo Park, on May 25. Soper (The Birds of Wood Buffalo Park and Vicin- ity, Northern Alberta and District of Mac- kenzie, N.W.T., Canada. Trans. Royal Can. Inst. 24: 19-100. 1942) did not encounter this species during two years’ residence in the park and quotes two specimens collected by Preble in 1901 near Fort Smith as the only FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 evidence of its occurrence in the area. Prof. W. Rowan has informed me that he saw at least one Upland Plover in ‘Wood Buffalo Park in 1925. Magnolia Warbler (Dendroica magnolia). Three males in song were seen in quite a small area near Norman Wells on June 2. Preble (North American Fauna, No. 27, 1908) states that he did not encounter this species farther north than Fort Simpson but quotes an arrival date for Fort Franklin from Richardson. Fort Franklin thus appears to be the most northern point from which the species has been recorded in Western Canada. The few ornithological publications on the area made since Preble’s report do not alter this statement. Norman Wells is approximately 30 miles farther north than Fort Franklin but almost certainly does not present the northernmost limit of distribution of this warbler because country of similar vegetation and climate extends much farther northwards along the Mackenzie River. Nevada Cowbird (Molothrus ater). A male was seen at Norman ‘Wells on May 31 but not on subsequent days up to June 4, when I left the locality. Preble (op. cit.) gives Fort Simpson, over 300 miles south of Norman Wells as the northernmost locality from which this species has been recorded. It has not been recorded beyond this point, in publications by later observers in the area. Starling (Sturnus vulgaris). This species. only became common in the Edmonton dis- trict of Alberta during the late 1940’s. It was observed by Dr. 'W. Stevens, Superinten- dent of Game, Mackenzie District, at Fort Smith in 1954, and earlier in 1954 a dead Starling was found west of Fort Smith (Fuller, W. A., Can. Field Nat. 69: 27. 1955). On May 25, I saw both members of a pair re- peatedly enter a hole in a poplar at the Hay: Camp, Wood Buffalo Park. Nesting or at- tempted nesting seems highly probable. This. observation is the first to suggest breeding of the species in Wood Buffalo Park. E. O. HOHN: Department of Physiology University of Alberta Edmonton, Alberta July-September, 1956] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 145 REVIEWS Prairie Ducks By Lyte K. Sowts. Harrisburg, Pa., Stackpole Co., 1955. 193 p., illus. $4.75. The publication of Sowls’ book on the waterfowl of the great central region of North America adds another valuable con- tribution to the books on American water- fowl. There are now three titles by the Wild- life Management Institute that should be in the library of everyone interested in water- fowl, be the biologist, sportsman or naturalist. Each book does an admirable job in its own special field. Kortright’s Ducks, Geese and Swans of North America provides the identi- fication manual and general information; Hochbaum’s Canvasback on a Prairie March is the intimate story of one species, and now the book under review opens up an entirely new field of knowledge of waterfowl behavior. This is at the same time a research publi- cation and a well and simply written account of the most important aspects in the lives of the pond ducks of the great ‘duck factory’ region of the continent. Step by step the author treats the events of the summer life of the birds he studied for five years: the migration, the homing tendency, what consti- tutes nesting terrain, the factors that influence the success of the nesting season, the behavior of the ducks during the nesting season, causes of loss to the parent birds and their young, and the behavior of the birds as the southward flight and the shooting season move in upon them. Each of these is the subject of at least one chapter. To those already well informed in the general subject of waterfowl biology, one of the most interesting parts of the present book will be the studies of homing. Sowls has shown that most, if not all, surviving hens of pintail, gadwall and shoveller return to nest in the same meadow, year after year. For blue-winged teal this is not true. He has shown also that a large proportion of the young return to nest in the region of their origin. Here then we have a documentation of what Hochbaum has referred to as the essential conservatism of waterfowl populations. This explains the ease with which a local population may be shot out. Further it offers reason for the successful establishment of local populations as a result of local effort. The extent of renesting following destruc- tion of the first nest is made known for the first time. All species studied were more or less capable of renesting, but the pintail was the most persistent and the blue-winged teal the least. The proportion of nest losses compensated by renesting has yet to be established. But the facts made known by Sowls help explain the success the pintail, mallard and shoveller often evince in bring- ing off broods despite unfavorable circum- stances in the early part of the season. They reveal the blue-winged teal as a _ highly vulnerable species. Of particular point, in view of the popularity of widespread campaigns against crows and magpies on the Prairie Provinces, is the statement that “in many marshes there are several predators competing for duck nests. When one predator is reduced, the damage from another one is increased. Unless water- fowl predator control can be complete and exhaustive, it seems advisable to consider with extreme caution the partial destruction of predators.” This book not only makes an important contribution to the knowledge of the pond ducks but it points up many fruitful avenues for further research. The production job is well done. Ilustra- tions are numerous and the many pen-and-ink sketches by Hochbaum are particularly at- tractive. I. McT. Cowan Pheasants in North America Edited by Durwarp L. ALLEN. Colored front. and drawings by Bob Hines. Harrisburg, Pa., Stackpole Co., 1956. 490 p., 82 plates. $7.50. Durward Allen and his 19 co-workers have put together a most readable and author- itative treatise on the management of the ringneck pheasant in North America. The general pattern is regional, with one or more authorities on this bird and its management, contributing in detail on the important facts surrounding the lives of pheasants in the region of his acquaintance. Six ecological regions are recognized and treated separately. They cover the pheasant range from Canada to Mexico and coast to coast. This method of treatment makes some re- petition almost inevitable. In this instance however, though some more of it might have 146 been omitted, the repetition often serves to emphasize the range of adaptation the pheasant has been able to achieve. It serves also to emphasize the continent-wide nature of the great decline of the 1940’s. The trial and error involved in finding the place of pen-reared birds in the overall picture of pheasant management again becomes more forceful by repetition. Apparently almost each State has experimented in its own region and come up with the same answer. The increasing use of “put and take” shooting as a private, commercial venture is dealt with in detail; the variations on this theme are worth careful study by game commissions faced with this development. Dr. Allen has attempted to integrate the broad field of pheasant management by adding a concluding chapter of his own writing. This is a very useful summary of the management outlook and will do much to bring into focus the ideas of all those interested in the pheasant. Not only does he review the present situation and concen- trate on the most productive management techniques and attitudes, but he emphasizes the most urgent research needs. When he states that “the greatest present need is to expand basic work in the fields of nutrition, bioclimatics, and physiology,” this reviewer is in most enthusiastic agreement. The opening chapter, “Pheasants and Pheasant Populations” by Fred Dale, is the other integrative chapter of the book. It is written to give the interested sportsman the significant facts of pheasant biology in concise easily understood form. It impresses me as a job well done. Somewhere in the book I would like to have seen an analysis of the significant features of the decline of the 1940’s. But perhaps this can best be done in a more technical article. This is a book on ring pheasant manage- ment. It does not deal with this species of pheasant as a bird, though all life history pertinent to management is fully treated, nor does it deal with pheasants, other than ringnecks, that have been liberated in North America from time to time. It is a worthwhile addition to the library of sportsman, game administrator and biolo- gist alike, and a credit to its authors and publisher. I. McT. Cowan THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Upland Trails By DAN McCowan. Toronto, Macmillan Company of Canada, 1955. 28 photographic illustra- tions, 156 p. $3.25. Dan McCowan’s many friends will find his sixth book a welcome addition to the five which have preceded it. As in previous works, much of the material contained in the short stories which form the twenty-nine chapters concerns his beloved Rockies and other parts of Canada. Most of these stories deal with wildlife, natural history and animal behavior but their range is wide. As usual, personal observations and historical references do much to increase the interest. He writes of Rocky Mountain place names, bird and mammal play and other behavior, trees and smaller plants, hailstones and even the mechanics of the aurora borealis. His long residence in Banff and his ac- quaintance with many problems of National Parks lead him to several references to proper public conduct in the presence of wildlife. Careful attention to his suggestions will do much to increase public safety and public enjoyment of wildlife in these great natural areas. Students of detailed natural history will find many of the subjects treated in a light and superficial manner. This implies no criticism since the book was written to be read and enjoyed by those seeking pleasant entertainment and _ interesting anecdotes rather than detailed scientific information. The type is large and clear, the text free from typographical errors and pleasant to read. V. E. F. SOLMAN Travels and Traditions of Waterfowl By A. ALBERT HocCHBAUM. Minneapolis, The University of Minnesota Press and Toronto, Thomas Allen Ltd., 1956. 301 p., $5.50. This new book from the pen of the director of the Delta Waterfowl Research Station is a significant contribution to the rapidly growing literature on animal behavior. It contains much information of importance to workers in wildlife management and orni- thology; but it should also be of great interest to naturalists and sportsmen. Authoritative semipopular books on any phase of natural history in Canada are few enough to make the present volume doubly important. July-September, 1956] The author’s thesis is the role of tradition, that is, information transmitted by example rather than genetically, in migration and other movements of waterfowl (Anatidae). He presents convincing evidence of the degree to which waterfowl behavior is governed by tradition, and the information, new and old, brought together is vital to several phases of waterfowl management. All degrees of traditional movement are considered, starting with the more or less fixed paths over the Delta marsh. A good deal of solid presentation of back- ground information is needed to put the reader in a position to follow the author’s arguments; and some of the early chapters provide rather heavy reading; but the later chapters form an excellent and _ skillfully presented capitulation. An excellent biblio- graphy of close to 500 references is included and key references are noted for certain subjects. There is also an appendix of bird names and an adequate index. In a few places the complexity of the subject seems to have affected the author’s style to the detriment of readability. Some rather ponderous philosophical discussions of time, space and memory, not very pertinent to the theme of the book, might well have been deleted. The chapter on the dimensions of travel is made difficult to read mainly by the loose use of the word “relative” in various connotations; adoption of the concepts of angular size, movement, and velocity would have clarified the discussion. Chapter 5, on the aerial environments, is perhaps hardly up to the level of the others. It is unfortunate that Poole’s odd, inverted definition of wing loading is given instead of that universally used in aircraft aero- dynamics. The author seems to infer that most birds. are highly stable, whereas they are inherently unstable to a degree un- thinkable in aircraft, which increases ma- neuverability and reduces landing speed. It is hard to imagine anything more violently unstable than a Mallard or Black Duck dropping into a pond. That a bird can maintain control under such conditions is a tribute to its rapid reactions and delicate balance system. The loons are not excess- ively unstable; they simply have too high a wing loading and too inefficient a wing to fly slowly. The alula and emarginated primaries are high-lift rather than stability devices — a confusion that has been made before. THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 147 In emphasizing his arguments the author makes a few generalizations that may not be wholly justified. How general, for example, is the ability of a duckling to recognize its mother? I doubt if this is true of Old Squaws, in which the broods frequently get mixed in all proportions. Although the mechanism of migration and navigation by visual cues and familiar landmarks that the author proposes may be largely true for ducks, it seems to me that we have a long way to go before it can be safely applied to all groups of birds. For example, the young European Cuckoo seems to migrate without adult guidance. How can the directional flights of night migrants and the ocean passages of penguins under overcast skies be explained in terms of orientation by the sun or a down-wind drift? These are minor points, however, and the book makes an important contribution to our understanding of bird behavior, migration and distribution. The volume is well bound, and printed on substantial paper. It is delightfully illustrated with pen sketches by the author — a pleasant relief from the glossy photographs that make so many modern books look like seed catalogues. D. B. O. SAVILE The Geography, Birds, and Mammals of the Perry River Region By Harotp C. HANSON, PAUL QUENEAU, and PETER ScoTr. The Arctic Institute of North America, Spec. Pub. No. 3, 1956. 34 fig., 96 p. ($2.00 to nonmembers of the Arctic Institute; $1.00 to members). Angus Gavin’s discovery in 1938 of the breeding grounds of Ross’s Goose in the remote Perry River, N.W.T., barrens, and his subsequent published reports of re- latively rich bird and mammal faunas, in- spired the authors to journey there in 1949 and spend the period June 6 to August 2 gathering data and specimens. Queneau did the mapping, geological, and meteorological studies; Hanson supervised the general bio- logical program; and Hanson and Scott col- laborated on the bird studies. - The area was so poorly known that maps of it were very sketchy. Perry River was found to flow approximately due north, not northeast; to drain from the east side of MacAlpine Lake instead of its west side; and its mouth to be some fifteen miles farther west than was shown on then-existing maps, placing it in Mackenzie instead of Keewatin. 148 THE CANADIAN The report contains data on the cartography, physical geology, weather, ice and snow conditions, the Eskimo, _ transportation problems, and vegetation. The section on birds (p. 29-81) gives much interesting information on the forty-seven avian species and subspecies that the authors encountered. The avifauna, aside from its Holarctic and Nearctic elements, shows af- finities with western populations. The ac- counts of the waterfowl are most full. Ross’s Goose, Chen rossii, never previously studied by scientists on its nesting grounds, received most attention and 12 pages of the report are devoted to it. Data are given on its downy plumage which was found to be definitey dichromatic, local distribution, productivity, nesting habits, populations, behavior, food habits, and band recoveries. Specimens are listed and taxonomic com- ments are made on them as necessary. In addition, for a number of species there are data on weights, sex ratios, and parasites. Mammal studies (p. 82-89) were secondary to the investigations of the bird life. The section contains information on Lepus arc- ticus, Citellus parryii, Lemmus trimucro- natus, Discrostonyx groenlandicus, Clethrio- nomys rutilus, and Rangifer arcticus. Two appendices, with brief comments on rock specimens and a few fishes and insects, and a list of literature references bring this commendable report to a close. It is well printed on good paper and is superbly edited. W. EARL GODFREY The Marine and Fresh-Water Plankton By CHARLES C. Davis. East Lansing, Michigan State University Press, 1955. 681 fig., 562 p. $10.00. This carefully prepared work brings together a wealth of information on marine and fresh- water plankton in a most interesting manner. The material presented is included in nine chapters. The first two, comprising intro- duction, special adaptations to planktonic existence and general cycle of production in aquatic environments, deal with general features of plankton life history and the chemical and physical nature of the environ- ment. Following these general discussions of en- vironment comes a most interesting chapter on phytoplankton, with a long and carefully documented discussion of regional and season- FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 al distribution, the production of ‘blooms’ of phytoplankton and their deleterious and sometimes dangerous effects. The next two chapters deal with phyto- plankton-zooplankton relationship and prob- lems of distribution. Distribution is discussed in relation to season, water movements, diurnal and other vertical migrations, move- ment of larvae and speed of movement. These discussions are particularly well documented and, although the reasons for some movements are not yet known, various theories advanced in explanation are well set forth for con- sideration. A short chapter on geographic and seasonal variation in structure of zooplankton is follow- ed by a larger discussion of plankton organ- isms as feeders on still smaller forms of life and as a food source for larger animals, up to and including whalebone (baleen) whales. In the next 138 pages, constituting chapter 9, the author discusses in some detail the life history, structure, reproduction and habits of the various groups of plants and animals that compose marine and fresh-water plankton. Each of the three phytoplankton and 17 zoo- plankton phyla or orders dealt with has the descriptive text accompanied by a _ useful analytical key to the more common genera. The descriptions and keys are supplemented by all but 48 of the 681 figures which serve as effective illustrations for the many forms discussed. A fifteen page glossary defines technical terms not explained in the text and a biblio- graphy occupying twenty-four pages gives a good review of current and past literature on the subject. A twenty-one-page index to both subjects and authors aids in locating reference material. A Canadian reviewer must point out the absence of Canadian examples and authors from the text, but in view of the relativey small literature on plankton by Canadian authors, this ommission does not reduce the value of the book significantly. The book fills a long-felt need for a text and reference work for college courses and general studies concerned with plankton. Treating as it does in a general way both marine and fresh-water forms, it will bring home to all the relationships and dissimilarities of these two media and of their plankton populations. The book has been carefully produced with easily-read type and clear illustrations. V. E. F. SoLMAN D SOCIETIES — aaa Mi gly t ‘ PROVANCHER SOCIETY OF NATURAL a _ HISTORY OF CANADA ; a i University of E Jy mn Vics Piestalntie'* ; aad ¥ ANGLIN; ey WH songs ADS git ‘CHELE; ee WAL Junior EE NIG MARY — sr: Mrs. TB. STEWART, : 2 ORES i Mee h ea | glossy fae For ‘reproduction as a com-— ita mounted without ane A GUIDE to the GEOLOGY of the OTTAWA DISTRICT by: ALICE E. WILSON ADDITIONAL COPIES OF THIS MOST USEFUL WORK MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE BUSINESS MANAGER AT A COST OF ONE DOLLAR fmeiert a9 * a JUN ibis ie UNIVERSITY "Epwin M. Hacwrime : _ Hoes Liorp — JG. RrrcHte, ‘Rares D. Bmp i 183 186 189 , THE OTTAWA FIELD-N/ 1 hi | Fouxpen IN 1879 The objects of the club are to None | an tuequsineatiee! with eg encourage investigation and to publish the results of original researc all branches of natural history. The patron is His eo the Ri Massey, C.H., Governor General of Canada. MEMBERS OF COUNCIL _W.K.W. Batpwin, President, National Museum of Canada, tH Ontario a Loris S. RussELt, First Vice-President Epwarp L. BousFIELD, Second Vice-President Raymonp J. Moore, Treasurer, Science Service Building, Ottawa, On : Homer J. Scocean, Secretary, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, I.L.. Conners, C. FRANKTON, Auditors X Messrs: R. M. eee ip W. Agnoen. is S. Bee "B. K. Bow es, ‘A.W. Cameron, W.J. Copy, I.L. Conners, We. Dor W.E. GopFREY, H. Grou, J.W. Groves, R.A. Hamittron, W.I. H. Lioyp, W.W. Mam, T.H. Manninc, H. MarsHatu, D.A. | Ruopes, P.A. RUDDELL, D.B.O. SAVILE, H.A. Sa oo Rosert A. Haeacoit Editor reg i i “a } Ms A Associate Editors: F.J. ALCOCK (Geology), Joun W. ARNOLD ‘ (Paleontology), SHERMAN BLEAKNEY (Herpetology), AUSTIN Witt G. Dore (Botany), J .R. Dymonp (Ichthyology), W. Earu | logy), A. G. Huntsman (Marine Biology), A. LaRocque (Con mae ey The Canadian Field-Naturalist is published quarterly by the O Club with the assistance of affiliated societies listed on the inside representing personal observations or the results of original 1 research tural history are invited. In the preparation of papers authors sho recent issue and the information for contributors on the inside bac rates and prices of back numbers of this journal and its predecessors the business manager. er , VRE The annual ts paae Mt af $3.0 00 covers ence re the 1g however, may subscribe at the same rate as that for membership. — Single ct of regular issues are ninety cents. Money orders should be made vey a Naturalists’ Club and sent to the treasurer. high he NA Authorized as second-class mail by the Post Oifice Department at Ottawe ‘Ontario Ned ittae ‘ K ’ ae i {Cr a Ht w) 9 ee 7. Se es be nN " i The Canadian eS a To Myainee . VOLUME 70 OCTOBER-DECEMBER, 1956 = “DISTRIBUTION OF MARTEN AND FISHER IN NORTH, we EDWIN M. HAGMEIER University of New Brunswick, Fredericton, New Brunswick Received for publication September 4, 1956 The following is a summary of what is known of the distribution of marten (Martes americana) and fisher (Martes pennanti) in North America. Since it is based on a survey of the available literature and an examina- tion of a fairly large series of museum spe- cimens, it deals with past as well as present ranges. The study forms part of a thesis directed _by Dr. I. McT. Cowan, and presented to the University of British Columbia. Assistance, given by many people, is gratefully acknow- ledged. The following is a partial list of those who have helped: Doctors J. W. Ald- rich, S. B. Benson, L. Butler, W. A. Clemens, E. L. Cockrum, F. W. Fay, E. R. Hall, W. J. Hamilton Jr., N. Preble, L. Russell, H. Setzer, G. Swanson, and Messrs. D. Benson, A. Came- ron, R. Denney, C. Guiget, F. C. Kleinschnitz, F. Merner, J. A. Munro, F. Newby, D. Pim- lott, R. W. Sutton, J. S. Tener, B. S. Wright, and Miss H. Silver. The following have pro- vided specimens for examination: Doctors Benson, W. Burt, Cowan, J. D. Doutt, Hall, D. Johnson, H. Tate, P. L. Wright, L. E. Yeager, and Messrs. J. Bryant, A. Cameron, W. Cottle, R. Y. Edwards, D. Flook, C. Len- sink, K. Racey, R. Webb, and Miss Viola Schantz. A great many workers, not named here, have been generous in their loans and gifts of papers and books and in other ways. The study has been financed in part with funds provided by the University of British Columbia, the British Columbia Sugar Com- pany and the National Research Council of Canada. Mrs. Elizabeth Hagmeier has devoted time to typing and proofreading. The distribution of marten in North America is governed by the distribution of the northern evergreen forest (Seton 1925- 28, Grinnell, Dixon and Linsdale 1937, Bailey 1936, Dalquest 1948, Merriam 1886, Merriam 1882 and 1884,-de Vos 1952). Lensink (1953) concluded that marten distribution in Alaska is coincident with the distribution of white and black spruce, “which is apparently the critical element in their habitat.” Edwards (1950) wrote that those coniferous forests of highest market value supported the great- est number of marten. Anthony (1917) be- lieved, however, that “...it does not appear to be particularly attached to coniferous woods, living in them simply because such forests prevail to a great extent in the geo- graphical areas it inhabits.’ The work of Ponomarev (1944) supports this view. He said that Eurasian marten had their distri- butions controlled chiefly by the presence or absence of low temperatures (20°C. and less). Most workers name the humid upper Transition, the Canadian and the Hudsonian life zones as those inhabited by marten (Rhoads 1903, Cary 1917, Grinnell and Storer 1924, Skinner 1927, Williams 1930, Bailey 1936, Grinnell, Dixon and Linsdale 1937, Hall 1946, Rust 1946, Dalquest 1948, Yeager, Den- ney and Hammit 1949, de Vos and Guenther 1952, Durrant 1952, and Sumner and Dixon 1953). Marten have been found outside the evergreen type forest. While de Vos (1952) and most writers consider them scarce or absent in hardwoods, a few report them com- mon there (Emmons 1840, Adams 1873, Rhoads 1903, Allen 1904, de Vos 1952). This relationship also holds, it seems in Eurasia, since Jurgenson (1939) wrote that Martes martes prefer a mixed deciduous-coniferous forest to any other. In mountainous regions, marten have been known to frequent talus slides (Turner 1886, Grinnell and Storer 1924, Clarke 1940, Hayward 1952, and Marshall 1951), and tundra and meadows (Turner 1886, Cary 1911 and Clarke 1944). One was taken in the sagebrush vegetation of the upper Sonoran Zone, 2000 feet below forest in the Sierra Nevadas (Jones 1955). Marten The Canadian Field-Naturalist for July-September 1956 (Can. Field Nat. 70: 101-148. 1956) was issued May 8, 1957. Atl \ ae THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 \ Fig. 1. Marten distribution have decreased in numbers in the past several centuries (Henderson and Craig 1932, Seton 1925-28, Allen 1942, Yeager 1950, Minville 1946, Innis 1927, Anon. 1927-50, Squires 1946, Butler 1950). The distribution of fisher is similar to but not identical with that of marten. Their northern limit is 10° south of that of marten, and, while they extend as far south in the Pacific mountains, their range is more restricted in the Rocky Mountains, and more extended in the eastern United States. While marten occur on coastal islands, fisher are absent. Part of the explanation for the fish- ers’ distinctive range may lie in their en- vironmental requirements. Merriam (1882- 84, 1886) reported that they fed on beech nuts, and Rhoads (1903) said that many were caught in the beech woods of Pennsylvania. Shorger (1942) wrote that while they were never aS common as marten in the Lake states, they were far more common in the hardwood timber. De Vos (1951) said that they are present in second-growth forest where marten are absent. The same author also stated (1952) that while they prefer heavy timber, they are frequently seen in open second-growth stands and occasionally in areas recently burnt over. In Ontario they are not strict in their habitat requirements, and occur in coniferous, mixed, and maple — yellow birch forests. Mason (1924) and Martin (1950) reported that they ranged over burnt areas of willow, birch and aspen. Barger (1951) said they live through the hardwoods of Wisconsin. In the area about Great Slave Lake, fisher often occurred in the grassy prairies at the mouth of the Slave Oct.-Dec. 1956] FISMER DISTRIBUTION © SPECI MEMS LaamindD + GTRER Aiconbe THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 151 Fig. 2. Fisher distribution River (Ross 1861). Edwards (1950) reported them in alpine grasslands. Fisher are believ- ed to stay at lower altitudes than marten. Rhoads (1903) said they prefer low wet grounds and the banks of streams, whereas marten stay on the hills. In the mountainous country of the west fisher are reported to live in the lowlands with marten, while only marten live in the higher country (Rand 1944, Edwards 1950, Webb 1952). The life zones in which fisher live are said to be the humid Transition and Canadian zones (Rhoads 1903, Grinnell, Dixon and Linsdale 1937, Bailey 1936, Rust 1946, Dalquest 1948). Rhoads (1903) wrote that in Pennsylvania they also occurred in the Hudsonian zone. Fisher, like marten, have decreased in the last century (Seton 1925-28, Allen 1942, Min- ville 1946, Innis 1927, Anon. 1927-50, Hen- derson and Craig 1932); however, recent local increases have been reported (Hamilton and Cook 1955, Coulter 1952). Fisher are known only from North America. Poland (1892) mistakenly stated, however, that “,..a few are still found in South America, and skins from these parts having only hair.” Figures 1 and 2 map the distributions of marten and fisher as they likely occurred when the white man came to the continent. The present limits of both species, when compared to the distributions mapped, are now much reduced, especially in the south. The outline of the original limits has been freely drawn, and is based in part on in- formation obtained from vegetation maps. Other distribution maps of these species have been prepared by the following: Seton 1909, Cary 1911, Cory 1912, Grinnell and Dixon 152 THE CANADIAN 1926, Seton 1925-28, Anderson 1934, Broui- lette 1934, Bailey 1936, Grinnell, Dixon and Linsdale 1937, Melven 1938, Dufresne 1942, Hamilton 1943, Hall 1946 and 1954, Twining and Hensley 1947, Dalquest 1948, Burt 1948, de Vos 1952, Durrant 1952, Webb 1952, Lyon 1936, Bandy 1952, Macleod 1950, Edwards 1950, and Hamilton and Cook 1955. A com- plete list of the literature used in the prep- aration of Figures 1 and 2 may be found in the thesis from which this paper has been prepared. ALASKA MARTEN: All of forested Alaska, as far west as Norton Sound and Kotzebue Sound (Nelson and True 1887) and nearly to the mouth of the Yukon River (Dice 1921) and as far north as the head of the Nunatog River at latitude 68° (Nelson and True 1887) and Anaktuvak Pass in the Brooks Range (Rausch 1950 and 1951); the Kenai Peninsula and the Panhandle; the following at least of the Alexander Archipeligo: Admiralty Island (Swarth 1911, Dufresne 1946, and specimens examined), Etolin Island (specimens exam- ined), Kodiak Island (Nelson and True 1887), Kuiu Island (Swarth 1911, Dufresne 1946, and specimens examined), Kupreanof Island (Du- fresne 1942 and 1946 and specimens exam- ined) and Revillagigedo Island (Dufresne 1946 and C. Lensink letter). Marten were introduced into Prince of Wales and Chicha- gof islands in 1934 (Dufresne 1946). Locali- ties not mapped include: Savioyok Valley, Brooks Range (Rausch 1951); Bering Sea, coast of Alaska (Elliot 1905); Salcha (U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service file). FISHER: Coues (1877) said that he had examined specimens from Alaska, but did not give a specific locality of capture. Remarking on this, Osgood in 1900 reported that “no specimens are at hand to corroborate this record, but there is little doubt that it occurs along the upper Yukon, as it is known from similar latitudes to the eastward.” ‘Turner (1886) wrote that they occur “sparingly in the upper Yukon valley; rather more abun- dantly in the heavier timbered regions to the south,” but nowhere did he explicitly refer the area to Alaska. Macleod (1950) recorded them from the lower Iskut region of British Columbia, very near the Alaskan Border, and they may possibly occur in the southern part of the adjacent panhandle. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 ALBERTA MARTEN: Probably through all of the forested part of the province, from the Rocky Mountains east to Waterton Lakes National Park (Banfield 1947) and Rocky Mountain House (specimens examined); absent from the grasslands, occurring at least as far south as Whitehead, Smith Landing, Athabaska River (specimens examined) and Lac la Biche (Seton 1911), and probably further. Present through the remainder of the province; more common formerly than now (Seton 1911, Soper 1942, 1947 and 1948 and Rand 1948). Chief collecting points have been Forts Chipwyan, Fitzgerald and Vermilion, and Upper Hay River (L. Butler, letter). FISHER: All of forested Alberta, at least as far south in the west as Prairie Creek near Rocky Mountain House (specimens examined) and in the east as far as’ the Athabaska River (Preble 1908). Rand (1944a) said they inhabit two-fifths of the north and west of the prov- ince. L. Butler (letter) writes that Alberta has the least fisher of any of the three prairie provinces. Its catch has come chiefly from Fort Vermilion, Little Red River and Sturgeon Lake. Rand (1948a) said they are “now scarce in, or unreported from, many areas.” ARKANSAS FISHER: Brown (1908) reported a Pleis- tocene recovery of Martes pennantz from Conard Fissure in Newton County. Hall (1936) believed these may be referable to M. diluviania (a small extinct fisher). No recent records are known. BRITISH COLUMBIA MARTEN: Occur through all of the follow- ing biotic areas of Munro and Cowan (1947): Cariboo Parklands, Columbia Forest, Subalpine Forest, Boreal Forest, Peace River Parklands, Coast Forest, Queen Charlotte Island, and Vancouver Island (many sources and speci- mens examined); are present on both Graham and Moresby islands of the Queen Charlotte group (specimens examined). Macleod (1950) said they have been trapped on Pitt, McCauley and Hawksbury islands, and suggested that they occur on still others. C. Guiget says they have been reported from Hunter Island. Re- latively large numbers are still trapped every year. An unmapped record is Dove Creek Trail, Forbidden Plateau, Vancouver Island (Hardy 1954). FISHER: Still common throughout most of the forested part of the province; occur in Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN the following Biotic Areas of Munro and Cowan (1947): Coast Forest, north to the Iskut River and south to the region about Namu and River Inlet (Macleod 1950); apparently absent south of this area except for the region about Manning Park (specimens examined, Carl Guiget and Hardy 1952, Goldman 1935, Rhoads 1898, Edwards 1950); Subalpine Forest, at least as far north as Ware on the Finlay River (Bandy 1952) and as far south as Kamloops and Salmon Arm (specimens ex- amined); Cariboo Parklands (‘Webb 1953 and specimens examined); the northern parts of the Columbia and Dry Forests, apparently no farther south than about Invermere (Bandy 1952); Boreal Forest, east to the Alberta boundary (Edwards 1950, Rand 1944c, Quick 1953, Baker 1951, specimens examined and other sources), and west to the Lower Post area (Rand 1944c, Edwards 1950); also pre- sent in the area about Dease Lake and Anvil Mountain (Edwards 1950); apparently absent northwest of a line connecting the Lower Iskut River, Dease Lake and Lower Post; occur in the Peace River Parklands, including the Peace River area (Cowan 1939, Edwards 1950) and the area about Fort Nelson (Quick 1953, Edwards 1950, and specimens examined); do not seem to occur in the Parklands east of Fort Nelson; are absent from any of the islands along the coast. A specimen is listed in the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service File as having been taken from Graham Island, but J. A. Munro, the collector, writes that the listing must be attributed to clerical error. Two unmapped records for the province are New Caledonia (Macfarlane 1905) and Buck- ingham area (Rand 1944a). CALIFORNIA MARTEN: The forested parts of the Kla- math Mountains and Coast Mountains as far south as Sonoma County, and the Sierra Nevadas as far south as Tulare County (Grin- nell 1933, Grinnell, Dixon and Linsdale 1937, Twining and Hensley 1947). One specimen from San Joseph Island, Lower California, (U.S. National Museum No. 32033) is identi- fied as a marten, but is likely referable to Bassariscus. Marten were trapped in the winter of 1948-1949. Localities not mapped include Rush Creek and Bear Creek (Kellogg 1916). FISHER: The mountainous part of the state, from the Oregon boundary south in the Klamath and Coast Ranges to the region about Lakeport, Mendocino County and Lake Coun- FIELD-NATURALIST 153 ty; also recorded from Main County; south in the Sierra Nevadas to Greenhorn Mountain, Kern County (Summer and Dixon 1953, Grin- nell, Dixon and Linsdale 1937). According to most authors, their numbers are now much reduced. Records not mapped include Fort Crock, Cahlo, Big Creek, Mariposa County and Atwell’s Mill (specimens examined). COLORADO MARTEN: Everywhere in the higher moun- tains above 9,500 feet (Williams 1947, Reming- ton 1950, Yeager, Denney and Hammit 1949) from the northern to the southern boundaries of the state and as far east as western Ara- pahoe County (Yeager 1950) and western Huerjane County (R. Denney, letter). F. C. Kleinschnitz (letter) believes marten to be found in the following counties beyond those mapped: Alamosa, Archuleta, Chaffee, Cone- fos, Custer, Della, Delores, Fremont, Gilpin, Hinsdale, Huerjano, Lake, La Plata, Mesa, Moffat, Ouray, Pitkin, Rio Grande, Saguache, San Miguel, and Teller. Marten were being trapped in the winter of 1948-1949 (Yeager 1950). Localities not mapped are East Spanish peak and Bennett’s Well (Cary 1911), and Camp Hale (Remington 1950). FISHER: “Said to be more or less common in Park County...” (Allen 1874). Comment- ing on this, Cary (1911) wrote “I have made careful inquiry of old hunters and trappers throughout ...northern Colorado...and have yet to meet one who...has even heard of the animal within the state... It seems prob- able that Allen’s record is based upon er- roneous information.” Warren (1942) said that there had been rumors of their occur- rence, but concluded that they had never inhabited the state. Yeager, Denney and Ham- mit (1949) referred to them as “rare; if present at all in the original fauna, has been extirpated... .” R. Denney (letter) says that two were imported from British Columbia five years ago, and are now living in captivity. I know of no other records. CONNECTICUT MARTEN: Linsley (1842) listed marten for the state but Goodwin (1935) found no authen- tic records. He believed that they may once have occurred on the mountains of the north- western and possibly the northeastern parts of the state. Two specimens from the Ameri- can Museum of Natural History (41340 and 41335) collected in Greenwich are labeled 154 “M. foina’ and “M. americana,’ and to the second is appended the statement “This may be an introduced species.” Examination of these has led me to conclude that the first specimen is referable to M. foina and the second to M. zibellina, and that neither re- present the native fauna. FISHER: Linsley (1842) listed the fisher. Goodwin (1935) reported that they have “sup- posedly been extirpated for many years; it is not impossible, however, that a few in- dividuals may still survive in the wilderness of the northwestern section of the state or in the highlands of the northeast.” He said that 124 fisher were trapped in 1924. DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA MARTEN: Captain John Smith in 1607-1608 (after Mansueti 1950) recorded ‘martens’ from the district. McAtee (1918) said that ‘“accord- ing to Wm. Palmer there is a fairly certain record as late as about 1880.” Bailey (1926) and Mansueti both concluded that marten once occurred in the area. IDAHO MARTEN: The forested mountains of the state, as far south as Ada, Elmore, Blaine and Fremont counties (Baird 1857 and 1859, Suckley and Gibbs 1860, and specimens ex- amined). The vegetation map of Davis (1939) suggests that they may occur in Caribou, Bon- neville and Bear Lake counties. They were still being taken in the winter of 1948-1949 (Yeager 1950). An unmapped locality is Kanisku region (Rust 1946). FISHER: The mountainous part of the state, including the Selkirk, Bitterroot and Salmon River ranges, originally as far south as Sawtooth (specimens examined), Ketchum and Alturas Lake, all in Blaine County (Davis 1939); now probably restricted to the northern and central parts of the state, and very scarce (Davis 1939, Rust 1946). ILLINOIS MARTEN: Kennicott (1855 and 1859) said they were formerly present in Cook County, and Sanborn (1925) believed they once oc- curred about the Chicago region. Hahn (1909) and Cory (1912) reported that a skeleton of a marten was held by the Chicago Academy of Sciences and that it was said to have been collected in the northern part of the state many years before. Shorger (1942) concluded that they once occurred in the strip of pine timber along the shore of Lake Michigan. THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Mohr (1943) wrote that recent reports (U.S. Forest Service 1937) have listed marten as occurring in the state. According to Mohr these reports are incorrect and the animal has been extinct for a century. FISHER: Kennicott (1855) reported fisher from Cook County, saying they used to be common in the timber along Lake Michigan. The same author in 1859 said they occurred in the woods of the northern part of the state. Sanborn (1925) said they have occurred within historic times about the Chicago region. Forbes, in 1912, reported they “have long been extinct in this state”. A record from southern Indiana (see below) suggests that fisher may have once occurred in southern Illinois. INDIANA MARTEN: Hahn (1909) considered them a “hypothetical intruder.” Lyon (1936) believed that if they occurred in Illinois (see above) they likely occurred in Indiana. Shorger (1942) concluded that they formerly pene- trated into the strip of pine timber that ran along the shore of Lake Michigan. FISHER: Formerly, it seems, through most or all of the state. Plummer (1844) wrote that they had not been seen since 1820, but that prior to that time they were “not un- common.” Lyon (1936) said that the last specimen was taken in 1859. The same author (1933) considered them a wanderer from the north, and not a normal inhabitant. Records are known from the following counties: Porter (Rand and Rand 1951), Hamilton (Lyon 1936), Wayne (Plummer 1844, Hahn 1909), Posey (Lyon 1936, Hahn 1909) and Ohio (Kirkpatrick and Conway 1948). IOWA MARTEN: Scott (1937) cited papers by Goding and Osborn as listing marten for the state, but considered these records doubtful. He concluded that they “may have entered northeastern Iowa as a straggler many years AVEO) ads oY FISHER: Goding (after Scott 1937) con- sidered the species “rare” and the same author cited Spurrell as reporting that tracks were seen in Calhoun County and a few skins traded north of Sac County in the 1850's. Scott considered these records open to ques- tion, but believed the fisher may once have been present. | Oct.-Dec. 1956] KANSAS MARTEN: E. L. Cockrum (letter, citing Cockrum 1952) wrote that Mead (1899) said “martens were rare,” and that for this reason Hibbard (1933) listed them as a former in- habitant. He concludes that marten have not occurred in the state within historic time. MAINE MARTEN: Occur throughout the mountain- ous northern part of the state. Seton (1925- 28) wrote that they are rarely seen now in the southern parts. They are reported to have occurred as far south as Muddy River (Topsham) about 1915, and New Gloucester 100 years ago, and are known from the shell heaps on Goose Island (Norton 1930). Coues (1877), Allen (1876), and Anderson and Sclater (1881 and 1891) reported them from as far south as central Oxford County. The last specimen was taken in 1936 (Yeager 1950). FISHER: In all but the southern part of the state, at least as far south as Brownfield (Coulter 1952), Lincoln (Rhoads 1898) and extreme southern Aroostook County (Hardy 1910). Coulter said “it is now common north and west of a general line from Brownfield to Rumford, Stron, Bingham, Guilford, and Katahdin Iron Works, thence north to Mt. Katahdin, Portage, and St. John Plantation. [Also found in]... two districts in north- western Franklin County close to the Cana- dian border.” Coulter added that “it is now common... [whereas] ten years ago it was reported as rare... .” MANITOBA MARTEN: Originally all of the province, except perhaps the extreme southwest portion and the barrens about Hudson Bay; now very rare south of latitude 53°N (Melven 1938). The most southerly records are Aweme (Crid- dle 1929), Pembina Mountains (Seton 1925- 28), and Riding Mountain National Park, where they became extinct about 1915 (Soper 1953). One was captured on the poplar bluffs near the Delta Research Station in the winter of 1951-52 (J. Bryant, and letter of R. W. Sutton). Marten were being trapped in the winter of 1948-1949 (Yeager 1950). The chief collecting points are Nelson House, Lac du Brochet and Shamatawa (L. Butler, letter). FISHER: Originally all of Manitoba south of a line connecting Stony Lake (Melven 1938), Churchill River (L. Butler, letter), and THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 155 York Factory (Preble 1902), and north and east of Riding Mountain (Greene 1932) and Assiniboine (Seton 1925-28). “Are now found chiefly between the Ontario border and Lake Winnipegosis, with a few further north along the Churchill River. The province has the highest catch of any of the Prairie Provinces, the chief collecting points being Little Grand Rapids, Berens River and Norway House” L. Butler, letter). They were taken in the following sections in 1952: Wabowden Lake, Sherridon Lake, Norway House, Oxford House, Island Lake, Pukatawagan, God’s Lake, and Cross Lake (Malaher 1952). J. Bryant has told me that they have increased in numbers and extended their range in the past few years. MARYLAND MARTEN: Scharf (1882) said that “marten occurred in western Maryland.” Mansueti (1950) wrote that they have been completely extirpated from the state for at least 70 years. “Its distribution probably was not widespread.” J. W. Aldrich (letter) reports that there ap- pear to be no definite records for the state. FISHER: Although no positive records exist, Mansueti (1950) believed that they probably occurred in Garrett County and other portions of western Maryland more than two centuries ago. Poole (1932) recorded a specimen captured in 1921 in Holtwood, Penn- sylvania, about twelve miles from the Mary- land border. MASSACHUSETTS MARTEN: Formerly present in the Berk- shire Mountains of Bershire County (Emmons 1840, Allen 1869, Coues 1877, Allen 1904). Hamilton (1943) suggested that they may still occur in the area. FISHER: Originally, at least, through the Berkshire Hills and Green Mountains of the western part of the state (Emmons 1840, Allen 1869, Allen 1904); according to Allen (1904) extinct at time of writing. MICHIGAN MARTEN: Formerly all of the timbered areas of the state as far south as Allegan County; also on Isle Royale, and Sugar Island. None have been taken in twenty-five years and they are now rare or absent. (Burt 1948, Pruitt 1951). FISHER: Originally all of the state, at least as far south as ‘Wexford, Gratiot, Ingham, 156 Washtenow and Wayne counties (Burt 1948 and specimens examined). Pruitt (1951) said they have been seen on Sugar Island. Shorger (1942) reported the last specimen trapped in 1930-1931. Burt (1948) considered them very rare or absent. Locality not map- ped: Park Siding (Elliot 1907). MINNESOTA MARTEN: Northern Minnesota, as far south as Polk County (specimen examined) and Crow ‘Wing County (Swanson, Surber and Roberts 1945); originally common, rare by 1900, and probably now extinct, although still possibly existing in Superior and Chippewa National Forests (Shorger 1942, Swanson, Surber and Roberts 1945, Gunderson and Beer 1953, Stenlund 1955). The last speci- men was taken in 1953 in St. Louis County (Stenlund 1955). FISHER: Occured at one time throughout northeastern half of the state, their south- western limit being a line connecting eastern Pennington, southern Clearwater, southern Crow Wing and southern Ransey counties (Shorger 1942, Gunderson and Beer 1953, Swanson, Surber and Roberts 1945); formerly numerous, but now rare and restricted to the extreme northern and western portions of the state and are still taken there in small num- bers. An unmapped record is Big Bog (Shorger 1942). MONTANA MARTEN: Through the Montana and Bitter- root sections of the Northern Rockies, as far east as western Glacier, Telon, Cascade, Lewis and Clark, Jefferson, and Beaverhead coun- ties (Wright 1953, Newby 1955, and speci- mens examined). Also present in the south- western part of the state in Madison, Gallatin, Park, Sweetgrass, Stillwater and Carbon counties (U.S. Fish and (Wildlife Service File, Newby 1955, and specimens examined). They are still common (Yeager 1950, P.L. Wright, Letter). Newby (1955) has published a de- tailed distribution map for the state. FISHER: Only three records are known to me; these are Glacier National Park (Allen 1942), Swan River, south fork, and upper Swift Current River (Bailey and Bailey 1918). Only the first two of these have been mapped. F. E. Newby (letter) says that these records are so unreliable as to be unauthentic. Be- cause they occur in central Idaho and northern Wyoming, it is possible that they occur or occurred throughout much of the Montana THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 section of the Northern Rockies; it is signifi- cant however, that there are no records from southeastern British Columbia. NEBRASKA MARTEN: Swenk (1908) cited an undated publication of Aughey who reported that they had been taken in the northwestern part of the state, but that they were rare. Swenk considered them extinct at time of writing. FISHER: Swenk (1908) believed that they likely occured within the state but found no record of their presence. NEVADA MARTEN: Reported to occur in the south- west portion where the Sierra Nevadas enter the state, from Mount Rose south to Monu- ment Peak. One specimen is known from Marlette Lake (Hall 1946). FISHER: “Occurs in the Sierra Nevada of California and may occur in these mountains hetween Carson City and Reno. Satisfactorv evidence of their presence within the state is lacking” (Hall 1946). Grinnell, Dixon and Linsdale (1937) map them as entering Neva- da. NEW BRUNSWICK MARTEN: Once common throughout all of the province (Chamberlain 1884 and 1892); at present greatly reduced and restricted to the more remote areas (Allen 1942, Morris 1948). No specimens have been taken legally since 1945-46, but they are still found, and the occasional one is taken. There is an un- substantiated sight record from Taymouth. Specimens not mapped include Lake Edward (Chamberlain 1884 and 1892), between Lake Edward and Salmon Lake (Elliot 190la and b), and Salmon Lake (Chamberlain). FISHER: Original range not known, but at present restricted to the central and northern parts of the province (Rand 1944a, Morris 1948). B.S. Wright (letter) says fisher tracks were seen in 1953 in the Burpee Game Re- serve (Sunbury County), where a fisher brought from Ontario had been released in 1950. A fisher was taken in 1956 in Char- lotte County, and is now held captive in the. Provincial Game Farm. Another has been seen near Renous. These records are the most southerly in the province. Chamberlain (1884 and 1892) considered the fisher rare at time of writing, but Wright (letter) says a few are still taken each year. Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN NEWFOUNLAND (excluding Labrador) MARTEN: Originally common in all the wooded areas (Reeks 1870 and 1871) but now very scarce (Bangs 1913, Allen 1942). A. Cameron (letter) says they are now rare and confined to the more inaccessible regions. D. H. Pimlott (letter) reports that they have, for the past two years, been reported from the lower Grand Lake and Gambo Lake areas only. NEW HAMPSHIRE MARTEN: Found originally in the White Mountains and northward (Allen 1904); very nearly, if not completely, exterminated now (Preble 1942-43). N. Preble (letter) has sent the following information. One specimen is known from the state, this from Coos County in the New England Museum of Natural History (Boston Museum of Science). They were common 100 years ago in the Crawford Notch region of the ‘White Mountains, but are now rare, the last specimen being taken in 1936. Alfred Preble saw an animal on Mount Washington in 1930 that was likely a marten, a fisher, or a ring-tailed cat. A marten was reported at the same place in the spring of 1944. All records from the state are in Coos County except one from Laconia in Belknap County taken between 1931 and 1935 (Helenette Silver, letter, after Jackson 1922). They have recently been reintroduced into the northern part of the state (Monahan 1953). FISHER: At one time through all of the White Mountains and northward (Allen 1904). Records are known from the extreme north- ern part of Coos County to southern Cheshire County in the very southern part of the state (specimens examined). Canpenter and Siegler (1945) and Hamilton (1943) said they were still present, and N. Preble (letter) says two were taken in 1936. Helenette Silver (letter) sayS a specimen was trapped at Warner in 1951, and adds that “I have heard well authenticated rumors of others being taken by trappers who were afraid to turn them over to us as they are fully protected.... It is probable that they are more common than we know.” F. H. Fay has told me that he recollects that two young fisher were captured in 1949 or 1950 near Lake Ossipee in the east-central part of the state, and that another was seen on the road at Pasaconaway near North Conway in 1948. An unmapped record is Greenough Trail (Helenette Silver, letter). FIELD-NATURALIST 157 NEW JERSEY MARTEN: “Once abundant in the mountain regions. Now wholly absent from the state. Probably exterminated fifty years ago” (Rhoads 1903). I know of no other records. FISHER: Abbott wrote in 1868 that “about the mountains in the northern counties a few are still living.” In 1889, Nelson reported that a few persisted in the northern part of the state; Rhoads (1903) knew of no re- cord other than Abbott’s; he concluded that they had occurred in the northern section in former days. NEW MEXICO MARTEN: Present, but by no means com- mon, in the high mountains of the northern part of the state, especially the San Juan and Sagre de Cristo Ranges (Bailey 1931). Re- cords known are from Chama (specimen ex- amined), Taos (Wheeler 1875), Twining, and Truchas Peak (Bailey 1931) and Las Vegas Mountains (Durrant 1952). The last locality named is the most southerly record in North America. Allen (1942) believed they still existed in the state; their present status is unknown to me. An unmapped locality is Twining (Bailey 1931). NEW YORK MARTEN: Formerly common in the Adirondacks and possibly the Catskills until 1890 (DeKay 1842, Merriam 1882-1884, and 1886, Mearns 1898, Miller 1899 and 1900) but trapped almost to extinction since then (Seton 1925-1928). The most southerly re- cords are those from the Catskills (Audubon and Bachman 1851-1854, Mearns 1898). An unmapped locality is Averyville (Harper 1929). The last specimen was taken in 1938 (Yeager 1950). FISHER: Occurred at one time through all but the southwestern part of the state, ex- tending as far west and south as Buffalo - (Miller 1899), Munro County (Specimen ex- amined), northern Delaware County (speci- men examined), and Rennselaer County (Au- dubon and Bachman 1851-1854). Grant (1906) reported that they were confined to the Adir- ondacks by 1842, although Mearns in 1898 wrote that they were still taken occasionally in the Catskills, and Miller’s Buffalo specimen was captured in 1899. By 1900 they were restricted to the Adirondacks (Grant 1906), where they still occur. According to Hamil- ton and Cook (1955) they have in recent years 158 increased their numbers and extended their range in the Adirondacks, so that they now occur through at least parts of St. Lawrence, Franklin, Clinton, Lewis, Oneida, Herkimer, Hamilton, Essex, Warren and Saratoga coun- ties. These authors present a distribution map of fisher for the state. NORTH CAROLINA FISHER: Known only from one specimen reported by Audubon and Bachman (1851- 1854) which was taken from Buncombe County in the western part of the state. Kel- logg (1937) wrote that they once occurred, without adding detail. Aside from a Pleis- tocene fisher found in Arkansas, this is the most southerly record known east of the Great Plains. NORTH DAKOTA MARTEN: Common in the wooded north- eastern part of the state a century ago, but have been long extinct (Bailey 1926a, Allen 1942); known records are from Pembina County (Bailey), Walsh County (Bailey; Swanson, Surber and Roberts 1945) and Grand Forks County (Bailey). Another unmapped record is the Hair Hills (Bailey). FISHER: Audubon and Bachman (1851- 1854) reported having seen many skins from the ‘upper Missouri” and hence possibly from this state. Bailey (1926a) said that they formerly occurred in the northeastern part, but that they are now extinct. Records are known from eastern Cavalier, Pembina, Walsh and Grand Forks counties and from the Hair Hills. The last of these is unmapped (Bailey 1926a; Swanson, Surber and Roberts 1945; and Over and Churchill 1945). NORTHWEST TERRITORIES MARTEN: All of the Territories south of the barrens (Ross 1861a and b and 1862, Mac- Farlane 1905, Mair and MacFarlane 1908, Preble 1902 and 1908). They have occasion- ally been taken on the barrens some distance from tree line (Degerbol 1935, Clarke 1944 and Banfield 1951). The greatest numbers of martens were taken during the period 1840- 1860, according to Seton (1925-1928), but since then numbers have steadily decreased (many authors). The annual catch in the years 1851-1860 exceeded 30,000 pelts, but by 1930 the average had dropped to about 5,000. The chief collecting places are now Forts Simpson, Good Hope, Norman, Aklavik, Rae. Smith, Resolution and Providence, in that order of THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 importance (Robinson and Robinson 1946). An unmapped record is Fort Anderson (Preble 1908). FISHER: Known from the Mackenzie District only, not to my knowledge from Keewatin; were originally well known as far north as Resolution on the shore of Great Slave Lake (Richardson 1829, Ross 186la and b, MacFarlane 1905, Russell 1898, Preble 1908, Seton 1911), although never common at its northern limit (Ross 1862, MacFarlane 1905, Russell 1898). Russell said that they were not found between Great Slave and Athabaska lakes except along the Slave River, which is their eastern limit, although they were common on the numerous deltas of the Slave (Ross 1861la). Russell said that to the west they have been seen just north of Providence, and the Liard River has been considered a more westerly northern limit (Preble 1908, Seton 1911, Mason 1924). Seton (1911) said that the natives considered the point where the north Nahanni enters the Mackenzie the most northerly limit of fisher in the district. Patterson (1954, pp. 76 and 180) saw fisher tracks on the south Nahanni northwest of Caribou Creek and in Dead- man’s Valley. MacFarlane (1905) reported that specimens had been taken at Whitefish Lake, which I locate about 125 miles east of Resolution, and Clark (1944) said they have been taken at the headwaters of the Anderson River, which I map north of Great Bear Lake. Both are likely incorrectly map- ped. The number of fishers taken in the territory has never been great, and are now very low. Clark (1944) wrote that “for a number of years no fisher have been reported from the Mackenzie District except in the Fort Liard area. At this post a very few skins from the Mackenzie District are traded annually.” NOVA SCOTIA MARTEN: Originally probably all of Nova Scotia (Smith 1940), and according to Coues (1877) and Bailey (1896) once common; now very rare, and found only in restricted areas (Smith 1940). No specimens have been col- lected legally for some time, but Rand in 1933 had heard of one smuggled out shortly beforehand. They are present on Cape Bre- ton Island (Rowan 1876, Rand 1944b). D. Benson says that two were trapped there in 1954. Seven marten have been brought from Ontario, are now in quarantine, and are to be released on the mainland shortly. Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN FISHER: Gilpin (1868) listed them as present, but there has been no record of them since (Smith 1940, Allen 1942, Rand 1944b). D. Benson says that several fisher were re- leased in the southwest part of the province six or eight years ago. Very recently a three- year-old female was trapped in the same region. Benson thinks it likely that it re- presents progeny of the introduced stock. OHIO MARTEN: Kirtland (1838) reported that “the pine weasel is admitted to the state’s fauna on the authority of Dr. Ward, who informs me that it was taken in the vicinity of Chille- cothe.” Brayton (1882), quoting a letter of one Emory Potter, listed them as ‘extinct in Ohio.” Bole and Moulthrop (1942) have ex- amined two specimens believed collected in Ashtabula County. They concluded that they have been extinct for about one hundred years. The Chillecothe record, if correct, marks the most southerly record known for the area east of the Great Plains. FISHER: Kirtland (1838) stated that two specimens had been taken in Ashtabula County in 1837. Brayton (1882) listed fisher as a member of the state’s fauna. Bole and Moul- throp (1942) said that a specimen (possibly Kirtland’s) taken in the state was held in the Cleveland Museum of Natural History. Leedy (1950) considered fisher rare or ab- sent. No other records of its occurrence are known to me. ONTARIO MARTEN: Apparently once common throughout the whole of the province except for the barrens just south of Hudson Bay. They now occur no further south than the southern limits of Algonquin Park (Cross and Dymond 1929, Downing 1948, de Vos 1952), and they are made up of many small disjunct populations, the largest centering around the area fifty to seventy-five miles west of Tim- mins (de Vos 1952). At one time they ap- parently occurred all through southern On- tario, at least as far south as Essex County and Rondeau, as the following evidence in- dicates. Small and Lett (1884, Trans. Ottawa Field Nat. Club 6: 150-151 and 280-283) and Rand (1945a) said that they occurred near Ottawa about 1840, and Seton (1925-1928) said that they were found between Lake Simcoe and Ottawa in the 1870’s. They occurred at Whitechurch, ten miles north of Toronto FIELD-NATURALIST 159 (Seton 1925-1928) and near Toronto in 1830 and ‘much later” (Faull 1913). They were believed to have once occurred near Hamil- ton (Warren 1950), and in the upper Thames watershed (Richardson 1952); and Saunders (1932) was told in 1899 that they had been seen at Rondeau. De Vos (1952) wrote that Volume 3 of the Census of Canada, 1870-1871, recorded fur returns of marten from the fol- lowing ridings: Essex, Kent, Brant, Simcoe, Victoria and Peterborough. Marten skeletons have been found in the late pre-European middens of Prescott, Brantford and London (Wittemberg 1919, 1939 and 1948). F. Merner has told me that a marten was taken near Hespeler about 25 years ago. Marten refuges have recently been formed on the east coast of James Bay and on Akimiski Island (de Vos 1952). I do not know if marten have ever naturally occurred on the island. FISHER: Formerly present throughout all of the province except the unforested low- lands bordering Hudson Bay. Now their range extends no further south than the French and Mattawa Rivers, and Algonquin Park (Rand 1944a, Downing 1948, de Vos 1952). De Vos’s map showed the population to be divided into three major groups, one center- ing around Central Patricia, one around Tim- mins and one around Algonquin Park. Ori- ginally fisher occurred in the southern part of the province as the following records show. Audubon and Bachman (1851-1854) recorded one shot at Port Hope. Gapper (1830) men- tioned one taken between Toronto and Lake Simcoe. Saunders (1932) stated that he had been told that they had occurred at Rondeau and at Burks Falls at the turn of the century. Richardson (1952) believed they had once oc- curred in the upper Thames watershed. Wit- temberg (1939, 1948) recorded them from the late pre-European middens of London and Brantford. Localities not mapped are Mc- Clure Township and Quinte Forest District (de Vos 1952). OREGON MARTEN: Throughout the Coast Moun- tains and Cascade Mountains from the north- ern to the southern boundaries of the state, as far east as western Crook County (Bailey 1936) and Des Chutes River (eastern Wasco County) (specimen examined). Also present in the Blue Mountains in the northeastern part of the state, as far west as Grant County (Bailey 1936, Anon. 1951 and 1952) and as 160 far south as Prairie City (specimen examined). Marten were being trapped in 1952 (Anon. 1952). An unmapped locality is Olive Lake (Bailey). FISHER: Through the Coast Mountains and the Klamath and Cascade Ranges of the state, from the northern to the southern boundaries, as far east as eastern Hood River, eastern Douglas and central Jackson Counties (Bailey 1936). Also present in the Blue Mountains of the northeast, at least as far east as central Umatilla County, and as far south as south- ern Union County (Bailey). According to Bailey, they are united with the western population in the area north of the High Desert and Harney Basin. PENNSYLVANIA MARTEN: Once abundant in the northern mountains of the state, but were exterminat- ed by 1900 (Rhoads 1903, Richmond and Roslund 1949). Their southern limits in the state appear to have been Crawford, Forest, Elk, Cameron, Clinton, Tioga, Sullivan, Colum- bia, Wyoming and Wayne counties (Rhoads, Shoemaker 1919). Rhoads wrote that they also occurred in Lancaster County; if this is so, it is the most southerly record known in the Appalachian Mountains, aside from an old Ohio record. FISHER: At one time through all of the northeastern half of the state (Rhoads 1903), occurring as far south as Forest, Elk, Clear- field, Centre, Cumberland and _ Lancaster Counties (Rhoads 1898 and 1903, Shoemaker 1919, Hamilton 1943 and specimens exam- ined). Roslund (1951) believed that fisher had become extinct by 1903, but Poole (1932) reported that one was taken at Holtwood in 1921. Localities not mapped include Second Mountain and Peter Mountain (Shoemaker) and Mountain bog above Strausstown (Poole). PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND FISHER: “In Prince Edward Island . . there are now no fisher’ (Rand 1944a). Whether or not Rand meant this to signify that fisher once occurred there I do not know. QUEBEC (including Labrador) MARTEN: Common at one time through- out all of Quebec and Labrador north to the tree line (Bell 1884, Low 1895 and 1896, Bangs 1898, Anderson 1931-1932, Strong 1930 and Tanner 1944). Inland they were abundant everywhere (Stearns 1883) but north of Mis- tassini they occurred chiefly in the forested THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 river valleys (Low 1895 and 1896, Strong 1930). The numbers trapped per year have dropped from 12,000 in 1870 to 1,200 in 1949- 50 (Minville 1946, Anon. 1927-1950). They occur as far north as Chimo and Upper Seal Lake and as far west as George and as far east as the barrens edging the Labrador Coast (Doutt 1954, and specimens examined). In spite of the fact that they are known from adjacent New York, New Hampshire, Ver- mont, Maine and New Brunswick, and though Hall (1861) recorded them from near Mon- treal, Cameron and Orkin (1950) from Lau- rentides Park, and though they are known to be present though scarce on the Gaspé Peninsula (Cameron 1953 and specimens ex- amined), there are no records for their oc- currence in the Eastern Townships. Verrill (1862) and Rowan (1876) reported that marten occurred on Anticosti Island. Hunter (1907) said he had examined specimens of these, and Newsom (1937) was assured of the former presence of marten on the island. D. H. Pimlott (letter) writes that the last speci- men from the island was trapped in 1926, and that tracks have not been seen since 1931. FISHER: In Quebec known only south of a line connecting the southern end of James Bay, Lake Mistassini, and Mingan (Bell 1884, Low 1895 and 1896, Anderson 1938 and speci- mens examined). Stearns (1883) wrote that they were occasionally found in the southern . portions of Labrador, and Eidmann (1935) said the natives reported them to occur oc- casionally in the Matamek region. Hunter (1907) wrote that “... prior to about the year 1860 the fisher... was... unknown to the trappers on the north shore... east of the Saguenay and it was only after that year that an odd one was trapped in that lower coun- try....” On the south shore of the Saint Lawrence they were reported from Ile Ste. Héléne (Achintre and Crevier 1876) and the Gaspé Peninsula (Goodwin 1924, Cameron 1953). No fisher were known from Anticosti, and while two were released there a number of years ago, they were never seen again (Newsom 1937). Fisher have become very much scarcer in the province than they were originally (Neilson 1948, Cameron 1953, Min- ville 1946). Localities not mapped: Eureka Lake, Pontiac County (specimen examined). RHODE ISLAND FISHER: Included by Mearns (1900) in his list of the state’s original fauna, but as far as I know never substantiated. Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN SASKATCHEWAN MARTEN: The northern wooded portion of the province, probably as far south as the southern limit of aspen parkland, and at least as far south as the southern limit of the coni- ferous forest. Records for the province are scarce, the most southerly being [le a la Crosse in the west and Pas Mountains and Redearth in the east (L. Butler, letter and specimens examined). I have examined a specimen from Duck Mountain in Manitoba, just across the border from Saskatchewan, and about 150 miles south of Pas Mountains and Redearth. Twenty-five hundred skins were taken in 1919-1920, but this was reduced to 375 by 1949-1950 (Anon. 1927-1950). The chief collecting points are Fond du Lac, Ile a la Crosse, and Pelican Narrows (L. Butler, letter). FISHER: Forested Saskatchewan,. at least as far south as Little Red River (L. Butler, letter), and Redearth (specimen examined). Although once present in Prince Albert Park, they were believed to be extinct. Since 1945 however, a few animals have been seen in the area (Soper 1952). They are now col- lected chiefly near the Saskatchewan and Churchill Rivers, Lac la Roche, Montreal Lake and Cumberland House (L. Butler, letter). SOUTH CAROLINA FISHER: Said by Seton (1925-1928) to occur in the mountains as far south as South Carolina. I know of no other record, and Seton’s is likely incorrect. SOUTH DAKOTA MARTEN: “A specimen... was taken in the Black Hills near Custer in January, 1930, which is the only authentic record for the state. However, there is every reason to assume that before the white trapper entered the region the pine marten roamed in the wooded area up the eastern side of the state and in the Black Hills as a straggler” (Over and Churchill 1945). A record of a marten taken from Pringle in the Black Hills is held in the files of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. FISHER: “There is no authentic record that it was ever taken in South Dakota ter- ritory, but early trappers mention it as frequently seen in the Red River valley of North Dakota, and it is likely that before the advent of white man it inhabited the FIELD-NATURALIST 161 timbered regions of the eastern side of the state.... No doubt it lived sparingly in the Black Hills in the early days” (Over and Churchill 1945). TENNESSEE FISHER: Known only from specimens taken in western Cumberland and Cocke Counties (Audubon and Bachman 1851-1854, Merriam 1886, Rhoads 1896). They have likely been extinct for at least 75 years. TEXAS FISHER: Lydekker (1901-1904) and An- thony (1917) both reported that they oc- curred in the northern part of the state. These may be references to the area once known as Texas Territory; I do not believe that the fisher ever occurred within the limits of present day Texas. UTAH MARTEN: Occur through the Wasatch and Uinta Ranges of the Middle Rocky Mountains, as far west as Salt Lake and Utah counties and as far south as Lost Lake, Wasatch Coun- ty, if not further; present also in the Colo- rado Plateau region of the southeastern part of the state, in San Juan and Grand Counties (Durrant 1952 and specimens examined). Small numbers of marten were collected in 1949-1950 (Yeager 1950). FISHER: Durrant (1952) included fisher in the state’s fauna on the basis of photo- graphs of fisher tracks taken by William Marshall at Trial Lake in Summit County in 1938. Other tracks were seen in the same place the following year. Durrant considered evidence for its presence in the state to be “unimpeachable.” VERMONT MARTEN: Originally common throughout the mountainous portions of the state (Kirk 1916, Osgood 1938); reported scarce by 1840 (Seton 1925-1928) and nearly extinct at pre- sent (Osgood, Foote 1944). Osgood reported that the last specimen was taken in 1926. Records are known only from Rutland, Ben- nington, and ‘Windham Counties (Kirk 1916, Osgood 1938). FISHER: Known originally throughout the Green Mountains from La Moille to Rutland counties (Kirk 1916, Osgood 1938, Foote 1944 and specimens examined). By 1916 had been confined to “the wildest mountain districts” 162 THE CANADIAN (Kirk) and by 1938 were very nearly extinct (Osgood). Their present status in the state is uncertain (Foote). Locality not mapped is Meridan (Kirk). VIRGINIA MARTEN: Bailey (1946) wrote that the “Account Showing the Quantity of Skins and Furs Exported Annually... from Virginia from... 1698 to ...1715” listed marten, and that Thomas Jefferson in his “Notes on the State of Virginia’ (1801) included them. Audubon and Bachman (1851-1854) reported that “we have sought for it in vain on the mountains of Virginia where notwithstanding, we think a straggler will occasionally make its appearance.’ Anthony (1928), Bailey (1946), Brown (1952) and others all listed them as likely former inhabitants. Handley and Patton (1947) reviewed the situation and reached the following conclusion: “Although its range has been given by dozens of authors, even to the present day as ‘extending south in the mountains to Virginia’, we have been unable to find record of any specific evidence of its occurrence south of Pennsylvania. It is not inconceivable, however, that it might have occurred in the...spruce forests that formerly covered eastern West Virginia and extended into the Virginia Mountains... .” FISHER: The “Account Showing the Quan- tity of Skins and Furs Exported Annually...” listed fisher as being taken, according to Bailey (1946). Audubon and Bachman (1851- 1854) said that they saw them on the moun- tains of the state, and Allen (1876b) wrote that they once occurred there. Poland (1892) suggested that their German name “Virginian fitch’ implied their presence. Handley and Patton (1947) reported that ‘we have been told by old residents of the Crabbottom sec- tion that ‘Black -foxes’ had been killed in Highland County as late as 1890... and it seems reasonable to believe that these may have been Martes pennanti. Before the ad- vance of civilization... fishers were probably common in many parts of western Virgi- nia....” They are now extinct (Handley and Patton, Brown 1952). WASHINGTON MARTEN: Occur in the Olympic Peninsula, and south in the Coast Mountains to Chehalis, at least (specimens examined); the Cascade Mountains from the international boundary to the Columbia River, west to Camp Skagit, Mount Vernon, and Hamilton (specimens examined), and east to eastern Chelan County FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 and Chelan (Dalquest 1948 and specimens examined); present in the Columbia, Bitter- root and Selkirk ranges of the northeastern part of the state (Dalquest, Anon. 1931 and specimens examined) and the Blue Mountains of the southeastern part. The last marten were taken in 1946-1947, the season being closed since (Dalquest). FISHER: Occur in the Olympic and Coast mountains from the northern tip south to Grays Harbor (Dalquest 1948, Elliot 1899 and 1907 and specimens examined); apparently absent from the Puget Lowland except at low altitudes in Mason and Pierce Counties (Scheffer 1938 and specimens examined); present in the Cascade Mountains from the international boundary south to the Colum- bia River, as far west as eastern ‘Whatcom, Snonomish and central King counties, and as far east as central Okanagan, Chelan and Yakima counties (Dalquest, Scheffer, Taylor and Shaw 1929, Rhoads 1898, Potts and Grater 1949, Baird 1857 and 1859). Dalquest be- lieved that it was possible that a few exist or existed in the Columbia, Selkirk and Bit- terroot ranges of the northeastern part, and in the Blue Mountains of the southeastern part of the state. Localities not mapped are: Iron Creek (specimen examined), Billy Goat Mountain, Head of Cascade River, Granville and Suez (Scheffer). WEST VIRGINIA FISHER: Occurred originally through most of the mountainous parts, and apparently still present in very small numbers. Surber (1912) reported them quite common formerly, but rare at time of writing. Kellogg (1987) said they were once present, and Brooks (1924) recorded one taken in Upshur County. Mc- Keever, Frum and Berard (1951) reviewed the above records and added to them as fol- lows. Fred Brooks reported in 1911 that they had been common fifty years earlier, but that they were rare or extinct at the time of relating. He said that three were caught in the early seventy’s in northern Boone Coun- ty. A fisher was trapped in Gilner County in 1949, according to these authors and there appears to be no doubt as to its correct iden- tity. A record not mapped is from Clear Fork, Big Coal River (Kellogg 1937). WISCONSIN MARTEN: Formerly in the wooded por- tions of the northern part of the state, at least as far south as St. Croix, La Cross, Jackson, Juneau and Brown Counties (Shorger 1942); Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN nearly extinct by 1900 (Jackson 1908, Cory 1912 and Barger 1951). Shorger wrote that the last specimen was taken in 1925; accord- ing to de Vos (1951) they still occur in very small numbers. Shorger reported them from Outer Island of the Apostle Island group in Lake Superior in 1934. FISHER: Said by Jackson (1908), Hollister (1910), Cory (1912) and Barger (1951) to have occurred through almost all of the state at one time, but to be lacking in any specific records. Cory believed that they still existed, and Shorger (1942) was positive of their presence at time of writing; Barger believed however that they had become extinct by 1900. The only records are those given by Shorger for La Cross, Sauk, Jefferson and Milwaukee Counties. WYOMING MARTEN: Reasonably common in the forested areas of the Wasatch and Yellow- stone sections of the Middle Rocky Mountains of the western part of the state (Cary 1917, Seton 1925-1928, Bailey 1930, Cahalane 1943, Anon. 1950 and Thomas 1952b). Occur from Yellowstone Park south to La Barge Creek, Lincoln County (specimen examined) and as far east as western Park County (U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service file), and Dinwoody Canyon, western Fremont County (specimen examined). No specimens were trapped in the year 1948-1949 (Yeager 1950). FISHER: Known only from Yellowstone and Shoshone counties in the northwest corner of the state (Skinner 1927, Cahalane 1947, Thomas 1952a and Anon. 1950). This is con- sidered their southern limit in the Rocky Mountains (Seton 1925-1928, Allen 1942, Handley and Patton 1947, Summer and Dixon 1953) although they are known from northern Utah. Are now extinct or nearly so (Skinner, Anon. 1950, T. J. Grasse, letter). According to Thomas the first specimen taken in the state was captured early in the 1920’s, al- though tracks had been observed previous to this. None have been taken since about 1940 (Anon. 1950). Reports indicate that they exist now only in the Absaroka Range of northern Park County (Thomas). YUKON TERRITORY MARTEN: Present through all of the forested part of the Territory, at least as far north as Macmillan River (Mason 1924, Rand 1945c). Their present status is good FIELD-NATURALIST 163 and promises to remain so (Rand 1944c) al- though the present total take is not equal to that of the catches of some single trappers thirty-five to forty years ago (Rand 1945b). A locality not mapped is the lower Yukon region (Twitchell 1921). FISHER: Rand (1944a) wrote that they barely enter the southern Yukon. The same author (1945b) reported that “Mr. Drury of Whitehorse... trades a few fisher, but they do not average one a year, and he did not know of a single pelt that had undoubtedly been taken in Yukon.... That fisher do occur in southeast Yukon, as usually assumed, is supported by trappers Leitman and Carmen of Tobally Lakes, and Larsen of Beaver River. The former have taken three in several years’ trapping; the latter one fisher in several years’ trapping....” Rand (1945c) sai dtwo to thirty-eight skins have been traded in Yukon from 1920 to 1942, but gave no as- surance that any were taken within the Ter- ritory. Turner (1886) reported that they oc- curred in the upper ‘Yukon valley, but I do not know if he meant that portion in the Territory or not. REFERENCES Abbott, C.C. 1868. Catalogue of vertebrate ant- mals of New Jersey, Appendix E. In Geology of New Jersey, by G.H. Cook. Newark, Daily Advertiser, p. 751-830. Achintre, A., and J.A. Crevier. 1876. L’Isle Ste. Héléne .... Montreal, National, 102 p. Adams, A.L. 1873. Field and forest rambles... London, King, 333 p. Allen, G.M. 1904. Check list of the mammals of New England. Occ. Papers Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 7:1-35. —— 1942. Extinct and vanishing mammals of the western hemisphere. Lancaster, Amer. Comm. Internat. Wild]. Protection, Spec. Pub. 11, 620 p. Allen, J.A. 1869. Catalogue of the mammals of Massachusetts . ... Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 1: 161-167. —— 1874. Notes on the mammals of portions of Kansas, Colorado, Wyoming and Utah. Bull. Essex Ins. 6:43-66. —— 1876. The former range of some New England mammals. Amer. Nat. 10:27-32. Anderson, J., and W.L. Sclater. 1881 and 1891. Catalogue of mammalia in the Indian Mu- seum, Calcutta. Calcutta, Govt. Printing Of- fice, 2 v. Anderson, M.B.A. 1931-1932. Contributions to the knowledge of extreme northeastern Labra- dor.... Can. Field Nat. 45: 49-55, 85-90, 115-118, 143-146, 169-174, 194-198, 222-224; 46: 7-12, 34-36; 56-63, 84-89, 112-116, 143- 145, 153-162. Anderson, R.M. 1934. The distribution, abundance, and economic importance of the game and 164 | THE CANADIAN furbearing mammals of western North Ameri- ca. Proc. 5th Pac. Sci. Congr., v. 5, p. 4055- 4073. —— 1938. The mammals of tthe province of Que- bec. Ann. Rept. Provancher Soc. Que., 1938: 50-114. Anonymous. 1927-1950. Fur production of Canada. Ann. Repts. Canada Dept. Trade Comm. — 1931. Wild game census in Colville National Forest, Northeastern Washington. Murrelet L226: — 1950. Wyoming’s fur-bearers. 14: 22-27. —— 1951. Fur catch report... . Game Comm. 6:6, —— 1952. Fur catch report... . Game Comm. 7:7. Anthony, H.E. 1917. Mammals of America. N.Y., Univ. Soc., 335 p. —— 1928. Field book of North American mam- mals... . N.Y., Putnams, 625 p. Audubon, J.J., and J. Bachman. 1851-1854. The Wyo. Wildl. Bull. Oregon State Bull. Oregon State quadrupeds of North America. N.Y., Audu- bon, 3 v. Bailey, J.W. 1946. The mammals of Virginia... . Richmond, privately printed, 416 p. Bailey, L.W. 1896. Report on the geology of south-west Nova-Scotia... . Zn Ann. Rept. Geol. Surv. Canada 9: 1M-154M. Bailey, V. 1926a. A biological survey of North Dakota.... N. Amer. Fauna 49, 226 p. — 1926b. Mammals of the vicinity of Washing- ton. J. Wash. Acad. Sci. 16: 441-445. — 1930. Animal life of Yellowstone National Park. Baltimore, Thomas, 241 p. — 1931. Mammals of New Mexico. N. Fauna 53, 412 p. —— 1936, The mammals and life zones of Oregon. N. Amer. Fauna 55, 416 p. Bailey, V., and F.M. Bailey. 1918. Wild animals of Glacier National Park. U.S.D.IJ. Nat. Park Serv. Pub., 210 p. Baird, S.F. 1857. General report upon the mam- mals of the several Pacific railroad routes. U.S. Pac. R.R. Expl. and Surv., 8: 1-764. — 1859. Mammals of North America... . Phila, Lippincott, 765 p. Baker, R.H. 1951. Mammals taken along the Alas- ka Highway. Pub. Univ. Kansas Mus. Nat. Hist. 5: 87-117. Bandy, P.J. 1952. A study of the fur-bearing mam- mals of the sub-alpine and Columbia forest regions of British Columbia in relation to fur production from 1929 to 1949. Unpublished B.A. thesis, Univ. B.C., 82 p. Banfield, A.W.F. 1947. The mammals of Waterton Lakes National Park. Can. Wild]. Serv. Wild]. Man. Bull. 1.1, 43 p. —— 1951. Notes on the mammals of the Mac- kenzie District, N.W.T. Arctic 4: 113-121. Amer. Bangs, O. 1898. A list of the mammals of Labra- dor. Amer. Nat. 32: 489-507. —— 1913. The land mammals of Newfoundland. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 54: 507-516. Barger, N.R. 1951. Wisconsin mammals. Wis. Cons. Dept. 351-51, 54 p. Bell, R. 1884. Observations on the geology, miner- alogy, zoology, and botany of the Labrador Pub. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 coast, Hudson’s Strait, and Bay. Prog. Rept. Geol. Surv. Canada 1882-83, 4: 1-62DD. Bole, B.P. Jr., and P.N. Moulthrop. 1942. The Ohio recent mammal collection in the Cleve- land Museum of Natural History. Cleveland Mus. Nat. Hist. Pub. 5: 83-181. Brayton, A.W. 1882. Report on the mammals of Ohio. Rept. Geol. Surv. Ohio 4: 3-185. Brooks, A.B. 1924. West Virginia’s vanished and vanishing wildlife. West Virg. Wildl. May. 9-15. Brouillette, R. 1934. La chasse des animaux a four- rure au Canada. 3d ed., Paris, Gallimard, 205 p. Brown, B. 1908. The Conard Fissure, a Pleisto- cene bone deposit in northern Arkansas... . Mem. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 9: 157-208. Brown, G.H. 1952. Illustrated skull key to the recent Jand mammals of Virginia. Va. Coop. Wildl. Res. Unit Release 52-2, 75 p. W.H. 1948. The mammals of Michigan. 2d ed. Univ. Mich. Press, 288 p. Butler, L. 1950. Canada’s wild fur crop. Beaver, Dec: 26-31. Cahalane, V.H. 1943. Meeting the mammals. N.Y., MacMillan, 133 p. —— 1047. The mammals of North America. N.Y., Macmillan, 682 p. Cameron, A.W. 1953. Mammals of the Trois Pis- toles area and the Gaspé Peninsula, Quebec. Ann. Rept. Nat. Mus. Canada 128: 95-108. Cameron, A.W., and P.A. Orkin. 1942. Mammals Burt, of the Lake St. John region, Quebec. Bull. Nat. Mus. Canada 118: 95-108. Carl, G.C., C.J. Guiget, and G.A. Hardy. 1952. A natural history survey of the Manning Park area, B.C. Occ. Papers B.C. Prov. Mus. 9: 130 p. Carpenter, R.G., and H.R. Siegler. 1945. A list of New Hampshire mammals and their distribu- tion. Tech. Circ. New Hampshire Fish and Game Dept., 10 p. 11743 — Field Nat. — 8x 8% — A. Larose 2 Cary, M. 1911. A biological survey of Colorado. N. Amer. Fauna 33, 256 p. —— 1917. Life zone investigations in Wyoming. N. Amer. Fauna 42, 85 p. Chamberlain, M. 1884. Mammals of New Bruns- wick. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. N.B. 3: 39-41, —— 1892. Mammals of New Brunswick. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. N.B. 10: 30-34, Clarke, CH.D. 1940. A biological investigation of the Thelon Game Sanctuary. Bull Nat. Mus. Canada 96, 135 p. —— 1944. Notes on the status and distribution of certain mammals and birds in the Mackenzie River and western Arctic area in 1942 and 1943. Can. Field Nat. 58: 97-103. Cockrum, E.L. 1952. Mammals of Kansas. Univ. Kansas: Mus. Nat. Hist. 7: 1-103. Cory, C.B. 1912. The mammals of Illinois and Wis- consin. Pub. Field Mus, Nat. Hist. 153: 1-105. Coues, E. 1877. Fur-bearing animals... . U.S.D.I. Misc. Pub. 8, 348 p. Coulter, M.W. 1952. Big game and fur-bearing animals of Maine. Me. Extension Bull. 425, 32 p. Cowan, I. McT. 1939. The vertebrate fauna of the Peace River district of British Columbia. Pub. Oct.-Dec. 1956] Occ. Papers B.C. Prov. Mus. 1, 102 p. Criddle, S. 1929. An annotated list of the mam- mals of Aweme, Manitoba. Can. Field Nat. 43: 155-159. Cross, E.C., and J.R. Dymond. 1929. The mam- mals of Ontario. R.O.M.Z. Handbook 1, 56 p. Dalquest, W.W. 1948. Mammals of Washington. Pub. Univ. Kansas Mus. Nat. Hist. 2, 444 p. Davis, W.B. 1939. The recent mammals of Idaho. Caldwell, Caxton, 400 p. Degerbol, M.A. 1935. Mammals. In Report of 5th Thule expedition. Copenhagen, Gyldendal, A 25. BRS ws De Kay, J.E. 1842. Zoology of New York... . pt. 1. Albany, Thurlow and Weed, 146 p. de Vos, A. 1951. Recent findings in fisher and marten ecology and management. Trans. 16th N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., p. 498-507. — 1952. Ecology and management of fisher and marten in Ontario. Tech. Bull. Ont. Dept. Lands and Forests, 90 p. Dice, L.R. 1921. Notes on the mammals of interior Alaska. J. Mammal. 2: 20-28. Doutt, K. 1954. Observations on mammals along the east coast of Hudson Bay and the interior of Ungava. Ann. Carnegie Mus. 33. 14: 235-249, Downing, S.C. 1948. A provisional check-list of the mammals of Ontario, R.O.M.Z Misc. Pub. H Ab joy Dufresne, F. 1942. Mammals and birds of Alas- ka. US.DJ. Fish and Wildl. Circ. 3, 37 p. — 1946. Alaska’s animals and fishes. N.Y.,, Barnes, 297 p. Durrant, S.D. 1952. Mammals of Utah... . Publ. Univ. Kansas Mus. Nat. Hist. 6, 549 p. Edwards, R.Y. 1950 Variations in the fur pro- ductivity of northern British Columbia... . Unpublished M.A. thesis, Univ. B.C., 126 p. Eidmann, H. 1935. Zur Kenntnis der Saugetier- fauna von Sudlabrador, 2. Zeitschr. fiir Sau- getierk. 10: 39-61. Elliot, D.G. 1899. Catalogue of mammals from the Olympic Mountains, Washington .. Pub. Field Col. Mus. 32: 241-276. — 190la. A synopsis of the mammals of North America and the adjacent seas. Pub. Field Col. Mus. 2, 56 p. —— 1901b. List of mammals obtained by Thad- deus Surber... in the provinces of New Brunswick and Quebec, Canada. Pub. Field Col. Mus. 54: 15-29. —— 1905. Descriptions of apparently new mam- mals of the genera Ovibos, Cynomys and Mus- tela. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash. 18: 135-140. —— 1907. A catalogue of the collection of mam- mals in the Field Columbian Museum. Pub. Field Col. Mus. 115, 694 p. Emmons, E. 1840. Report on the quadrupeds of Massachusetts. Jn Reports on the herbaceous plants and on the quadrupeds of Massachu- setts, by C. Dewey and E. Emmons. Cam- bridge, Folsom Wells and Thurston, 86 p. Faull, J.H. 1913. The natural history of the To- ronto region. Toronto, Can. Inst., 419 p. Foote, L.E. 1944: A history of wild game in Ver- mont, 3rd ed., State Bull. Vt. Fish and Game Service i, 51 p. THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 165 Forbes, S.A. 1912. The native animal resources of the state. Trans. Illinois State Acad. 5: 37-48. Gapper, A. 1830. Observations on the quadrupeds found in the district of Upper Canada ex- tending between York and Lake Simcoe... . Zool, J. 5: 201-207. Gilpin, J.B. 1868. On the mammalia of Nova Scotia. Trans. N.S. Inst. Nat. Sci. 3: 11-14 (incorrectly marked v. 2). Goldman, E.A. 1935. New American Mustelids of the genera Martes, Gulo, and Lutra. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash. 48: 175-186. Goodwin, C.G. 1924. Mammals of the Gaspé Peninsula, Quebec. J. Mammal. 5: 246-257. —— 1935. The mammals of Connecticut. Conn. State Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Bull. 53, 221 p. Grant, M. 1906. Notes on Adirondack mammals, with special reference to fur-bearers. N.Y. Forest Fish and Game Comm. 8th and 9th Ann. Rept., p. 319-334. Green, H.U. 1932. Mammals of the Riding Moun- tain National Park, Manitoba. Can. Field Nat. 46: 149-152, Review of the recent mammal Univ. Calif. Pub. Zool. Grinnell, J. 1933. fauna of California. 40: 71-234. Grinnell, J and J. Dixon. 1926. Two new races of the pine marten from the Pacific coast of North America. Univ. Calif. Pub. Zool. 21: 411-417. Grinnell, J.. J. Dixon and J.M. Lindsdale, 1937. Fur-bearing mammals of California; their na- tural history, systematic status, and relation to man. Univ. Calif. Press, 2 v. Grinnell, J. and T.I. Storer. 1924. Animal life in the Yosemite. Univ. Calif. Press, 752 p. Gunderson, H.L., and J.R. Beer. 1953. The mam- mals of Minnesota. Occ. Papers Univ. Minne- sota Mus. Nat. Hist. 6, 190 p. Hahn, W.L. 1909. The mammals of Indiana. Ind. Geol. Dept. 33d Ann. Rept., p. 419-654. Hall, A. 1861. On the mammals and birds of the district of Montreal. Can. Nat. and Geol. 6: 284-309. E.R. 1936. Mustelid mammals from the Pleistocene of North America with systematic notes on some recent members of the genera Mustela, Taxidea and Mephitis. Pub. Carnegie Inst. Wash. 473: pp. 43-119. — 1946. Mammals of Nevada. Univ. Calif. Press, 710 p. —— 1954. Taxonomy of martens. Paper read to the Amer. Soc. Mammal., 34th Ann. Meeting, Estes Park, Colo. Hamilton, W.J. 1943. The mammals of eastern United States... . Ithaca, Comstock, 432 p. Hamilton, W.J., and A.H. Cook. 1955. The biology and management of the fisher in New York. N.Y. Fish and Game J., Jan. 13-55. Handley, C.O., and C.P. Patton. 1947. Wild mam- mals of Virginia. Va. Comm. Game Inland Fisheries, 220 p. Hardy, G.A. 1954. The natural history of the Forbidden Plateau area, Vancouver Island. Ann. Rept. B.C. Prov. Mus. 1954: 24-63. Hall, 166 Hardy, M. 1910. A fall fur hunt in Maine. Forest and Stream 74:808-811 and 888-890. Harper, F. 1929. Notes on mammals of the Adi- rondacks. Handb. N.Y. State Mus. 8: 51-118. Hayward, C.L. 1952. Alpine biotic communities of the Uinta Mountains, Utah. Ecol. Monogr. 22, 93-120. Henderson, J., and E.L. Craig. 1932. Economic mammalogy. Baltimore, Thomas, 397 p. Hibbard, C.W. 1933. A revised check list of Kan- sas mammals. Trans. Kansas Acad. Sci. 36: 230-249. Hollister, N. 1910. A check list of Wisconsin mam- mals. Bull. Wis. Nat. Hist. Soc. 8: 21-31. Hunter, M. 1907. Canadian Wilds... . Columbus, Harding, 227 p. Innis, H.A. 1927. The fur trade of Canada. Toronto Press, 172 p. Jackson, C.F. 1922. Notes on New Hampshire mammals. J. Mammal. 3: 13-15. Jackson, H.H.T. 1908. A preliminary list of Wis- consin mammals. Bull. Wis. Nat. Hist. Soc. 6: 13-34, Jones, F.L. 1955. A low altitudinal record of the Sierra Nevada pine marten. J. Mammal. 36: 568-569. Jurgenson, P.B. 1939. Types of habitat and the forest marten.... Problems of Ecol. and Biocenology 4: 142-173. Kellogg, L. 1916. Report upon mammals and birds found in portions of Trinity, Siskiyou and Shasta Counties, California. Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool. 12: 335-398. Kellogg, R. 1937. Annotated list of West Virginia mammals. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 84: 443-447. Kennicott, R.I. 1855. Catalogue of animals ob- served in Cook County, Illinois. Trans. Il. State Agric. Soc. 1: 577-595. —— 1859. The quadrupeds of Illinois injurous and beneficial to the farmer. Jn Report Commis- sioner Patents 1858: 241-256. Kirk, G.L. 1916. The mammals of Vermont. Joint Bull. 2, Vt. Bot. and Bird Clubs, p. 28-34. Kirkpatrick, C.M., and C.H. Conaway. 1948. Some notes on Indiana Mammals. Amer. Midl. Nat. 39: 128-136. Kirtland, J.P. 1838. Report on the Zoology of Ohio. In 2nd Ann. Rept. Geol. Surv. Ohio, v. 2, p. 160-161, 175-177. Leedy, D.I. 1950. Ohio’s status as a game and fur producing state. Ohio J. Sci. 50: 88-94. Lensink, C.J. 1953. Population dynamics and movements of the marten in interior Alas- ka... . Quart. Rept. Alaska Coop. Wildl. Research Unit 5: 14-40. Linsley, J.H. 1842. A catalogue of the mammalia of Connecticut... . Amer. J. Sci. 43: 345- 354. Low, A.P. 1895. List of mammalia of the Labrador Peninsula... . /n Report of exploration in the Labrador Peninsula..., by A.P. Low. Ottawa, Dawson, p. 313L-321L. Univ. — 1896. List of mammalia of the Labrador Peninsula.... In Ann. Rept. Geol. Surv. Canada 8: 313-321. Lydekker, R., (Editor), 1901-1904. Library of Natural History. N.Y., Saalfield, 6 v. THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Lyon, M.W. 1933. Origins of Indiana’s mammals. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 43:27-43. —— 1936. Mammals of Indiana. Amer. Midl. Nat. 17: 1-384. Macfarlane, R.R. 1905. lected and observed kenzie River district... . Mus. 28: 673-764. Macleod, C.F. 1950. The productivity and distribu- tion of fur-bearing species of the Coast Forest of B.C..... Unpublished M.A. thesis, Univ. BAC, HOS js), Mair, C., and R. Macfarlane. Mackenzie Basin... . Toronto, Briggs, 494 p. Malaher, G.W., (Director). 1952. Minutes of the registered traplines conference of conservation Notes on mammals col- in the northern Mac- Proc. U.S. Nat. 1908. Through the officers. Manitoba Dept. Mines Resources, 119 p. Mansueti, R. 1950. Extinct and vanishing mam- mals of Maryland and District of Columbia. Md. Nat. 20: 2-48. Marshall, W.H. 1951. An age determination method for the pine marten. J. Wildl. Man. 15: 276- 283. Martin, P.W. 1950. Report on wildlife survey of Wells Gray Park 1950. Unpublished Rept. B.C. Forest Surv. Mason, M.H. 1924. The arctic forests. Hodder and Stoughton, 370 p. McAtee, W.L. 1918. A sketch of the natural his- London, tory of the District of Columbia.... Bull. Biol. Soc. Wash. 11: 1-42. McKeever, S.W., G. Frum, and E. Berard. 1951. A survey of West Virginia mammals. Pub. Conserv. Comm. West Va. 22R, 126 p. Mead, J.R. 1899. Some natural history notes of 1859. Trans. Kansas Acad. Sci. 16: 280-281. Mearns, E.A. 1898. Notes on the mammals of the Catskill Mountains of N.Y. with general re- marks on the fauna and flora of the region. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 21: 341-360. —— 1900. The native mammals of Rhode Island. Circ. Newport Nat. Hist. Soc. 1: 1-5. Melven, J. 1938. The fur industry of Manitoba. Manitoba Economic Surv. Bd., 30 p. Merriam, C.H. 1882-1884. The vertebrates of the Adirondack Region, northeastern New York. Mammalia. Trans. Linn. Soc. N.Y. 1: 9-107 and 2: 108-312. —— 1886. The mammals of the Adirondack region, northeastern New York.... N.Y., Holt, 316 p Miller, GS. 1899. Preliminary list of the mammals of New York. Bull. State Mus, 6: 273-390. —— 1900. Key to the land mammals of northeast- ern North America. Bull. State Mus. N.Y. 38: 59-160. Minville, E., ed. 1946, Péche et chasse. Montreal, Ecole des Hautes Etudes commerciales, 580 p. Mohr, C.O. 1943. Illinois furbearer distribution and income. Bull. Ill. Nat. Hist. Surv. 22: 505- Bd Monahan, R.S. 1953. Bringing back the marten. Dartmouth Alumni Mag. 46: 88. Morris, R.F. 1948. The land mammals of New Brunswick. J. Mammal, 29: 165-176. Munro, J.A., and I. McT. Cowan. 1947. A review of the bird fauna of British Columbia. B.C. Prov. Mus. Spec. Pub. 2, 285 p. Oct.-Dec. 1956] Neilson, J.M. 1948. The Mistassini Territory of northern Quebec. Can. Geog. J. 37: 144-157. Nelson, E.W., and F.W. True. 1887. Mammals of northern Alaska... . Pub. U.S. Army Signal Service 3, p. 277-293. Nelson, J. 1889. A catalogue of the vertebrates of New Jersey. Rept. State Geol. N.J. 2: 489- 824. Newby, F.E. 1955. ' vestigation; marten population status. Dept. Fish and Game Rept., p. 46-61. Newby, F.E., and V.D. Hawley. 1954. Progress on a marten live-trapping study. Trans. 19th N. Amer. Wildl. Con, 452-462. Newson, W.M. 1937. Mammals on Anticosti Island. J. Mammal. 18: 435-442. Fur resources survey and in- Mont. Norton, A.H. 1930. The mammals of Portland, Maine, and vicinity. Proc. Portland Soc. Nat. Hist. 4: 1-151. Osgood, F.L. 1938. The mammals of Vermont. J. Mammal. 19:435-441, Osgood, W.H. 1900. Biological reconnaissance of the Yukon River region.... N. Amer. Fauna 19, 43 p. Over, W.H., and E.P. Churchill. 1945. Mammals of South Dakota. Pub. by the authors, 59 p. Patterson, R.M. 1954. The dangerous river. Lon- don, Allen and Unwin, 260 p. Plummer, J.T. 1844. Scraps in natural history (Quadrupeds). Amer. J. Sci. 46: 236-249. Poland, H. 1892. Fur-bearing animals in nature and in commerce. London, Guerney and Jackson, 392 p. Ponomarev, A.L. 1944. The Mustelidae to variations in Zool. J. U.S.S.R. 23: 51-55, Poole, E.L. 1932. A survey of the mammals of Berks County, Pennsylvania. Bull. Reading Pub. Mus. 13: 1-74. Potts, M.R., and R.K. Grater. Mount Ranier National Park. Nat. Hist. Assoc., 87 p. Preble, E.A. 1902. A biological investigation of the Hudson’s Bay region. N. Amer. Fauna, 22, 140 p. —— 1908. A biological investigation of the Atha- baska-Mackenzie region. N. Amer. Fauna 27, 574 p. Preble, N.A. 1942-1943. New Hampshire. Ohio State Univ. reactions of some temperature. 1949, Mammals of Mt. Ranier The land mammals of Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, Pruitt, W.O. 1951. Mammals of the Chase S. Os- born Preserve, Sugar Island, Michigan. J. Mammal, 32: 470-472. Quick, H.F. 1953. Wolverine, fisher, and marten studies in a wilderness region. Trans. 18th N. Amer. Wildl. Conf., p. 513-532. Rand, A.L. 1933. Notes on the mammals of the interior of western Nova Scotia. Can. Field Nat. 47: 41-50. — 1944a. The status of the fisher Martes pen- nanti (Erxleben) in Canada. Can. Field Nat. 58: 77-81. — 1944b. The recent status of Nova Scotia fur bearers. Can. Field Nat. 58: 85-96. —— 1944c. The southern half of the Alaska high- way and its mammals. Bull. Nat. Mus. Can. 98, 50 p. THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 167 —— 1945a. Lesser known Ottawa mammals. Can. Field Nat. 59: 133-135. —— 1945b. Mammal investigations on the Canol Road, Yukon and Northwest Territories, 1944. Bull. Nat. Mus. Can. 99: 52 p. —— 1945c. Mammals of Yukon, Nat. Mus. Can. 100, 93 p. —— 1948. Mammals of the eastern Rockies and western plains of Canada. Bull. Nat. Mus. Can. 108, 237 p. Rand, A.L., and S.A. Rand. Canada. Bull. 1951. Mammal bones from dunes south of Lake Michigan. Amer. Mid]. Nat. 46: 649-659. Rausch, R. 1950. Notes on the distribution of some Arctic mammals. J. Mammal. 31: 464- 466. —— 1951. Notes on the Nunamiut Eskimo and mammals of the Anaktuvuk Pass region, Brooks Range, Alaska. Arctic 4: 147-195. Reeks, H. 1870 and 1871. Notes on the zoology of Newfoundland. Zool. 2d. ser. 54: 2033-2049 and 67: 2540-2553. Remington, J.D. 1950. Ecology and economics of the Rocky Mountain marten. Quart. Rept. Colo. Wildl. Res. Unit 3: 21-27 and 4: 12-23. Rhoads, S.N. 1896. Contributions to the biology of Tennessee, No. 3. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 48: 175-205, -—— 1898. Contributions to a revision of the North American beavers, otters and fishers. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. n. s. 19: 417-439. — 1903. The mammals of Pennsylvania and New Jersey.... Phila., privately printed, 266 p. Richardson, A. M. 1952. servation report 1952. Development, 202 p. Richardson, J. 1829. Fauna boreali-americana... . London, Murray, 300 p. Richmond, N.D., and H.R. Rosland. 1949. Mam- mal survey of Northwestern Pennsylvania. Penna. Game Comm. 67 p. Upper Thames Valley con- Ont. Dept. Planning and Robinson, M.J., and J.L. Robinson. 1946. Fur production in the Northwest Territories. Can. Geo. J. 1946: 1-16, Roslund, H.R. 1951. Mammal survey of north central Pennsylvania. Penna. Game Comm. 55 p. Ross, B.R. 1861a, A popular treatise on the fur- bearing animals of the Mackenzie River dis- trict. Can. Nat. and Geol. 6: 5-36. —— 1861b. List of species of mammals and birds collected in the Mackenzie River district during 1860-61.... Can. Nat. and Geol. 6: 441-444, —— 1862. List of mammals, birds and eggs, ob- served in the Mackenzie River district, with notices. Can. Nat. and Geol. 7 137-155. Rowan, J.J. 1876. The emigrant and sportsman in Canada.... London, Stanford, 441 p. Russell, F. 1898. Explorations in the far north. Univ. Iowa Press, 290 p. Rust, H.J. 1946. Mammals of northern Idaho. J. Mammal. 27 : 308-327. Sanborn, C.C. 1925. Mammals of the Chicago area. Field Mus. Nat. Hist. leaflet 8, p. 129- 151. 168 THE CANADIAN Saunders, W.E. 1932. Notes on the mammals of Ontario. Trans. Roy. Can. Inst. 18 (2), 40: 271-309. Scharf, J.T. 1882. History of western Mary- land... . Phila, publisher unknown, 2 v. Scheffer, V.B. 1938. Notes on wolverine and fisher in the state of Washington. Murrelet 19: 8-10. Schorger, A.W. 1942. Extinct and endangered mammals and birds of the upper Great Lake Region. Trans. Wisc. Acad. Sci. Arts Letters 34: 26-57. Scott, T.G. 1937. Mammals of lowa. Coll. J. Sci. 12: 43-97. Iowa State Seton, E.T. 1909. Life-histories of northern ani- mals.... N.Y. Scribner, 2 v. —— 1911. The Arctic Prairies... . N.Y., Scribner, 2 he —=— 1925-1928. Lives of game animals...) N-Y., Doubleday Doran, 4 v. (8 parts). Shoemaker, H.W. 1919. Extinct Pennsylvania ani- mals; part 2. Altoona, Tribune Pub. Co., 202 p. Skinner, M.P. 1927. The predatory and fur-bear- ing animals of Yellowstone National Park. Roosevelt Wildl. Bull. 4: 156-281. Smith, R.W. 1940. The land mammals of Nova Scotia. Amer. Midl. Nat. 24: 213-241. Soper, J.D. 1942. Mammals of Wood Buffalo Park, Northern Alberta and District of Mackenzie. J. Mammal. 23: 119-145. —— 1947. Observations on mammals and birds in the Rocky Mountains of Alberta. Can. Field Nat. 61: 143-173. — 1948. Mammal notes from the Grand Prairie - Peace River region, Alberta. J. Mammal. 29: 49-64. —— 1952. The mammals of Prince Albert Na- tional Park, Saskatchewan, Canada. Wildl. Man. Bull., Can. Wildl. Service, Ser. 1. No. 5, 48 p. -—— 1953. The mammals of Riding Mountain Na- tional Park, Manitoba, Canada. Wildl. Man. Bull. Can. Wildl. Service, Ser. 1. No. 7, 34 p. Squires, W.A. 1946. Changes in mammal popula- tion in New Brunswick. Acad. Nat. 2: 26-41. Stearns, W.A. 1883. Notes on the natural history of Labrador. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 6 (353): Mei his-1ps20-1arp Stenlund, M.H. 1955. A recent record of the marten in Minnesota. J. Mammal. 36: 133. Strong, W.D. 1930. Notes on the mammals of the Labrador interior. J. Mammal. 11: 1-10. Suckley, G., and G. Gibbs. 1860. Report on the mammals collected by the survey. Jn Reports of explorations and surveys to ascertain the... route for a railroad... to the Pacific Ocean, by I. I. Stevens. v. 12, book 2, p. 73-139, Wash., Ford. Summer, L., and J.S. Dixon. 1953. Birds and mam- mals of the Sierra Nevada.... Univ. Calif. Press, 484 p. Surber, T. 1912. Some remarks on the game mam- mals of West Virginia... . 2d biennial Rept. Forest Warden of W. Va. 1911-1912, p. 77-83. Swanson, G., T. Surber, and T.S. Roberts. 1945. The mammals of Minnesota. Tech. Bull. Minn, Cons. Dept. 2, 108 p. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Swarth, H.S. 1911. Birds and mammals of the 1909 Alexander Alaska expedition. Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool. 7: 9-172. Swenk, M.H. 1908. A preliminary review of the mammals of Nebraska. Studies Zool. Lab. Univ. Neb. 89:1-88. Tanner, V. 1944. Outlines of the geography, life and the customs of Newfoundland, Labra- dor... . Acta Geographica 8: 1-906. Taylor, W.P., and W.T. Shaw. 1929. Provisional list of land mammals of the state of Washing- ton. Occ. Papers Chas. R. Conner Mus. 2: 1-32. Thomas, E.M. 1952a. The fur-bearing mammals of Wyoming. Wyo. Wildl. 16: 23-27. —— 1952b. The fur-bearing mammals of Wyo- ming. Wyo. Wildl. 16: 12-17. Turner, L.M. 1886. Contributions to the natural history of Alaska.... U.S. Army Signal Sen, 220 jp, 1947. The status Calif. Fish and Twining, H., and A. Hensley. of pine martens in California. Game 33: 133-137. Twitchell, A-H. 1921. Notes on the mammals of the lower Yukon region. J. Mammal. 2: 40- 41. U.S. Forest Service. 1937. Estimate of fur-bearing animals on national forests, 1935-1936. U.S. Forest Service, p. 1, mimeo. Verrill, A.E. 1862. Notes on the natural history of Anticosti. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 9: 132-151. Warren, A.E. 1950. The fauna of the Royal Bo- tanical Gardens, Hamilton, Ontario. Can. Field Nat. 64: 130-133. Warren, E.R. 1942. The mammals of Colorado.... 2d ed. Univ. Okla. Press, 330 p. Webb, R. 1952. Distribution trends of the major fur-bearing animals of central British Co- lumbia. Unpublished B.A. thesis Univ. B.C., 64 p. Wheeler, G.M. 1875. Report upon geographical and geological explorations and surveys west of the one hundredth meridian.... v. 5, Zoology. Wash. Govt. Printing Office, 1021 p. Williams, C.M. 1947. Marten in Colorado. Conservation Comments 10: 12-13. Williams, S.H. 1930. Mammalian fauna of Penn- sylvania. Ann, Carnegie Mus. 19: 225-234, Wittemberg, W.J. 1919. Archaeology as an aid to zoology. Can. Field Nat. 33: 63-72. —— 1939. Lawson prehistoric village site, Middle- sex County, Ontario. Bull. Nat. Mus. Canada 94, 103 p. —— 1948. The Middleport prehistoric village site. Bull. Nat. Mus. Canada 109, 42 p. Wright, P.L. 1953. Intergradation between Martes americana and Martes caurina in western Montana. J. Mammal. 34: 74-86. Veager, L.E. 1950. Implications of some harvest and habitat factors of pine marten manage- Colo. ment. Trans. 15th N. Amer, Wildl. Conf., p. 319-334. Yeager, L.E., R.N. Denney, and H.C. Hammit. 1949, Survey of the Colorado fur resource. Current Rept. 25, Colo. Game and Fish Dept., 67 p. Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 169 RALPH EMERSON DeLURY 1881-1956 More than fifty years ago when I first made the acquaintance of a chemical labo- ratory at the University of Toronto one of the instructors was Ralph DeLury. His guidance and his cryptic red-ink remarks on my labo- ratory notebooks are vividly remembered yet. For a time our paths separated only to meet again at Ottawa where he was an astronomer at the Dominion Observatory and I had been appointed to administer Dominion wildlife protection. Ralph DeLury joined the Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club in 1916, and later became a Sustaining Life Member. He served on Council from 1920 to 1947, and as Second Vice-President in 1936 and 1937. He did not wish to accept higher office. For the period 1920 to 1940 spring ex- cursions were held in May at Fairy Lake, near Hull, Quebec, and it became customary for beLury, one of the leaders, to furnish, for comparative purposes, multigraphed lists of birds found in previous years. He was especially interested in comparing dates of arrival from year to year. Ralph DeLury was active, with others at Ottawa, in taking the Christmas Bird Census and sometimes served as Chairman of our Bird Census Committee. His party had an excellent regular route — Experimental Farm and along Rideau Canal and River to Black Rapids — and had great success in finding many birds of interest. The last census he took here was in 1945. Another Club activity of his was to serve as a member of the important Publications Committee. In the early 1920’s, when radio was new in Ottawa, the Club furnished a program of lectures and Ralph DeLury was one of our speakers. He proceeded to chat into a micro- phone as readily as though this had always been his practice. At the Club evening lectures he spoke infrequently on such topics as “Photographing the Birds” (March 24, 1938), and “Some Aspects of Bird Banding’ (March 16, 1939). His bird banding experiences are described in the Canadian Field-Naturalist (volume 38, pages 21-24, 1924). He was an excellent pliotographer and his presentations, whether spoken or written. were illustrated by his own wildlife pictures. His article “The Experimental Farm as a Bird Sanctuary” (Can. Field Nat. 39: 14, 1925) is unique in many ways. The photo- graphs and areas discussed, as well as birds mentioned as nesting, are located on an aerial map marked off in 1000-foot lines from the Dominion Observatory which is the geodetic zero point for Canada. Both the observatory and Dr. DeLury’s home, as well as nearby Clark’s Woods, the waterfowl enclosure, Dow’s Swamp, Dow’s Lake, and the Rideau Canal are shown. Ninety-three spe- cies of birds had been identified at his resi- dence, and if those seen at the Farm or near it are included, the list numbered 136 species in the previous 14 years. The list is given. R. E. DeLury and his brother, Justin S. DeLury, published one of the first breeding records for the Evening Grosbeak in Ontario (Can. Field Nat. 36: 137, 1922). DeLury served on our Committee to arrange for the first Canadian meeting of the American Ornithologists’ Union, 1926, and took an active part in the proceedings and in the Union’s first camp-out at Blue Sea Lake, Quebec. Birdbanding activities were a regular under- taking at the DeLury residence and in 1926 he banded and measured more than 700 Red- polls there. . As an astronomer his chief study was the sun. From long study of his chosen subject he evolved a mathematical law for the rate of rotation of the sun, which varies with solar latitude. He was keenly interested in fluctuations of plant growth and of animal life and considered that these and many other terrestrial phenomena reflected the sunspot cycle, whatever the mechanism connecting the terrestrial events with the suncycle or cycles might be. His thoughts on the effects of sun- spots and life are concisely expressed in the article “Sunspots and Living Things’ which appears in the Transactions of the Seven- teenth American Game Conference, New York, 1930. His article entitled “Arrival of Birds in Relation to sunspots” (The Auk 50: 414-419, 1923) shows the connection between the date of arrival of several species at Montdidier, France, according to records of the Chandon family, and the sunspot numbers. Ralph DeLury was short in stature, though of sturdy build; he was quick in action and keen-witted. Perhaps early athletics had a 170 THE CANADIAN bearing here, for he had played association football, baseball, and hockey. Probably base- ball was his favorite game as he had pitched for Princeton and was star pitcher for Ottawa Y.M.C.A. in the City League. In fact he never Jost interest in the game, and followed the local teams and the fate of the big leagues, keeping score meticulously. DeLury’s nature was kindly, equable, hu- mane. He was an enthusiast in his regular scientific work and in nature study which he considered so closely allied to it. His helpful- ness to others is indicated by a single inci- dent. Astronomers and a few assistants had spent two hectic weeks in setting up camp and instruments in the Laurentians of Quebec to observe the 1932 total eclipse of the sun. On the night before the eclipse I met him driving away from camp over an execrable trail — his mission: to get a doctor to officiate at the birth of a new Quebecois, Joseph Eclipse Morin. We did not see the total eclipse, except through rain clouds, but we did have a christening party. Upon his retirement in 1946 Ralph seemed to terminate all Ottawa interests and devote his entire energy to the development of his waterfowl and beaver sanctuary ponds at the old home, Manilla, Ontario. It seems possible that he entered too strenuously into active pursuits at Manilla after sedentary ones at Ottawa. DeLury’s official connection with the Do- minion Observatory began in 1907 when he was appointed Observer. From 1913 to 1946 when he retired with the rank of Acting Director he was in charge of the division of solar physics. In addition to his long interest in variations in solar radiation and related phenomena of the earth and the solar system, he has specified the following specialties as his concern: kinetics, amalgam FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 potential, spectroscopy, solar rotation, wave- lengths, and arc spectra. He belonged to many scientific societies as follows: American Astronomical Society, Optical Society of America, Royal Astrono- mical Society of Canada (President 1936-38), Fellow of the Royal Society of Canada, Fellow of the Royal Astronomical Society, Fellow of the London Chemical Society, Deutsche Astronomische Gesellschaft, Société Astrono- mique de France, American Society of Mam- malogists, American Ornithologists’ Union, and Cooper Ornithological Club. Ralph DeLury, one of a family of nine, was born at Manilla, Ontario, on November 23, 1881, the eighth child and fifth son of Daniel DeLury and his wife, Catherine Weir. He ‘attended Port Perry High School and graduated from the University of Toronto attaining his B.A. in 1903, his M.A. in 1904, and his Ph.D. in 1907. While at Toronto both Ralph and his youngest brother Justin lived with the oldest of the family, Professor Alfred T. DeLury. Ralph also studied at Chicago Uni- versity and was an assistant in Physical Chemistry at Princeton in 1906 and 1907. Both his parents were from Ireland and Alfred T. DeLury’s very great interest in Irish history and literature was shared by Ralph throughout the years. He died in hospital at Port Perry on September 20, 1956, and was buried near there in the family plot at Prince Albert. A sister, Abigail, of Manilla, who was formerly with the University of Saskatchewan, and two brothers, Daniel of Walker, Minnesota, and Justin S., formerly of the University of Manitoba, now of Uxbridge, Ontario, survive. His wife, Isobel MacBrien, died many years ago. Hoyves Lioyp Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN. FIELD-NATURALIST 171 A PLANT COLLECTION FROM NORTHWESTERN MANITOBA J. C. RITCHIE Department of Botany, University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, Manitoba Received for publication March 2, 1956 INTRODUCTION Only two major collections of vascular plants have been reported from the entire area of northwestern Manitoba, one by Bald- win (1953) from Reindeer and Nueltin lakes and one by Scoggan (1952) from Baralzon Lake area (Fig. 1). There is no information available about either bryophytes or lichens for this region; Thomson (1950) has provided an account of the lichens of the vicinity of The Pas, about 350 km. (220 miles) south of the area of the present study. The fol- lowing account presents the floristic data, including Vasculares, Bryophyta and _ Li- chenes, of a botanical survey which was made during the summer of 1955 in the MacBride and Tod lake regions, at 56°50'N., 99°53’W., and 56°35’N., 101°47’W. respective- ly (Fig. 1). The primary object of the in- vestigation was to describe the vegetation of small areas in detail; thus, at both locali- ties, areas no greater than 500 sq. km. (192 sq. miles) were examined. This work was made possible by an op- portunity to accompany two field parties of the Manitoba Geological. Survey, and for this the writer wishes to thank the Mines Branch of the Department of Mines and Natural Resources, Manitoba, and the geologists in charge of the parties, Messrs. L. C. Kilburn and G. C. Milligan who provided hospitality and invaluable assistance in the field. Thanks are due to Dr. H. A. Senn, Head of the Botany Unit, Division of Botany, Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, who arranged for the revision of certain vascular plants in his department; also to Drs. C. R. Ball, H. A. Crum and J. W. Thomson who named the willows, mosses and lichens respectively. The field work and subsequent laboratory work were sponsored in entirety by a grant and postdoctorate fellowship which were awarded by the National Research Council of Canada. GEOLOGY AND VEGETATION The area which includes MacBride and Tod lakes is part of the Canadian Shield region of Manitoba. With few exceptions relief is low, the ridges seldom exceeding 150 m. above the level of the lakes. The low undulating terrain consists of glacial clay till, with occasional eskers and sand plains. Neither region falls within the area of Glacial Lake Agassiz, and accordingly lacustrine deposits are absent from the areas. Rock outcrops are frequent and they are all of pre-Cambrian age. Accounts of the geology of the particular areas with which this paper is concerned are available by Milligan (1952) and Kilburn (1956). In a detailed account of the vegetation of the region (Ritchie, 1956) it is shown that both areas belong to that forest zone which is characterized on mesic sites by a closed forest of Picea mariana with a single sub- sidiary stratum of ground mosses, chiefly Pleurozium schreberi, Hylocomium splendens and Ptilium crista-castrensis; that is, they lie within the B22 or northern coniferous section of the boreal forest (Halliday, 1937) which might be referred to as the Southern Spruce Forest Zone (after Hustich, 1949). Stands of Picea glauca are rare in the region, being confined to areas of particularly fa- vorable climate and soil drainage. Pinus banksiana forms stable forests on extensive outcrop ridges, sand plains and eskers, and also assumes dominance in certain subseral communities which develop after fires. Hol- lows and depressions between till ridges contain shallow lakes and ponds, peat bog and muskeg. The preponderance of base-deficient, poorly drained soils provides little diversity of habitat and bears a relatively poor flora. The only area which was comparatively rich in species was found on the northwest shore of Tod Lake where rather exceptional fault- ing of two series of sedimentary rocks has produced a range of varied, local habitats. AN ANNOTATED LIST OF PLANTS The following list of plants amounts to 264 entities, of which 197 are Vasculares, 44 Bryophyta and 23 Lichenes. A compari- son of the list of vascular plants with that of Baldwin (1953) is of some interest since the present collection was from localities within the Southern Spruce Forest Zone, Baldwin’s Reindeer Lake material is from THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 TORIES HUDSON Zz < = ul = , O = < x 9) } < “ MANITOBA OIYVLNO nl O- miles 100 }———_____________4 ae \ | OQ kilometers 200 i ae es ni Ee Bias | N. DAKOTA MINNESOTA Fic. 1. Map of Manitoba showing the localities from which the present collections were made (M = MacBride Lake, T = Tod Lake), and those of other workers, referred to in the text (R = Reindeer Lake, N = Nueltin Lake, B = Baralzon Lake). The position of the boundaries of the northern sections of the Boreal Forest Region are shown by heavy lines. (After Halliday, 1937.) Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN a taiga region and his Nueltin Lake plants are from near the southern limit of the forest-tundra zone. In the present list are 64 entities which are not found in Baldwin’s list, and of these 50 are strictly boreal plants which probably do not extend beyond the limit of continuous, closed forest. Of the native plants mentioned by Baldwin (loc. cit.) 75 are absent from the present list and of these about 45 are arctic-subarctie species whose southern limit does not extend for any great distance into the forested regions. If this comparison is extended to include the list of Porsild (1950) from that part of Nueltin Lake which extends into Keewatin, it becomes clear that across the three vegeta- tion zones — the Southern Spruce Forest, Taiga and Forest-Tundra Zones — there is a related change of floristic affinity from boreal through subarctic to arctic. Additions and notable extensions to the flora of Manitoba are marked * and § re- spectively in the list; they have been treated at greater length elsewhere (Ritchie, 1956a). The nomenclature of the vascular plants in- cludes certain modern treatments but the more common synonyms are appended. The nomenclature of the Musci follows Richards and Wallace (1950). After the name of each entity the locality abbreviations (T — Tod Lake, M = MacBride Lake) and collection number are given, followed by brief ecolo- gical notes. A complete set of the plants is in the Herbarium of the University of Manitoba; a duplicate set of the mosses has been deposited in the Herbarium of the National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, and of the lichens in the Herbarium of the Univer- sity of Wisconsin, Madison. PTERIDOPHYTA Equisetum sylvaticum L. var pauciramosum Milde. M936. In damp, shaded parts of spruce forest and muskeg. Equisetum fluviatile L. M1036. Common, forming extensive pure stands along lake shorelines and river margins, in 15 - 50 cm. water. Equisetum scirpoides Michx. M 953. Local, in damp, shaded parts of black spruce forest and related seral types. Lycopodium annotinum L. T1274. Locally common on humous soil of open (seral) pinewood. Lycopodium, annotinum L. var. pungens (LaPylaie) Desv. M944, 1042. In shaded, damp hollows on granite outcrops and in FIELD-NATURALIST iis) shaded parts of the spruce forest. Lycopodium clavatum L. T1303. Local, found in a damp, shaded carpet of Pleuro- zum in a closed black-spruce forest on Tod Lake. Lycopodium obscurum L. T1276. Local, found in an open seral pinewood over a well drained clay loam soil. Lycopodium complanatum L. M 937, 1048. T1275. Local but widespread in shaded, mossy sites in spruce and pine forest types. § Botrychium lunaria (L.) Sw. M1124. Re- corded from only two localities, both habitats having well-drained substrata and high inso- lation. | Woodsia ilvensis (L.) R.Br. M1178, 1209. T1236. Local but common, confined to shaded outcrop crevices and ledges. *“ Woodsia alpina (Bolton) S. F. Gray. T 1264. In a deeply shaded locality, growing in a narrow ledge of a granite outcrop; the only record. Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bernh. T 1233. Local, found in shaded but dry outcrop and ridge crevices. § Cystopteris dickieana Sims. T1263. The only locality, growing with Woodsia alpina on a damp, shaded outerop ledge. Dryopteris robertiana (Hoff.) Christens. T 1261. Local, found in a erevice of a N.- facing, shaded outcrop ridge. Dryopteris fragrans (L.) Schott. T 1234, 1235. Locally common on exposed and partly shaded outcrop rock surfaces. * Thelypteris phegopteris (L.) Slosson T1257. The only locality, growing under black-spruce and balsam poplar in wet, silty soil near a small beaver dam. Cryptogramma acrostichoides R. Br. T 1298. The only record from the area, growing on the exposed surface of a granite outcrop under open jackpine. Polypodium virginianum L. M 1079, T 1260. Locally common, under spruce on a N.-facing granite outcrop. SPERMATOPHYTA Picea glauca (Moench) Voss M1226. Of local occurrence, it appears to be confined to sites with southern aspects and particu- larly well-drained, mineral soil and to local alluvial soils. Picea mariana (Mill.) BSP M935. Domi- nating forests on moderately well-drained soils and muskegs. Larix laricina (DuRoi) K. Koch M1014. Most common in wet parts of peat bogs, it 174 THE CANADIAN was also recorded in seral sprucewoods on drier soils. Pinus banksiana Lamb. M 1060. The domi- nant of forests on outcrop ridges and sand plains, it also occurs as dominant of seral forests on clay loam soils. Juniperus communis L. var. depressa Pursh M 1068. Locally common, particularly on ex- posed, sunny shoreline outcrops and slopes. Sparganium minimum (Hartm.) Fries M1092. The only record, growing at the margin of a shallow peaty pool. Sparganium angustifolium Michx. M 1075. Common in the marginal community of shal- low lakes and slow rivers, in 4% — 1 m. water. § Potamogeton robbinsii Oakes M1214. The only locality, forming a dominant submerged zone at 60 cm. in a shallow arm of MacBride Lake. Potamogeton alpinus Balbis var. tenuzfolius (Raf.) Ogden M 1215, 1219. Locally common in shallow, marginal zones of lakes and river extensions. Potamogeton gramineus L. M1136. Local- ly common in shallow, peaty lakes with Nuphar variegatum. Potamogeton richardsoni (Ar. Benn.) Rydb. M 1031, 1076. Common in rivers and lakes, growing in 4% — 1 m. water on silted bottoms. Triglochin maritima L. M1010. Local, con- fined to the wetter areas of peat bogs. Scheuchzeria palustris L. var. americana Fern. M 1007. Loeal, recorded in the wetter parts of a few peat bogs. Sagittaria cuneata Sheldon M1132, 1181, 1227. Common in marginal aquatic commu- nities of shallow lakes and river extensions, growing in 4% — 1 m. water. § Schizachne purpurascens (Torr.) Swallen T1247. Only one record, from the S.-facing slope of a high outcrop ridge. Glyceria straita (Lam.) Hitche. var. stricta Fern. T1258. Local, recorded in the wet silty soil round a small beaver dam. Poa palustris L. M1072. Local, recorded in damp clay over a shoreline outcrop. Poa glauca Vahl M1089, 1238, 1243, 1292, 1294. Common in many unshaded sites with well-drained soils. Poa ?interior Rydb. M1224. In well-drain- ed soil with juniper and Rhytidium rugosum under white-spruce. Roegneria violacea (Hornem.) Meld. (Agro- pyron violaceum (Hornem.) Lange) T 1249. Recorded from the well-drained mineral soil on the upper, S.-facing flank of a high out- crop ridge. FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Trisetum spicatum (L.) Richter M 1070. Of local occurrence, it was recorded only from certain exposed, sunny shoreline out- crops. Calamagrostis canadensis (Michx.) Nutt. M 1105, 1189, 1289. Locally dominant on dry, organic substrata. Calamagrostis inexpansa Gray M1041. Fre- quent but local, growing in areas of impeded drainage under spruce and pine canopies. Calamagrostis lapponica (Wahl.) Hartm. var. nearctica Porsild T1272. Local on clay- loam soil of an open, seral pinewood. Agrostis scabra Willd. M1102, 1175, 1287. Local, confined to habitats with well-drained soils; in outcrop crevices and open areas on clay soil under seral pinewood. Oryzopsis pungens (Torr.) Hitche. M 1126. Locally common on open clay soil under subseral pine forest. Eleocharis acicularis (L.) R. & S. M1037, 1210. Local, growing in mineral, or partly peaty substrata, at lake margins and the edges of lake bogs. Scirpus atrocinctus Fern. T 1299. Recorded from one locality, growing in the wet, silty soil of a small stream. Eriophorum medium Anders. M 1009, 1187, 1267. Occasional in the wetter parts of peat bogs. Eriophorum brachyantherum Trautv. (Erio- pherum opacum (Bjornstr.) Fern.) M 958. Local, occurring in open patches of spruce muskeg communities. Eriophorum spissum Fern. M 1038, T 1266. Infrequent, recorded in a peaty depression on a high outcrop ridge, and in a peat bog. Eriophorum gracile W. D. J. Koch M1011. In the outer, wet zones of peat bogs. Eriophorum angustifolitum Honck. M 1187a. Occasional in the outer zones of a few peat bogs. Carex gynocrates Wormsk. M956, 1005. Infrequent, found in drier parts of spruce muskeg vegetation. Carex chordorrhiza L. M1148. Locally abundant but not widespread, confined to wet Sphagnum mats in peat bogs. Carex diandra Schrank M963. Local, re- corded in the wetter areas of peat bogs, as- sociated with Menyanthes trifoliata. § Carex heleonastes Ehrh. M 968, 1024, 1147, 1185. Occasional, in hummocks of Sphagnum warnstorfianum and Camptothecium nitens in peat bogs. Carex disperma Dew. M976, T1296. Oc- casional in spruce muskeg. Oct.-Dec. 1956] Carex trisperma Dew. T1268. Local, re- corded at the edge of a muskeg lake with Myrica gale and Ledum groenlandicum. Carex tenuiiflora Wahlenb. M975. Local- ly abundant in spruce muskeg and peat bogs. -Carex canescens L. M 1040, 1100, T 1285. Common on wet organic soil at pond margins and in peat bogs. Carex brunnescens (Pers.) Poir. M 1039, 1056, 1061, T1296a. Common in dry humus of outcrop crevices and depressions. Carex bebbit Olney M1101. Local, form- ing tussocks at the margin of a small pond; growing in wet peat. § Carex leptalea Wahlenb. M1143. The only record, growing in a wet peaty stream in muskeg with Carex paupercula and Caltha palustris. Carex deflexa Hornem. M1045. Local, found in damp humus of outcrop crevices with Corydalis sempervirens and Cladonia spp. * Carex abdita Bickn. T1242. The only re- cord, growing in dry mineral soil on the southern aspect of a high outcrop ridge. Carex concinna R. Br. M1115. Very local, growing with Aulacomnium palustre in a damp hollow on clay under an open, seral pinewood. Carex aquatilis Wahlenb. M979, 1016, 1099. Common, forming local pure stands in wet peaty habitats at pond and bog margins. Carex media R. Br. M1069, 1103. Occa- sional, occurring in damp humus at pond margins, shoreline outcrops and muskegs. Carex limosa L. M965. Common in the wetter parts of peat bogs. Carex paupercula Michx. M1142. The only record, forming local tussocks in a small muskeg stream. § Carex lasiocarpa Ehrh. var. americana Fern. M 1219, 1221. Local, forming a narrow zone of dominance at the margin of a lake bog. Carex vaginata Tausch. M955, 1093. Oc- casional, found in damp peat of spruce mus- keg vegetation. § Carex oligosperma Michx. T1270. The only locality, forming a closed sward in a small damp swampy area over clay. Carex rostrata Stokes M1012, 1034, 1098, 1135. Common, in shoreline communities and at pond margins. Carex vesicaria L. M1218. Forming a zone of dominance at the outer margin of lake bog vegetation. Calla palustris L. M 1204. Locally common, THE CANADIAN: FIELD-NATURALIST 175 in shallow lakes where it forms the outer Marginal zone in wet, silty peat. § Acorus calamus L. M1228. The only re- cord, forming a small stand at the shoreline of MacBride Lake in shallow water. Juncus brevicaudatus (Engelm.) Fern. T 1308. The only record, growing in wet sand at the margin of a small depression in a sand plain pineforest. Juncus filiformis L. T1269. Local, record- ed with Carex oligosperma in an open swampy area over clay. Smilacina trifolia (L.) Desv. M974. Wide- spread, confined to areas of wet, peaty sub- strata; in muskeg and bog. Maianthemum canadense Desf. T1282. Local, occurring in the ground vegetation of a closed pine forest on a sand plain. Platanthera hyperborea (L.) Lindl. (Ha- benaria hyperborea (L.) R. Br.) M1008, 1094. Very local, confined to the wetter parts of apparently eutrophic bogs. Corallorhiza trifida Chatelain M1134. The only record, growing in deep shade under a mixed stand of black-spruce, alder and poplar. Salix pyrifolia Anderss. M988, 1058. T 1290, 1307. Common, most frequently re- corded in spruce muskeg communities. Salix mackenzieana (Hook.) Barr. M 1117. The only record, growing in an open pine forest over clay (a seral forest type). * Salix pseudocordata (Anderss.) Rydb. M1118. The only record, found in spruce muskeg beside a small peaty pool. Salix myrtillifolia Anderss. M1001. Lo- cally abundant in spruce muskeg, growing with Ledum groenlandicum and Sphagnum fuscum. Salix bebbiana Sarg. M1083, 1116. Com- mon in the region, in several communities; most commonly the chief tree of the wood- land fringe of lakes and rivers. Saliz bebbiana Sarg. var. perrostrata (Rydb.) Schneider M934, 1122. Common, the chief tall shrub in stratified, mixed woods (seral). Salix pedicellaris Pursh var. hypoglauca Fern. M 964, 1025. Common, confined to the Sphagnum-mat zone of open bogs. ‘ § Salix hebecarpa Fern. (? S. athabascensis Raup) M990, 1029. The only records, both found in spruce muskeg. § Salix petiolaris Smith M1205. Forming a discontinuous tall shrub stratum in a stand of white-birch on a dry peat ridge. Salix discolor Muehl. M1109, 1230. Not 176 THE CANADIAN uncommon, occurring on both organic (mus- kegs) and mineral (eskers) substrata. Salix discolor Muehl. var. latifolia Anderss. M 978, T1254, 1255. Common, occurring in depressions on outcrop summits under pine and in muskeg communities with black- spruce. Salix pellita Anderss. T1273. Local, re- corded in damp clay soil in an open seral pinewood community. § Salix arbusculoides Anderss. M985, 989. Of local occurrence in spruce muskeg and peat bog, growing with Larix laricina. Populus tremuloides Michx. M1188. Oc- casional, forming local stands after burning on certain ridges and occurring in a few mature mixed stands on low, alluvial sub- strata. Populus balsamifera L. M1130. Local, oc- curring sporadically in open seral pine forest over clay and on dry, exposed slopes with white-spruce; also locally common along river banks and low lake shores. Myrica gale L. M1180. Common, forming a peripheral shrub zone of several shallow peaty lakes and ponds. Betula papyrifera Marsh. var. neoalaskana (Sarg.) Raup M1059, T1252, 1265. Wide- spread, it occurs on mineral and organic substrata forming pure stands on certain very local ridges of the latter. Betula glandulifera (Regel) Butler M 983, T1291. Common, occurring in peat bog, muskeg and shoreline vegetation. Alnus crispa (Ait.) Pursh M 933. Common, forming the shrub stratum of several seral mixed forests on mineral soil, extending into muskegs. Alnus rugosa (DuRoi) Spreng. var. ameri- cana (Regel) Fern. T1300. Infrequent, re- corded in the rich peaty silt of a local stream community. Urtica gracilis Ait. M1190. Locally fre- quent, recorded only from rare birchwoods on dry organic substrata. Geocaulon lividum (Richards.) Fern. M 1067. Locally frequent in the shaded parts of black spruce stands and closed mixed forest types. Rumex ?fenestratus Greene M1211. In the outer Carex-Comarum zone of a lake-bog. Moehringia lateriflora (L.) Fenzl (Arena- ria lateriflora L.) Infrequent, recorded in open tracts between stands of pine on clay soil. Stellaria longipes Goldie M1139, 1186. Locally frequent, confined to marginal bog FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 communities. Stellaria calycantha (Ledeb.) Bong. var. floribunda Fern. M1107. In damp, peaty habitats, at pond margins and in bogs. Stellaria longifolia Muehl. M982, 1183. Local, found in wet, eutrophic peat of bogs and muskeg. Nuphar variegatum Englem. M 1132a. Common, locally abundant along shallow lake and river shorelines in % - 1 m. water. Batrachium subrigidum (W. B. Drew) Ritchie (Ranunculus subrigidus W. B. Drew) M 1096, 1216. Found in shallow marginal zones of peaty ponds and lakes. Coptidium lapponicum (L.) Beurl. (Ranun- culus lapponicus L.) M972. Local, in wet, eutrophic peat at the margin of a spruce muskeg. Ranunculus purshi Richards. (R. gmelini DC.) M971. Local, in small peaty pools of the muskeg-spruce forest ecotone. Ranunculus reptans L. M1033. The only record from the area, growing between shore- line boulders in wet mud; it forms a closed sward. Ranunculus abortivus L. var. acrolasius Fern. M970. Very local, recorded in wet, eutrophic peat at the transition between a muskeg and a spruce forest on a clay ridge. Ranunculus pensylvanicus L. f. M1108. Local, noted on a Calamagrostis-dominated raised peat ridge flanking a small pond. Caltha palustris L. M1137. Locally abun- dant, found in lake bogs and along the banks of muskeg streams. Aquilegia brevistyla Hook. M1086, 1131. Local, confined to open, unshaded habitats of mineral substrata. Actaea rubra (Ait.) Willd. M1133. The only record, occurring sparsely in the shaded, damp habitat of a shoreline willow-alder fringe. Corydalis sempervirens (L.) Pers. M 1057. Confined to the dry humous soil which fills crevices in outcrop ridges; common. Rorippa islandica Scop. var. fernaldiana Butt. & Abbe M1089. The only record, oc- curring in damp, apparently eutrophic peat at a pond margin. Arabis holboellii Hornem. var. collinsi (Fern) Rollins T1253. The only record, found in dry, mineral soil on the southern aspect of a high greenstone ridge. Drosera rotundifolia L. T1262. Very local, but abundant where found, it grows in muskegs associated with Sphagnum and Rubus chamaemorus. Oct.-Dec. 1956] Saxifraga tricuspidata Rottb. M 1073. Local, found on a few shoreline outcrops in humus over rock. Mitella nuda L. M949. Locally common, it occurs in damp, shaded parts of closed spruce and mixed forest types. Parnassia multiseta (Ledeb.) Fern. (P. palustria L. var. neogaea Fern.) M1088. Common along shorelines, growing in the damp humous soil of shaded banks. Ribes oxyacanthoides L. T1250. Occasion- al in dry mineral soil of open, S.-facing ridge slopes and shoreline outcrops. § Ribes lacustre (Pers.) Poir. M1066. Local, occurring in shaded humus of steep, spruce- clad slopes, growing with Pyrola asarifolia and Linnaea. Ribes glandulosum Grauer M1191. Occa- sional, growing in dry humus of a white- birch dominated peat ridge. Ribes triste Pall. M961. Occasional in damp, low areas of the closed black-spruce forest. Ribes hudsonianum Richards. M 938, 948. Common in various seral forest types of the black-spruce forest association. Amelanchier alnifolia Nutt. T1244. The only record, occurring on the southern aspect of a high outcrop ridge; growing in an un- shaded habitat in local abundance. Fragaria vesca L. s. lat. M977, 1128. Com- mon, occurring in mineral soils in various communities — in open pinewoods, mixed spruce-birch-pine forest types, and locally, in muskegs. Sibbaldiopsis tridentata (Ait.) Rydb. (Po- tentilla tridentata Ait.) T1295. Very local, confined to dry crevice sites on high outcrop ridges under open pine forest. Comarum palustre L. (Potentilla palustris (L.) Scop.) M981. Locally abundant in open peat bogs; also found in the outer margins of lake bogs. Drymocallis arguta Rydb. (Potentilla arguta Pursh) T1246. The only record, occurring in a rich mineral soil of a high outcrop ridge; on a S.-facing slope. § Potentilla pensylvanica L. T1251. The only record, found in dry mineral soil on the southern aspect of a high outcrop ridge. § Potentilla pensylvanica L. T1251. The only record, found in dry mineral soil on the southern aspect of a high outcrop ridge. Geum perincisum Rydb. (G. macrophyl- lum Willd. var. perinciswm (Rydb.) Raup) THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 177 M1192. Found in this area only in the ground vegetation of white-birch forest on very local organic ridges. Rubus chamaemorus L. M1138a, T 1262a. Common, occurring in the Sphagnum mat zone of peat bogs and in muskegs. Rubus pubescens Raf. M1121, 1206. Lo- cally common, occurring in the ground vege- tation of open pinewoods (seral) and on a few shoreline outcrop communities. Rubus acaulis Michx. M984. Occasional, confined to peat bogs where it occurs in Sphagnum cushions. Rubus idaeus L. var. strigosus (Michx.) Maxim. M1118, 1200. Common, occurring in dry habitats of various forest types. Rosa acicularis Lindl. M960. Of frequent occurrence in mixed and pure black spruce forests on well-drained mineral substrata. Prunus pensylvanica L. T1248. The only record, growing on the southern aspect of a high greenstone ridge in well developed mineral soil. § Oxytropis splendens Dougl. T1241. Rare, occurring on crevice habitats of a high green- stone ridge of southern aspect. Geranium bicknellii Britt. T1256. Very local, of weedy habit in a shoreline habitat exposed by recent lowering of the level of Tod Lake. Callitriche palustris L. M1078. The only record, found totally immersed at 40 cm., growing with Myriophyllum exalbescens. Empetrum hermaphroditum (Lange) Hage- rup M1055. Confined to the open pine forest community on high granite outcrops where it is locally frequent. Viola palustris L. M1150. Local, found in slightly silted peat bogs and lake bogs. Shepherdia canadensis (L.) Nutt. M 1225, T 1239. The only localities in the region, in both cases it occurred on well-drained slopes of southern exposure growing with white spruce. Chamaenerion angustifolium (L.) Scop. (Epilobium angustifolium L.) M 1028, 1030, T 1283. Scattered throughout the mixed (seral) forest types on mineral substrata, ex- tending into the spruce muskeg. Epilobium palustre L. M973, 1091, 1144. Common, found in wet peaty habitats with some mineral matter — such as muskeg streams and lake bogs. Epilobium davuricum Fisch. M 1182. Local, found only in peat bogs growing in a cushion of Sphagnum fuscum with Aulacomnium pa- lustre. 178 Epilobum glandulosum Lehm. var. adeno- caulon (Haussk.) Fern. M 1097, 1196. T 1288. Locally common in humous substrata at pond and lake margins. Myriophyllum exalbescens Fern. M 1077. Occasional in shallow shoreline waters at % - 1m. depth. Hippuris vulgaris L. M1110. Common in shallow ponds and lake margins, often as- sociated with Utricularia vulgaris. Aralia nudicaulis L. M1223. Confined to shaded, well-drained loamy soils, most com- monly found on steep spruce-clad slopes. Cicuta mackenzieana Raup M1146. Occa- sional, found in peat bogs which give evidence of local silting. Sium suave Walt. M1035. Common, grow- ing in shallow water of lakeshores, ponds and small rivers. Chamaepericlymenum canadensis (L.) As- chers. & Graebn. (Cornus canadensis L.) M 947. Locally common on well-drained slopes in the closed pure and mixed spruce forest types. Cornus stolonifera Michx. M1082, T 1301. Of local occurrence, found along lake shore- lines with willows and on stream banks with rich alluvial soil. Ramischia secunda (L.) Garcke M 1006, 1140. Of local occurrence, confined to bogs and muskegs where it grows in the cushions of Sphagnum, generally S. fuscum. Pyrola asarifolia Michx. M1065. Confined to shaded, mossy sites in closed spruce forest types where it forms local clones. Ledum groenlandicum Oeder M932. The most common shrub, it is found in all but the wettest and driest habitats, in both open and shaded locations and on both mineral and organic substrata. Kalmia polifolia Wang. M 967. Infrequent, it is found only in the transitional zone be- tween peat bogs and spruce muskeg, usually growing in a cushion of Sphagnum. Andromeda polifolia L. M966, 1021la. A bog plant, it forms conspicuous societies with various sedges and Oxycoccus microcarpus on the summits of large Sphagnum cushions. Chamaedaphne calyculata (L.) Moench var. angustifolia (Ait.) Rehd. M1013. In certain peat bogs this shrub dominates a broad inner zone, while in others it is not common; it occurs in spruce muskegs. Arctostaphylos wva-ursi (L.) Spreng. var. adenotricha Fern. & MacBr. M959, 1127. Locally abundant, it is found in dry, often mineral soil of open areas in the spruce THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 forest and (more commonly) in open, sub- seral pine forests. Arctous rubra (Rehd. & Wils.) Nakai (Are- tostaphylos rubra (Rehd. & Wils.) Fern.) M 991. Very local, it occurs in spruce mus- kegs, extending into damp, mossy situations in the closed spruce forest. Vaccinium uliginosum L. M 946, Confined to the same habitats as the last species. Vaccinium myrtilloides Michx. M 1046, T1271. Common in open pinewoods on granite outcrop ridges. Vaccinium vitis-idaea L. ssp. minus (Lodd.) Hult. M931. Locally abundant in the closed spruce forest, mixed forest types and spruce muskeg, it also occurs in pine forests on sand plains and outcrop ridges. Oxycoccus microcarpus Turez. (Vaccinium oxycoccus L.) M957. Recorded only in peat bogs and muskegs, it is locally frequent, associated with Andromeda and Sphagnum. Naumburgia thyrsiflora (L.) DC. (Lysi- machia thyrsiflora L.) M1080. Widespread in the area, it is confined to aquatic habitats, growing in 20 - 50 cm. of water at lake and river margins. Trientalis borealis Raf. T1297. The only record, growing in humous soil on a southern slope of a ridge dominated by an open stand of white-spruce. Menyanthes trifoliata L. M1015. Common in the pioneer zones of marginal lake-bog and peat-bog vegetation. Mertensia paniculata (Ait.) G. Don M 930. Common, recorded in all forest types on mineral substrata. Scutellaria epilobiifolia A. Hamilton M1081. Of local occurrence, growing in humous soil on shoreline outcrops and in the ground vegetation of white-birch stands on organic ridges. Dracocephalum parviflorum Nutt. T1305. Rare, of weedy habit, recorded on an open shoreline habitat which has been exposed by a recent drop in the level of Tod Lake. Lycopus wuniflorus Michx. M1168, 1220. Confined to wet peat, growing in lake-bogs and in shoreline habitats. Utricularia vulgaris L. M1195, T1284. Locally common in shallow peaty water of lake-bogs and ponds. Pinguicula villosa L. M1138. Rare, found only in the surface of cushions of Sphagnum fuscum in muskegs, usually associated with Rubus chamaemorus. Galium trifidum L. M1090. In local abun- dance with Sphagnum spp. and Aulacomnium Oct.-Dec. 1956] palustre in the wet marginal peat of a pond. Linnaea borealis L. ssp. americana (Rehd.) Hult. M954. Common in dry, slightly open parts of closed spruce and mixed forest types. Solidago multiradiata Ait. M1232. Con- fined to open sunny habitats in the open seral forests of eskers and dry clay plains, and on exposed outcrops. § Solidago decumbens Greene var. oreophila (Rydb.) Fern. T1240. The only record, on an exposed, S.-facing outcrop slope, growing in a small crevice. § Aster ciliolatus Lindl. M1231. The oniy record, growing in an open tract of a seral shrub woodland on a small esker. Erigeron elatus Greene M1095. Rare, re- corded in wet, peaty soil in a mixed spruce- tamarack forest over clay. Achillea millefolium L. M1104. On a dry organic ridge flanking a pond; locally com- mon. § Artemisia caudata Michx. var. douglasiana (Besser) Boivin (A. caudata of American authors) T1245. The only record, found in rich mineral soil on the southern slope of a high outcrop ridge, growing in open situa- tions of high insolation. Petasites palmatus (Ait.) Gray M939. Common, occurring in various seral types of the closed spruce forest; also it occurs sporadically in muskeg. Senecio pauperculus Michx. M1149. Of very local occurrence, recorded in a peat- bog through which a small silt-carrying stream passes. | Senecio pauperculus Michx. var. flavovirens (Rydb.) Boivin T1125. Rare, recorded in an open heathy vegetation associated with subseral pine forest. Arnica lonchophylla Greene var. loncho- phylla M1071. Rare, the only record, grow- ing on a sunny shoreline outcrop. Hieracium umbellatum L. M 1229. The only record, growing in dry humous soil on an open, outcrop island in MacBride Lake. BRYOPHYTA Sphagnum capillaceum (Weiss) Schrank M 945, 992, 1064. The dominant of muskeg ground vegetation, forming dense hummocks; it occurs sporadically in other communities. Sphagnum fuscum (Schimp.) H. Klinggr. M 994, 997, 998, 1141. Abundant in peat-bogs and muskegs, forming large cushions. Sphagnum riparium Angstr. M1194. Form- ing a pure mat covering a small depression in a spruce muskeg at MacBride Lake. THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 179 Sphagnum squarrosum Crome M 1023. It occurs locally in peat-bogs as a subsidiary hummock builder. Sphagnum warnstorfianum Du Rietz M 1022. The dominant of the stable mat of mature peat-bogs, forming large hummocks with S. fuscum. Andreaea rupestris Hedw. M1063, 1170. T1280. Common on moderately sheltered and open outcrops of rock. Polytrichum piliferum Hedw. M1164. Ty- pically it occurs as a colonizer in areas of disturbed substratum, often on the mineral soil which is exposed by uprooted trees. Polytrichum juniperinum Hedw. var. al- pestre (Hoppe) BSG. M940, 1000, 1174. Occurs in a wide range of habitats, usually in peaty, moderately to poorly drained sub- Strata. Polytrichum formosum Hedw. T1302. The only record, forming a distinct zone in a low swampy area, associated with Carex oli- gosperma and Juncus filiformis. Polytrichum commune Hedw. M 1044. Lo- cally abundant in damp humus accumula- tions in hollows of outcrops. Ditrichum flexicaule (Schwaegr.) Hampe. M1193. Uncommon, observed only on thin humus over exposed, sunny shoreline out- crops on MacBride Lake. Ceratodon purpureus (Hedw.) Brid. M 962, 1160. Local in shaded, damp sites in spruce forests, often growing on the bases of spruce trunks. Dicranum strictum Schleich. M 1167. Local, forming small tussocks in shaded humus at the base of black-spruce trees. Dicranum fuscescens Turn. M1156. Oc- casional in the ‘feather-moss’ carpet of mature black-spruce forests. Dicranum rugosum Brid. M943, 1152. Occasional, locally frequent, in black-spruce forests and related seral types. Dicranum elongatum Schleich. M 1213. The only record, occurring on a shaded granite outcrop on MacBride Lake shoreline, growing with Cladonia rangiferina. Dicranum bergeri Bland. M 920, 952, 993, 1004, 1161. A close associate of Picea mariana, being abundant in spruce forests and muskegs. Tetraplodon mnioides (Hedw.) BSG. T 1309, Local, growing at the base of black-spruce trunks in a closed forest. Pohlia nutans (Hedw.) Lindb. M 941, 1162, 1199. Common on dry, often shaded, humous 180 soils, in spruce and pine forests; occasional in muskegs. Pohlia sphagnicola (BSG.) Lindl. & Arn. M999. Locally common, confined to the surface of hummocks of Sphagnum capil- laceum in spruce muskegs. Mnium affine Bland. M112. Common in wet, open peat of bog pools and ponds. Mnium cinclidioides Hedw. M1168a. F're- quent in shaded, low humous banks of Mac- Bride River, with Climacium dendroides. Mnium sp. M1184. A new species, to be described shortly by Dr. W. C. Steere. The only record, found in wet peat at the margin of a large open bog. Meesia triquetra (Hock. & Tayl.) Angstr. M 1017a, 101942. Common in the partly sub- mersed moss mat of the outer zone of peat- bogs, associated with Drepanocladus aduncus. Meesia uliginosa Hedw. M1004a._ Infre- quent in wet areas of spruce muskegs. Bryum cuspidatum (BSG) Lindl. & Arn. M 999. Locally common, confined to the thin humous layer over clay in open subseral pine forests. Climacium dendroides (Hedw.) Web. & Mohr. M1169. Frequent on shaded, vertical banks at lake and river shorelines. Hedwigia ciliata (Hedw.) P.B. M1179. Less common than in southern regions, it forms mats locally on the sloping surfaces of outcrop rocks. Thuidium abietinum (Brid.) B. & S. M 1207. Infrequent, on damp humus of exposed shore- line outcrops at MacBride Lake. Drepanocladus aduncus (Hedw.) Warnst. M 1017, 1020, 1111. The dominant moss of the open, colonizing mat of the wetter parts of peat bogs. Drepanocladus intermedius (Lindb.) Warnst. M1018, 1019a. Associated with the previous species, it is frequent in peat bogs. Drepanocladus sendtneri (Schimp.) Warnst. M1212. Locally abundant in shallow parts of MacBride Lake where it forms a dense com- munity at 30 - 60 cm. in silty lake bottom sites with Potamogeton robbinsii and P. alpinus var. tenuifolius. Camptothecium nitens (Hedw.) Schimp. (Tomenthypnum nitens (Hedw.) Loeske) M969, 996, 1021, 1026. Abundant in the Sphagnum-mat of peat bogs and in spruce muskegs; in both communities it forms dense hummocks. Eurhynchium diversifolium (Schleich.) B. & S. M1123. Common in open, subseral pine THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 forests, growing on thin humus over clay with Peltigera canina var. rufescens. Brachythecium mildeanum (Schimp.) Milde M1198. Local, occurring in the ground vegetation of rare white-birch stands on peat ridges. Pleurozium schreberi (Brid.) Mitt. M918, 1151. The dominant of the ‘feather-moss’ layer of closed spruce woods; abundant in subseral mixed forests and in drier parts of muskegs. Hypnum hamulosum B. & S. M1085. Very local, forming loose mats on damp, exposed humus of exposed shoreline outcrops. Ptilium crista-castrensis (Hedw.) De Not. (Hypnum crista-castrensis Hedw.) M921, 1163. A characteristic member of the ‘feather-moss’ ground vegetation of mature spruce woods, forming discrete, pure stands. Rhytidium rugosum Brid. M1222. Locally abundant, confined to well-drained open sites, usually with a southern exposure. Hylocomium splendens (Hedw.) B.&S. M 926, 1153. A constant and abundant mem- ber of the ‘feather-moss’ carpet of closed black-spruce forests; also found in pine forests and in drier parts of muskeg vegeta- tion. LICHENES Nephroma helvetica Ach. T1259. The only record, found on steep outcrop slopes in dense shade under mature black-spruce forest on a North-facing ridge slope. Peltigera aphthosa (L.) Willd. M923. Fre- quent, often associated with Plewrozium schreberi in the ground vegetation of pure and mixed black-spruce forests. Peltigera aphthosa var. variolosa (Mass) Thoms. M1158a. The only record, found in the moss carpet of a mature black-spruce forest, with Pleurozium. Peltigera canina (L.) Willd. var. rufescens (Weis.) Mudd. M1120. Common on clay soil in open pinewoods. Peltigera malacea (Ach.) Funck. M 928a, 1158a. Frequent in the ground carpet of mosses in pure and mixed black-spruce forest types. Cladonia alpestris (L.) Rabh. M1154. Locally frequent in mature spruce forests where it replaces the moss carpet in areas of improved illumination. Cladonia coccifera (L.) Willd. M1172, T 1278. Common in dry, exposed humus of high outcrops and open tracts of subseral pine forests. Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN Cladonia crispata (Ach.) Flot. var. virgata (Ach.) Vainio M 942, 1173, T1279a. Common on humus of flat outcrop ridge summits and open, lichen covered tracts of open pine forests over clay. Cladonia deformis Hoffm. T1277. Occa- sional in the lichen carpet of unshaded ground in open pine forest types. ~ Cladonia glauca Flk. M928a, 995, 1159. Common in pure and mixed stands of black- spruce forests, forming small local tussocks on exposed humus, often at the bases of spruce trunks. Cladonia gracilis (L.) Willd. M1197, T 1279. Not infrequent in humous, partially shaded situations of mixed pine-birch stands on clay ridges. Cladonia mitis Sandst. M924. Locally common in drier sites of mixed spruce-pine- birch seral forest types on till ridges. Cladonia rangiferina (L.) Web. M1155. Locally abundant in incompletely shaded parts of spruce forests, on sheltered out- crops and high outcrop ridge summits. Stereocaulon paschale (L.) E. Fr. M925. Occasional in mixed spruce-pine-birch forest types on outcrop ridges. Actinogyra miihlenbergit (Ach.) Schol. M 1047. Consistently saxicolous, it is locally abundant on large exposed outcrops of ridge summits. Parmelia centrifuga (L.) Ach. M1048. Locally dominant on exposed outcrop sur- faces, it is characteristic of high ridge pine- dominated communities. Parmelia olivacea Nyl. M1202. Epiphytic, common on the bark of Betula papyrifera var. neoalaskana. Parmelia stenophylla (Ach.) Hueg. M 1049. ‘Of local occurence on outcrops of high sum- mit ridges. FIELD-NATURALIST 181 Parmelia sulcata Tayl. M1201. Epiphytic, common on the bark of Betula papyrifera var. neoalaskana. Cetraria hepatizon (Ach.) Nyl. M1053, 1171. Occasional, locally frequent on large outcrop rock surfaces of high ridge summits. Cetraria nivalis (L.) Ach. T1293. On dry humus over outcrop surfaces, on a relatively high granite ridge; the only locality for the region. Evernia mesomorpha Nyl. M1203. Epi- phytic on trunks and branches of birch, ~ spruce and pine; common. REFERENCES Baldwin, W.K.W. 1953. Botanical investigations in the Reindeer-Nueltin Lakes area, Manitoba. Nat. Mus. Canada, Bull. 128 p. 110-142. Halliday, W.E.D. 1937. A forest classification for Canada. Dom. of Canada, Dept. of Mines and Resources, For. Ser. Bull. 89. Hustich, I. 1949. On the forest geography of the Labrador Peninsula. Acta Geographica 10 (2) : 1-63. Kilburn, L.C. 1956. Geology of the MacBride Lake area, Uhlman Lake Division, Northern Mani- toba. Manitoba Mines Branch, Rept., im press. Milligan, G.C. 1952. Geology of the Laurie Lake area, Granville Lake Division, Northern Mani- toba. Manitoba Mines Branch, Rept. 50-7, p. 1-30. Porsild, A.E. 1950. Vascular plants of Nueltin Lake, N.W.T. Nat. Mus. Canada, Bull. 118. p. 72-83. Richards, P.W. and E.C. Wallace. 1950. An anno- tated list of British mosses. Trans. Brit. Bryol. Se, i (4) ¢- les. Ritchie, J.C. 1956. The vegetation of northern Manitoba. I. Studies in the Southern Spruce Forest Zone. Can. J. Bot. 34: 523-561. Ritchie, J.C. 1956a. Additions and extensions to the flora of Manitoba. Rhodora 58: 321-325. Scoggan, H.J. 1952. Botanical investigations in Manitoba in 1950. Nat. Mus. Canada, Bull. _ 126. p. 208-227. , ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS — VOLUME 70 Page 78. Under photograph insert legend and credit: Fig. 1. Drummond’s Vole (Photograph by R. D. Bird). Page 99, column 2, line 8 from bottom. For 62°7’N. lat., 115°55’W. long. read 62°27'47”N. lat., 114°54’W. long. Page 140, column 2, line 32. For Acanthus read Acanthis. Page 141. In the note entitled “Great Gray Owl Near Black Sturgeon Lake, Ontario,” the Black Sturgeon Lake intended is some 60 miles north by east of Port Arthur. 182 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 THE AMERICAN EGRET IN MANITOBA RALPH D. Birp Science Service, Entomology Division, Canada Department of Agriculture, Brandon, Manitoba Received for publication December 22, 1955 The year 1955 is noteworthy in that the American Egret Casmerodius albus egretta (Gmelin) was recorded for the first time as nesting in southeastern Saskatchewan and in southwestern Manitoba. Fox (1955) records a pair of egrets nesting and raising three young in the Qu’Appelle Valley north of Regina, Sask. Oeming and Riggall (1955) record the egret as being first seen in Alberta in 1954 at Cowley and Edmonton. I was privi- leged to find a pair of egrets nesting near Pipestone, Man. It is hence appropriate to draw together at this time all scattered records of this bird in Manitoba. R. W. Sutton, Director of the Manitoba Museum, has supplied early records from his files. An American Egret was shot at Duck Bay, Lake Winnipegosis, in 1888 by David Armit. Another was shot by an Indian on the Wanipigow River, Manigotagan, Man., in 1930. In 1953 one American Egret spent a month on a slough near Lockport. In the same year, and again in 1954, Albert Hochbaum observed an egret fly past the Delta Waterfowl Research Station, Delta, Man., in May. On May 10, 1955, I observed an American Egret feeding in flooded flats of the Souris River at Napinka, Man. When first seen it was only fifty yards from the road grade along which I was driving. I stopped and watched it with a pair of 6 binoculars. The black legs and yellow bill, with some black markings indicating it was last year’s juve- nile, were plainly visible. It then became alarmed and flew another fifty yards in the marsh and was observed to stalk and capture a large frog, which it grabbed by the middle. After much shaking and pounding, the frog was turned around and swallowed head first. The swelling could be distinctly seen as the frog went down the bird’s neck, after which the egret with its beak upright ‘smacked its chops’ with evident satisfaction. On June 5 for the purpose of photography, I visited a large colony of Great Blue and Black-crowned Night Herons nesting in some boxelder trees on an island in a marsh twelve miles north of Napinka. To my surprise and delight, an egret was found associated with American Egret at Pipestone, Manitoba (Photograph by author) the herons and obligingly sat on a tree within twenty yards of my blind near the top of an adjacent tree. I was able to secure some excellent shots in both color and black-and- white with an Exakta camera and 300-mm telephoto. The bird was much troubled by a swarm of black flies Simulium sp. and spent considerable time rubbing its neck with its bill and scratching with its foot. The herons accepted it as a member of the colony and did not molest it in any way. On returning to the colony on June 19, I found the egret frequenting the same tree. Its nest, well hidden on the end of a leafy Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN branch, was in an inaccessible spot about fifteen feet above the ground, but I was able to see the heads of at least two downy young. The mate was observed several times in flight but was quite wary and did not approach closer than fifty yards. More photographs were taken. Later, Mrs. James Stewart of Napinka wrote to say that on August 12 she saw four snow- white birds perched on trees in a swampy location along the Souris River. She ap- proached quite close and gave a very good description of the birds, which were undoubt- edly American Egrets. She described three of the four as young because they had “little . tail as yet.’ Later she approached to within twenty feet of the birds on a sand bar and FIELD-NATURALIST 183 again noted that the young did not have the “fluffy tail’ of the adult. This group of birds was probably the family I had observed nesting in the swamp twelve miles north, and their presence indicated that three young had been successfully raised. The heron colony was visited in 1953 and 1954. In neither of these years were egrets observed. REFERENCES Fox, E.L. 1955. Great American Egret, Casmero- dius albus egretta. The Blue Jay 13 (4): 7. Oeming, A.F. and F.H. Riggall. 1955. First records of the American Egret in Alberta. Can. Field Nat. 69 : 67-68. [Editor’s note : Since acceptance of this article the author has informed me that no egrets were seen in 1956.] SEVENTH CENSUS OF NONPASSERINE BIRDS IN THE BIRD SANCTUARIES OF THE NORTH SHORE OF THE GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE Louis LEMIEUX Canadian Wildlife Service, Quebec, Quebec Received for publication January 26, 1956 The seventh quinquennial census of nonpas- serine birds in the bird sanctuaries of the north shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence was con- ducted from June 2 to June 21, 1955. Travel was with the Royal Canadian Mounted Police - ship MacBrien, from Rimouski to Blanc Sa- blon and return. The kind co-operation of the MacBrien crew and the fine weather en- joyed throughout the trip made it possible to complete the census in so short a period. The author was ably assisted by Raymond Cayouette, of the Quebec Zoological Garden. The sanctuary caretakers also participated in this census. The techniques used in taking the census were those described by Dr. H.F. Lewis and followed in the past, except that no estimates were made for birds absent from their nests. It is very difficult to estimate the number of birds away fishing, for instance, since it varies with weather conditions, abundance of food, etc. If the same technician did the work year after year, his estimates might be con- sistent; however, the census was conducted by different persons in 1945, 1950, and 1955, and it is believed that the estimates may vary considerably on this account. The results for 1955 shown in Table 1 are therefore straight counts. When nests, including those of auks and murres, were counted, their number was, of course, doubled to obtain the number of nesting birds, since only one bird of a pair is on the nest at a time. The 1955 results may thus be interpreted as conservative. It must be further noted that the counts in 1955 were made earlier in the summer than in the past. A total of 115,700 birds was counted in 1955, an increase of 17 percent over 1950, and of 14 percent over 1945. Three sanctuaries showed decreases since 1950 and the re- mainder showed increases. Most of the important species were more abundant than in 1950, razor-billed auks having increased by over 100 percent. Eiders were at the 1950 level, still less abundant than in 1945. 184 THE CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 TABLE 1. CreNsus oF NONPASSERINE BIRDS IN THE BirD SANCTURIEs | Carrousel Birch Species Island Islands Betchouane Watshishu Fog 1950 1955 1950 1955 1950 1955 1950 1955 1950 Red-throated loon 28 European cormorant Double-crested cormorant 164 240 104 270 Black duck 10 30 6 Pintail 6 Green-winged teal ' 4 American eider 78 130 1688 1970 1562 1580 1564 430 600 Red-breasted merganser 4 0 2 Semipalmated plover 2 0 10 Spotted sandpiper 2 2 12 26 14 6 12 0 30 Great black-backed gull 2 2 10 54 104 64 114 190 124 Herring gull 800 1450 634 1330 492 724 158 52 124 Ring-billed gull 150 714 0 Kittiwake 600 178 © 76 120 Common and Arctic terns 250 176 62 2 420 128 54 Caspian tern 0 Razor-billed auk 38 25 280 444 30 34 22 Common murre 2400 Brunnich’s murre Black guillemot 148 145 44 20 32 18 108 Puffin 662 232 0 Totals 1832 2172 2638 3576 3402 3896 2450 1152 3518 On Carrousel Island, the bird population was higher than in 1950, lower than in 1945. Kittiwakes have decreased in number sub- stantially, but this is probably due to the fact that many have moved out of the sanctuary to establish new colonies on nearby islands (Manowan and Great Boule). Other species show slight variations. On Birch Islands, the total number of birds has increased by approximately 30 percent since 1950, and by more than that since 1945. Herring gulls and eiders show the largest increases. Terns were not abundant, but were only beginning to arrive in the sanctu- ary at the time the count was made. The Betchouane sanctuary also showed an increase since the last two censuses. Eiders were af the 1950 level, while herring gulls, ring-billed gulls, and kittiwakes had greatly increased. Puffins had decreased. Terns were just beginning to arrive. The Watshishu sanctuary bird population has devreased by 50 percent since 1950. There is an increasing boat traffic through this sanctuary; 15 boats were seen while we travel- ed through it. Many fishermen set lobster traps and salmon nets in the sanctuary. The increased human activity probably accounts for the decrease of birds, and it may be expected that the trend will continue. Eiders and herring gulls have decreased sub- stantially in the sanctuary. -Terns had not. yet started to nest. An increase was noted in the Fog Island bird population. Ring-billed and great black- backed gulls as well as eiders were more abundant. Murres showed a surprising de- crease; they were apparently not all nesting at the time we visited the sanctuary. A 100 percent increase of the total bird population was recorded at the Wolf Bay sanctuary, puffins and razor-billed auks having increased tremendously. There, too, the season was early for terns. The eider popula- tion was higher than in 1950. Conditions were stable at the St. Mary Islands. The total number of birds was somewhat lower than in 1950; a decrease in Oct.-Dec. 1956] THe CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST 185 or THE NorRTH SHORE OF THE GULF oF ST. LAWRENCE, 1950 AND 1955 LG ee ae oe mL aT a a NIMS UD nt nent er I ne Tt Wolf St. Mary Bradore {sland Bay Islands Mecatina St. Augustin Bay Totals 1955 1950 8=©1955 1950 1955 1950 1955 1950 1955 1950 1955 1950 1955 24 10 4 20 16 30 24 16 14 104 82 490 678 490 678 164 180 0 14 0 26 432 730 8 2 1 0 2 4 20 22 61 2 2 0 8 2 0 2 2 6 2 910 720 1126 600 1450 750 142 1100 950 8662 8688 0 0 30 6 0 0 6 12 36 0 2 1 a 0 12 4 30 5 24 6 12 12 16 14 8 16 2 12 16 130 112 268 228 248 106 748 150 56 160 90 0 4 998 1724 66 396 364 670 1032 548 276 860 1184 0 4 4682 6492 1762 30 0 0 314 200 2790 676 298 82 8 44 0 8 0 10 794 450 76 0 76 50 2200 8030 3800 3906 144 0 1760 6000 8274 18489 670 2180 2054 6862 7070 180 2500 11622 12294 2 0 2 0 126 6 100 326 312 600 200 182 70 1446 991 2 5600 9670 5400 2538 48622 49258 60284 61700 | 4070 11518 21862 18296 17792 2290 734 2344 2654 50586 57792 98874 115700 the puffin population is responsible for this. Eiders were more abundant than in 1950, and so were most other species. Brunnich’s murres were not seen at the time of the census, but the caretaker has since reported observing one of these birds. The European cormorant colony has increased substantially. St. Mary and Fog Islands are no doubt the most interesting sanctuaries along the coast because so many different species nest there. The Mecatina sanctuary was blocked with ice in the spring, and this may account for the great decrease of the bird population there. Black guillemots, razor-billed auks, herring gulls, great black-backed gulls, and eiders were less abundant than in 1950. Not much change was observed at St. Augustin Islands; herring gulls had increased while eiders showed a slight decrease. The black guillemot and black-backed gull popula- tions were low. At Bradore Bay, auks and murres had greatly increased, while puffins were slightly more plentiful. Other species were present in insignificant numbers. The total bird popula- tion of this sanctuary had increased sub- stantially. As may be seen, conditions were generally very good in 1955 in the north shore bird sanctuaries. BIBLIOGRAPHY Hewitt, Oliver H. 1950. Fifth census of nonpas- serine birds in the sanctuaries of the north shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Can. Field Nat. 64: 73-76. Lewis, Harrison F. 1925. The new bird sanctuaries in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Can. Field Nat. 39: 177-179. —— 1931. Five years’ progress in the bird sanctua- ries of the north shore of the Gulf of St. Law- rence. Can. Field Nat. 45: 73-78. —— 1037. A decade of progress in the bird sanctua- ries of the north shore of the Gulf of St. Law- rence. Can. Field Nat. 51: 51-55. —— 1942. Fourth census of the nonpasserine birds in the bird sanctuaries on the north shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Can. Field Nat. 56: 5-8. Tener, J.S. 1951. Sixth census of nonpasserine birds in the bird sanctuaries of the north shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Can. Field Nat. 65: 65-68. 186 THE: CANADIAN FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 REVIEWS Annual Report for 1955 of the Denver Museum of Natural History Colo., 1956. 70 p. This finely printed and illustrated booklet demonstrates the rapid growth and develop- ment of the Denver Museum. Included are photographs of twenty-nine habitat groups and murals that appear to be of excellent quality. Several of the groups illustrated are of prime interest to Canadian naturalists. The Museum is to be congratulated both for this attractive report and for the achievement that it represents. Denver, D. B. O. SAVILE The Last Passenger By JaMes RALPH JOHNSON, New York, The Mac- millan Company and Toronto, Brett-Mac- millan Ltd. 1956. 10 pen drawings, 116 p. S27: The story of the last of a wildlife species is ever one of nostalgia and regret but the tragedy lies only in the ruthless role played by man in its disappearance without return. In this little book the author offers the life history of Blue, the last passenger pigeon, and he selected this theme for the sentient reason that he could not bear the thought of the last survivor of a famous species living out its life in a zoo, but envisioned it as a feed bird winging its own way into oblivion. In light sketches he draws the biological background of the passengers, re- vealing to those who may not know some of the important factors which, apart from man’s merciless slaughtering, in time perhaps inevitably would have brought about the ex- tinction of a species once so impressively alive. There is a lack of good timing in that it seems impossible to compress the period lasting from the flocks of thousands “darken- ing the skies” to the existence of but one survivor within the short life span of a single bird, in the opinion of this reviewer an all too ultrarapid reduction, and in this an opportunity for subtle dramatization has perhaps been overlooked. Despite anthropo- morphic lapses, admittedly difficult to avoid in a biographical sketch of this kind, and a now obsolete theory on bird migration, the appeal of Blue is poignant, less so through the literary ability of the author than through the very fact that the gentle bird must have existed. When writing of weather and flight in particular, the author nevertheless presents us passages of much poetic beauty and understanding because, being an air- man in the United States Air Force, he knows these things intimately and has a profound feeling for them. His greatest artistic contri- bution Mr. Johnson undoubtedly makes by. his own exquisite pen drawings which il- lustrate the book. His audacity of design re-. calls Audubon’s folios but he works it beyond the mere figures of the wildlife into their backgrounds with fine artistry. This alone should secure the book a space on the book shelf of every discerning nature lover. LOUISE DE KiRILINE LAWRENCE The Great Migrations By GEORGES BLOND. New York, The Macmillan Company and Toronto, Brett-Macmillan Ltd., 1956. 192 p. $4.00. This interesting book, which will delight the layman and occasionally inform the expert, deals with half a dozen of the world’s most spectacular animal mass-movements. Whether these journeys are all migrations in the dictionary meaning of that word is im- material since they are all dramatic, arrest- ing, intensely interesting, not yet fully ex- plained and of great importance to man. Once started, the book will not easily be laid aside. The author has made skillful use of the device of anthropomorphism, in a way that adds much to the presentation of the bio- logical data. The migrations chosen are of great interest. The biological facts may be a little over- shadowed, in some cases, by the dramatic form of presentation. The author has secured his scientific facts and interpretations from experts in the field. He has mentioned his advisers but, as might be expected in a book written primarily for the layman, has not included a bibliography of titles or other exact references to pub- lished literature in the fields covered. Five of the six examples chosen are from the old world but references to research and the choice of a North American species, the North American bison for one example, indicate the breadth of the author’s research in preparation for the writing of the book. The use of old-world examples is particu- Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN larly interesting in a book readily available to a North American audience because it indicates the universality of the phenomena described and the impact of North American research results on the development of European theories. Several points of view are presented for each controversial matter in the well-rounded and interesting discus- sions. The spectacular and hazardous migration of the Asiatic Graylag geese, at first on foot and then in flight at high altitude over the major mountain barriers of Asia, is well described. The carefully detailed description of Atlantic salmon migration from freshwater hatching through marine growth to fresh- water spawning is well done according to classical information. Recent United States and Canadian work on chemical sensitivity as guides to spawning streams, however, is not mentioned. The history of the unfolding of the facts of the migration of the eel and its study over a period of 2300 years is given all its beauti- ful simplicity and amazing complexity. The story of the extirpation of the plains bison from the majority of its North Ameri- can range includes a wealth of historical detail, much of which is of no credit to the authorities of the time during which the major destruction occurred. The full horror and appalling beauty of the locust plagues in Africa, of their devastation of crops and of modern methods which are now bringing them under control and re- ducing the agricultural loss, are described in vivid detail. The idea of a cloud of pink locusts covering an area of 90 square miles is difficult to grasp, but the author manages to convey a large measure of understanding through his dramatic treatment. The build-up of lemming populations, the stresses and endoctrine upset, the persistence of the long and difficult migration are, for greater effect, presented as if seen through the eyes of one of the lemmings. The lemming story, as carefully based on up-to-date scien-. tifie evidence as all the others, illustrates again the versatility of the author and his ability to transmit vivid impressions and general biological principles to the reader. The book has been translated from the French into smooth-flowing English by Francis Frenaye. The type is easy to read and free from typographical errors. V. E. F. SOLMAN FIELD-NATURALIST 187 The Singing Wilderness By SiGuRD F. OLson. New York, Alfred A. Knopf, 1956. 38 illustrations by Francis Lee Jaques, 245 p. $4.00. No one who has traveled in the wilderness or toted a canoe over a portage or paddled down a quiet lake can fail to find a responsive chord in this book. Not a natural history book in the sense that it provides facts or seeks to instruct the reader in nature lore, it is rather an interpretation of the deep emotions aroused by close association with the wilder- ness and the creatures living there. In a series of short essays describing various experiences in the Quetico-Superior country, the author expresses in beautifully written, at times almost lyrical, prose the feelings and emotions aroused by his personal contacts with the sights, sounds, and smells of nature. The essays are unrelated except that they are loosely grouped to follow the march of the seasons from spring to winter. It is the simple things that appeal to him: the early signs of spring, a squirrel gathering pine cones, a simple country church service, the call of the loon, collecting pine knots for the fireplace in winter, a lonely trapper’s cabin, and simply the silence of the woods. The one theme that binds together all these seemingly unrelated incidents is the need of mankind for the wild places and the necessity of preserving areas of wilderness in their natural conditions, and of conserving not only the game animals as a meat supply but also the predators and all forms of wildlife in a balanced community of nature. The book is beautifully and tastefully il- lustrated with black and white drawings by Francis Lee Jaques. J. WALTON GROVES The Mammals of Minnesota By Harvey L. GUNDERSON and JAMES R. BEER. Minneapolis, The University of Minnesota Press. (Minnesota Museum of Natural History Occasional Papers: Number 6). 26 photo- graphs, 66 distributional maps, 190 p. 1953. Although this booklet is restricted to Min- nesota, it should find ready acceptance among Canadians living in the prairie provinces. Each species recorded in the state within historic times is treated, with range maps on which are plotted specimen and _ sight records. The short account devoted to each species contains a brief description of the mammal and comments on habits and life history. There are good photographs of a 188 THE CANADIAN number. of species. More advanced students will: find the keys to species useful; these are grouped according to order. The introductory chapter, dealing with the techniques of study skin preparation, is very good and will be of wide general interest. The accompanying photographs, showing the various steps in the procedure, will be wel- comed by the beginner. The sections devoted to trapping methods and specimen label data will also be most useful for the amateur in- terested in building up a collection of his own. Both the authors and the publisher are to be complimented on the excellence of this small volume. AUSTIN W. CAMERON Theophrastus on Stones By EarLeE R. Caley and JOHN F. C. RICHARDS. The Ohio State University, Graduate School Monographs, . Contrib. in Phys. Sci., No. 1. 238 p., 1956. $6.00. Twentieth-century geologists, on the whole, have been much more interested in develop- ing the theoretical and practical aspects of their science than in studying its early de- velopment. The late Frank D. Adams was one of the exceptions to this rule and we owe him a debt of gratitude for his excellent Birth and Development of the Geological Sciences (1938) now again available as a Dover reprint. Interest in the history of FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 geology seems to be growing at present, as shown by the list of reprints and translations which give us an insight into the ancient and medieval knowledge of our science. Professors Caley and Richards have just published still another such work, important because of its antiquity, a thoroughly scholar- ly edition of the Greek text of Theophrastus’ On Stones with an accurate translation and commentary. They are particularly well-fitted for their task; Professor Richards is a Greek scholar of high reputation and Professor Caley a chemist with specialized knowledge of classical archeology, mineralogy, and geo- logy. This book is highly recommended to all geologists interested in the early beginnings of their science. In fact, it is fascinating reading for anyone with an interest in geo- logy, mineralogy, or chemistry, for here are the first faltering footsteps in these sciences, still encumbered with myth and fancy, but nevertheless revealing penetrating insight into the nature of rocks and their origin and much less fanciful than some of the lapidaries of the Middle Ages. The Ohio State University Graduate Schoo! has spared neither pains nor expense to pro- duce a book of fine scholarship and pleasing appearance, which will be a cherished addi- tion to any geologist’s library. AURELE LA ROCQUE Oct.-Dec. 1956] INDEX TO VOLUME 70 Compiled by Joun M. GILLETT Acanthis flammea, 134, 140; hornemanni, 134 Achillea millefolium, 179; sibivica, 128 Acorus calamus, 108, 175 Actaea rubra, 176 Actinoceras bigsbyi, 67 Actinogyra miihlenbergii, 181 Agrimonia striata, 118 Agropyron cristatum, 83; pectiniforme, 105; repens var. repens, 105; trachycaulum var. glaucum, 105; trachycaulum var. novae-angliae, 104; trachycaulum var. unilaterale, 105; vitolaceum, 174 Agrostis scabra, 174 Aikman, E. F. Brown-headed Chickadees in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, 94 Alaska, Notes on some birds and mammals of the Colville River, by Edward B. Reed, 130 Alberta, New plant records for northern, and south- ern Mackenzie district, by W. J. Cody, 101 Alces alces gigas, 136 Alisma plantagoaquatica ssp. brevipes, 103; triviale, 103 Alnus crispa, 176; Alopex lagopus, 134 Amelanchier alnifolia, 117, 177; florida, 117; san- guinea, 117 Ammodramus savannarum pratensis, 138 Amysgdalocystites florealis, 67 Anas acuta, 72, 132, 139; discors, 137; rubripes, 72 Andreaea rupestris, 179 Andromeda polifolia, 178 Androsace septentrionalis, 122 Anemone multifida, 113; multifida var. sansonii, f. sansoni, 113; multifida var. hudsoniana {. hud- soniana, 113; multifida var. hudsoniana f. san- guinea, 113; multifida var. sansonii f. galactt- flora, 113; multifida var. saxicola, 113; ri- chardsonii, 71, 113 Annual meeting of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, 1955, 91 Annual Report for 1955 of the Denver Museum of Natural History, reviewed by D.B.O. Savile, 186 Anser albifrons flavirostris, 137 Antennaria campestris var. athabascensis, 127; in- carnata, 127, 128; leontopodioides sp. nov. 127; 128; rosea, 127 Anthoza, 51 Anthus spinoletta rubescens, 74 Apocynum sibiricum, 122 Aquila chrysaetos, 95, 139; 133 Aquilegia brevistyla, 176 Arabidopsis glauca, 116; mollis, 116 Arabis glabra, 116; hirsuta var. pycnocarpa, 116; holboelli var. collinsiz, 176; holboellit var. re- trofracta 116; hookerii, 116; retrofracta var. collinsii, 116; retrofracta var. retrofracta, 116 Aralia nudicaulis, 121, 178 Arctagrostis arundinacea, 105 Arctophila fulva, 105 Arctostaphylos rubra, 178; var. adenotricha, 178 Arcztous rubra, 178 Avenaria capillaris, 112; lateriflora, 176 rugosa var. americana, 176 chrysaetos canadensis, uva-ursi, 121; uva-ursi 1 ty} tte THE CANADIAN FiELp-NATURALIST iN 138 98! ) Arnica lonchophylla var. lonchophylla, 179 Artemisia caudata var. douglasiana, 179; 128; ludoviciana var. gnaphalodes, 128 Asio flammeus, 133 Aster angustus, 126; 126 Astragalus adsurgens, 119; eucosmus, 119; goniatus, 119; hypoglottis, 119; striatus, 119; -yukonis, 119 Atriplex patula var. hastata, 111 Auk, Razor-billed, 184 Aulacomnium palustre, 175, 177, 178 Aythya collaris, 137; marila nearctica, 132 frigida, ciliolatus, 179; pauciflorus, Back River, N.W.T., Annotated list of birds of part of, by John S. Tener, 138 Balanus, 61; crenulatus, 68 Baldpate, 90 Banfield, A. W. F., Records of two microtine rodents from the Quebec tundra, 99 Bartramia longicaula, 144 Bassariscus, 153 Bathyurus extans, 67; trispinosis, 67 Batrachium subrigidum, 176 Bats, in Saskatchewan, additional records of, by N.S. Novakowski, 141 Bear, Grizzly, 134 Beluga, 34 Betula glandulifera, 176; glandulosa, 71; fera var. neoalaskana, 176, 181 Bidens cernua, 128 Bird, Ralph D. The American Egret in Manitoba, 182 Birds wintering at Calgary, 1954-55, by W. Ray Salt, 93 Blackbird, Brewer’s, 90, 91; 91; Rusty, 87, 89 Bluebird, Eastern, 89; Mountain, 140; Western, 90 Bluethroat, Red-spotted, 133 Bob-white, 87 Botrychium lunaria, 173; Brachiopoda, 55 dum, 101 Brachythecium mildeanum, 180 Brant, 90; Black, 132 Branta bernicla, 132; canadensis, 132, 139; cana- densis canadensis, 72; canadensis interior, 72 Brassica juncea, 115; rapa, 115 Bromus inermis, 83, 104 Brown-headed Chickadees in the Gulf of St. Law- rence, by E. F. Aikman, 94 Bryozoa, 54 Bryum cuspidatum, 180 Bubo virginianus, 96; virginianus saturatus, 96 Bucephala, 72; islandica, 72 Buffle-head, 85, 86, 88-90 Bumastus milleri, 67 Bunting, Eastern Snow, 74; Snow, 85-90, 134, 140 Buteo lagopus, 133, 139 Butler, T. H. A first British Columbia record of the Cragonid Shrimp, 142 Byssonychia radiata, 68 Bythotrephis, 47 papyri- Red-winged, 88, 89, multifidum var. multifi- 190 Tur -CANADIAN -inexpansa, 174; nearctica, 174; Calamagrostis canadensis, 174; lapponica, 105; lapponica var. neglecta, 195 Calapoecia canadensis, 64 Calcarius lapponicus, 134, 140; cus, 74 Callitriche palustris, Caltha natans, 113; var. arctica, 113 Camarotoechia plena, 8, 34, 39, 45, 46, 64 Camelina sativa, 116 Cameron, Austin W. Review of: The Mammals of SOLS 187 Camptothecitum nitens, 174, 180 Canis lupus, 134 Canvas-back, 86, 89, 90 Capella gallinago delicata, 133 Capsella bursa-pastoris, 116 Cardamine parviflora var. arenicola, 115; vanica, 115 Cardinal, 87, 88; Eastern, 89 Carduelis flammea, 77 Carex, 71; abdita, 175; atratiformis, 108; bonanzensis, 107; la DBOnIEUS lapponi- 120, 177; - verna, 120 palustris, 175, 176; palustris pennsyl- aenea, 107; aquatilis, 175; bebbiz, 175; bigelowi, 71; brunnescens, 175; buxbau- mii, 108; canescens, 175; capitata, 106; chor- dorrhiza, 107, 174; concinna, 175; deflexa, 107, 175; diandra, 174; disperma, 107, 174; gynocrates, 174; heleonastes, 174; incurva, 107; lanuginosa, 108; lasiocarpa, 175; lasio- carpa var. americana, 108; leptalea, 175; limo- sa, 175; maritima, 107; media, 108, 175; oli- gosperma, 175, 179; paupercula, 175; peckii, 107; rvaymondii, 108; ~rossii, 108; rostrata, 108, 175; sprengelii, 108; supina var. spanio- carpa, 107; sychnocephala, 107; tenuiflora, 175; trisperma, 175; vaginata, 175; vahli var. inferalpina, 108; vesicaria, 175 Caribou, 75; Barren Ground, 136 Carum carvi, 121 Casmerodius albus egretta, 182 Castilleja miniata, 123, 124; rhexifolia, 123, 124 Catbird, 137 Catoptrophorus semipalmatus inornatus, 95 Cephalopoda, 58 Cerastium arvense, 112; 112 Ceratodon purpureus, 179 Cetraria hepatizon, 181; nivalis, 181 Chamaedaphne calyculata, 121; calyculata var. an- gustifolia, 178 Chamaenerion angustifolium, 177 Chamaepericlymenum canadensis, 178 Charadrius hiaticula, 140; hiaticula semipalmatus, ey, W) Clan hyperborea, 139 Chenopodium berlandierz var. gantospermum, 111 Chickadee, Black-capped, 85-90; Brown-capped, 85; Brown-headed, 89, 94; Chestnut-backed, 90; Hudsonian, 89. Choque, Fr. Charles, Myrtle Warbler at Baker Lake, N.W.T., 97 Chordeiles minor, 76 Christmas bird census for 1955, 85 Cicuta mackenzieana, 121, 178 Citellus undulatus, 134 Cladonia, 71, 175; alpestris, 180; coccifera, 180; crispata var. virgata, 181; deformis, 181; glau- vulgatum var. hirsutum, zschackei, 111; gi- FIeELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 ca, 181; gracilis, 181; mitis, 181; rangiferina, 179, 181 Clangula hyemalis, 73, 132, 137 Clethrionomys, 83; gapperi, 144; 74, 99; rutilus, 99 Climacium dendroides, 180 Climacograptus inuiti similis, 67 Cody, W. J. New plant records for northern Alberta and southern Mackenzie District, 101 Colpodium fulvum, 105 Comarum palustre, 177 Conularia, 52; trentonensis, 65 Coot, 89; American, 87, 90 Coptidium lapponicum, 176 Corallorhiza maculata, 109; trifida, 175 Cormorant, Brandt, 90; Double-crested, 184, Euro- pean, 85, 184 Cornus canadensis, 178; Corvus corax, 133 Corydalis aurea ssp, aurea, 114; sempervirens, 114, 175, 176 Cowan, I. McT. Review of: Prairie Ducks, 145 Cowbird, 85; Eastern, 89; Nevada, 144 Crane, Little Brown, 133 Creeper, Brown, 85-89 Cremacrinus inaequalis, 67 Crepis tectorum, 129 Criddle, Stuart Drummond’s Vole in Manitoba, 78 Richardson’s Merlin nesting in Manitoba, 94 Crinoidea, 63 Crossbill, Red, 87; White-winged, 77, 86-88, 90, 91 Crossbills, The White-winged, of Newfoundland, by Kenneth C. Parkes, 98 Crow, 85, 87-89; American, 86, 88-90; Northwest- ern, 90 Cryptogramma acrostichoides, 173 Ctenodonta gibberula, 66; nasuta, 66 Curlew, Hudsonian, 133 Cyclospira bisulcata, 65 Cyrtodonta canadensis, 66; carinata, 66 Cystoidea, 62 Cystopteris dickieana, 173; gappert ungava, stolonifera, 178 huronensis, 66; sub- fragilis, 173 DeLury, Ralph Emerson (biography), by Hoyes Lloyd, 169 Dendroica dominica albilora, 138; magnolia, 144; palmarum, 77; cola, 138; striata, 74, 77 hypochrysea, 77; petechia amni- Descurainia pinnata var. brachycarpa, 115; richard- sonii, 115; sophia, 115 Dickcissel, 143 Dicranum bergeri, 179; elongatum, 179; fusces- cens, 179; rugosum, 179; strictum, 179 Dicrostonyx hudsonicus, 74, 99 Dinorthis iphigenia, 65 Diplograptus amplexicaulus pertenius, 67 Dipper, 90 Distichlis spicata var. stricta, 104; stricta, 104 Ditrichum flexicaule, 179 Doleroides pervetus ottawanus, 26, 65 Dove, Mourning, 87-90; Rock, 86, 88-90 Draba nemorosa var. leiocarpa, 116; praelta, 116 Dracocephalum parviflorum, 122, 178 Drapenella, 38 ' Oct:-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN Drepanocladus aduncus, 180; intermedius, 180; sendtneri, 180 Drosera rotundifolia, 117, 176 Drymocallis arguta, 177 Dryopteris fragrans, 173; fragrans var. remotius- cula, 102; robertiana, 173 Duck, Black, 72, 85-89, 184; Harlequin, 90, 132; Ring-necked, 137; 86; Wood, 89 Dumetella carolinensis, 137 Greater Scaup, 90; Ruddy, Kagle, Bald, 87; Golden, 133, 139 Ecculiomphalus disjunctus, 64 Echinodermata, 62 Edrioasteroidea, 62 Egret, American, in Manitoba, by Ralph D. Bird, 182 Egret, American, 182; Little, 137; Egretta garzetta garzetta, 137 Eider, American, 184; Common, 85 Eklund, Carl R. Bird anad mammal notes from the interior Un- gava Peninsula, 69 Eleocharis acicularis, 174; 106 Elliott, K. R., R. F. James and N. D. Martin Great Gray Owl near Black Sturgeon Lake, Ontario, 141 Elymus canadensis, 105; macounii, 105 Empetrum hermaphroditum, 177 Epilobium angustifolium, 177; davuricum, 177; glandulosum var. adenocaulon, 120, 178; palus- tre, 177; tetragonum, 120 Equisetum fluviatile, 173; hyemale var. affine, 102; palustre, 102; prealtum, 102; scirpoides, 173; sylvaticum var, pauciramosum, 173 Eremophila alpestris, 140; alpestris alpestris, 73 Ereunetes pusillus, 73, 133 Erigeron acris var. arcuans, 126; acris var. asteroi- des, 126; angulosus var. kamtschaticus, 126; canadensis, 127; compositus var. trifidus, 127; elatus, 126, 179; lonchophyllus, 127 Eriophorum angustifolium, 71, 174; brachyanthe- rum, 174; gracile, 106, 174; medium, 174; opacum, 174; spissum, 174 Erolia bairdii, 133, 140; melanotos, 133; 73 Escharopora frondosa, 65 Euphorbia serpyllifolia, 120 Euphrasia disjuncta var. dolosa, 124 Eurhynchium diversifolium, 180 Evernia mesomorpha, 181 Snowy, 136 pauciflora var. fernaldii, minutilla, Falco columbarius richardsoni, 94; peregrinus, 133, 140 Falcon, Peregrine, 133, 140 Financial Statement of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, 1955, 100 Finch, Common Purple, 89; 86-88, 90; Rosy, 91 Fisher, Distribution of, in North America, by Edwin M. Hagmeier, 149 Flexicalymene senaria, 67 Flicker, Red-shafted, 90; Yellow-shafted, 86, 87, 89 Fluminia festucacea, 104 Fox, Arctic, 134; Red, 134 Fragaria canadensis, 117; glauca, 117; House, 91; Purple, vesca, 177 Galeopsis tetrahit var. bifida, 123 FIELD-NATURALIST 191 Galium labradoricum, 125; trifidum, 125, 178 Gastropoda, 57 Gavia adamsi, 132, 139; arctica, 139; arctica paci- fica, 132; immer 72, 139; stellata, 72, 132, 139 Geisonoceras, 42, 67 Geocaulon lividum, 110, 176 Geography, Birds, and Mammals of the Perry River Region, The, reviewed by W. Earl Godfrey, 147 Geranium bicknelli, 119, 177 Geum macrophyllum var. perincisum, 118, 177; perincisum, 177; perincisum var. perincisum, 118; vivale, 118; triflorum, 83 Glyceria borealis, 104; grandis, 104; grandis var. komarovii, 104; grandis {. pallescens, 104; pulchella, 104; striata, 174 Glyptorthis bellarugosa, 65 Godfrey, W. Earl Review of: Geography, Birds, and Mammals of the Perry River Region, 147 Some distributional notes on Canadian Birds, 136 Godwit, Iceland Black-tailed, 137 Golden Eagle, Nesting of, on Vancouver Island, by Hamilton M. Laing, 95 Goldeneye, 72; American, Common, 86-88, 90 Goldfinch, American, 85-91 Gonioceras occidentalis, 66 Goose, Blue, 86; Canada, 85, 89, 132, 139; Green- land White-fronted, 137; Lesser Snow, 139; Ungava Canada, 72 i Goshawk, 87, 89 Grackle, Bronzed, 85, 86, 88, 89; Graptoloidea, 61 Great Migrations, The, reviewed by V.E.F. Solman, 186 Grebe, Holboell’s, 90; Horned, 85, 86, 90; billed, 136; Western, 90 Grosbeak, Evening, 85-91; Pine, 85-90. Grouse, Ruffed, 85-89 Groves, J. Walton Review of: The Singing Wilderness, 187 Grus canadensis, 133 Guillemot, Black, 184; Pigeon, 90 Gull, Glaucous, 85, 86, 88, 89, 133; Glaucous- winged, 90; Great Black-backed, 85-89, 184; Herring, 73, 85-90, 140, 184; Iceland, 85, 89; Ring-billed, 86, 89, 90, 184; Short-billed, 90 Gulo gulo, 134 85-90; Barrow, 90; Purple, 87 Pied- Habenaria hyperborea, 175; viridis var. bracteata, 109 Hackelia americana, 122 Hagmeier, Edwin M. Distribution of marten and fisher in North America, 149 Haplopappus lanéeolatus var. sublamatus var. nov., 126 Hare, Arctic, 74 Harp Seal from the Leda Clay west of Hull, Que- bec, A, by C. M. Sternberg, 97 Hawk, American Rough-legged, 133, 139; Cooper’s, 86-89; Marsh, 87, 89, 90; Pigeon, 88, 90; Red-shouldered, 85, 88, 89; Red-tailed, 86-90; Rough-legged, 86, 89, 90; Sharp-shinned, 85, 87-90; Sparrow, 85-90. Hebertella, 8; pulchella, 64 Hedwigia ciliata, 180 Helenium autumnale var. grandiflorum, 128 192 THE CANADIAN Hemiphragma tenuimurale, 65 Heron, Great Blue, 86-90 Hesperorthis tricenaria, 26, 65 Hiatella, 23; arctica, 68 Hieracitum umbellatum, 179 Hierochloe alpina, 71; odorata, 106 Hippuris vulgaris, 120, 178 Histrionicus histrionicus, 132 Hohn, E. O. Some ornithological records for Wood Buffalo park and the Mackenzie District, N.W.T., 144 Hormotoma bellicincta, 66; trentonensis, 66 Horned Owl, Unusual, Nesting, by Hamilton M. Laing, 96 Hudsonia tomentosa, 120; tomentosa var. inter- media, 120 Hylocihla guttata, 76; minima, 76, 133; minima bicknelli, 137; ustulata, 76 Hylocomium splendens, 171, 180 Hypnum crista-castrensis, 180; hamulosum, 180 Icterus bullocki, 143 Tridoprogne bicolor, 76 Ischadites, 49 Isoetes muricata var. braunii, 102 Tsotelus ottawaensis, 67 Jaeger, Long-tailed, 73, 133, 140; 140; Pomarine, 133 Jay, Blue, 85-89; Canada, 85, 87-89; Jones, Edgar T. Mackenzie River Migration, 143 New and unusual bird records for Alberta, 143 Junco hiemalis, 77 Junco, Oregon, 90, 91 ; Slate-colored, 77, 85-88, 90, 91 Juncus brevicaudatus, 175; mis, 109, 175, 179 Juniperus communis, 103; 102, 174; communis var. montana, 102; zontalis, 103; sabina, 103 Parasitic, 133, Steller’s, 90 bufonius, 108; filifor- communis var. depressa, hori- ! Kalmia polifolia, 178 Kingfisher, Belted, 86, 87, 89, 90 Kinglet, 90; Golden-crowned, 87-90; Ruby-crown- ed, 77, 90 Kittiwake, 184 Klawe, W. L. Orobanche uniflora L. from Yarmouth County, Nova Scotia, 141 Labrador, Birds observed at Goose Bay and else- where in, by V. C. Wynne-Edwards, 76 Lagopus lagopus, 133; lagopus ungavus, 73; tus, 133; mutus rupestris, 73 Laing, Hamilton M. Nesting of Golden Eagle on Vancouver Island, 95 Record of Willet for Vancouver Island, 95 Unusual Horned Owl nesting, 96 Lambeophyllum profundum, 64 Lanius excubitor borealis, 134 Lappula redowski var. occidentalis, 122 Larix laricina, 173 Lark, Horned, 85, 86, 88, 90, Horned, 73 La Rocque, Auréle Review of: Theophrastus on Stones, 188 mu- 140; Northern FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Last Passenger, The, reviewed by Louise de Kiriline Lawrence, 186 Lawrence, Louise de Kiriline Review of: The Last Passenger, 186 Lechthalyus, 65 Ledum, 71; groenlandicum, 121, 175, 178 Lemieux, Louis Seventh census of nonpasserine birds, 183 Lemming, Collared, 74 Lemna trisulca, 108 Lepidiconia lorifrons, 67 Lepidium sativum, 115 Lepus arcticus, 74 Leucophoyx thula thula, 136 Licrophycus, 47; ottawaensis, 64 Lilium philadelphicum var. andinum, 109; philadel- phicum var. immaculatum, 109 Limosa limosa islandica, 137 Linaria vulgaris, 123 Lingula briseis, 65; cobourgensis, 65 Lingulepis acuminatus, 64 Linnaea borealis var. americana, 125; ssp. americana, 179; borealis var. americana {. candicans, 125 Lloyd, Hoyes Ralph Emerson DeLury, 169 Lobipes lobatus, 73, 133, 140 Longspur, Lapland, 74, 134, 140 Larus argentatus, 73, 140; hyperboreus hyperboreus, 133 Lonicera involucrata, 125 Loon, Arctic, 132; Common, 72, 86, 90, 139; Pacific, 139; Red-throated, 72, 90, 132, 139, 184; Yellow-billed, 132, 139 Loxia leucoptera, 77, 94; Luscinia svecica, 133 Lutra canadensis, 75 Lycopodium annotinum, 173; gens, 173; clavatum, 173; obscurum, 173 Lycopus uniflorus, 178 Lyopora, 34; halli, 24, 38, 65 Lysimachia thyrsiflora, 122, 178 leucoptera leucoptera, 98 annotinum var. pun- complanatum, 173; Mackenzie, New plant records for northern Alberta and southern, by W. J. Cody, 101 Mackenzie River Migration, by Edgar T. Jones, 143 Maclurites logani, 66 Macoma balthica, 68 Magpie, American, 90 Maianthemum canadense, 175 Mallard, 85-90 Malotus vellosus, 97 Mammals of Minnesota, The, reviewed by Austin W. Cameron, 187 Manitoba, A plant collection from northwestern, by J. C. Ritchie, 171 Marine and Fresh-water Plankton, reviewed by V. E. F. Solman, 148 Marten, Distribution of, in North America, by Edwin M. Hagmeier, 149 Martes americana, 97, 149, 154; diluviania, 152; foina, 154; martes, 149; pennanti, 149, 152, 162; szibellina, 154 Matricarvia ambigua, 128; rioides, 128 Meadowlark, Eastern, 87-89 Meesia triquetra, 180; wuliginosa, 180 Medicago lupulina var. glandulosa, 118; sativa, 118 Melanitta deglandi, 132; perspicillata, 133 inodora, 128; matrica- Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN Melilotus alba var. alba, 118; cinalis, 118 Melospiza lincolni, 77 Menyanthes trifoliata, 71, 178 Merganser, American, 85-90, 139; Common, 73, 87, 88; Hooded, 86, 87; Red-breasted, 86, 88-90, 133, 139, 184 Mergus merganser, 73, 139; serrator, 133, 139 Mertensia paniculata, 178 Microtus, 83; oeconomus, 136; miurus, 136; penn- sylvanicus drummondii, 78, 79; pennsylvanicus labradorius, 75; pennsylvanicus pennsylvanicus, 79 Mimus polyglottos polyglottos, 137 Mitchener, A. J. Clay-colored sparrow nesting in Grey County, Ontario, 141 Mitella nuda, 177 Mnium affine, 180, cinclidioides, 180 Mockingbird, 86; Eastern, 137 Moehringia lateriflora, 176 Molothrus ater, 144 Monolepis nuttalliana, 111 Moose, Alaska, 136 Motacilla flava, 133 Mouse, Lemming, 74; 74 Muhlenbergia richardsonis, 106; squarrosa, 106 Murre, Brunnich’s, 184; Common, 184 Murrelet, Marbled, 90 Mustela erminet, 75 Myrica gale, 175, 176 Myriophyllum exalbescens, 120, 177, 178; latum var. pectinatum, 120. Myrtle Warbler at Baker Lake, N.W.T., by Fr. Charles Choque, 97 Mytilus edulis, 68 officinalis var. offi- Meadow, 75; Red-backed, verticil- Naumburgia thyrstflora, 178 Nephroma helvetica, 180 Neslia paniculata, 116 Nesting of Golden Eagle on Vancouver Island, by Hamilton M. Laing, 95 Nighthawk, 76 Nonpasserine birds, seventh census of, by Louis Le- mieux, 183 Novakowski, N. S. ' Additional records of Bats in Saskatchewan, 141 Numenius phaeopus hudsonicus, 133 Nuphar variegatum, 176 Nutcracker, Clark’s, 90 Nuthatch, Pygmy, 90; Red-breasted, 85-90; White- breasted, 85-90 Nyctea scandiaca, 133 Nymphaea tetragona, 112; 112 Nyroca, 139 tetragona ssp. leibergii, Ogygites, 41; latimarginatus, 67 Oidemia nigra, 73 Old-squaw, 73, 85, 86, 88-90, 132, 137 Olor columbianus, 139 Oreoscoptes montanus, 143 Opikina, 26, 27, 34 Oriole, Bullock, 143 Ormoceras allumettense, 67 Orobanche uniflora L. from Yarmouth County, Nova Scotia, by W. L. Klawe, 141 FIELD-NATURALIST 193 Orthodesma decorosum, 66 Oryzopsis pungens, 106, 174 Ottawa District geology of the, A guide to the, by Alice E. Wilson, 1 Otter, 75 Owl, Barred, 88, 143; Great Gray, 89; Great Horned, 85-88; Horned, 87, 89; Long-eared, 86, 87, 89; Northern Barred, 137; Pygmy, 90; Saw-whet, 87, 89, 90; Screech, 85-89; Short-eared, 89, 90, 133; Snowy, 85, 86, 88, 89, 133 Oxycoccus microcarpus, 178 Oxytropis deflexa var. sericea, 119; splendens, 177 retrorsa, 119; Parastrophia hemiplicata, 29 Parkes, Kenneth C. The White-winged Crossbills of Newfoundland, 98 Parmelia centrifuga, 181; olivacea, 181, stenophylla, 181; sulcata, 181 Parnassia, multiseta, 177 Partridge, European, 86, 90; Hungarian, 87, 88 Parus hudsonicus, 77, 94 Pasceolus, 49 Passerculus sandwichensis, 77, 134, 140; sandwichen- sis labradorius, 74; sandwichensis oblitus, 138 Passerella iliaca, 77 Pelecypoda, 56 Peltigera aphthosa, 180; aphthosa var. variolosa, 180; canina var. rufescens, 180; malacea, 180 Perca flavescens, 99 Perch, Record of, Perca flavescens, from Great Slave Lake, N.W.T., by Donald C. Scott, 99 Petasites palmatus, 179 Phalarope, Northern, 73, 133, 140 Pheasant, 90; Common, 87, 88; 86, 38-90 Pheasants in North America, reviewed by I. McT. Cowan, 145 Phleum pratense, 105 Phoca groenlandica, 97; Pholidops trentonensis, 65 Phragmolites compressus, 66 Phylloscopus borealis, 134 Physostegia parviflora, 123 Picea glauca, 171, 173; mariana, 171, 173 Pinguicula villosa, 178 Pintail, 72, 89, 90, 132, 139, 184 Pinus banksiana, 102, 171, 174 Pipilo erythrophthalmus erythrophthalmus, 138 Pipit, American Water, 74 Piranga olivacea, 138 Plantago eriopoda, 125; major, 125 Platanthera hyperborea, 175 Platystrophia amoena longicardinalis, 65 Plectorthis plicatella laurentina, 65 Plectrophenax nivalis, 134, 140; nivalis nivalis, 74 Pleurozium schreberi, 171, 180 Plover, Black-bellied, 133; Golden, 133, 140; Semi- palmated, 73, 133, 140, 184; Upland, 144 Pluvialis dominica, 133, 140 Poa cusickit, 104; glauca, 174; interior, 104, 174; palustris, 174; pratensis, 81; stenantha, 104 Podilymbus podiceps podiceps, 136 Pohlia nutans, 179; sphagnicola, 180 177; palustris var. neogaea, Ring-necked, 85, vitulina, 134 194 THe CANADIAN Polygonum achoreum, 110; amphibium var. stipu- laceum {. fluitans, 110; convobvulus, 111; hart- wrightti, 110; lapathifolium var. salicifolium, 111; persicaria var. minus, 111; scabrum, 111 Polypodium virginianum, 173 Polytrichum commune, 179; formosum, 179; juni- perinum alpestre, 179; piliferum, 179 Populus balsamifera, 176; tremuloides, 176 Porifera, 48 Potamogeton alpinus, 180; alpinus var. tenuifolius, 103, 174; féliformis var. borealis, 103; folio- sus var. macellus, 103; gramineus, 174; richard- soni, 174; robbinsi, 174, 180 Potentilla arguta, 174; bipinnatifida, 117; monspe- liensis, 177; multifida, 117; morgevica var. genuina, 177; palustris, 177; pensylvanica, 118, 177; tridentata, 118, 177 Prairie Ducks, reviewed by I. McT. Cowan, 145 Prasopora, 40, 65; grandis, 65 Prunus pensylvanica, 177 Ptarmigan, Rock, 73, 133; Willow, 133 Ptilium crista-castrensis, 171, 180 Puccinellia hauptiana, 104 Puffin, 184 Pyrethrum inodorum, 128 Pyrola asarifolia, 177, 178; Ungava Willow, 73; grandiflora, 71 Rafinesquina, 26, 27, 34; alternata, 65; deltoidea, 65 Rail, Virginia, 89 Ramischia secunda, 178 Rangifer arcticus, 75, 136 Ranunculus abortivus, 113; abortivus var. acrola- sius, 176; circinatus var. subrigidus, 113; cymba- lavia var. cymbalaria, 114; gmelini, 176; gme- lint var. gmelini, 113; hispidus, 114; lapponicus, 176; macounii, 114; pensylvanicus, 114, 176; purshii, 176; reptans, 176; rhomboideus, 113; subrigidus, 176; wuncinatus var. uncinatus, 114 Raphistomina canadensis, 64 Raven, 85, 89; American, 90; Northern, 133 Receptaculites, 49, 50; Redpoll, 86-88, 134-140; 91; Hoary, 88, 90 Reed, Edward B. Notes on some birds and mammals of the Col- ville River, Alaska, 130 Regulus calendula, 77 Report of Council at the 77th Annual meeting of the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, 1955, 91 Resserella, 34; rogata, 65 Common, 86, 89; occidentalis, 38, 64 Common, 77, 85-88, 90, Rhinanthus crista-galli, 124; groenlandicus, 124; kyrollae, 124; oblongifolius, 124 Rhododendron lapponicum, 121 Rhynchotrema increbescens, 65 Rhynidictya, 65 Rhytidium rugosum, 180 Ribes americanum, 117; glandulosum, 177; hud- sonianum, 177; lacustre, 177; oxyacanthoides, 177; triste, 177 Richardson’s Merlin nesting in Manitoba, by Stuart Criddle, 94 Ritchie, J. C. A plant collection from northwestern Manitoba, 171 Robin, 77, 85-90; American, 74, 85, 87, 88 Rodents, Records of two microtine, from the Que- bec tundra, by A. W. F. Banfield, 99 FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Roegneria violacea, 174 Rorippa islandica var. fernaldiana, 176 Rosa acicularis, 177 Rubus acaulis, 177; chamaemorus, 71, 176-178; idaeus var. aculeatissimus, 117; idaeus var. canadensis, 117; ztdaeus var. strigosus, 117, 177; pubescens, 177; pubescens var. paracaulis, 117 Rumex fenestratus, 176; pallidus, 110; szbiricus, 110 Sagittaria cuneata, 103, 174 Salix athabascensis, 175; arbusculoides, 176; arcto- phila, 109; barrattiana, 110; barrattiana var. angustofolia, 110; barrattiana var. marcescens, 110; bebbiana, 175; bebbiana perrostrata, 175; discolor, 175; discolor var. latifolia, 176; hebe- carpa, 175; lasiandra, 109; lutea, 110; mac- calliana, 109; mackenzieana, 175; myrtillifolia, 175; pedicellaris var. hypoglauca, 110, 175; pellita, 176; petiolaris, 175; pseudocardata, 175; pseudomonticola, 110; pyrifolia, 175; serissi- ma, 109 Salt, W. Ray Birds wintering at Calgary, 1954-55, 93 Western Flycatcher in Alberta, 94 Sandpiper, Baird’s, 133, 140; Least, 73; Pectoral, 133; Red-backed, 90; Semipalmated, 73, 133; Spotted, 184 Sanicula marilandica, 121 Savile, D. B. O. Review of: Travels and Traditions of Water- - fowl, 146 Review of: Annual Report for 1955 of the Den- ver Museum of Natural History, 186 Saxifraga nivalis, 117; tricuspidata, 177 Saxicava, 23; rugosa, 97 Scaup, 132, 139; Greater, 86, 88, 89; Lesser, 86, 90 Scheuchzeria palustris var. americana, 174 Schizachne purpurascens, 174 Scirpus atrocinctus, 174; paludosus, 106 Scolithus canadensis, 64 Scolochloa festucacea, 104 Scoter, American, 90; Black, 73; Surf, 85, 90, 133; White-winged, 85, 86, 90 Scotiaptex nebulosa, 143 Scott, Donald C, Record of Perch, Perca flavescens, from Great Slave Lake, N.W.T., 99 Scutellaria epilobiifolia, 122, 178; epilobifolia, 122; 122 Seal, Harbor, 134 Selaginella rupestris, 102 Senecio cymbalarioides var. borealis, 129; eremo- philus, 128; indecorus, 129; lugens, 129; pau- perculus, 179; pauperculus var. flavovirens, 129, 179; vulgaris, 128 Shepherdia canadensis, 120, 177 Shrike, Gray, 85, 86; Northern, 85-90, 134 Shrimp, Cragonid, A first British Columbia record, by T, H. Butler, 142 Sialia currucoides, 140 Sibbaldiopsis tridentata, 177 Silene menziesiz, 112 Singing Wilderness, The, reviewed by J. Walton Groves, 187 Siskin, 87; Pine, 85-91 Sysimbrium brachycarpum, salsuginosum, 116 Sium suave, 178 galericulata var. galericulata var. pubescens, 115; canescens, 115; Oct.-Dec. 1956] THE CANADIAN Smilacma trifolia, 109, 175 Snipe, Wilson’s, 90, 133 Solidago decumbens var. oreophila, 126, 179; tiradiata, 126, 179 Solitaire, Townsend’s, 90 Solman, V. E. F. Review of: The Great Migrations, 186 Review of: Marine and Fresh-water Plankton, 148 Review of: Upland Trails, 146 Sorex cinereus, 144 Sowerbyella sericea, 65 Sparganium angustifolium, 174; minimum, 103, 174 Sparrow, American Tree, 87; Churchill Savannah, 138; Eastern Grasshopper, 138; Eastern Tree, 74; English, 87, 91; Field, 87, 90; Fox, 77, 85, 90, 134; Harris’s, 91; House, 85-90; La- brador Savannah, 74; Lincoln’s, 77; Savan- nah, 77, 134, 140; Song, 85, 87-91; Swamp, 86-88, 90; Tree, 77, 85-91, 134; White-crowned, 74, 77, 87-89, 134; White-throated, 77, 85, 38, 90, 91 Sparrow, Clay-colored, nesting in Grey County, Ontario, by A. J. Mitchener, 141 Spergula arvensis, 112 Sphagnum capillaceum, 179, 180; fuscum, 175, 177- 179; ripartum, 179; squarrosum, 179; warn- storfianum, 174, 179 Sphenopholis intermedia, 105; Spinacia oleracea, 111 Spiranthes romanzoffiana, 109 Spiza americana, 143 Spizella arborea, 77, 134; arborea arborea, 74 Squatarola squatarola, 133 Squirrel, Arctic Ground, 134 Starling, 85-90, 144; Common, 85, 87, 89; pean, 85 Stellaria atrata var. atrata, 112; atrata var. eciliata, mul- pallens, 105 Euro- 112; calycantha var. floribunda, 176; crassi- folia, 112; longifolia, 112, 176; longipes, 176; media, 112 Stelliella billingsi, 64; crassa, 64; ottawaensis, 64 Stercorarius longicaudus, 133, 140; longicaudus pal- lascens, 73; parasiticus, 133, 140; pomarinus, 133 Stereocaulon paschale, 181 Sterna forsteri, 137; paradisaea, 73, 133, 140 Sternberg, C. M. A Harp Seal from the Leda Clay west of Hull, Quebec, 97 Stipa spartea var. curtiseta, 106 Streptelasma, 24, 34; corniculum, 64 Strix varia, 143; varia varia, 137 Stromatocerium rugosum, 64 Stromatoporoidea, 50 Strophomena, 34 Sturnus vulgaris, 144 Suaeda depressa, 111 Subularia aquatica, 114 Swallow, Tree, 76 Swan, Whistling, 139 Synaptomys borealis innuitus, 74, 99 Tanager, Scarlet, 138 Taraxacum officinale, 129 . Teal, Blue-winged, 137; Green-winged, 90, 184 Tener, John S. Annotated list of birds of part of the Back River, N.W.T., 138 FIELD-NATURALIST 195 Tern, Arctic, 73, 133, 140, 184; Caspian, 184; Com- mon, 184; Forster, 137 Tetradium, 38, 52; fibratum, 64 Tetraplodon mnioides, 179 Thalictrum occidentale, 114; Thellungiella salsuginea, 116 Thelypteris phegopteris, 173 Theophrastus on Stones, reviewed by Auréle La Roc- que, 188 Thlaspi arvense, 115 Thrasher, Brown, 88; Sage, 143 Thrush, Bicknell Gray-cheeked, 137; cheeked, 76, 133; Hermit, 76, 87, 89; backed, 76; Varied, 90 Thuidium abietinum, 180 Tillaea aquatica, 117 Titmouse, Tufted, 87 Tomenthypnum nitens, 180 Towhee, Eastern, 78; Red-eyed, 88, 138; 90 Tragopogon dubius, 129; major, 129 Travels and Traditions of Waterfowl, reviewed by D. B. O. Savile, 146 Triarthrus, 41; spinosus, 67 Trientalis borealis, 178; europaea var. arctica, 122 Trifolium hybridum var. hybridum, 119; pratense, 119; repens, 119 Triglochin maritima, 174 Trilobita, 59 Trisetum spicatum, 174 Trocholites, 42 Trochonema umbilicatum canadense, 66 Turdus migratorius, 74, 77; migratorius nigrideus, 74 Typha latifolia, 103 turneri, 114 Gray- Olive- Spotted, Ungava Peninsula, Bird and mammal notes from the interior, by Carl R. Eklund, 69 Upland Trails, reviewed by V. E. F. Solman, 146 Ursus horribilis, 134 Urtica gracilis, 176 Utricularia intermedia, 125; minor, 125; 125, 178 vulgaris, Vaccinium canadense, 121; myrtilloides, 121, 178; oxycoccus, 178; uliginosum, 178; wuliginosum var. alpinum, 71; vitis-idaea var. minus, 71, 178 Vanuxemia canadensis, 66; inconstans, 66 Vermes, 53 lad Vermivora peregrina, 77 Veronica peregrina var. xalapensis, 123 Viburnum edule, 125; pduciflorum, 125 Vicia cracca, 119 Viola palustris, 177 Vole, Drummond’s, in Manitoba, by Stuart Criddle, 78 Vole, Singing, 136; Vulpes fulva, 134 Wagtail, Yellow, 133 Tundra, 136 Warbler, Blackpoll, 77; Black-polled, 74; lia, 144; Myrtle, 85; Magno- Newfoundland Yellow, 138; Palm, 77; Sycamore, 138; Tennessee, 77; Willow, 134; Wilson’s 77 Waxwing, Bohemian, 90; Cedar, 85-90 Weasel, 75 Western Flycatcher in Alberta, by W. Ray Salt, 94 196 THE CANADIAN White-winged Crossbills of Newfoundland, The, by Kenneth C. Parkes, 98 Willet, Record of, for Vancouver Island, by Hamil- ton M. Laing, 95 Wilson, Alice E. A guide to the geology of the Ottawa District, 1 Wilsonia pusilla, 77 Wolverine, 134 Wood Buffalo Park, Some ornithological records for, by E O. Hohn, 144 Woodpecker, Arctic Three-toed, 86; Downy, 85-90; Hairy, 85-90; Pileated, 85-90; Red-headed, 86 Wren, Bewick’s, 90; Carolina, 86, 89; Winter, 86, 88, 90 FIELD-NATURALIST [Vol. 70 Wolf, Gray, 134 Woodsia alpina, 173; ilvensis, 173 Wynne-Edwards, V. C. Birds observed at Goose Bay and elsewhere in Labrador, 76 Yoldia arctica, 68 Zonotrichia albicollis, 77; leucophrys, 77, 134; leu- cophrys leucophrys, 74 Zygadenus elegans, 109 Zygospira, 55; recurvirostris, 65 ica =, AMES LEACH; Corresponding President: JOHN MITCHELE; Vice Lee Tee Oe, Director Junior TENG: MARY oo R. JARMAIN. 59 Ridout StS, — PES at Meetings 2.00 pm. Public Iibrory, third Monday, EL Sly oee Maad Taal tout fe a VANCOUVER NATURAL HISTORY NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY 3 OF MANITOBA — oe des oe Prosident: Mis, W.A. CARTWRIGHT: ViceProsident: PLOMMER; Treasurer: F. SANFORD; Secretary: Manuscripts oe oh eee eR nek eee eee Manuscripts should be typewritten on one side Be ee ae be incorporated in ee ie cect ee sermioes| shed (be ae wi ee a iven name. f£ matter, including quotations, ee ee eee Se nae ge for figures, should be double-spaced. to appear in ‘reproduction oe names should be underlined. Every sheet of the in black ink. \ should be lettered, should be nur Spl tiga a Ac ey teed ae l Hae permit easy legibility a reduction is made. Webster’s New International Dictionary is the One-column illustrations septs 25% inches authority for spelling. wide; fallpadia dilustrationa, 90s inches wide References are made by the author-date system. Photographs should have a q finish and They should be listed /and typed at show sharp contrasts. For | Se ane eae Bear the icin ody of tent [Sos gael oi laren coat aas ari a tivel Beh cde satel Tank legends for oF FR GPRM Gaye Mi Hee ied 'Y ' ‘or the figures should be placed after the list of refer- ratio of height to width should conform to that of ences. Each table all the legends should be the journal page (5% by 8% inches) but the height aot Pages. should be adjusted to allow for the legend. — oe in arabic nu. ‘Reprints, with or without covers, may be bought. merals, The author's nome, title of the paper, and ee ak ea ee figure number should -be written in the lower left is attached to the galley proofs. OF ONE DO wa hE ddl MG oF aie ae bass ’ mw af i is . ) ( ie oe ay Date Due GUNS | EM 3 2044 1 .